Samsung Téléphone Mobile Smartphones SGH-I320 - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur

Smartphone SGH-i320 User’s GuideTable of Contents 2 Table of Contents Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CHAPTER 1 Getting started What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Getting to know your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Installing the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Charging your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Turning your phone on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CHAPTER 2 The basics Using the Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Start menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Customising your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Locking the keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Program Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using an optional memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adding and removing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Managing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Resetting your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 SIM AT (SIM Application Toolkit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 CHAPTER 3 Synchronisation Installing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Customising connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting your phone to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Synchronising information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Customising synchronisation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Table of Contents 3 CHAPTER 4 Call functions Turning the phone functions on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Using the Dialling screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Advanced calling features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Answering or ignoring a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Options during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Call-related features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Customising your phone functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 CHAPTER 5 Messaging, Internet, and Messenger Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 WAP Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CHAPTER 6 Organiser Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 D-Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Voice Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 WorldClock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 CHAPTER 7 Multimedia Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Picture & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Table of Contents 4 CHAPTER 8 Extra programs Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Smart Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 StopWatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Voice Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Picsel Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 SIM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 CHAPTER 9 Getting connected Beaming with infrared connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Beaming with Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Modem link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Connecting to the Internet or your network . . . . . . . . . 148 CHAPTER 10 Troubleshooting General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Call problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Power and charging problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CHAPTER 11 Regulatory notices SAR certification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 European union notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Safety precautions for power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Microsoft End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 Important safety precautions Read these guidelines before using your wireless phone. Failure to comply with them may be dangerous or illegal. Drive safely at all times Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. Park the vehicle first. Switch off the phone when refuelling Do not use the phone at a refuelling point (service station) or near fuels or chemicals. Switch off in an aircraft Wireless phones can cause interference. Using them in an aircraft is both illegal and dangerous. Switch off the phone near all medical equipment Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external radio frequency energy. Follow any regulations or rules in force. Interference All wireless phones may be subject to interference, which could affect their performance. Be aware of special regulations Meet any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. Water resistance Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. Sensible use Use only in the normal position (held to the ear). Avoid unnecessary contact with the antenna when the phone is switched on.6 Emergency calls Key in the emergency number for your present location, then press . Keep your phone away from small children Keep the phone and all its parts, including accessories, out of the reach of small children. Accessories and batteries Use only Samsung-approved accessories and batteries. Use of any unauthorised accessories could damage your phone and may be dangerous. CAUTION: • The phone could explode if the battery is replaced with an incorrect type. • Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Qualified service Only qualified service personnel may install or repair your phone. Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty. For more detailed safety information, see “Important safety information” on page 166. Note: Depending on your country, your phone and accessories may appear different from the illustrations in this guide. At very high volume, prolonged listening to a headset can damage your hearing.1 7 Getting started Congratulations on the purchase of your new Smartphone! This chapter helps you set up your phone, charge the phone’s batteries, and familiarise yourself with the different components of your phone. What’s in the box? Your package contains the following items: In addition, you can obtain the following accessories for your phone from your local Samsung dealer: Note: The items supplied with your phone and the accessories available at your Samsung dealer may vary, depending on your country or service provider. Phone PC data cable Batteries Travel charger CD-ROMs * * One contains Microsoft ActiveSync software, Add-on software and programs, and the other contains User’s Guide in PDF format. Quick reference guide • Car charger/adapter • Battery holder • Standard battery • Bluetooth hands-free car kit • Travel charger • Straight headset • PC data cable • Bluetooth USB dongle kit • Bluetooth mono & stereo headsetGetting started 8 Getting to know your phone Front view Volume keys Send key Left soft key Infrared port Home key OK key Microphone Navigation (Up/Down/ Left/Right) keys Earpiece Right soft key End/Power on or off key Display Back/Clear key Alphanumeric keys/ Special function keysGetting started 9 Rear view Keys of your phone Battery cover Camera lens Charger/PC data cable jack Quick List/ Key Lock key Camera key Camera flash Headset jack External speaker Key Description • Press to open the Quick List screen. • Press and hold to lock the keys. • Press to open the Voice Notes program. • Press and hold to turn on the camera.Getting started 10 • Press to adjust the earpiece and speaker volume. • Press to mute the call ringer as a call comes in. Press and hold to reject the call. Press to perform the command shown on the screen immediately above the key. Press to switch to the Home screen from a program. • Press to return to the previous screen. • Press to delete characters in a text input field. • Press to scroll through a list. • Press to move the cursor in a text input field. • Press to confirm your selection or input. • Press to open the Dialling screen. • Press to make or answer a call. • Press and hold to turn the phone on or off. • Press to end a call. ~ Press to enter numbers and characters. Press to switch between characters on the upper half of the keys and characters on the lower half in a text input filed. Press to change case in a text input field. Press to change the text input mode. Key DescriptionGetting started 11 Installing the SIM card When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, any optional services available, and many other details. • Keep all miniature SIM cards out of the reach of small children. • The SIM card and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling the card. • When installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off before you remove the battery. Press and hold to activate or deactivate the Silent profile from the Home screen. Press to delete characters. • Press to confirm your selection or input. • Press to start a new line in a text input field. Press to open the Messaging program. Press to enter a comma in a text input field. Key DescriptionGetting started 12 Inserting the SIM card 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Insert and slide the SIM card under the two tabs, as shown, ensuring that the gold coloured contacts of the card are face down into the phone. Continue to install the battery. See the next page. Removing the SIM card To remove the SIM card, slide the card out of the holder, as shown.Getting started 13 Installing the battery Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Installing the battery 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment, with the gold-culoured contact toward the top of the phone. 3. Close the battery cover.Getting started 14 Removing the battery 1. If necessary, switch off the phone by pressing and holding until the power-off image displays. 2. Remove the battery cover. 3. Lift the battery away from the phone. Charging your phone 1. Plug the connector of the travel charger into the jack on the right side of the phone. 2. Plug the travel charger into a standard AC wall outlet. The LED on the charger will indicate the charging progress by the following colours: • Red: the phone is being charged. • Green: the phone is fully charged. • Orange: the travel charger is not plugged in correctly. Check the phone and the charger. 3. When charging is finished, unplug the travel charger from the power outlet. Getting started 15 4. Remove the travel charger from the phone by pressing the buttons on both sides of the connector and pulling the connector out. Note: Do not remove batteries while charging. It may cause malfunctions and may damage the device. Low battery warning Your phone displays the Battery Very Low icon ( ) and a warning message when the battery gets very low. If this happens, charge the battery. Turning your phone on or off Press and hold to turn on your phone. The phone is logged into your home network and receives the signal from the network. You can now make or answer a call and use programs on the phone. To turn off the phone, press and hold .2 16 The basics This chapter explains basic information about using your phone, such as customising your phone and using online help. Using the Home screen When you turn on your phone, the Home screen, the phone’s idle screen, appears. You can also access this screen by pressing from any program. On the Home screen, you can view important information for the day or messages at a glance. You can also quickly switch to the programs you recently accessed. Press the left soft key to open the Start menu and switch to a program. Press the right soft key to open Contacts. Status icons indicates your phone’s current status. See the next page. Quick Launcher: Select to view appointments or messages, or change the profile settings.The basics 17 Status bar On the top line of the screen, the Status bar displays icons to show your phone’s current status. Followings are some of the status icons you may see: Icon Description Shows the strength of the signal. You can also view the following service status: • : You are out of a service area. • : The phone functions are turned off. Appears when a call is in progress. Appears when a data call is in progress. Appears when the current call is on hold. Appears when a GPRS connection is available in the network. When a GPRS connection is active, appears. Appears when you are roaming out of your home service area and logged onto a different GPRS network. Shows the level of your battery power. The more bars you see, the more power you have remaining. When the battery level is very low, appears. Appears when the ring type has been set to Silent in the current profile. For details, see page 25.The basics 18 Appears when the ring type has been set to Vibrate in the current profile or the ring tone in Sounds has been set to Vibrate. Also, appears when the Silent profile is activated. For details, see page 25. Indicates that you can make calls using phone line 1 or 2 only (network service). Appears when you’re roaming outside of your home area and logged onto a different network. Appears when Bluetooth is activated. For details, see page 144. Appears when a text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) message has been received. Appears that an instant message has been received. Appears when a new voicemail has been received. • : A new voicemail from line 1. • : A new voicemail from line 2. • : A new voicemail from both lines. Appears when there is a call you have missed. Appears when you have set incoming calls to be diverted to another destination. Icon DescriptionThe basics 19 Accessing information from the Home screen From the Home screen, you can: • view upcoming appointments • change the profile option • view unread text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages To change information on each item: 1. On the Home screen, scroll to the item you want to change by pressing the Navigation keys and press . 2. Access appointments or messages, or change the profile setting. For more information on changing these items, see the appropriate instructions for each task in this guide. 3. Press or to return to the Home screen.The basics 20 Customising the Home screen You can customise the Home screen according to your preferences. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Display → Home Screen. 3. Press the Up or Down key to scroll to an option and then Left or Right key to change the setting. The following options are available: • Home screen layout: Select the layout to be used for the Home screen. • Colour scheme: Select the colour scheme to be used for the Home screen. • Background image: Select an image to use as a background image on the Home screen. • Time out: Specify the length of time the phone waits before returning the display to the Home screen if the phone is not used. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Start menu screen On the Start menu, you can access all of the programs for your phone. From the Home screen, press the Start soft key to open the Start menu screen. You can change the start menu type. Press the Start soft key, and select Settings → Display → Start Menu Style. Then select Grid or List .The basics 21 Opening programs or folders Scroll to a progarm or a folder by pressing the Navigation keys and press to open it. You can also press the number key assigned to the program you want. Switching between programs Your phone is a multi-tasking product. You can run multiple programs at the same time and switch from one program to another. From any application, press or to swich to the Home screen. Then access another one from the Quick Launcher or Start menu. Note: When you use a GPRS connection, pressing terminates the connection. If you want the current connection to continue, press , or as many times as necessary, to switch to the Home screen. Closing programs Using Task Manager, you can end the programs which are currently open. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then More soft key, press the Task Manager. 3. Scroll to a program, press the Stop soft key. To close all of the running programs, Press the Menu soft key and select Stop All.The basics 22 Entering text Your phone is equipped with a QWERTY keypad to support easy and quick text input. You can enter text as you would when using a computer’s keyboard. The keys are labelled with alphabet on the lower half and numbers and symbols on the upper half. Press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter. To switch between the upper characters and lower characters, press . You can move the cursor by pressing the Navigation keys. To delete a character, press . In addition, you can use the following function keys: • : deletes characters. • : starts a new line. • : changes case or switches to Capital Lock mode. • : changes the text input mode. You can switch between ABC mode and T9 mode in which displays the word choices for your key presses. 123 mode and Symbol mode are also available for entering numbers and symbols. • : switches to 123 mode.The basics 23 Customising your phone You can customise the phone settings to suit the way you work. Regional settings Using Regional Settings, you can change number, currency, and time and date formats appropriate to the countries in question. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Regional Settings. 3. Select the option you want in each field. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. 5. If you changed the Language or Locale option, press the OK soft key. Then you need to turn the phone off and then back on to make your changes take effect. Time and date settings The Date and Time setting enables you to set the date, time, and time zone. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Clock & Alarm → Date and Time. Note: By using Alarm on the Clock & Alarm screen, you can set alarms to ring at a specified time. The basics 24 3. Set your time zone and the current date and time. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Note: You can change the time and date format to be displayed in Regional Settings. Power settings You can conserve battery power by adjusting the time-out settings for the display and the backlight of the keypad and display or adjusting the display brightness. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Power Management. 3. Select the power settings: • Main battery: You can check the remaining battery power. • Backlight time out: You can select the length of time the backlight stays on. A backlight illuminates the display and the keypad. When you press any key, the backlight turns on and remains on for the backlight time out period. • Display time out: You can select the length of time the display stays on. During standby, the phone goes to Sleep mode after a specified period of time, so very little power is being consumed. • Display Brightness: You can adjust the brightness for the display. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 25 Accessibility settings You can configure the options to increase the accessibility to your phone’s functions. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Accessibility. 3. Select the options you want. • System font size: You can set the size of the font on your screen. • Confirmation time out: You can set the delay before an unconfirmed action times out. • In-call alert volume: You can set the volume of the alert tone that sounds when you are on a call. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Sound settings You can customise sound settings for various events happening on the phone. Setting sounds and notifications Your phone reminds you in various ways when you have something to do, receive a message, or press the keys on the phone. For example, if you have set up an appointment, you are notified in any of the following ways: • A sound, which you can specify, plays, • The LED indicator flashes, or • Your phone vibrates. You can change phone sounds by choosing types or sounds for each event.The basics 26 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Sounds. 3. Select the event for which to specify a sound. 4. Select the reminder type or ringtone. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Notes: • You can connect to the Internet and then download ringtones that are in a .wav or .mid format. • To use an .mp3 or .wma file as your call ringtone, it must be saved in a folder in Storage, Storage Card or My Documents. Changing the sound profile Using Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events or environments and then apply the settings as a group. The currently selected profile displays on the Home screen. To change profiles: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Profiles. The list of profiles opens. 3. Select the profile you want. If you select Automatic, the profile will automatically switch between Normal and Meeting according to your calendar items. Notes: • You can quickly change the profile. Press and select the profile you want from the Quick List. • You can quickly activate or deactivate the Silent profile by pressing and holding from the Home screen.The basics 27 To customise profiles: 1. On the Profiles screen, scroll to the profile you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit. 3. Change the settings in each field. Available options may differ depending on the selected profile. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Notes: • To change all profile settings to their factory default, press the Menu soft key from the profile list and select Reset to default. • For the Headset profile, when you set the ring type to Silent or Vibrate, you must manually answer calls even if the Auto-answer in option is activated. Owner information Owner Information identifies the owner or user of the phone. Set your contact information in case you have lost the phone. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Owner Information. 3. Fill in each input field. To attach notes, enter notes in the Notes field. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 28 USB function setting You can select how the phone functions when connected to a computer via the USB port. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → USB. 3. Select one of the following functions for USB connections: • ActiveSync: Select this option if you want the phone to communicate with ActiveSync. • Mass Storage: The phone is perceived as an external memory device. 4. Press the Done soft key. Error reporting setting Your phone has the Error Reporting function which informs you of errors in a program that can give a crash to the phone system. You can enable or disable this function. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Error Reporting. 3. Select Enable or Disable and press the Done soft key.The basics 29 Security settings With options in Security, you can protect your phone and SIM card from unauthorised use. Locking the phone You can protect your phone using the Device Lock feature. Once the feature is enabled, your phone is automatically locked after the specified period of inactivity. Note: Even if the phone is locked, you will be able to receive calls. To lock the phone: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Device Lock. 3. Select Prompt if device unused for and select a length of time the phone waits for before locking itself when it is not in use. 4. Scroll to the Password type field and select a password type. • Simple PIN: Use the PIN code supplied with the SIM card. • Strong alphanumeric: Use an alphanumeric password. A password must be more than 7 characters and contain at least 3 of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, or punctuation marks. 5. Enter a password in the Password field. 6. Re-enter the same password in the Confirm password field for confirmation. The basics 30 7. Press the Done soft key. 8. Press the Yes soft key. Note: You can also manually lock the phone by pressing and selecting Device lock from the Quick List. To unlock your phone: 1. On the Home screen, press the Unlock soft key. 2. Enter the password and press the Done soft key. Activating the SIM PIN When SIM PIN is enabled, you must enter your PIN supplied with your phone each time you turn the phone on or insert the current SIM card into another device. Consequently, any person who does not have your PIN cannot use your phone without your approval. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Enable SIM PIN. 3. Enter the PIN and press the Done soft key. Locking the SIM card When SIM Lock is enabled, your phone works only with the current SIM card. To use another SIM card, you must enter the SIM Lock password. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Enable SIM Lock.The basics 31 3. Enter a password for your SIM card, and re-enter the password for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key. Changing PIN2 A PIN 2 is used for certain functions supported by the SIM card. You can change the PIN2 supplied with your SIM card to a new one. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Change PIN2. 3. Enter the current PIN2, then a new PIN2, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key. Changing the call barring Password You can change the default call barring password supplied by your service provider. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Call Barring Password. 3. Enter the current password, then a new password, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key.The basics 32 Menu shortcut settings The number keys can be used as shortcut keys to directly access specific programs that exist in the Start menu. Note: You can also assign phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web pages in Contacts to the number keys as speed dial entries. For details about setting the speed dial list, see page 57. Assigning a shortcut to a key 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Scroll to the program you want to assign to a key. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add Speed Dial. 4. If necessary, enter the name you want in the Name field. 5. Select a location in the Keypad assignment field and press the Done soft key. Note: Up to 99 locations are available. Locations 0 and 1 are reserved for the international call prefix “+” and the voicemail centre number, respectively. Accessing a menu using its shortcut On the Home screen, use one of the following ways: • For one-digit shourtcut keys, press and hold the number key. • For two-digit shortcut keys, press the first number key and then press and hold the last number key.The basics 33 Note: To ensure that operations, such as moving or saving files, proceed to completion, wait at least 50 seconds before removing the battery. Locking the keys You can lock the keys on the phone to keep any accidental key presses from causing a program’s launch or phone switch on or off. To lock the keypad, press and hold , or press and select Key lock on the Quick List. To unlock the keypad, press the Unlock soft key, and then press . Using the Program Launcher Using the Program Launcher, you can view the programs in the Start menu categorised by type, and quickly access the program you want. To open the Launcher: Press and hold on the Home screen. You can also press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories → Program Launcher. Opening a program 1. On the Launcher screen, press the Group soft key and select the group you want. 2. Select the program you want.The basics 34 Moving a program within a group 1. On the Launcher screen, scroll to the program you want to move. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Move. 3. When the selected program blinks, move the program to the position you want by pressing the Up or Down key. 4. Press the Done soft key. Managing groups You can create new groups or delete the groups, or change the order of the group list. 1. On the Launcher screen, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Group. 2. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options: • New: allows you to add a new group. • Delete: allows you to delete the selected group. • Rename: allows you to change the name of the group. • Move: allows you to move the position of the group. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 35 Using an optional memory card Your phone has an expansion slot compatible with micro SD memory cards, which are primarily used to back up or transfer files and data. Note: Use only compatible memory cards with your phone. Using incompatible memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, may damage the card, as well as the phone, and data stored on the card. Inserting the memory card 1. Turn off the phone and remove the battery cover and the battery. 2. Push the memory card into the slot until it clicks into place. The card is secure when it is not protruding from the phone. 3. Install the battery into place and close the battery cover.The basics 36 Removing the memory card To remove the card, push it in and release so that it is disengaged from the slot. Then slide the card out. Adding and removing programs You can install any program created for your phone, as long as the phone has enough memory. The most popular place to find software for your phone is on the Microsoft web site (http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/smartphone). Adding programs using ActiveSync You can install programs downloaded from the Internet or included on the supplied software CD-ROM by performing synchronisation between your phone and your computer. First you need to determine what your phone and processor type is so that you know which version of the software to install. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → More... → About. Check the version of your phone.The basics 37 2. Download a program to your computer from the Internet or insert the CD-ROM that contains the program into your computer. Be sure to select the program designed for the phone and your phone’s processor type. 3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. 4. Connect your phone to your computer and make sure that the ActiveSync is activated. For more information on ActiveSync, see page 42. 5. Double-click the *.exe file on the computer. If the file is an installer, the installation wizard will begin. Follow the instructions on the screen. Once the software has been installed, the installer will automatically transfer the software to your phone. If the file is not an installer, you will see an error message. You need to move this file to your phone by using ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Start Menu folder on your phone. Once installation is completed, you can view and open the program by accessing the Start menu. Adding a program directly from the Internet First, you need to determine what your phone and processor type is so that you know which version of the software to install. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → More... → About. Check the version of your phone.The basics 38 2. Download the program to your phone straight from the Internet using Internet Explorer. Be sure to select the program designed for the phone and your phone’s processor type. 3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. 4. Select the file, such as a *.xip or *.exe file. The installation wizard will begin. 5. Follow the directions on the screen. Once installation is completed, you can view and open the program by accessing the Start menu. Removing programs 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to delete. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Remove. 5. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. 6. When you have finished, press the OK soft key.The basics 39 Managing certificates On your phone you can add and delete public key certificates. You can store the following two types of certificates on your phone. • Personal: help to establish your identity, when you log on to a secured network, such as a corporate network. • Root: help to establish the identity of servers with which you connect. This helps to prevent unauthorised users from accessing your phone and information. Viewing certificates 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Certificates → a certificate type. 3. To view more details, select the certificate. Deleting a certificate 1. Scroll to the certificate you want on the list. 2. Press the Menu soft key and then select Delete. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion.The basics 40 Resetting your phone You can reset your phone’s settings and clear all added data from memory. Resetting the phone 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → More... → Hard reset. You can also turn on the phone with pressing and holding . 3. Enter the initialisation password and press the Done soft key. The default password is “1234.” 4. Press the Yes soft key to confirm. The phone resets and reboots itself. Changing the initialisation password You can change the initialisation password to prevent the phone from being reset by unauthorised people. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → More... → Hard reset password. 3. Enter the old password, then a new password, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key.The basics 41 Using online help Your phone is supported by additional information available online, or on the CD-ROM that came with your phone. SIM AT (SIM Application Toolkit) This is available if you use a SIM AT card that provides the SIM Application Toolkit menus and additional services, such as news, weather, sports, entertainment, and location services. Available services may vary, depending on your service provider’s plans. For details, see your SIM card instructions or contact your service provider. For information on: see: additional programs that can be installed on your phone, the supplied CD-ROM. connecting to and synchronising with a PC, Chapter 3 in this User’s Guide or ActiveSync Help on your PC. To view the ActiveSync help, click the ActiveSync icon on the Windows task bar. up-to-date information on your phone, http://www.microsoft.com/ mobile/smartphone.3 42 Synchronisation Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® , you can synchronise data on your desktop computer with the data on your phone. Synchronisation compares the data on your phone with your desktop computer and updates both your phone and computer with the latest data. With ActiveSync, you can: • Keep Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, or Inbox data up-to-date by synchronising your phone with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop computer. • Copy (rather than synchronise) files between your phone and desktop computer. • Control the moment when synchronisation occurs by selecting a synchronisation mode. • Select data types to be synchronised and control the amount of synchronised data. WARNING! • ActiveSync synchronises two devices using the latest data. Therefore, if you delete some specific data from the phone after synchronisation, and then perform a synchronisation again, the corresponding data on the computer will be deleted. Be careful not to lose important data. • If you turn off the phone after copying files to any folders, except for the Storage folder, using ActiveSync, all files in those folders will be deleted. Store important files in the Storage folder to prevent from being deleted.Synchronisation 43 Installing ActiveSync Before beginning synchronisation, you must install ActiveSync on your desktop computer using the supplied CD-ROM. You can also download the latest version of ActiveSync from the Microsoft web site (http:// www.microsoft.com). 1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your desktop computer. Alternatively, double-click the downloaded ActiveSync installer. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen for installing Microsoft ActiveSync. When installation is completed, the Synchronisation Setup Wizard helps you to connect your phone to your desktop computer, to set up a partnership. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note: See page 45 for more information on connecting the phone and a computer. Your first synchronisation process will automatically begin when your phone is connected to the computer. After the first synchronisation, take a look at Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks on your phone. You will notice that your information has been copied to the phone.Synchronisation 44 Customising connection settings To establish a connection between your computer and the phone, you must enable the connection(s) you want to use in the ActiveSync program. By default, all connections are enabled. 1. From the ActiveSync window on your computer, select File → Connection Settings... 2. Change the connection settings. 3. Click OK. If your phone is not connected to the computer, click this button to establish a connection.Synchronisation 45 Connecting your phone to a computer To connect the phone to your computer, you can use a PC data cable or the infrared port. Connecting with a PC data cable Connect one end of the PC data cable to the charger/PC data cable jack on the right of the phone and the other end to the USB port on your computer. Note: USB mode of your phone must be set for ActiveSync. Press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → Connections → USB. Then change the mode. The connection is established and the Microsoft ActiveSync window appears. The synchronisation automatically begins. Note: When an error occurs in a USB connection, activate the DHCP Client service, or deactivate the firewall or VPN environment. Connecting via the infrared port 1. Enable IR transmissions on your phone; Select Start → Settings → More... → Connections → Beam → Receive incoming beams. 2. Align the infrared ports on your phone and the computer. Note: To use the infrared port, the phone’s display must be activated. 3. From the Connection Settings window of the Windows ActiveSync, select Infrared Port (IR).Synchronisation 46 4. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select ActiveSync. 5. Press the Menu soft key and select Connect via IR. Once the connections is established, appears on the Windows task bar. Note: If your computer doesn’t have an infrared port, you can purchase a USB-IrDA adapter. Synchronising information To start synchronisation, connect your phone to your computer. For more information on connecting the phone and the computer, see page 45. The ActiveSync screen on your computer automatically appears and synchronisation starts. Once the synchronisation is completed, the phone stays connected to the computer. If any change is made, ActiveSync automatically will begin synchronisation. To begin synchronisation, press the Sync soft key in ActiveSync on your phone. You can open the phone’s file directory by clicking Explore from the Microsoft ActiveSync window. You can then copy files quickly and easily from the phone to the computer or vice versa. Shows the synchronisation status. Shows types of information to be synchronised.Synchronisation 47 Note: To synchronize Bluetooth devices with a compatible PC, you need the Bluetooth stack for Windows XP Service Pack 2 on your PC. Customising synchronisation settings You can customise various setting options for synchronisation with a computer and a server, and set the synchronisation schedule. First, you must break the connection between the phone and computer. Disconnect the PC data cable or remove the phone from the infrared range. Changing PC Settings 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Options. 2. Highlight Window PC. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Settings. 4. Change the computer name, set how to handle a data conflict between the phone and computer, or set a event logging type and press the Done soft key. 5. Select data types to be synchronised under the selected computer. 6. Press the Done soft key. Note: For more information on the conditions that must be met on the computer and how to change synchronisation options, see ActiveSync Help.Synchronisation 48 Setting server synchronisation You can synchronise information automatically as items arrive only if your company is running Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync. Configuring an Exchange Server connection 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Add Server Source. 2. Enter the server address and select This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection to use a SSL protocol for server access. 3. Press the Next soft key. 4. Enter your Microsoft Exchange user name, password, and domain name. To save the password for subsequent accesses, select Save password. 5. Press the Next soft key. 6. Select data types to be synchronised. 7. When you have finished, press the Finish soft key. Changing the synchronisation schedule You can schedule synchronisation with the Microsoft Exchange Server on two separate times. Use the peak time schedule to synchronise during working hours or other times when you experience higher mail volumes. Use the off-peak time schedule to synchronise during times when you experience lower mail volumes.Synchronisation 49 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Schedule. 2. Set each option: • To synchronise periodically during peak times, select a frequency of synchronisation in the Peak times field. • To synchronise periodically during off-peak times, select a frequency of synchronisation in the Off-peak times field. • To use the peak time and off-peak time setting while roaming, select Use above settings when roaming. • To synchronise each time you send an e-mail, select Send outgoing items immediately. • To set the days and hours for peak times, press the Menu soft key and select Peak Times. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.4 50 Call functions This chapter explains all of the call- functions provided by your phone. Turning the phone functions on and off You can choose to turn off the phone functions and just use the PDA functions at any time and then turn it back on when you want. Note: In many countries you may be required by law to turn off the phone functions while on a flight. To turn off the display of your phone does not actually turn off the phone functions; you must turn off your wireless connection to your operator’s network. To turn off the phone functions, press and select Wireless Manager. Then select Phone to set it to Off. appears on the top right corner of the screen. To turn back on the phone functions, select Phone to set it to On from the Wireless Manager screen.Call functions 51 Using the Dialling screen When you start entering a number or press , the Dialling screen opens. You can view the most recent calls you have dialled, received, and missed on the screen. When you enter a digit, the Dialling screen lists all of the numbers containing the entered digit in Contacts and Call History, as well as the phone number assigned to the corresponding Speed Dial key. Making a call You can make a phone call using the number keypad. 1. From the Home screen, enter a number including an area code using the keypad. 2. Press to make a call. When a call is connected, the call duration displays. During a call, you can use several call options. For details, see page 55. To adjust the earpiece volume during a call, press to increase or decrease the volume level. 3. To end the call, press . Advanced calling features You can make a call from Contacts, Speed Dial, and Call History.Call functions 52 Making a call from Contacts 1. On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. 2. Select a contact card from the contact list. 3. Scroll to the number you want and press . Making a call from Speed Dial Speed Dial is a list you can create of often-dialled numbers. Information on adding a number to Speed Dial is detailed on page 57. By memorising the position on the Speed Dial list, you can dial the number simply by entering that number of the Speed Dial key. The phone number assigned to the key appears on the Dialling screen. Alternatively, if you do not remember the position of a number, access the Speed Dial list: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Speed Dial. 3. Scroll to the number you want and press .Call functions 53 Making a call using name dialling You can make a phone call by saying the name that has been assigned to a contact card in Contacts or on the SIM card. For details, see page 129. Making a call from the Call History 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Call History. The recent call list appears. Note: is for incoming calls, is for outgoing calls, and is for missed calls. To view the calls categorised by call type, press the Menu soft key, select Filter, and select a category from the pop-up list. 3. Scroll to the number you want and then press . Making an international call 1. Press and hold until the + sign appears. The + replaces the international access code. 2. Enter the full phone number you want to dial. It includes the country code, the area code (without the leading zero), and the phone number. 3. Press . Note: You can set the country or are code to be added before the number when dialling. See page 62.Call functions 54 Making an emergency call Your phone provides the emergency number 112. This number can normally be used to make an emergency call in any country, with or without a SIM card inserted, if you are within a mobile phone network’s service area. Enter the emergency number 112 and press . Notes: • Some service providers may require a SIM card to be inserted, and in some cases the PIN to be entered as well. • In some cases, other emergency numbers may also be accessed. Your service provider may save additional local emergency numbers on the SIM card. Answering or ignoring a call When a call comes in and the phone rings or vibrates, depending on the ringer setting: • Press the Answer soft key or press to answer the call. • Press the Ignore soft key or press to reject the call. You can also press and hold . Note: If you reject a call, the busy tone is sent out. Depending on your service provider, the caller may be guided to your voicemail server.Call functions 55 Options during a call Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use while a call is in progress. Putting a call on hold If a person is trying to call you when you are talking on the phone, a notification window will pop out. 1. Press the Answer soft key to answer the second call and put the first on hold. 2. To swap back and forth between the two callers, press the Swap soft key. 3. To end the second call and go back to the first, press the End soft key or press . Setting up conference calling Conference calling enables you to invite callers during a call and have a conversation with up to 5 people at the same time. 1. Put a call on hold, dial a second number, and wait for it to be picked up. Alternatively, accept a second incoming call when you already have one in progress. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Conference. If the conference connection is successful, the word “Conference” will appear at the top of the screen. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Hold to place the conference call on hold and make a new call or answer another incoming call. Call functions 56 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Conference to join together all existing calls. To talk privately to a person during a conference call, press the Menu soft key and select Private. When the list of call participants appears, select one. Switching a call to a Speakerphone During a call, you can switch to a speakerphone. In Speakerphone mode, a noisy enviroment will make it difficult to hear the person whom you are speaking with. In a noisy environment, it is better to use the normal phone mode for better audio performance. • To activate a speakerphone, press and hold for about 1 seconds. • To deactivate a speakerphone, press and hold the key again for the same length of time. Call-related features Checking your voicemail The first speed dial location is assigned to your voicemail box by default. When you insert your SIM card into the phone, it will automatically detect and set as default the voicemail centre number of your mobile service provider. To check your voicemail, press and hold from the Dialling screen. Note: You can check and change the voicemail centre number. See page 62.Call functions 57 Managing the Speed Dial list You can assign frequently-used phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web pages in Contacts to the speed dial location 2 through 99. The location 0 and 1 on the Speed Dial list is preset for the international call prefix + and the voicemail centre number, respectively. Note: You cannot create a speed dial for a phone number stored on the SIM card. Adding a contact to the Speed Dial list 1. On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. 2. Select a contact from the list. 3. Scroll to a number, e-mail address, or web page address. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Add to Speed Dial. 5. If necessary, enter the name you want. 6. In the Keypad assignment field, select a location. 7. Press the Done soft key. Deleting Speed Dial assignments 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Speed Dial. 3. On the Speed Dial list, select a number.Call functions 58 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 5. When the confirmation message appears, press the Yes soft key. Managing your Call History Call History details all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, and also provides a summary of total calls. It can also tell you when a call was initiated and how long it lasted. To open the Call History: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Call History. A list of all calls appears. If necessary, select the category of the call history to be displayed by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Filter. Calls are categorised as below: • No Filter: shows all calls made to and from the phone in chronological order. • Missed Calls: shows only calls that were not answered. • Incoming Calls: shows only calls made to the phone. • Outgoing Calls: shows only calls made from the phone. Viewing details of calls • To view the duration of a call and time and date you received or made it, scroll to the call you want to view and press . • To view contact information, scroll to a contact, press the Menu soft key, and select Find Contact. • To send an SMS message, press the Menu soft key and select Send SMS.Call functions 59 • To send an e-mail message using the e-mail address on the call history, scroll to the contacts, press the Menu soft key, and select Email. • To delete individual calls, press the Menu soft key, and then select Delete. To delete all calls, select Delete List. • To save a phone number in a call to Contacts, scroll to the call you want and press the Save soft key. Viewing call timers In Call History, you can view the duration of your calls. This option is convenient for estimating your usage. 1. On the Call History screen, press the Menu soft key and select View Timers. You can view the total call time, the last call time, the time of calls you received and made, and a lifetime counter. You can also view the time you reset the call time. 2. Press the Done soft key. You can easily erase the call time records at any time, except for Lifetime calls, by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Reset Timers. Viewing call cost This network feature lets you view the cost of calls. Viewing call cost may not be available, depending on particular SIM cards. For more information, contact your service provider. 1. On the Call History screen, press the Menu soft key and select Call Cost.Call functions 60 2. Select the option you want. • Last Call Cost: shows the cost of the last call you made. • Total Cost: shows the total cost of all calls made since the cost counter was last reset. If the total cost exceeds the maximum cost set in the Set Max Cost option, you can no longer make any calls until you reset the counter. • Max Cost: shows the maximum cost set in the Set Max Cost option. • Reset Counters: allows you to reset the cost counter. • Set Max Cost: allows you to enter the maximum cost that you authorise for your calls. Calls can be made as long as the preset max cost is not exceeded. • Price/Unit: allows you to set the cost of one unit. This price per unit is applied when calculating the cost of your calls. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Customising your phone functions You can personalise the settings of the phone functions, the services you have, and the network to which you have connected. Accessing the Phone setting options 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Phone. 3. Select a setting menu, and then set each option.Call functions 61 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Available setting options • Band Selection: This option allows you to select the network band in which your phone will operate. Your phone can operate in the GSM 900/1800 or PCS 1900 band. • Call Barring: This network service allows you to restrict your incoming or outgoing calls. To set up this service, you need to enter the call barring password obtained from your service provider. All calls: No calls can be made or received. When roaming: Calls cannot be received when you are using your phone outside of your home service area. Off: Call barring is deactivated; all calls can be made and received normally. Int's except home: When abroad, calls can be made only to number within the current country and to your home country. Int'l calls: International calls cannot be made. • Call Forwarding: This network service allows you to forward your incoming calls to another phone number. Unconditional: All calls are forwarded. No Reply: Calls are forwarded when you do not answer. Busy: Calls are forwarded when you are on the phone. Unavailable: Calls are forwarded when your phone is turned off or your phone is out of the service area. Data Calls: All data calls are forward.Call functions 62 • Call Options: You can customise settings related to call functions, such as an answering option, voicemail and SMS access numbers, and auto dial codes. Any key answer: When this option is activated, you can answer incoming calls by pressing any key, except for , , , and . Show SIM contacts: With this option is activated, the contact cards stored on the SIM card display on the contact list. Phone number: Check your phone number. Voice mail number/SMS service centre: When you insert your SIM card into your phone, it automatically detects and sets your voicemail and SMS access numbers by default. If not, you can manually enter the numbers obtained from your service provider. Country code/Dialling code: You can enter a country code or area code. The code will be automatically added before a phone number when dialling. • Call Waiting: This service allows you to receive another call while you have a call in progress. Select Provided call waiting call notifications to activate this service. • Caller ID: When you place a call, your phone number can be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. Using this option, you can enable or disable the display of your caller identification. For more detailed information , press the Start soft key and then Select Settings → Phone → More.... • Channels: This option allows you to set the cell broadcast (CB) message receipt and set up broadcast channels from which you want to receive CB messages. Enable channels: Select to enable the receipt of CB messages.Call functions 63 Language: Select your preferred languages to display CB messages. To edit the channel list, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Channels. Then press the Menu soft key and select the options for adding, editing or deleting channels. • Extra Tones: You can activate or deactivate the connect tone, which alerts you when your call is connected to the system, or the minute minder tone, which alerts you every minute during a call. • Fixed Dialling: When this option is activated, your phone allows outgoing calls only to the limited set of phone numbers. You can call only those numbers that are included in the Fixed Dialling Number list or which begin with the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. • Networks: You can set the phone to automatically select a network when you are roaming out of your service area, or find and select the network you want. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options: Find a New Network: Search for all available networks. You can start searching when the phone is out of your service area. Select a Network: Select a network from the available networks Preferred Networks: Set up a list of your preferred networks. You can set priority of the networks or add networks manually by selecting them from the preset network list or entering their service ID codes.64 5 Messaging, Internet, and Messenger Messaging In Messaging, you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise: • Text messages (SMS) • Multimedia message (MMS) • E-mail messages To open Messaging: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Messaging. Working with SMS or MMS messages You can write an SMS message of up to 160 characters. When you enter more than 160 characters, your phone handles the message as a multi-part message. You can also send or receive multimedia messages (MMS). In addition to the familiar text content of text messages, multimedia messages can contain images, video clips, audio clips, and combinations of these things in more than one page. MMS also supports e-mail addressing, so that messages can be sent from phone to e-mail and vice versa.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 65 Creating and sending an SMS message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select SMS/MMS. 2. Press the New soft key and select SMS. 3. In the To field, enter the recipients’ phone numbers, separating them with a semicolon. You can retrieve numbers from the contact list by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipient. 4. Press the Down key and compose your message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, press the Menu soft key, select My Text, and select a message. 5. Press the Send soft key when you’ve finished the message. Creating and sending an MMS message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select SMS/MMS. 2. Press the New soft key and select MMS. 3. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, enter the recipients’ numbers or addresses, separating them with a semicolon. Note: The Cc or Bcc fields are above the To field. You can also retrieve numbers or the addresses from the contact list or the messages you have sent by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipients.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 66 4. Press the Down key to move to the Subject field and enter the message subject. 5. Press the Down key and enter the message text. 6. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options for composing a message: • Preview: shows the multimedia message you created. • Add Recipients: allows you to add recipients addresses. • Edit Item: allows you to edit the selected item. • Add: allows you to add a variety of contents, such as data, media files and templates. • Attach: allows you to attach a contact card or calendar item as a digital file format, or a media file. • Edit Page: allows you to add or delete pages, change the text style, or set the page order or duration. • Save to: allows you to save the message to Drafts or as an MMS template. • Cancel Message: cancels sending the message. • MMS Options: allows you to change the message options. See page 70. 7. When you have finished composing the message, press the Send soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 67 Viewing SMS/MMS messages When you receive a new SMS or MMS message, the New Message icon ( ) displays on the top line of the screen and a new message is stored in Inbox. Press the Message soft key to open the message. You can also view messages you received, sent, composed but not sent by accessing the message folders. To open the message folders: On the SMS/MMS screen, press the Menu soft key and select Folders. The following default folders display: • Deleted Items: contains messages that have been deleted on your phone. • Drafts: stores draft messages that have not been sent. • Inbox: contains received messages. • Outbox: is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. • Sent Items: stores the messages that have been sent. To view all message folder contents, press the Menu soft key and select Show All Folders. To clear the SMS/MMS messages in a specific folder, scroll to the folder, press the Menu soft key, and select Clear SMS/MMS.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 68 To view a received message: 1. On the SMS/MMS screen, open the message folder you want. The icons on the message list tells you the message type. • : SMS message • : MMS message Note: You can change the default settings for viewing an SMS message. On a message list, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Display. 2. Select the message you want to view. If you open a push message from a WAP server, press the Proceed soft key to access the URL specified in the message. To access message options: While viewing a received or sent message, you can access the following options by pressing the Menu soft key. • Delete: deletes the message. • Reply All (SMS): sends a reply to the sender and all other recipients • Reply (MMS) : sends a reply to the sender and/or all other recipients, or forwards the message to other people.. • Forward (SMS): forwards the message to other people. • Move: allows you to move the message to other folders.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 69 • Mark as Unread/Mark as Read: allows you to mark the message as unread or read. Unread messages are boldfaced on the message list. • Save to Contacts: allows you to save the sender’s number or address. • Save as MMS Template (MMS): saves the message as an MMS template for reuse. • Attached files (MMS): allows you to save attachments of the message into the phone’s memory. • MMS Options: allows you to change the MMS settings. See below. Viewing messages on the SIM card Sometimes, text messages may be stored on the SIM card, depending on their specifications. To view the messages stored on the SIM card, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1. On a message list, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Import SIM Messages. 2. Press the Done soft key. The text messages are copied from the SIM card to SMS/MMS Inbox.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 70 Configuring MMS settings You can change the default MMS settings. From composing or viewing an MMS message, press the Menu soft key and select MMS Options. The following options are available: • Sending Options: Allows you to change the settings for sending MMS messages. Priority: You can select the priority level of your messages. Validity Period: You can select the length of time your messages are stored in the message centre after they are sent. Delivery Time: You can select the time delay before messages are sent. Creation Mode:Allows you to set the phone to allow the MMS creation using unsupported files. Size: You can select the message size. Hide address: You can set your caller ID to be hidden from outgoing messages. Request delivery report: When this option is activated, the network informs you whether or not your message has been delivered. Request read report: When this option is activated, your phone sends a request for a reply along with your message to the recipient. • Receiving Options: Allows you to change the settings for receiving MMS messages. Home Network: Set how to retrieve new messages from the server in your home network. Roaming Network: Set how to retrieve new messages from the server while roaming around another network.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 71 Reject Unknown Sender:reject messages from unknown senders. Report Allowed:send a delivery report from the network to the sender. Advertisement Allowed:accept advertisements. Information Allowed:accept information messages. • MMS Profiles: Allows you to set up and activate MMS profiles which are sets of MMS parameters required to send or receive MMS messages. To activate a profile, select it from the profile list. To edit a profile, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. Change the following options: Profile Name: Enter the profile name. MMSC URL: Enter the URL address of the MMS centre. Bearer: select the network bearer type. Working with E-mail messages You can send and receive e-mail messages in one of these ways: • Synchronise e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook on your PC. • Send and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a network.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 72 Synchronising E-mail messages Use the Outlook EMail account to send and receive e-mail messages by synchronising e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook on your PC. E-mail messages can be synchronised as part of the general synchronisation process. You will need to enable Inbox synchronisation in ActiveSync. During synchronisation: • Messages are copied from the mail folders of Exchange or Outlook on your PC to the Outlook Email folders on your phone. • E-mail messages in Outbox on your phone are transferred to Exchange or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. • E-mail messages in folders must be selected in ActiveSync on your PC in order to be transferred. Connecting directly to an E-mail server You can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server. You’ll need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to your e-mail server. When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the phone’s Inbox folder. Also messages in the phone’s Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted on the e-mail server are removed from the phone’s message folders. Folder behavior with a direct connection to an E-mail server The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using POP3 or IMAP4.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 73 • If you use POP3 and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on the phone and their copies on the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server will see that the messages are missing from the phone Inbox and delete them. This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you will no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the phone. • If you use IMAP4, the folders you created and the e-mail messages you moved are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your mail server. This synchronisation of folders occurs whenever you connect to your mail server; create new folders or rename/delete folders when connected. Creating an e-mail account You need to create a new account to be used for retrieving and sending e-mail messages. To make a new account: 1. From any message folder, press the Menu soft key and select Options → New Account. 2. Enter your display name and e-mail address, and press the Next soft key. If you want to set up your account automatically from the Internet, select Attempt to obtain email settings from the Internet. 3. Enter your user information, such as user name, password, and domain name, press the Next soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 74 4. Select the e-mail server type, enter an account name, and select a network type. 5. Press the Next soft key. 6. Enter the server names and press the Next soft key. If you want to set up an outgoing server, select Outgoing Server Settings. 7. Set the options for downloading e-mail messages and press the Next soft key. You can select the number of days for which you receive e-mail messages and set the maximum data volume of e-mail messages you want to download. 8. Select how often your phone automatically connects to the server and checks for incoming e-mails, and press the Next soft key. 9. Press the Finish soft key. To edit an account: 1. From any message folder, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Account Options. 2. Select the account you want. 3. Change the account settings as you would when creating it. For SMS/MMS, you can set to send a delivery report request for outgoing messages or to use Unicode encoding.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 75 Creating and sending an E-mail message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the e-mail account with which you want to send. 2. Press the New soft key. 3. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, enter the recipients’ e-mail addresses, separating them with a semicolon. Note: The Cc or Bcc fields are above the To field. You can retrieve addresses from the contact list by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipient. 4. Press the Down key to move to the Subject field and enter the e-mail subject. 5. Compose your e-mail message. To enter preset or frequently used sentences, press the Menu soft key, select My Text, and select a sentence. You can add a picture or voice note as an attachment by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Insert → a item type. 6. Press the Send soft key when you have finished composing the message. 7. Press the Menu soft key and select Send/Receive to connect to the network and send the message. Viewing e-mail messages You can also view messages you received, sent, composed but not sent by accessing the message folders.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 76 To open the message folders: On the Messaging main screen, access the e-mail account you want, press the Menu soft key, and select Folders. The following default folders display: • Deleted Items: contains messages that have been deleted on your phone. • Drafts: stores draft messages that have not been sent. • Inbox: contains received messages. • Outbox: is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. • Sent Items: stores the messages that have been sent. Note: When you first have synchronised e-mail messages, the Junk E-mail folder is copied from the Microsoft Outlook on your PC to Outlook E-mail on your phone. The next time you synchronise, the e-mail messages that appear to be Junk e-mail are saved in that folder according to the options you set in the Microsoft Outlook. To view all message folder contents in the selected account, press the Menu soft key and select Show All Folders. To view an e-mail message: 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the e-mail account from which you want to receive e-mail messages. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Send/Receive. The phone connects to your e-mail server and receives incoming e-mail messages or sends e-mail messages in Outbox. 3. Select the message you want to view.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 77 To access message options: While viewing a received or sent e-mail, you can access the following options by pressing the Menu soft key. • Delete: deletes the message. • Reply All: sends a reply to the senders and all other recipients. • Move: allows you to move message(s) to other folders. • Mark as Unread/Mark as Read: allows you to mark the message as unread or read. Unread messages are boldfaced on the message list. • Download Message: allows you to download the complete contents of the e-mail from the e-mail server. • Send/Receive: sends or receives the e-mail messages. Setting downloading options You can specify your downloading preferences when you set up the account or select your synchronisation options. You can change them at any time: • Change options for Inbox synchronisation using ActiveSync options. For more information, see “ActiveSync Help.” • Change options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on your phone. Press the Menu soft key and select Options → Account Options. Select the account you want and change it. Viewing e-mail attachments To download an attachment, select the attachment displayed as a list of hyperlinks in an open message. It will be downloaded the next time you synchonise or connect to your e-mail server and send or receive e-mail messages. To view an attachment, select the attachment in an open message.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 78 Switching beween message accounts While working in an account, you can switch to another message account any time you need. 1. Press the Menu soft key and select Switch Accounts. 2. Select the account to which you want to switch. Inserting signatures into messages You can specify a signature to be automatically inserted into SMS, MMS or e-mail messages that you send. To specify a signature: 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the message account you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Options → Signatures. 3. Select the account for which you want to specify from the Select an account field. 4. Select Use signature with this account. 5. To insert a signature in every messages, including when you reply or forward the message, select Include when replying and forwarding. 6. Enter a signature to be inserted and press the Done soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 79 Internet Explorer Use Microsoft® Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web HTML, cHTML, and WAP pages. You can browse by connecting to an Internet service provider (ISP) or network and browse the Web. To do this, you’ll need to create the connection first as described on page 148. When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and programs from the Internet. To open Internet Explorer: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Internet → Internet Explorer. Browsing the Internet 1. To connect and start browsing, do one of the following: • Press the Menu soft key and select Address Bar. Enter the web address you want to visit • Press the Menu soft key and select History to open the list of the pages you last accessed. Select a page from the list. • Scroll to the page you want to view from the Favourites list. 2. Press the Go soft key on the browser to open the associated web page.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 80 Navigating the Internet Explorer The following table helps you browse the Internet easily: Using the Favorites list You can store your favourite link while using the Internet Browser and then access them easily. Categorising them enables you to find them more quickly. Adding a web page to the Favorites list 1. Go to the page you want to add and press the Menu soft key and select Add to Favourites. To Press scroll through browser items the Navigation keys. select a browser item . return to the previous page . refresh the connection the Menu soft key and select Refresh. To change the display options the Menu soft key, select View, and select the option you want. To change the text and image size the Menu soft key, select Zoom, and select the option you want. view information on the web page the Menu soft key and select Tools → Properties.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 81 2. Enter a name for the favourite link and the URL of the link. 3. Select a category from the Folder field under which you want to save the favourite link. You can also create a new category. See page 84. 4. Press the Add soft key. Opening a link through the Favourites list 1. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to the link you want to access. If the link you want is in the certain folder, open the folder and scroll to the link. 3. Press the Go soft key. Managing Favorites categories You can create a new category for saving favourite web pages and edit or delete the created categories. 1. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Add Folder to create a new category. Alternatively, scroll to the category and press the Menu soft key and select Edit or Delete to edit or delete the selected category.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 82 Changing Explorer options You can customise Web browsing options, change the connection settings, and clear memory. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Menu soft key and select Tools → Options. The following options are available: • General: You can select whether or not to play sounds on web pages, view the warnings when you move from a secure web page to a non-secure one, or enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. You can also select the text encoding type to use. • Connections: You can change the network setting to connect to Internet Explorer. If you select Automatically detect settings, your phone automatically detects network settings from your service provider. • Memory: You can check the amount of memory currently being used for the Internet Explorer. To clear the memory, scroll to a type of memory and press the Clear soft key. WAP Browser Using Browser, you can browse the WAP service preset by your service provider and other WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites on your phone. Connecting to a WAP site 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Internet → WAP Browser.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 83 3. To connect and start browsing, do one of the following: • Press the Menu soft key and select Home to access the homepage of your service provider. • Press the Favourites soft key, select the category which contains the WAP site you want, and then select the WAP site. • Press the Menu soft key and select Go To. Enter the address of WAP site you want to visit and press the Go soft key. 4. While navigating through WAP pages, you can use the following options: Using the Favourites list You can store your favourite WAP sites and then access them easily. Categorising them enables you to find them more quickly. Adding a URL to the Favourites list 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Menu soft key and select Add to Favourites. To Press go to the previous visited page . go to the homepage the Menu soft key and select Home. refresh the current page the Menu soft key and select Refresh. Open the list of the WAP sites you have accessed the Menu soft key and select History.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 84 2. If there is no category created, enter a name for the category and press the Save soft key. 3. Enter a name for the favourite site and the URL of the site. 4. Select the category under which you want to save the favourite site. You can also create a new category by pressing the Menu soft key and select New Category. 5. Press the Done soft key. Opening a page through the Favourites list 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to a category from the list and press the Open soft key. 3. Scroll to the WAP site you want and press the Go soft key. Managing Favourite categories You can create a new category for saving favourite WAP sites and edit or delete the created category. 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select New to create a new category. Or scroll to the category you want, press the Menu soft key, and then select Rename or Delete to edit the selected category.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 85 Deleting a favourite item 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to a category from the list and press the Open soft key. 3. Scroll to the WAP site you want to delete and press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 4. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. Setting the WAP options You can access options for the WAP browser. Press the Menu soft key and select Options. • Settings: You can view the current connection settings for WAP and set the selected profile as an active profile or edit a selected profile. You can also set the WAP browser to load the homepage when launching. • Cache/Cookie: Viewed pages can be cached for faster downloads and cookies are pieces of information related to a session. You can select to enable or disable the cache or cookies. You can clear information stored in the cache and cookie by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Clear Cache or Clear Cookie. • Set as Home Page: You can change the startup homepage of the WAP browser. Access the page you want and select this option.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 86 Pocket MSN Pocket MSN delivers an always-on experience that enables you to remain available to other online users and always up to date with e-mail, instant messaging (IM) and other online services without maintaining a continuous network connection to the phone. The connection will be restored when a new message arrives or when you needs the service. In addition, subscribers will receive only updates or changes to their contacts and Inbox rather than receiving entire lists when they connect to the service. You will have one-click access to MSN Hotmail® and MSN Messenger. In addition, Pocket MSN will allow you to wirelessly browse online and receive other MSN services, including MSN Alerts, which include news, sports and weather updates. In addition to always-on services, you can access, compose and answer Hotmail messages offline, maximising their time when mobile connections aren't available. To access Pocket MSN: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Internet → Pocket MSN. Signing In To use the MSN Messenger or Hotmail service, you must have a Microsoft Passport™ account or Hotmail account, or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail account. If you have a Hotmail® or MSN account, you already have a Passport. Once you have obtained either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account, you are ready to set up your account.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 87 Note: Sign up for a Microsoft Passport account at http:// www.passport.com. Get a free Microsoft Hotmail e-mail address at http://www.hotmail.com. To sign into the MSN service: 1. On the Pocket MSN main screen, select MSN Messenger, MSN Hotmail, or Compose Hotmail. 2. If you selected MSN Messenger, press the Sign In soft key. 3. Enter the e-mail address and the password of your Microsoft Passport and Hotmail account. 4. Press the Sign In soft key. Using MSN Messenger MSN® Messenger on your phone is an instant messaging program that lets you: • see who is online. • send and receive instant messages. • have instant message conversations with groups of contacts. Working with contacts The MSN Messenger screen shows all of your messenger contacts at a glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while connected, you can start a chat. • To see others who are online but not seen on the MSN Messenger screen, press the Menu soft key and select Chats.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 88 • To add a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Add Contact. • To delete a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Delete Contact. • To set the MSN Messenger to automatically update the contacts’ status when it changes, press the Menu soft key and select Auto update status. • To view the properties of a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Properties. • To block a contact from chatting with you, press the Menu soft key and select Block.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 89 Chatting with contacts 1. To open a chat window, scroll to the contact with whom you want to chat. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Send Message. 3. Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen, or press the Menu soft key and select My Text to enter a preset message. To invite another contact to a multi user chat, press the Menu soft key, select Invite, and select the contact you want to invite. To switch back to the main window, press the Menu soft key and select My contacts. To revert back to your chat window, press the Menu soft key, select Chats, and select the person whom you were chatting with. 4. To end the chat, press the Menu soft key and select End Chat. Using the Hotmail service You can send and read e-mail messages on the phone via the Microsoft Hotmail service. Composing and sending an e-mail 1. On the Pocket MSN screen, select Compose Hotmail. 2. Compose an e-mail as you would in the Messaging program.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 90 Viewing e-mail messages 1. On the Pocket MSN screen, select MSN Hotmail. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Folders. 3. Select a message folder, and then select the message you want to view. Accessing the MSN Mobile Homepage On the Pocket MSN screen, select MSN Mobile Home. You can access various mail, information, entertainment services provided by Microsoft. Changing Pocket MSN setting options From the Pocket MSN mail screen, press the Options soft keys. The following options are available: Note: To change the settings, you may need to sign in to the MSN service. • General: You can clear the saved password, if any, or set Pocket MSN to be displayed on the Home screen. • Hotmail: You can set filters to receive or block e-mails or set Hotmail to automatically download new messages to the phone. • Messenger: You can change your display name in Messenger or set Messenger to automatically update your contacts’ presence information. • SMS: You can set Pocket MSN to temporarily use SMS when a data connection is unavailable. • Switch User: You can reset user information to sign in to the MSN service by another user account.6 91 Organiser This chapter explains how to keep track of contacts and appointments and make a list of tasks you need to do. Contacts Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you’re looking for, whether you’re at home or on the road. To open Contacts: On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. You can view the list of contact cards that you have created. Creating a contact card You can save a new contact card in Contacts or on the SIM card. Creating a contact card in the phone’s memory 1. On the contact list, press the New soft key. 2. Enter a name and other contact information. To assign the contact card to a category, scroll to the Categories field and select a category. You can add a personal ringtone to a contact card. Scroll to the Custom ring tone field and select the ring melody you want. Select the Picture field to add an image for the caller ID image.Organiser 92 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a contact card on the SIM card 1. On the contact list, press the Menu soft key and select New SIM Contact. 2. Enter the name of the person you want to add. 3. Scroll to the Number field and enter the number you want to store. 4. Press the Done soft key. Creating a contact card from the Dialling screen 1. On the Home screen, enter the phone number and press the Save soft key. 2. To create a new contact card, select . To add the phone number to an existing contact card, select the contact card. 3. Scroll to the location in which you want to save the number and press the Insert soft key. 4. Fill in the other fields and press the Done soft key.Organiser 93 Viewing and editing a contact card When you access Contacts, the contact list displays the names of your contacts alphabetically, along with an abbreviation for the primary contact number or E-mail address, such as the person’s work phone number (w) or mobile phone number (m). The following table shows possible abbreviations that might be displayed on the Contacts list and their meanings: Abbreviation Meaning w/w2 work phone/work phone 2 h/h2 home phone/home phone 2 m mobile phone co company phone pgr pager car car phone ast assistant phone rdo radio phone number e/e2/e3 e-mail/e-mail 2/e-mail 3 Indicates the type of the default number or e-mail address. Indicates the contacts stored on the SIM card.Organiser 94 Note: All of the contacts saved on the SIM card follow all of the contacts saved in the phone’s memory. To open a contact card: 1. On the contact list, select the contact’s name you want to view. If the contact card is assigned to a certain category, press the Menu soft key and select Filter and then select the category from the pop-up list. 2. Select the contact card you want. A summary screen is displayed. 3. On the summary screen: • To edit the contact information, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. • To send an SMS message to the contact card, scroll to the available number and press the SMS soft key, or press the Menu soft key and then select Send SMS. • To dial a number, select the number or press the Call soft key. • To send an e-mail, select the e-mail address. • To access a web page, select the web page. im/im2/im3 IM/IM2/IM3 web web page Abbreviation MeaningOrganiser 95 Adding a number or address to Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number for speed dialling or to an e-mail or URL address for quick access. 1. On the contact list, select the contact you want. 2. Scroll to the number or address. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add to Speed Dial. 4. If necessary, change the name and select a keypad location. 5. Press the Done soft key. Copying entries between the SIM Card and Contacts You can copy the contact card or all of contact entries in a specific category to the SIM card or vice versa. Copying from Contacts to the SIM card 1. On the contact list, select the contact card stored in the phone’s memory. 2. Scroll to the phone number to be copied. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Save to SIM. 4. If necessary, change the contact name. 5. Press the Done soft key.Organiser 96 Copying from the SIM card to Contacts 1. On the contact list, select the contact card stored on the SIM card. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Save to Contacts. 3. Select to create a new contact card and add contact information. Otherwise, select a contact card to which you want to add the number, scroll to the number type, and press the Insert soft key. 4. Press the Done soft key to save the change. Beaming a contact card You can send a contact card in Contacts to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the contact list or on the summary screen, press the Menu soft key and select Beam Contact . 2. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 3. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key.Organiser 97 Deleting a contact card 1. On the contact list or on the summary screen, press the Menu soft key and select Delete Contact or Delete. 2. Press the Yes soft key to permanently delete the contact card. Note: If you delete a contact card on your phone and synchronise Contacts with your computer, the contact card in Outlook on your computer will be deleted. Calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Week, and Month). To open Calendar: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Calendar. You can view the lists of appointments that you have created in the agenda view.Organiser 98 Creating an appointment 1. Press the Menu soft key and select New Appointment. 2. Fill in the fields. • Subject: Enter a description of the appointment. • Start date, Start time, End date, and End time: If needed, change the date and time. • All day event: If checked, the appointment lasts all day. • Location: Enter the place of the appointment. • Reminder: Select a time setting for the alarm to remind you of the appointment. • Occurs: Select a repeat interval to set how often the appointment repeats. • Status: Select an appropriate status for the appointment. • Sensitivity: Select a sensitivity class by which Microsoft Exchange Server handles the appointment. • Notes: Add a note for the appointment. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.Organiser 99 Viewing and editing an appointment On the Calendar screen, you can view and edit your appointments using the different views: Agenda, Week, or Month. By default, the Calendar first appears in the agenda view, which provides the most detail information about your appointment. Switching the view mode You can change the view mode of the calendar to cycle through the agenda, week, and month view. In each view, press the Week, Month, or Agenda soft key. • Week View: shows the calendar of your appointments. • Month View: allows you to keep track of your monthly schedule and shows which days have appointments scheduled. • Agenda View: shows you the appointments for the selected day. The entries are grouped according to their starting times. Editing an appointment 1. Select the calendar view by pressing the Week, Month, or Agenda soft key.Organiser 100 2. In each view, select the date of the appointment by pressing the Navigation keys. To go to today, press the Menu soft key and select Go to Today. To go to a certain date, press the Menu soft key and select Go to Date. Enter the date and press the Done soft key. 3. Select the appointment you want to view. 4. Press the Edit soft key. 5. If you are editing a repeating or continuous appointment, decide whether to edit all appointments in the series or just the current appointment by pressing the No or Yes soft key. 6. Edit the appointment information and press the Done soft key to save the changes to the appointment. Beaming an appointment You can send an appointment to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the calendar screen, open the appointment you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam Appointment.Organiser 101 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. Deleting an appointment 1. On the calendar screen, scroll to an appointment to delete. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete Appointment. 3. If you make deleting to a repeating or continuous appointment, decide whether to delete all appointments in the series or just the current appointment by pressing the No or Yes soft key. Or, press the Yes soft key to permanently delete the appointment. Changing calendar setting options From any view, press the Menu soft key and select Options. The following options are available: • First day of week: You can select which day the calendar starts with. • Week view: You can select a week view type. • Month view: You can set the Month view shows the current week number. • Set reminders: You can select default schedule alarm time.Organiser 102 D-Day In D-Day, you can calculate how many days are left before or have passed since a specific event. To open D-Day: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → D-Day. Creating a D-Day counter 1. Press the New soft key. 2. Set options in each field. • Date: Enter the date of the day you want to count to or from. • Title: Enter the counter title. • Category: Select one of the preset categories. You can filter counters by category from the counter list. • Repeat every year: Select to set the D-day counter to repeat every year. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. The counter is added to the list and shows how many days are left or have passed.Organiser 103 Editing D-Day categories You can change the name of D-Day categories. 1. From the counter list, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Category. 2. Scroll to the category you want. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Rename. 4. Enter a new name and press the Done soft key. Deleting a D-Day counter 1. Scroll to the counter you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. Tasks Tasks is a convenient place to create task reminders. You can mark a task as completed or delete a task. To open Tasks: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Tasks. Creating a task note 1. Enter your task information in the Enter new task here field. 2. When you have finished, press twice. The task note is added to the task list.Organiser 104 Completing a task When a task is complete, mark it to indicate that the task is done. To mark, scroll to the completed task and press the Complete soft key. To unmark, press the Activate soft key. Beaming a task note You can send a task note to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the task list, scroll to the task you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam Task . 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 4. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key. Deleting a task 1. On the task list, scroll to the task. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete Task. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion.Organiser 105 Voice Notes In any program where you can write on the screen, you can also quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a message. In Voice Notes, you can create a recording. To open Voice Notes: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Voice Notes. Recording a voice note 1. Hold your phone’s microphone near your mouth or other source of sound. 2. Press the Record soft key to make your recording. The numbers on the centre of the screen indicate the elapsed time. 3. Press the Stop soft key to stop recording. Your phone automatically saves the voice note labelled with the title and lists the notes on the All Notes screen. Reviewing a voice note 1. On the All Notes list, select the note you want to review. Recording is playing. During playback, you can adjust the sound volume by pressing . 2. Press the Stop soft key to stop playing.Organiser 106 Setting a voice note as the ringtone 1. On the All Notes list, scroll to a voice note. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Set As Ringtone. 3. Press the OK soft key. Alarm You can use the alarm clock to set a wake-up alarm or set an alarm to remind you of an appointment. To open alarm: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Alarm. Setting a wake-up alarm 1. On the Alarm screen, select Wake up alarm. 2. Select a check box, enter the time for the wake-up alarm to sound, and select the days when the wake-up alarm rings in the week viewer. Use the Navigation keys to move through each field. You can make up to 3 wake-up alarms. 3. Select a melody for the alarm in the Tone field. 4. Select a time interval to resume the alarm after the alarm is stopped in the Snooze field. 5. Press the Done soft key. Organiser 107 Setting an alarm 1. On the Alarm screen, select one of Alarm 1 to Alarm 4. 2. Set each alarm option. 3. Press the Done soft key. Stopping an alarm • When an alarm rings, press the Dismiss soft key to stop it, or press the Snooze soft key to set the alarm to ring again after the specified snooze interval. • To deactivate an alarm, access it from the Alarm screen and remove the check marks for a wake-up alarm, or set Off from the Alarm activation field for a normal alarm. WorldClock You can set up the world clock with the time zones you want, and then check the current time of the city you need at any time. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key 2. Select Organizer → WorldClock. 3. Select the clock you want. 4. Press the Left or Right key to move the time zone line. To apply daylight savings to the currently selected time zone, select Summer Time. 5. Press the Done soft key to save the selected time zone. 6. Repeat from step 3 to add time zones.7 108 Multimedia Camera With the built-in camera on your phone, you can take photos or record videos of people or events while on the move. Your phone produces JPEG photos and 3GP videos. To open Camera: Press the Start soft key , and select Camera. Taking photos 1. When you access the Camera mode, the image to be captured appears. 2. Adjust the image to be captured. • Press the Up or Down key to zoom in or out. • Press the Left or Right key to adjust the brightness of the image. • Press the Menu soft key to access the camera options. See page 109. • Use the number keypad to adjust the image quickly. See page 109. 3. Press or to take a photo. 4. Press the Save soft key to save the photo. The photo is saved to the location specified in the Default Storage option. After saving the photo, the camera automatically returns to Preview mode.Multimedia 109 Setting camera options You can customise the camera settings. Once you set the camera settings, the corresponding icons display at the top of the Preview screen. On the Preview screen, press the Menu soft key. • Camcorder: switches to Camcorder mode. • Shooting Mode: changes the camera shooting mode. Single Shot: takes a normal single shot. Multi Shot: takes a series of stills. You can select the number of photos the camera will take. Mosaic Shot: takes a series of stills and saves them in one frame. You can select a layout. • Flash On: turns the flash on or off. • Timer: selects the length of time for the camera to delay before taking a photo. • Effects: selects a colour tone for photos. • Frames: selects a decorative frame. • Options: changes the default settings for Camera. See page 112. Using the keypad shortcuts You can use the keypad to customise your camera settings when you are in the preview screen. • : switches to Camcorder mode. • : changes the shooting mode by changing the number of photos or the layout. • : changes the image size. • : changes the image quality. • : changes the white balance.Multimedia 110 • : turns the flash on or off. • : selects the length of delay time before taking a photo. • : changes the colour tone. • : allows you to add a decorative frame to the photo. • : allows you to select camera options. Viewing photos To view photos you have taken, press the Album soft key in Camera mode. The list of the photos is stored in the currently selected storage memory. For further details, see page 122. Recording video clips 1. From Camera mode, press to switch to Camcorder mode. The image to be recorded appears. 2. Adjust the image to be recorded. • Press the Up or Down key to zoom in or out on your subject. • Press the Left or Right key to adjust the brightness of the image. • Press the Menu soft key to access the camcorder options. See page 111 • Use the number keypad to adjust the image quickly. See page 111. 3. To start recording, press or . The timer on the top left of the screen shows you the elapsed time.Multimedia 111 4. To stop recording, press the Stop soft key, , or . 5. Press the Save soft key to save the video. The video clip is saved to the location specified in the Default Storage option. After saving the video, the camcorder automatically returns to Video Preview. Setting camcorder options You can customise the camcorder settings. Once you set the video settings, the corresponding icons display at the top of the Video Preview screen. On the Video Preview screen, press the Menu soft key. • Camera: switches to Camera mode. • Recording Mode: select a video recording mode. Select Limit for MMS to record a video suitable for an MMS or e-mail message. Select Normal to record a video within the limit of the currently available memory. • Flash On: turns the flash on or off. • Timer: selects the length of time for the phone to delay before recording a video. • Effects: selects a colour tone for the video. • Audio Off: selects whether or not you record audio with a video clip. • Options: changes the default settings for Camera. See page 112. Using the keypad shortcuts You can use the keypad to customise your video settings when you are on the Video Preview screen. • : switches to Camera mode. • : changes the recording mode.Multimedia 112 • : changes the image size. • : changes the image quality. • : changes the white balance. • : turns the flash on or off. • : selects the length of delay time before starting recording a video. • : changes the colour tone. • : mutes or unmutes audio. • : allows you to select camera options. Playing video clips To view the video clips you have recorded, press the Album soft key in Camcorder mode. The list of the video clips is stored in the currently selected storage memory. For further details, see page 122. Changing the default camera settings To customise the default camera settings, press the Menu soft key and select Options. The following options are available: • General: You can customise the general settings for the Camera program. Auto Save: allows you to set whether the camera will save the photo or video after taking or recording. Default Storage: allows you to select where you want to store your photos or video clips. • Camera: You can customise the settings for Camera mode.Multimedia 113 Photo Size: allows you to select an image size. Photo Quality: allows you to select an image quality. White Balance: allows you to select the white balance mode to adjust the colour balance of photos. Shutter Sound: allows you to select a sound for the shutter release. Default Name: allows you to change the default prefix of photo names. • Camcorder: You can customise the settings for Camcorder mode Video Size: allows you to select an video frame size. Video Quality: allows you to select an image quality. White Balance: allows you to select the white balance mode to adjust the colour balance of videos. Default Name: allows you to change the default prefix of video names. • Shortcuts: You can check view the functions assigned to the keys in Camera mode or Camcorder mode. • About: You can check the copyright information of the Camera program.Multimedia 114 Windows Media Player Your phone is equipped with Microsoft Windows Media Player 10. With Windows Media Player, you can play Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Video, and MP3 audio files that are stored on your phone, a memory card, or on the Web. To open Windows Media Player: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Windows Media. Preparing media files The Windows Media Player of your phone can play various file formats, such as .asf, .wma, .wmv, and .mp3. You can copy media files from your desktop computer to the phone using the Windows Media Player or ActiveSync. You can also copy media files using a memory card. Note: If you have stored too many files in memory, the operation speed of the system slows down. Using an optional memory card helps you clear up this problem and lets you enjoy more music files. About DRM, licenses, and protected files Some digital media files, such as songs downloaded from online stores, are encrypted to prevent the files from being unlawfully distributed or shared. Content providers use a technology called Digital Rights Management (DRM), to encrypt the files. During the encryption process, the content provider creates a license which specifies how and when the file can be used. Multimedia 115 For example, a content provider could create a license that allows you to play a certain file on your computer, but not on your phone. Or, a license that allows you to play a certain file on your phone, but only for a month, or perhaps only a certain number of times. Files that have licenses associated with them are called protected files. Copying media files using ActiveSync 1. Connect your phone to a computer and start synchronisation by referring to page 42. 2. Open the file directory on the phone by clicking Explore from the Microsoft ActiveSync window. 3. Drag the media files you want to copy and drop them into a folder. Windows Media Player automatically retrieves the media files from the folder where the files are copied and you can search them from the Library screen. If the media files do not appear in Library, update the library by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Update Library. Copying media files using the desktop player You can use the desktop player to copy media files. Using the desktop player ensures that licenses are copied with protected files. Make sure that you have Windows Media Player 10 or later versions on your desktop computer. Depending on the version of your desktop player, the procedure to copy files may vary. 1. Connect your phone to the desktop computer and start synchronisation using a PC data cable.Multimedia 116 2. Open Windows Media Player on the desktop computer. 3. Click the Sync tab. 4. Click Edit Playlist. 5. Select the media files you want to synchronise from the left pane of the window. 6. Click OK. 7. Select the saving location from the right pane. 8. Click to select the quality level you want and click OK. 9. Click Start Sync. The selected files are converted and copied to the location you selected in step 7.Multimedia 117 Using libraries A library is a file list provided by Windows Media Player to retrieve media files in the phone’s memory. The Library screen contains categories, such as My Music, My Videos, My TV, and My Playlists. Using the Library screen, you can sort your content by criteria, such as artist name, album title, or genre. On the Library screen, you can use the following options by pressing the Menu soft key: • Queue Up: adds the selected file to the end of the current play list. • Delete from Library: deletes the selected file from the library. • Now Playing: Open the current play list. • Library: allows you to select the library you want to view; for example, the library of files stored on your phone or on the memory card. • Update Library: adds new files to the library by searching your phone or a memory card. • Open File: allows you to find and play files that are stored on your phone or a memory card, but those are not in the library. • Open URL: allows you to specify a URL address for a streaming service. • Properties: displays information about the selected file. • Done: closes the Library screen and displays the player screen.Multimedia 118 Playing music and video files If you have copied media files to your phone’s memory or memory card, you can play them from Media Player. Playing media files from a library 1. On the Library screen, if necessary, press the Menu soft key, select Library, and select the memory from which you want to retrieve files. 2. When libraries have been updated, press the Done soft key. 3. Select a category. 4. Scroll to the library you want to play and press the Play soft key. If the file does not appear in a library, on the Library screen, press the Menu soft key and select Open File. Then select the file you want to play. The player screen appears and the selected file plays. Use the following options during playback: • To adjust the volume, press the Up or Down key. You can view the volume level on the screen. • To adjust the earpiece volume, press . • To move backward in a file, press and hold the Left key. • To move forward in a file, press and hold the Right key. • To access the next file, press the Right key. • To access the previous file, press the Left key. • To pause or resume playback, press . • To play the files in the play list randomly or repeatedly, press the Menu soft key and select Shuffle/Repeat. • To stop playback, press the Menu soft key and select Stop.Multimedia 119 Notes: • When a Bluetooth headset is connected to the phone, the play/pause/stop button on the headset may not function properly. To control the player from the headset, first play or pause music from Media Player, and then use the button. • While playback is in progress, the multi-function key on the Bluetooth headset may not function. Playing media files on a network 1. On the Library screen, press the Menu soft key and select Open URL. 2. Enter a URL in the URL field, or scroll to one of URLs that you have used from the History field. 3. Press the OK soft key. Note: To play streaming media, you must be connected to a network. For more information on creating a remote connection between your phone and a network, see page 148. Setting up a play list You can add media files on the Library screen to a temporary play list. It lists the currently playing file, as well as any files that have been queued up to play next. Creating a play list 1. On the Library screen, select the category you want and scroll to the file you want to play. If the file does not appear on the list, press the Menu soft key and select Update Library. You can also select Open File to display the File System screen and search the files you want.Multimedia 120 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Queue Up to add the file to the play list. 3. Repeat from step 1 to add more files. 4. Press to return to the player screen. 5. Press to start playing the files. Opening the play list On the player screen, press the Now Playing soft key. You can use various options by pressing the Menu soft key. Editing the play list • To change the play order, press the Menu soft key and select Move Up or Move Down. • To delete the selected files, press the Menu soft key and select Delete from Playlist. • To clear the play list, press the Menu soft key and select Clear Now Playing. Changing the Window Media Player settings You can customise the appearance and functionality of Windows Media Player. On the player screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options. You can use the following options: • Playback: Select the options for playback. You can select the way time is displayed on the player screen, or whether or not to pause playback when you launch another program, and resume playback after a phone call.Multimedia 121 • Video: Select the viewing options for playing videos, such as shrinking oversized videos and playing videos on a full screen. Note: If there is a problem while playing MP4 files, deselect the Scale to fit window option. The problem occurs because the file has been resized. • Network: Change the connections speed and protocol for playing streaming content. • Library: Select whether the player screen or the Library screen is displayed when you open Windows Media Player. • Skins: Change the appearance of the player screen by selecting a new skin. • Buttons: Assign Windows Media Player functions to the keys on your phone to quickly control playback without having to use the menus. Customising SRS WOW XT Settings SRS WOW XT for Mobile is a suite of 3D audio, bass enhancement, and mono and stereo speaker technologies designed to improve the quality of mobile audio, e g cellular phone sound quality. To enjoy music with high audio quality, enable the WOW XT feature before playing media files. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then the More soft key, and press the WOW XT Settings. 3. On the SRS WOW XT screen, select On in the WOW XT On/Off field.Multimedia 122 4. Select the type you want in the SRS EQ field, or adjust the settings for each component. 5. Press the Done soft key. Note: • is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. • When you use a headset, the WOW XT feature is enhanced and provides a more powerful listening experience. Picture & Videos This program allows you to access all of your picture and video files stored in your phone's directory or on a memory card. To open Pictures & Videos: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Pictures & Videos. The thumbnails of the files display. Viewing a photo 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, select a photo folder, if necessary. Note: Photos captured by the camera on the phone are stored in the PIC-00 folder. 2. Scroll to the thumbnail image of the picture you want and press the View soft key. While viewing a photo, you can use the following options:Multimedia 123 • To zoom in or out, press or . • To send the picture as part of an MMS or e-mail message, press the Send soft key. • To edit the picture, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. You can then access the editing tool options by pressing the Menu soft key. • To set the picture as wallpaper for the Home screen, press the Menu soft key and select Use as Home Screen. Viewing photos as a slide show You can view all of your pictures as a slide show, a sequential presentation of each image in the current album. Press the Menu soft key and select Play Slide Show. The slide show begins on the full screen. • To change the screen to the Landscape view or Portrait view, press the Up or Down key. • To manually scroll through the pictures, press the Left or Right key. • To stop the slide show and return to the Pictures & Videos screen, press . Playing a video 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, Press the Menu soft key and select Folders → My Device → My Documents → My Videos. 2. Select a video folder, if necessary. Multimedia 124 Note: Videos captured by the camera on the phone are stored in the Mov-00 folder. 3. Scroll to the thumbnail image of the video clip you want and press the Play soft key. Beaming a file You can send a picture or video clip to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. Open a folder, if necessary, and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam.... 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 4. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key. Switching to another folder You can open files in any folder in the other directory of your phone. 1. From Pictures & Videos screen, press the Menu soft key and select Folders. 2. Select a folder. If necessary, repeat this step to open a subfolder.Multimedia 125 Copying or moving files 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, open the folder you want and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit → Cut or Copy. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Folders → another folder. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit → Paste. Deleting a file 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, open the folder you want and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. Customising settings From the Pictures & Videos screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options to access the following options: • General: allows you to select a maximum size of pictures for sending via e-mail messages, or select a rotating orientation. • Slide Show: allows you to select an orientation of a slide show or set whether or not the slide show plays as a screen saver when the phone is connected to a computer and in Idle mode.8 126 Extra programs Games Your phone includes fun games, such as Solitaire in Games. You can also download and play new Java games. To open Games: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key twice, and select Games. Solitaire The object of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up the four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with aces. Playing a game 1. On the Start screen, select Solitaire. 2. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen and then make any other available plays. To move cards, press the number or character of the card to move and then press the number or character of the stack to which you want to move the card. Note: Pressing the Up key moves a card to one of the four stacks in the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. 3. When you have made all available plays, press the Draw soft key to turn over cards.Extra programs 127 Funbox Funbox is a folder where downloaded games are stored. To download new games, press the Download soft key. Your phone launches the WAP browser and loads the preset website which provides you with the latest news and information about games and game downloads. To play a game, select one from the FunBox screen. How to play may vary from game to game. Calculator The calculator allows you to perform general mathematical functions, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Calculator. 3. Enter the numbers and perform calculations by pressing the Navigation keys (Up: +, Down: –, Left: /, Right: x). 4. To execute the calculation, press .Extra programs 128 Smart Converter In Smart Converter, you can perform unit conversions. 1. On the Home Screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Smart Converter. 3. Select a converter type. 4. Select an original unit and enter the value to be converted in the upper Unit field. Note: Press to add a decimal point. In the temperature converter, press to change the temperature to below or above zero. 5. Select a target unit from the lower Unit field. The equivalent value appears. Notes: • To reverse the unit fields for continuous conversions, press the Menu soft key and select Reverse. • For the currency converter, you may need to change currency rates. Press the Menu soft key and Currency rates.Extra programs 129 StopWatch You can measure elapsed time interval. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then More soft key. Press StopWatch. 3. Press the Start soft key to start the timer. 4. Press the Record soft key to check an interval. You can do this step for a total of 99 intervals. 5. Press the Stop soft key to stop the stopwatch. Voice Assist Voice Assist is a speech recognition program that enables you to launch programs or dial contacts by speaking an associated command into the microphone. Voice tips • Speak clearly, naturally, and continuously. • If you are in a very noisy environment, use the headset. If you are not using the headset, address the internal microphone at the bottom of the phone at a distance of about 10 to 20 cm from your mouth. • Speak when Voice Assist is ready to listen, as indicated by the progress bar and after an audible beep. • If Voice Assist does not clearly hear what you said, try repeating your voice command.Extra programs 130 Using Voice Command functions On the Home screen, press the Start soft key on the Home screen and select More soft key and press Voice Assist. Dialling a number You can make a phone call by saying the name that has been assigned to a contact in Contacts or the SIM card. Note: To use the Name Dial feature, the name that you want to dial must be in Contacts or the SIM card. 1. On the Voice Command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say “Name Dial”. 2. On the Name Dial screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a name in the following manner:”” If Voice Assist does not hear anything until the progress bar moves to the end, you will be asked to repeat the command up to 3 times. Note: You can say “Call” and then a person’s name stored in Contacts or on the SIM card to make a call by voice command. 3. Your phone recognises your commnad and displays a list of one or more names in the confirmation screen. 4. Scroll to the item you want to open and press the Ok soft key.Extra programs 131 5. If the selected name has more than one number, the phone asks which number you want to dial. 6. If you press the Ok soft key or say nothing for 3 seconds, the phone dials the currently selected number. Searching for contacts You can retrieve contact information for any name in Contacts or the SIM card by saying that name. Your phone displays the information. 1. On the Voice command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say “Name Search”. 2. On the Name Search screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a name in the following manner:”” 3. Your phone recognises your command and displays a list of one or more names in the confirmation screen. Opening programs by voice You can use your voice to launch programs that exist in Start menu. 1. On the Voice Command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a program name in the following manner:”Open ”. 2. Your phone recognises your command and displays a list of one or more applications in the confirmation screen. Note: If Quick Launch is checked at Settings, this confirmation step will be skipped and the best recoginition result wil be excuted immediately.Extra programs 132 Customising the Voice Command settings You can customise the various settings for using Voice Assist by pressing the Settings soft key on the Voice Command screen. • Timeout: Adjust the maximum time to listen to your commands. • Voice Guides:Check for more comprehensive voice prompts and responses. • Quick Launch: Check to skip the confirmation. • Sensitivity: Ajust the sensitivity in which your phone distinguishes the current voice and noise. Change the setting if your phone has difficulty recognising your voice. Picsel Viewer Picsel Viewer allows you to view documents on your phone without any file-conversion or loss of content. To view a document, you must transfer documents from a PC. If you have installed the memory card, you can view the files stored in it. By default, Picsel Viewer supports most common desktop document formats, such as .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pdf and .wmf. Note: Some document formats, such as .xls and .ppt, are not transformed into their corresponding file types when you copy them to your phone by using ActiveSync, so that you cannot view the documents in the directory. To avoid this case, change the conversion setting on the ActiveSync screen on your computer.Extra programs 133 To open Picsel Viewer: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Picsel Viewer. Viewing a document On the Picsel Viewer screen, the file directory of the phone is displayed. 1. Select the folder containing the document you want. If you have installed a memory card, Storage Card appears to allow you to access files on the memory card. 2. Select the document you want to open. Adobe PDF: , Microsoft World: , Microsoft Power Point: , Microsoft Excel: , Plain Text: , JPEG/ BMP/GIF/PNG: Go back to the upper level directory.Extra programs 134 Using options in a document view From a document view, you can use the number keypad to quickly perform an option. These are the keys you can use and options assigned to each key. • Panning: To pan to a different part of the document, press the Navigation keys to move to the direction you want. You can also press , , , , respectively. • Zooming: To zoom in or out, press to switch to zoom mode and then press the Navigation keys. You can also press or . • Fitting to width: To fit the width of the page on screen, press the Menu soft key and select Page → Fit to width. You can also press . • Navigating: To navigate the pages, press the Menu soft key and select Page → Next Page, Previous Page, First page, or Last page. You can also press , , , or , respectively. Viewing History The history view shows you previously visited documents as a small thumbnail-image of the document, and the document’s name, location, and the date of your visiting. To open the history view, press the Menu soft key and select History. To access any of the documents from the history view, select the small picture of that page. Note: Documents will remain on the history list until a certain number of days have passed. You can control this period in the option. See page 135.Extra programs 135 Viewing the Favourites list For your favourite documents, you can keep a list in Favourites. This looks similar to the history view but includes only those pages you have explicitly added. Before viewing the Favourites list, first you must add the pages to the Favourites list. To add the current page to the Favourites list: 1. Press the Menu soft key and select Favourites to access the Favourites list. 2. Press the Add/Delete soft key and select Add. 3. Enter the name you want and then press the OK soft key. To open a favourite page: Access the Favourites list and select the thumbnail of the page you want. Changing Picsel Viewer settings On the Picsel Viewer screen, press the Menu soft key and select Settings. The following options are available: • Preferences: Set the period after which the thumbnail pictures and descriptions of pages are removed from the history memory. To clear the History list, select Clear History. • Files: Select the file types which can be displayed on the Picsel Viewer screen. Select All to select all file formats. • Help: Shows the Help screen for using Picsel Viewer. • About: Shows information about the developers of Picsel Viewer.Extra programs 136 File Manager The File Manager program allows you to open an explorer window similar to a desktop Windows based system. The explorer window allows you to navigate through your phone to locate the desired folders and files. You can also quickly manage, delete, copy, or edit any files and folders on your phone. Note: If you turn off the phone after storing some files in any folders, except for the Storage folder, using ActiveSync, all of the files in those folders will be deleted. Store important files in the Storage folder to prevent them from being deleted. Accessing files 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select File Manager. The list of the folders in the phone’s memory displays. 3. Scroll to the folder that you want to view. 4. Select an item to open it. Extra programs 137 Using file management options From the file directory, you can use the number keypad to quickly perform an option. The options can be accessed by pressing the Menu soft key. These are the keys you can use and options assigned to each key. • (Folder Tree): Returns to the folder tree screen • (Favorites): Opens the favorite file list. • (Properties): Shows the file properties. • (Scroll to Top): Moves to the top of the file list. • (Refresh): Updates the file directory. • (Scroll up): Scrolls up by one page. • (Scroll to End): Moves to the end of the file list. • (Search): Allows you to search for a file by entering a keyword. The phone will search for files under the currently accessed folder. • (Scroll down): Scrolls down by one page. • (Select): Selects a file or folder. • (Unselect All): Deselects all checked files. • (Select All): Selects all files in the current folder. In addition, you can access the following options: • To use editing tools, press the Edit soft key. • To create a new folder, press the Edit soft key and select New Folder. • To send a file, press the Menu soft key and select Send → a sending option. • To change the order of files or folders, press the Menu soft key and select View → a sort option.Extra programs 138 SIM Manager The SIM Manager program enables you to view the contact cards stored on the SIM card and to copy the contact(s) from the SIM card to the contact list on your phone. You can also create a new contact card on the SIM card, edit, and delete the contact card. Viewing SIM contacts 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → SIM Manager. The contact list is displayed on the SIM Manager screen. 3. From the SIM contact list: • To create a new entry, press the New soft key. • To register the phone number and name as the own number on the SIM card, press the Menu soft key and select Own Number. • To view the amount of the contacts, SMS messages, and CB messages stored on the SIM card, press the Menu soft key and select Memory Status. • To refresh the SIM contacts, press the Menu soft key and select Refresh.Extra programs 139 Copying contact cards to the Contacts application You can copy a contact or all contacts stored on the SIM card to the Contacts program. 1. On the SIM Manager screen, select the check box next to the contact name you want to copy to your phone. If you want to copy all contacts, press the Menu soft key and select Check → Check All #. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select SIM Tool → Copy to Contacts. 3. To change the number category, press the Menu soft key and select Change (M/H/W). 4. Press the Copy soft key. 5. Press the OK soft key. Using the SIM Manager options On the SIM Manager screen, press the Menu soft key and select SIM Tool. The following options are available. • View: shows the selected SIM entry. • Edit: allows you to edit the selected entry. • Delete Entries: allows you to delete the selected entry(ies). • Dial: dials the number in the selected entry.Extra programs 140 • Send SMS: sends the SMS message using the number in the selected entry. • Copy to Contacts: copies the selected entries to Contacts. • Beam: allows you to send the selected entry via an infrared connection. Using the SMS Tool options Sometimes, text messages may be stored on the SIM card, depending on their specifications. To view these messages, press the Menu soft key and select SMS Tool. You can view a list of the sender’s phone numbers of the received SMS messages stored on the SIM card. On the SIM SMS Tool screen, press the Menu soft key to move SIM messages from the SIM card to the phone’s memory and view or delete an SMS message. To jump across your selection between the SIM list and the PDA list, press the Change soft key. Task Manager Your phone is a multi-tasking device. It can run more than one program at the same time. However, multi-tasking may cause hang-ups, freezing, memory problems, and additional power consumption. To avoid these problems, end unnecessary programs using Task Manager. To open Task Manager: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories and then the More soft key. Press Task Manager. The list of all the programs currently running on your phone appears.Extra programs 141 Managing running programs • To activate a program, press the Menu soft key and select Activate. • To close a program, press the Stop soft key. To close all programs, press the Menu soft key and select Stop All. • To refresh the program list, press the Menu soft key and select Refresh. Checking the memory status You can check the memory in use for running programs or storing files and information. Press the Menu soft key and select Memory. Checking the storage memory You can check the memory in use for storing files in each storage device: Storage Card and Storage. On the Task Manager screen, press the Menu soft key and select Storage. To format the memory card, press the Menu soft key and select Format Storage Card.9 142 Getting connected You can use your phone to exchange information with other mobile devices as well as your desktop computer, a network, or the Internet. You have the following connection options: • Use the infrared (IR) port on your device to send and receive files between two devices. • Exchange information between devices with Bluetooth capabilities without a physical connection. • Connect the phone to your computer using a USB or IrDA connection to use the phone as a modem. • Connect to your Internet service provider (ISP) or the network at your company. Once connected, you can send or receive e-mail and instant messages, and browse the Internet or intranet. Beaming with infrared connections Your phone can send and receive files to and from other IR devices. In most cases, you can also receive files from your PC when it is equipped with an infrared port. The two devices must be aimed at each other approximately 10 centimetres apart.Getting connected 143 If you have difficulty getting the two devices to send or receive data, try the following: • Make sure that the infrared port windows are clear and free of any dirt or obstructions and that there are no obstacles between the infrared port windows. • Adjust the room lighting or move to another location. Some types of lighting may interfere with transmission. Note: Your phone’s IrDA function is only compatible with Microsoft Smart Phones and Windows 2000/XP computers. Activating or deactivating IrDA reception You must activate the infrared port to let your phone to detect incoming IR transmissions and receive data. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Beam. 3. Select Receive incoming beams. 4. Press the Done soft key. Receiving data 1. Make sure that your phone’s display is activate and align the infrared port on your phone with the one on another device. Note: The display on your phone must be active. 2. Have the other device send the data to your phone. 3. When prompted to receive an incoming data, press the Yes soft key.Getting connected 144 Sending data 1. Open the item you want in a program. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam, followed by the type of item, such as Contact or Appointment. If you send an item in File Manager, press the Menu soft key and select Send → via IR. 3. Align the infrared port on your phone with the one on the other device. The two devices starts an IrDA connection and the other device name appears on your phone. 4. Press the Beam soft key. Note: The display on your phone must be active. Beaming with Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology. Devices with Bluetooth capabilities can exchange data over a distance of about 10 metres without requiring a physical connection. Unlike infrared, you do not need to line up the phone with another device to beam information with Bluetooth. Activating Bluetooth mode 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key.Getting connected 145 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Bluetooth → Bluetooth. 3. On the Bluetooth screen, select the operating mode you want in the Bluetooth field. You can use the following operating mode: • On: The Bluetooth radio is turned on and you can use Bluetooth features. • Off: The Bluetooth radio is turned off. You can neither send nor receive data by using Bluetooth. • Discoverable: The Bluetooth radio is turned on, and all of the other Bluetooth devices within range (about 10 meters) can detect your device and attempt to beam data to your device, establish a bond, or use a Bluetooth service. 4. Press the Done soft key. Searching for and pairing with a Bluetooth device 1. On the Bluetooth screen, press the Menu soft key and select Devices. 2. To search for a new device, press the Menu soft key and select New. 3. Wait for the phone to search for Bluetooth devices. 4. Select the device you want. 5. Enter a Bluetooth passkey and press the Next soft key. This passkey is used just once and you do not need to memorise it. Getting connected 146 When the owner of the other device enters the same passkey, paring is finished. Note: Some devices, especially headsets or hands-free car kits, may have a fixed Bluetooth passkey, such as 0000. If the other device has one, you must enter the passkey. 6. Enter a display name for the other device and press the Next soft key. 7. Press the OK soft key. Using the device options When you press the Menu soft key from the device list, you can access the following options: • New: allows you to search for any devices. • Edit: allows you to change the name of the connectable device. • Delete: allows you to delete the device. • Set as Hands-free: allows you to use the connectable device as a hands-free kit. You can converse with the other person on the phone without holding the phone to your ear during a call. • Set as wireless Stereo: allows you to play the audio files.Getting connected 147 Receiving data with Bluetooth 1. When a notification that a remote device is trying to connect to your phone, press the Bluetooth passkey entered from the device and press the Next soft key. 2. When prompted to receive an incoming data, press the Yes soft key. Modem link Using Modem Link, you can set your phone to be used as an external modem for another device or computer when connected via the USB port or infrared port. 1. Make sure that your phone is not connected with another device. 2. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 3. Select Accessories → Modem Link. 4. If you first access this program, press the Done soft key. 5. Select the type of connection, baud rate, and access point name. 6. Press the Activate soft key to activate Modem Link. 7. Press the Done soft key. Note: • When Modem Link is activated, you cannot use ActiveSync. • When Windows Service Pack 2 is used, Internet access using Modem Link is more stable.Getting connected 148 Connecting to the Internet or your network You can use the Connections settings to create dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), GPRS, and proxy connections so that you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. By using a data connection, you can browse the Internet, download e-mails, chat by using MSN® Messenger, or synchronise remotely with an Exchange Server. Check with your service provider to see if a data connection has already been set up for you, and if over-the-air configuration is supported. Creating a dial-up connection You can create a dial-up connection to connect remotely to the Internet, a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) network, or your corporate network. Then, when you open a program that is configured to use this connection, the phone uses it to automatically connect to the network. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Dial up. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects to: Select a type of network for which the connection will be used. • Phone number: Enter the dial-up number you use to connect to the network. • User name: Enter your network user name.Getting connected 149 • Password: Enter your password. • Domain: Enter the domain name, if required. Notes: • If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your service provider. • If you subscribe to General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), you can set up a GPRS connection to access your corporate network or the Internet, which is faster than a dial-up connection. For details, see “Creating a GPRS connection.” 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a GPRS connection If you subscribe to General Packet Radio Services (GPRS), you can set up a GPRS connection to gain access to your corporate network or the Internet. This is faster than a dial-up connection. You can also use your phone as a GPRS modem for a desktop computer. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → GPRS. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects to: Select a network type for which the connection will be used.Getting connected 150 • Access point: Enter the information provided by your system administrator. • User name: Enter your user name for the GPRS network. • Password: Enter your password. • Primary DNS: Enter the primary domain naming system (DNS) address. • Secondary DNS: Enter the secondary DNS address. • IP address: Enter the Internet Protocol (IP) address. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your network administrator. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a proxy connection You can use a proxy connection to gain access to the Internet over an existing connection to your corporate network. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Proxy. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects from: Select the type of network from which you will connect. • Connects to: Select the type of network to which you will connect.Getting connected 151 • Proxy (name:port): Enter the proxy server name and port number in the form. • Type: Select a network type for which proxy connection will be used. • User name: Enter your user name for the network to which you will connect. • Password: Enter your password. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your service provider. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a VPN connection If your company has set up a virtual private network (VPN), you can create a VPN connection to gain access to your corporate network over an Internet connection. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → More... → VPN. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • VPN type: Select the type of VPN. • Server: Enter the VPN server name. • Connects from: Select the type of network from which you will connect to VPN (typically The Internet).Getting connected 152 • Connects to: Select the type of network to which you will connect (typically Work). • User name: Enter your user name for the VPN. • Password: Enter your password. • Domain: Enter the domain name, if required. • IPSec authentication: If you selected IPSec/L2TP for VPN type, select the type of authentication. • IPSec Pre-shared key: If you selected Pre-Shared Key for IPSec authentication, enter the shared key. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your network administrator. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Setting up data connections After creating connection profiles, you can assign a profile to each network type. 1. On the Connections screen, press the Menu soft key and select Advanced. 2. Select a connection profile in each network. 3. Press the Done soft key.Getting connected 153 Adding a URL exception Some URLs for Web pages on your company intranet may use periods, for example: intranet.companyname.com. To view these pages in Internet Explorer, you must create a URL exception. Note: You do not need to create URL exceptions for Internet URLs. 1. On the Connections screen, press the Menu soft key and select Advanced. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Work URL Exceptions. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the URL and press the Done soft key. Separate multiple URLs with a semicolon. Changing the data connection options On the Advanced screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options to access the following options: • Redial attempts: Select the redial attempt to connect the Internet or your network after an unsuccessful connection. • Idle disconnect after: Select the length of time your phone waits for connecting to the Internet or your network after the specified period, your phone will disconnect from the Internet or your network. • My desktop connects to: Select the type of network to which your desktop computer will connect.10 154 Troubleshooting General problems Problem Description & Solution “Invalid or missing SIM card. You can still make emergency calls if your service provider supports it” displays Check that the SIM card has been correctly installed. “No network coverage,” “Error unable to connect. No network coverage.” or “Message sending failed” displays • The network connection has been lost. You may be in a weak signal area (in a tunnel or surrounded by buildings). Move and try again. • You are trying to access an option for which you have not taken out a subscription with your service provider. Contact the service provider for further details. The bars next to disappear • If you have just turned on your phone, wait about 2 minutes, until your phone finds the network and receives a signal from the network. • If you are in a tunnel or in an elevator, the phone may not be able to receive the network signal properly. Move to an open place. • This may appear when you move between different service areas. It is normal. The display is not clear In direct sunlight, you may not see the display clearly. Moving to a place with different lighting should solve this problem.Troubleshooting 155 White lines appear on the display This may happen if you turn on the phone after a long period of disuse, or after removing the battery without turning off the phone. This is not related to the phone’s life or performance. The display should correct itself shortly. “PIN code” appears • You are using your phone for the first time. You must enter the Personal Identification Number (PIN) supplied with the SIM card. • The PIN check feature has been enabled. Each time the phone is switched on, the PIN has to be entered. To disable this feature, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → Security → Disable SIM PIN, and enter the PIN. “PUK Required” appears The PIN code was entered incorrectly three times in succession and the SIM card is now blocked. Enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. I forgot the lock, PIN, initialisation, or PUK codes If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet Service Provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 156 Call problems Problem Description & Solution I have entered a number but it was not dialled • Be sure that you have pressed • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the network is unobstructed. • You may have set an outgoing call barring option. My correspondent cannot reach me • Be sure that your phone is switched on ( pressed for more than one second) • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the network is unobstructed. • You may have set an incoming call barring option. My correspondent cannot hear me speaking • Be sure that you have switched on the microphone • Make sure that the phone is close enough to your mouth The microphone is located at the bottom of the phone. The audio quality of the call is poor • Adjust the voice volume by pressing . • Check the signal strength indicator on the display ( ); the number of bars indicates the signal strength, from strong to weak. • Try moving the phone slightly or moving closer to a window if you are in a building.Troubleshooting 157 Power and charging problems Calls to and from the phone are not connected properly, and are easily disconnected • Signals from the network are weak. Move to another area. • Touching the antenna area on the top of the phone may lower the call quality. Be careful not to touch the antenna area while using the phone. Problem Description & Solution While charging, the LED on the travel charger blinks • Disconnect the phone from the travel charger, remove the battery, and then replace it. Try charging again. • If the problem persists, clean the metal contacts on the battery and the phone. • If the actions above do not clear the problem, contact a Samsung service representative. The phone malfunctions or does not function Remove the battery and then replace it. Turn on the phone. Or press the hole on the bottom of the phone to perform a soft reset. If the problem persists, contact a Samsung service representative. The LED on the travel charger turns to yellow The travel charger is overheated. Disconnect the charger from the phone or unplug it from the power outlet. Wait until the charger cools down and then recharge the phone. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 158 The battery’s standby time is shorter than expected • Batteries are subject to wear and tear. Standby time may grow shorter as time passes. • Leaving the fully charged battery in a cold or hot place for a long period of time may reduce battery life. • Standby time depends on where you use the phone. The actual time may differ from the battery’s specifications. Is it OK if I leave the phone connected to the power outlet after it is fully charged (indicated by the green LED on the charger is on) We recommend that you disconnect the phone from the charger or unplug the charger from the power outlet. The phone becomes hot This may happen when you are on the phone or when you use programs, such as games, the Internet, or the camera, because the phone needs more power at those times. This does not affect the phone’s life and performance. The battery level seem sufficient, but the phone does not turn on • Remove the battery from the phone and reinstall it. Then turn on the phone. • Clean the metal contacts both on the battery and on the phone. Reinstall the battery and turn on the phone. The phone turns off when the charger is connected Some dust on the contacts may cause unexpected power-off or charging problems. Clean the metal contacts both on the battery and on the phone. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 159 Application problems Problem Description & Solution “Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first.” or “Memory low. Delete some data.” displays To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories and then the More soft key , and press Task Manager. Press the Menu soft key and select Memory. Delete old items from programs. If necessary, make a backup copy of your data using ActiveSync or the memory card. Browser “Unable to connect. Verify your Dial-up or proxy settings are correct, and try again.” displays Insert proper browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. The phone is unable to connect to the Internet • Check if you have set up and are connected to an Internet service provider. • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the GPRS network is not obstructed. • Verify with your service provider that your user name and password are correct. • Verify with your Internet service provider that the network you are trying to connect is available, or try to connect it from another PC.Troubleshooting 160 Camera Images seem smudged Check that the camera lens protection window is clean. Contacts No number is dialled when you recall a contact card • Check that a number has been stored in the contact card. • Re-store the number, if necessary. Infrared Data does not transfer via an infrared connection • Line up the infrared ports of two devices so that they are unobstructed and within close range. • Make sure that nothing is between the two infrared ports. • Adjust the room lighting. Some types of light interfere with infrared connections. Try moving to a different location or turning off some lights. Bluetooth I cannot end a Bluetooth connection If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth. Go to Bluetooth and select Bluetooth → Off. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 161 I cannot find my friend’s Bluetoothenabled device • Check that both have activated Bluetooth. • Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres or that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. • Check that the other device is not in Hidden mode. • Check that both devices are compatible. I cannot discover the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • Check if the Bluetooth functionality on the phone is turned on. • Check if the remote Bluetooth stereo headset is in the discoverable mode. • Check if the remote Bluetooth device has the capability to act as a stereo headset. I cannot connect to the remote Bluetooth stereo headset Ensure that the correct passkey was entered on the phone during the connection with the headset. Most Bluetooth headsets have a fixed passkey that would be mentioned in their user’s guide. You would need to enter the passkey when establishing a connection with the headset. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 162 I cannot listen to music on the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • Ensure that you are connected to the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Ensure that the song that you are playing is one of the supported formats. • Check the battery levels on the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Ensure that the phone and headset are within range of each other. The maximum distance between the two should not be more than 10 metres. There are breaks in the music being played on the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • You may observe breaks if there are walls that separate the phone and the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Be sure that the Bluetooth functionality on the phone is turned on and you have set the phone to be detected by other devices. Call history The call history appears empty You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press the Start soft key and select Call History. Press the Menu soft key and select Filter → No Filter. Messaging I cannot select a contact card when creating a message If the contact card does not have a phone number or e-mail address, you cannot select it. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 163 If the above guidelines do not help you to solve the problem, take note of: • the model and serial numbers of your phone • your warranty details • a clear description of the problem Then contact your local dealer or Samsung after-sales service. PC connectivity Problems occur when connecting the phone to a PC Make sure that ActiveSync is installed and running on your PC. See the user’s guide for ActiveSync on the CD-ROM. For further information on how to use ActiveSync, see the help function on ActiveSync or visit www.microsoft.com. Problem Description & Solution11 164 Regulatory notices SAR certification information This phone meets European Union (EU) requirements concerning exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured so as not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio-frequency (RF) energy, as recommended by the EU Council. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through the periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as SAR (Specific Absorption Rate). The SAR limit recommended by the EU Council is 2.0W/Kg. * The highest SAR value for this model phone was 0.774 w/ Kg. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/ kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. The SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band.Regulatory notices 165 SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the phone. Before a new model phone is made available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE Directive must be shown. This directive includes as one of its essential requirements the protection of the health and safety of the user and any other person. European union notice Products with CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC), the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in brackets are the equivalent international standards): • EN 60950 (IEC 60950) - Safety of Information Technology Equipment • ETS 300 342-1 (June 1997) - Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) for European digital cellular telecommunications system (GSM 900MHz, GSM 1800MHz, and GSM 1900MHz); Part 1: Mobile and portable radio and ancillary equipmentRegulatory notices 166 • GSM11.10 • ANSI/IEEE C.95.1-1992- specific absorption rate in mobile phone emission condition for body health • FCC part 15 and part24 • prENV50166-2, 1995 for SAR • SAR: 0.774mW/10g Important safety information Retain and follow all product safety and operating instructions. Observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions. To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire, and/ or damage to the equipment, observe the following precautions: General precautions Heed service markings: Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating or Service documentation, do not service any product yourself. Service needed on components inside these compartments should be done by an authorised service technician or provider. Damage requiring service: Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and refer servicing to an authorised service technician or provider under the following conditions: • Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen into the product. • The product has been exposed to rain or water.Regulatory notices 167 • The product has been dropped or damaged. • There are noticeable signs of overheating. • The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Avoid hot areas: The product should be placed away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Avoid wet areas: Never use the product in a wet location. Avoid pushing objects into product: Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings in the product. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation. These openings must not be blocked or covered. Mounting Accessories: Do not use the product on an unstable table, cart, stand, tripod, or bracket. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid unstable mounting: Do not place the product with an unstable base. Use product with approved equipment: This product should be used only with personal computers and options identified as suitable for use with your equipment. Adjust the volume: Turn down the volume before using headphones or other audio devices. Cleaning: Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but NEVER use water to clean an LCD screen.Regulatory notices 168 Safety precautions for power supply unit Use the correct external power source: A product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of power source required, consult your authorised service provider or local power company. For a product that operates from battery power or other sources, refer to the operating instructions that are included with the product. Handle battery packs carefully: This product contains a Lithium Polymer battery. There is a risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is handled improperly. Do not attempt to open or service the battery pack. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts or circuits, dispose of in fire or water, or expose a battery pack to temperatures of higher than 60°C (140°F). Note: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with specified batteries. Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations or reference guide supplied with your product.Regulatory notices 169 Care and maintenance Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years. • Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children and pets. They may inadvertently damage these things or choke on small parts. • Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and liquids contain minerals that corrode electronic circuits. • Do not use the phone with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the phone. • Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas, as its moving parts may be damaged. • Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. • Do not store the phone in cold areas. When the phone warms up to its normal operating temperature, moisture can form inside the phone, which may damage the phone’s electronic circuit boards. • Do not drop, knock or shake the phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. • Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the phone. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.Regulatory notices 170 • Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the device’s moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Do not put the phone in or on heating devices, such as a microwave oven, a stove or a radiator. The phone may explode when overheated. • When the phone or battery gets wet, the label indicating water damage inside the phone changes colour. In this case, phone repairs are no longer guaranteed by the manufacturer's warranty, even if the warranty for your phone has not expired. • If your phone has a flash or light, do not use it too close to the eyes of people or animals. This may cause damage to their eyes. • Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas or modified accessories may damage the phone and violate regulations governing radio devices. • If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.Regulatory notices 171 Microsoft End User License Agreement • You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”), for use in connection with wireless network services provided under separate agreement between you and a wireless telecommunications provider (“Mobile Operator”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • SOFTWARE includes software already installed on the DEVICE (“DEVICE Software”) and MS software contained on the CD-ROM disk (“Companion CD”).Regulatory notices 172 GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license: DEVICE Software. You may use the DEVICE Software as installed on the DEVICE. All or certain portions of the DEVICE Software may be inoperable if you do not have and maintain a service account with an appropriate Mobile Operator, or if the Mobile Operator's network facilities are not operating or configured to operate with the DEVICE software. COMPANION CD. Additional software for your personal computer is included with your DEVICE, and you may install and use the Microsoft® ActiveSync® component on one (1) or more computers to exchange information with one (1) or more computing devices that contain a compatible version of the Microsoft® phone 2003 Software. For other software component(s) contained in the Companion CD, you may install and use such components only in accordance with the terms of the printed or online end user license agreement(s) provided with such component(s). In the absence of an end user license agreement for particular component(s) of the Companion CD, you may install and use only one (1) copy of such component(s) on the DEVICE or a single computer with which you use the DEVICE. Microsoft® Outlook® 2002. If Microsoft Outlook 2002 is included with your Device, the following terms apply to your use of Microsoft Outlook 2002: (i) regardless of the information contained in “Software Installation and Use” section of the online EULA you may install one (1) copy of Microsoft Outlook 2002 on one (1) computer to use, exchange data, share data, access and interact with the DEVICE, and (ii) the EULA for Microsoft Outlook 2002 is between the Company and the end user - not between the PC manufacturer and end user.Regulatory notices 173 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS • Speech/Handwriting Recognition. If the SOFTWARE includes speech and/or handwriting recognition component(s), you should understand that speech and handwriting recognition are inherently statistical processes; that recognition errors are inherent in the processes; and that errors can occur in the component's recognition of your handwriting, and the final conversion into text. Neither Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech and handwriting recognition processes. • Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. • Single DEVICE. The DEVICE Software is licensed with the DEVICE as a single integrated product. The DEVICE Software installed in read only memory (“ROM”) of the DEVICE may only be used as part of the DEVICE. • Single EULA. The package for the DEVICE may contain multiple versions of this EULA, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple versions of the EULA, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the DEVICE Software. Regulatory notices 174 • NOTICE REGARDING THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD. The SOFTWARE may include MPEG-4 visual decoding technology. MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires the following notice: USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C. If you have questions regarding this Notice, please contact MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 Steele Street, Suite 300, Denver, Colorado 80206; Telephone 303 331.1880; FAX 303 331.1879 • Rental. You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE. • Software Transfer. You may not permanently transfer any of your rights under this EULA with regard to the DEVICE Software or Companion CD, except as permitted by the applicable Mobile Operator. In the event that the Mobile Operator permits such transfer, you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.Regulatory notices 175 • Termination. Without prejudice to any other rights, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts. • Security Updates. The SOFTWARE may include digital rights management technology. If SOFTWARE does contain digital rights management technology, content providers are using the digital rights management technology (“Microsoft DRM”) contained in the SOFTWARE to protect the integrity of their content (“Secure Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. Owners of such Secure Content (“Secure Content Owners”) may, from time to time, request MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries to provide security related updates to the Microsoft DRM components of the SOFTWARE (“Security Updates”) that may affect your ability to copy, display and/or play Secure Content through Microsoft software or third party applications that utilize Microsoft DRM. You therefore agree that, if you elect to download a license from the Internet which enables your use of Secure Content, MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries may, in conjunction with such license, also download onto your DEVICE such Security Updates that a Secure Content Owner has requested that MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries distribute. MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries will not retrieve any personally identifiable information, or any other information, from your DEVICE by downloading such Security Updates. Regulatory notices 176 • Consent to Use of Data. You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. • Internet Gaming/Update Features. If the SOFTWARE provides, and you choose to utilize, the Internet gaming or update features within the SOFTWARE, it is necessary to use certain computer system, hardware, and software information to implement the features. By using these features, you explicitly authorize MS, Microsoft Corporation and/or their designated agent to use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS or Microsoft Corporation may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. • Internet-Based Services Components. The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your Device.Regulatory notices 177 • Links to Third Party Sites. The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates. Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates. • Additional Software/Services. The SOFTWARE may permit Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, addon components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”). • If Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. provides or makes available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. • If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s). Regulatory notices 178 • Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA • DEVICE Software. If the DEVICE Software is provided by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only”, you may install one copy of such DEVICE Software onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing DEVICE Software and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade DEVICE Software. • COMPANION CD. If any Companion CD component(s) is provided by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. separate from the DEVICE on CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only”, you may (i) install and use one copy of such component(s) on the computer(s) you use to exchange data with the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing Companion CD component(s). Regulatory notices 179 COPYRIGHT All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and “applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS or its suppliers (including Microsoft Corporation). You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS and its suppliers (including Microsoft Corporation). EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information, see http://www.microsoft.com/ exporting/.Regulatory notices 180 PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation, Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. support number provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. FOR APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTIES AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS PERTAINING TO YOUR PARTICULAR JURISDICTION, PLEASE REFER TO YOUR WARRANTY BOOKLET INCLUDED WITH THIS PACKAGE OR PROVIDED WITH THE SOFTWARE PRINTED MATERIALS.Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE) For the following product: GSM900/GSM1800/GSM1900 with Bluetooth Portable Cellular Telephone (Product description) SGH-i320 (Model name) Manufactured at: - Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd, 94-1 Imsoo-Dong, Gumi City, Kyung Buk, Korea 730-350* (factory name, address) to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents. Safety : EN 60950-1:2001 EMC : EN 301 489-01 v1.4.1 (08-2002) EN 301 489-07 v1.2.1 (08-2002) SAR : EN 50360:2001 EN 50361:2001 Network : EN 301 511 v9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 v1.6.1 (11-2004) We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC. The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/ EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body(ies): BABT, Balfour House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK Identification mark: 168 The technical documentation kept at: Samsung Electronics QA Lab. which will be made available upon request. (Representative in the EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK 2006. 04. 28 Yong-Sang Park / S. Manager (place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person) * It is not the address of the Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your phone.World wide Web http://www.samsungmobile.com English. 02/2006. Rev. 1.0 * Depending on the software installed or your service provider or country, some of the descriptions in this guide may not match your phone exactly. Smartphone SGH-i320 User’s GuideTable of Contents 2 Table of Contents Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CHAPTER 1 Getting started What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Getting to know your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Installing the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Charging your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Turning your phone on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CHAPTER 2 The basics Using the Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Start menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Customising your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Locking the keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Program Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using an optional memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adding and removing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Managing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Resetting your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 SIM AT (SIM Application Toolkit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 CHAPTER 3 Synchronisation Installing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Customising connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting your phone to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Synchronising information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Customising synchronisation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Table of Contents 3 CHAPTER 4 Call functions Turning the phone functions on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Using the Dialling screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Advanced calling features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Answering or ignoring a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Options during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Call-related features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Customising your phone functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 CHAPTER 5 Messaging, Internet, and Messenger Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 WAP Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CHAPTER 6 Organiser Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 D-Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Voice Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 WorldClock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 CHAPTER 7 Multimedia Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Picture & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Table of Contents 4 CHAPTER 8 Extra programs Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Smart Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 StopWatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Voice Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Picsel Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 SIM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 CHAPTER 9 Getting connected Beaming with infrared connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Beaming with Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Modem link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Connecting to the Internet or your network . . . . . . . . . 148 CHAPTER 10 Troubleshooting General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Call problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Power and charging problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CHAPTER 11 Regulatory notices SAR certification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 European union notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Safety precautions for power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Microsoft End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 Important safety precautions Read these guidelines before using your wireless phone. Failure to comply with them may be dangerous or illegal. Drive safely at all times Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. Park the vehicle first. Switch off the phone when refuelling Do not use the phone at a refuelling point (service station) or near fuels or chemicals. Switch off in an aircraft Wireless phones can cause interference. Using them in an aircraft is both illegal and dangerous. Switch off the phone near all medical equipment Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external radio frequency energy. Follow any regulations or rules in force. Interference All wireless phones may be subject to interference, which could affect their performance. Be aware of special regulations Meet any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. Water resistance Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. Sensible use Use only in the normal position (held to the ear). Avoid unnecessary contact with the antenna when the phone is switched on.6 Emergency calls Key in the emergency number for your present location, then press . Keep your phone away from small children Keep the phone and all its parts, including accessories, out of the reach of small children. Accessories and batteries Use only Samsung-approved accessories and batteries. Use of any unauthorised accessories could damage your phone and may be dangerous. CAUTION: • The phone could explode if the battery is replaced with an incorrect type. • Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Qualified service Only qualified service personnel may install or repair your phone. Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty. For more detailed safety information, see “Important safety information” on page 166. Note: Depending on your country, your phone and accessories may appear different from the illustrations in this guide. At very high volume, prolonged listening to a headset can damage your hearing.1 7 Getting started Congratulations on the purchase of your new Smartphone! This chapter helps you set up your phone, charge the phone’s batteries, and familiarise yourself with the different components of your phone. What’s in the box? Your package contains the following items: In addition, you can obtain the following accessories for your phone from your local Samsung dealer: Note: The items supplied with your phone and the accessories available at your Samsung dealer may vary, depending on your country or service provider. Phone PC data cable Batteries Travel charger CD-ROMs * * One contains Microsoft ActiveSync software, Add-on software and programs, and the other contains User’s Guide in PDF format. Quick reference guide • Car charger/adapter • Battery holder • Standard battery • Bluetooth hands-free car kit • Travel charger • Straight headset • PC data cable • Bluetooth USB dongle kit • Bluetooth mono & stereo headsetGetting started 8 Getting to know your phone Front view Volume keys Send key Left soft key Infrared port Home key OK key Microphone Navigation (Up/Down/ Left/Right) keys Earpiece Right soft key End/Power on or off key Display Back/Clear key Alphanumeric keys/ Special function keysGetting started 9 Rear view Keys of your phone Battery cover Camera lens Charger/PC data cable jack Quick List/ Key Lock key Camera key Camera flash Headset jack External speaker Key Description • Press to open the Quick List screen. • Press and hold to lock the keys. • Press to open the Voice Notes program. • Press and hold to turn on the camera.Getting started 10 • Press to adjust the earpiece and speaker volume. • Press to mute the call ringer as a call comes in. Press and hold to reject the call. Press to perform the command shown on the screen immediately above the key. Press to switch to the Home screen from a program. • Press to return to the previous screen. • Press to delete characters in a text input field. • Press to scroll through a list. • Press to move the cursor in a text input field. • Press to confirm your selection or input. • Press to open the Dialling screen. • Press to make or answer a call. • Press and hold to turn the phone on or off. • Press to end a call. ~ Press to enter numbers and characters. Press to switch between characters on the upper half of the keys and characters on the lower half in a text input filed. Press to change case in a text input field. Press to change the text input mode. Key DescriptionGetting started 11 Installing the SIM card When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, any optional services available, and many other details. • Keep all miniature SIM cards out of the reach of small children. • The SIM card and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling the card. • When installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off before you remove the battery. Press and hold to activate or deactivate the Silent profile from the Home screen. Press to delete characters. • Press to confirm your selection or input. • Press to start a new line in a text input field. Press to open the Messaging program. Press to enter a comma in a text input field. Key DescriptionGetting started 12 Inserting the SIM card 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Insert and slide the SIM card under the two tabs, as shown, ensuring that the gold coloured contacts of the card are face down into the phone. Continue to install the battery. See the next page. Removing the SIM card To remove the SIM card, slide the card out of the holder, as shown.Getting started 13 Installing the battery Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Installing the battery 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment, with the gold-culoured contact toward the top of the phone. 3. Close the battery cover.Getting started 14 Removing the battery 1. If necessary, switch off the phone by pressing and holding until the power-off image displays. 2. Remove the battery cover. 3. Lift the battery away from the phone. Charging your phone 1. Plug the connector of the travel charger into the jack on the right side of the phone. 2. Plug the travel charger into a standard AC wall outlet. The LED on the charger will indicate the charging progress by the following colours: • Red: the phone is being charged. • Green: the phone is fully charged. • Orange: the travel charger is not plugged in correctly. Check the phone and the charger. 3. When charging is finished, unplug the travel charger from the power outlet. Getting started 15 4. Remove the travel charger from the phone by pressing the buttons on both sides of the connector and pulling the connector out. Note: Do not remove batteries while charging. It may cause malfunctions and may damage the device. Low battery warning Your phone displays the Battery Very Low icon ( ) and a warning message when the battery gets very low. If this happens, charge the battery. Turning your phone on or off Press and hold to turn on your phone. The phone is logged into your home network and receives the signal from the network. You can now make or answer a call and use programs on the phone. To turn off the phone, press and hold .2 16 The basics This chapter explains basic information about using your phone, such as customising your phone and using online help. Using the Home screen When you turn on your phone, the Home screen, the phone’s idle screen, appears. You can also access this screen by pressing from any program. On the Home screen, you can view important information for the day or messages at a glance. You can also quickly switch to the programs you recently accessed. Press the left soft key to open the Start menu and switch to a program. Press the right soft key to open Contacts. Status icons indicates your phone’s current status. See the next page. Quick Launcher: Select to view appointments or messages, or change the profile settings.The basics 17 Status bar On the top line of the screen, the Status bar displays icons to show your phone’s current status. Followings are some of the status icons you may see: Icon Description Shows the strength of the signal. You can also view the following service status: • : You are out of a service area. • : The phone functions are turned off. Appears when a call is in progress. Appears when a data call is in progress. Appears when the current call is on hold. Appears when a GPRS connection is available in the network. When a GPRS connection is active, appears. Appears when you are roaming out of your home service area and logged onto a different GPRS network. Shows the level of your battery power. The more bars you see, the more power you have remaining. When the battery level is very low, appears. Appears when the ring type has been set to Silent in the current profile. For details, see page 25.The basics 18 Appears when the ring type has been set to Vibrate in the current profile or the ring tone in Sounds has been set to Vibrate. Also, appears when the Silent profile is activated. For details, see page 25. Indicates that you can make calls using phone line 1 or 2 only (network service). Appears when you’re roaming outside of your home area and logged onto a different network. Appears when Bluetooth is activated. For details, see page 144. Appears when a text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) message has been received. Appears that an instant message has been received. Appears when a new voicemail has been received. • : A new voicemail from line 1. • : A new voicemail from line 2. • : A new voicemail from both lines. Appears when there is a call you have missed. Appears when you have set incoming calls to be diverted to another destination. Icon DescriptionThe basics 19 Accessing information from the Home screen From the Home screen, you can: • view upcoming appointments • change the profile option • view unread text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages To change information on each item: 1. On the Home screen, scroll to the item you want to change by pressing the Navigation keys and press . 2. Access appointments or messages, or change the profile setting. For more information on changing these items, see the appropriate instructions for each task in this guide. 3. Press or to return to the Home screen.The basics 20 Customising the Home screen You can customise the Home screen according to your preferences. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Display → Home Screen. 3. Press the Up or Down key to scroll to an option and then Left or Right key to change the setting. The following options are available: • Home screen layout: Select the layout to be used for the Home screen. • Colour scheme: Select the colour scheme to be used for the Home screen. • Background image: Select an image to use as a background image on the Home screen. • Time out: Specify the length of time the phone waits before returning the display to the Home screen if the phone is not used. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Start menu screen On the Start menu, you can access all of the programs for your phone. From the Home screen, press the Start soft key to open the Start menu screen. You can change the start menu type. Press the Start soft key, and select Settings → Display → Start Menu Style. Then select Grid or List .The basics 21 Opening programs or folders Scroll to a progarm or a folder by pressing the Navigation keys and press to open it. You can also press the number key assigned to the program you want. Switching between programs Your phone is a multi-tasking product. You can run multiple programs at the same time and switch from one program to another. From any application, press or to swich to the Home screen. Then access another one from the Quick Launcher or Start menu. Note: When you use a GPRS connection, pressing terminates the connection. If you want the current connection to continue, press , or as many times as necessary, to switch to the Home screen. Closing programs Using Task Manager, you can end the programs which are currently open. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then More soft key, press the Task Manager. 3. Scroll to a program, press the Stop soft key. To close all of the running programs, Press the Menu soft key and select Stop All.The basics 22 Entering text Your phone is equipped with a QWERTY keypad to support easy and quick text input. You can enter text as you would when using a computer’s keyboard. The keys are labelled with alphabet on the lower half and numbers and symbols on the upper half. Press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter. To switch between the upper characters and lower characters, press . You can move the cursor by pressing the Navigation keys. To delete a character, press . In addition, you can use the following function keys: • : deletes characters. • : starts a new line. • : changes case or switches to Capital Lock mode. • : changes the text input mode. You can switch between ABC mode and T9 mode in which displays the word choices for your key presses. 123 mode and Symbol mode are also available for entering numbers and symbols. • : switches to 123 mode.The basics 23 Customising your phone You can customise the phone settings to suit the way you work. Regional settings Using Regional Settings, you can change number, currency, and time and date formats appropriate to the countries in question. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Regional Settings. 3. Select the option you want in each field. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. 5. If you changed the Language or Locale option, press the OK soft key. Then you need to turn the phone off and then back on to make your changes take effect. Time and date settings The Date and Time setting enables you to set the date, time, and time zone. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Clock & Alarm → Date and Time. Note: By using Alarm on the Clock & Alarm screen, you can set alarms to ring at a specified time. The basics 24 3. Set your time zone and the current date and time. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Note: You can change the time and date format to be displayed in Regional Settings. Power settings You can conserve battery power by adjusting the time-out settings for the display and the backlight of the keypad and display or adjusting the display brightness. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Power Management. 3. Select the power settings: • Main battery: You can check the remaining battery power. • Backlight time out: You can select the length of time the backlight stays on. A backlight illuminates the display and the keypad. When you press any key, the backlight turns on and remains on for the backlight time out period. • Display time out: You can select the length of time the display stays on. During standby, the phone goes to Sleep mode after a specified period of time, so very little power is being consumed. • Display Brightness: You can adjust the brightness for the display. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 25 Accessibility settings You can configure the options to increase the accessibility to your phone’s functions. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Accessibility. 3. Select the options you want. • System font size: You can set the size of the font on your screen. • Confirmation time out: You can set the delay before an unconfirmed action times out. • In-call alert volume: You can set the volume of the alert tone that sounds when you are on a call. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Sound settings You can customise sound settings for various events happening on the phone. Setting sounds and notifications Your phone reminds you in various ways when you have something to do, receive a message, or press the keys on the phone. For example, if you have set up an appointment, you are notified in any of the following ways: • A sound, which you can specify, plays, • The LED indicator flashes, or • Your phone vibrates. You can change phone sounds by choosing types or sounds for each event.The basics 26 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Sounds. 3. Select the event for which to specify a sound. 4. Select the reminder type or ringtone. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Notes: • You can connect to the Internet and then download ringtones that are in a .wav or .mid format. • To use an .mp3 or .wma file as your call ringtone, it must be saved in a folder in Storage, Storage Card or My Documents. Changing the sound profile Using Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events or environments and then apply the settings as a group. The currently selected profile displays on the Home screen. To change profiles: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Profiles. The list of profiles opens. 3. Select the profile you want. If you select Automatic, the profile will automatically switch between Normal and Meeting according to your calendar items. Notes: • You can quickly change the profile. Press and select the profile you want from the Quick List. • You can quickly activate or deactivate the Silent profile by pressing and holding from the Home screen.The basics 27 To customise profiles: 1. On the Profiles screen, scroll to the profile you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit. 3. Change the settings in each field. Available options may differ depending on the selected profile. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Notes: • To change all profile settings to their factory default, press the Menu soft key from the profile list and select Reset to default. • For the Headset profile, when you set the ring type to Silent or Vibrate, you must manually answer calls even if the Auto-answer in option is activated. Owner information Owner Information identifies the owner or user of the phone. Set your contact information in case you have lost the phone. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Owner Information. 3. Fill in each input field. To attach notes, enter notes in the Notes field. 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 28 USB function setting You can select how the phone functions when connected to a computer via the USB port. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → USB. 3. Select one of the following functions for USB connections: • ActiveSync: Select this option if you want the phone to communicate with ActiveSync. • Mass Storage: The phone is perceived as an external memory device. 4. Press the Done soft key. Error reporting setting Your phone has the Error Reporting function which informs you of errors in a program that can give a crash to the phone system. You can enable or disable this function. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → More... → Error Reporting. 3. Select Enable or Disable and press the Done soft key.The basics 29 Security settings With options in Security, you can protect your phone and SIM card from unauthorised use. Locking the phone You can protect your phone using the Device Lock feature. Once the feature is enabled, your phone is automatically locked after the specified period of inactivity. Note: Even if the phone is locked, you will be able to receive calls. To lock the phone: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Device Lock. 3. Select Prompt if device unused for and select a length of time the phone waits for before locking itself when it is not in use. 4. Scroll to the Password type field and select a password type. • Simple PIN: Use the PIN code supplied with the SIM card. • Strong alphanumeric: Use an alphanumeric password. A password must be more than 7 characters and contain at least 3 of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, or punctuation marks. 5. Enter a password in the Password field. 6. Re-enter the same password in the Confirm password field for confirmation. The basics 30 7. Press the Done soft key. 8. Press the Yes soft key. Note: You can also manually lock the phone by pressing and selecting Device lock from the Quick List. To unlock your phone: 1. On the Home screen, press the Unlock soft key. 2. Enter the password and press the Done soft key. Activating the SIM PIN When SIM PIN is enabled, you must enter your PIN supplied with your phone each time you turn the phone on or insert the current SIM card into another device. Consequently, any person who does not have your PIN cannot use your phone without your approval. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Enable SIM PIN. 3. Enter the PIN and press the Done soft key. Locking the SIM card When SIM Lock is enabled, your phone works only with the current SIM card. To use another SIM card, you must enter the SIM Lock password. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Enable SIM Lock.The basics 31 3. Enter a password for your SIM card, and re-enter the password for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key. Changing PIN2 A PIN 2 is used for certain functions supported by the SIM card. You can change the PIN2 supplied with your SIM card to a new one. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Change PIN2. 3. Enter the current PIN2, then a new PIN2, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key. Changing the call barring Password You can change the default call barring password supplied by your service provider. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Call Barring Password. 3. Enter the current password, then a new password, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key.The basics 32 Menu shortcut settings The number keys can be used as shortcut keys to directly access specific programs that exist in the Start menu. Note: You can also assign phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web pages in Contacts to the number keys as speed dial entries. For details about setting the speed dial list, see page 57. Assigning a shortcut to a key 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Scroll to the program you want to assign to a key. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add Speed Dial. 4. If necessary, enter the name you want in the Name field. 5. Select a location in the Keypad assignment field and press the Done soft key. Note: Up to 99 locations are available. Locations 0 and 1 are reserved for the international call prefix “+” and the voicemail centre number, respectively. Accessing a menu using its shortcut On the Home screen, use one of the following ways: • For one-digit shourtcut keys, press and hold the number key. • For two-digit shortcut keys, press the first number key and then press and hold the last number key.The basics 33 Note: To ensure that operations, such as moving or saving files, proceed to completion, wait at least 50 seconds before removing the battery. Locking the keys You can lock the keys on the phone to keep any accidental key presses from causing a program’s launch or phone switch on or off. To lock the keypad, press and hold , or press and select Key lock on the Quick List. To unlock the keypad, press the Unlock soft key, and then press . Using the Program Launcher Using the Program Launcher, you can view the programs in the Start menu categorised by type, and quickly access the program you want. To open the Launcher: Press and hold on the Home screen. You can also press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories → Program Launcher. Opening a program 1. On the Launcher screen, press the Group soft key and select the group you want. 2. Select the program you want.The basics 34 Moving a program within a group 1. On the Launcher screen, scroll to the program you want to move. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Move. 3. When the selected program blinks, move the program to the position you want by pressing the Up or Down key. 4. Press the Done soft key. Managing groups You can create new groups or delete the groups, or change the order of the group list. 1. On the Launcher screen, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Group. 2. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options: • New: allows you to add a new group. • Delete: allows you to delete the selected group. • Rename: allows you to change the name of the group. • Move: allows you to move the position of the group. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.The basics 35 Using an optional memory card Your phone has an expansion slot compatible with micro SD memory cards, which are primarily used to back up or transfer files and data. Note: Use only compatible memory cards with your phone. Using incompatible memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, may damage the card, as well as the phone, and data stored on the card. Inserting the memory card 1. Turn off the phone and remove the battery cover and the battery. 2. Push the memory card into the slot until it clicks into place. The card is secure when it is not protruding from the phone. 3. Install the battery into place and close the battery cover.The basics 36 Removing the memory card To remove the card, push it in and release so that it is disengaged from the slot. Then slide the card out. Adding and removing programs You can install any program created for your phone, as long as the phone has enough memory. The most popular place to find software for your phone is on the Microsoft web site (http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/smartphone). Adding programs using ActiveSync You can install programs downloaded from the Internet or included on the supplied software CD-ROM by performing synchronisation between your phone and your computer. First you need to determine what your phone and processor type is so that you know which version of the software to install. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → More... → About. Check the version of your phone.The basics 37 2. Download a program to your computer from the Internet or insert the CD-ROM that contains the program into your computer. Be sure to select the program designed for the phone and your phone’s processor type. 3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. 4. Connect your phone to your computer and make sure that the ActiveSync is activated. For more information on ActiveSync, see page 42. 5. Double-click the *.exe file on the computer. If the file is an installer, the installation wizard will begin. Follow the instructions on the screen. Once the software has been installed, the installer will automatically transfer the software to your phone. If the file is not an installer, you will see an error message. You need to move this file to your phone by using ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Start Menu folder on your phone. Once installation is completed, you can view and open the program by accessing the Start menu. Adding a program directly from the Internet First, you need to determine what your phone and processor type is so that you know which version of the software to install. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → More... → About. Check the version of your phone.The basics 38 2. Download the program to your phone straight from the Internet using Internet Explorer. Be sure to select the program designed for the phone and your phone’s processor type. 3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. 4. Select the file, such as a *.xip or *.exe file. The installation wizard will begin. 5. Follow the directions on the screen. Once installation is completed, you can view and open the program by accessing the Start menu. Removing programs 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to delete. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Remove. 5. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. 6. When you have finished, press the OK soft key.The basics 39 Managing certificates On your phone you can add and delete public key certificates. You can store the following two types of certificates on your phone. • Personal: help to establish your identity, when you log on to a secured network, such as a corporate network. • Root: help to establish the identity of servers with which you connect. This helps to prevent unauthorised users from accessing your phone and information. Viewing certificates 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → Certificates → a certificate type. 3. To view more details, select the certificate. Deleting a certificate 1. Scroll to the certificate you want on the list. 2. Press the Menu soft key and then select Delete. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion.The basics 40 Resetting your phone You can reset your phone’s settings and clear all added data from memory. Resetting the phone 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → More... → Hard reset. You can also turn on the phone with pressing and holding . 3. Enter the initialisation password and press the Done soft key. The default password is “1234.” 4. Press the Yes soft key to confirm. The phone resets and reboots itself. Changing the initialisation password You can change the initialisation password to prevent the phone from being reset by unauthorised people. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Security → More... → Hard reset password. 3. Enter the old password, then a new password, and re-enter the new one for confirmation. 4. Press the Done soft key.The basics 41 Using online help Your phone is supported by additional information available online, or on the CD-ROM that came with your phone. SIM AT (SIM Application Toolkit) This is available if you use a SIM AT card that provides the SIM Application Toolkit menus and additional services, such as news, weather, sports, entertainment, and location services. Available services may vary, depending on your service provider’s plans. For details, see your SIM card instructions or contact your service provider. For information on: see: additional programs that can be installed on your phone, the supplied CD-ROM. connecting to and synchronising with a PC, Chapter 3 in this User’s Guide or ActiveSync Help on your PC. To view the ActiveSync help, click the ActiveSync icon on the Windows task bar. up-to-date information on your phone, http://www.microsoft.com/ mobile/smartphone.3 42 Synchronisation Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® , you can synchronise data on your desktop computer with the data on your phone. Synchronisation compares the data on your phone with your desktop computer and updates both your phone and computer with the latest data. With ActiveSync, you can: • Keep Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, or Inbox data up-to-date by synchronising your phone with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop computer. • Copy (rather than synchronise) files between your phone and desktop computer. • Control the moment when synchronisation occurs by selecting a synchronisation mode. • Select data types to be synchronised and control the amount of synchronised data. WARNING! • ActiveSync synchronises two devices using the latest data. Therefore, if you delete some specific data from the phone after synchronisation, and then perform a synchronisation again, the corresponding data on the computer will be deleted. Be careful not to lose important data. • If you turn off the phone after copying files to any folders, except for the Storage folder, using ActiveSync, all files in those folders will be deleted. Store important files in the Storage folder to prevent from being deleted.Synchronisation 43 Installing ActiveSync Before beginning synchronisation, you must install ActiveSync on your desktop computer using the supplied CD-ROM. You can also download the latest version of ActiveSync from the Microsoft web site (http:// www.microsoft.com). 1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your desktop computer. Alternatively, double-click the downloaded ActiveSync installer. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen for installing Microsoft ActiveSync. When installation is completed, the Synchronisation Setup Wizard helps you to connect your phone to your desktop computer, to set up a partnership. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note: See page 45 for more information on connecting the phone and a computer. Your first synchronisation process will automatically begin when your phone is connected to the computer. After the first synchronisation, take a look at Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks on your phone. You will notice that your information has been copied to the phone.Synchronisation 44 Customising connection settings To establish a connection between your computer and the phone, you must enable the connection(s) you want to use in the ActiveSync program. By default, all connections are enabled. 1. From the ActiveSync window on your computer, select File → Connection Settings... 2. Change the connection settings. 3. Click OK. If your phone is not connected to the computer, click this button to establish a connection.Synchronisation 45 Connecting your phone to a computer To connect the phone to your computer, you can use a PC data cable or the infrared port. Connecting with a PC data cable Connect one end of the PC data cable to the charger/PC data cable jack on the right of the phone and the other end to the USB port on your computer. Note: USB mode of your phone must be set for ActiveSync. Press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → Connections → USB. Then change the mode. The connection is established and the Microsoft ActiveSync window appears. The synchronisation automatically begins. Note: When an error occurs in a USB connection, activate the DHCP Client service, or deactivate the firewall or VPN environment. Connecting via the infrared port 1. Enable IR transmissions on your phone; Select Start → Settings → More... → Connections → Beam → Receive incoming beams. 2. Align the infrared ports on your phone and the computer. Note: To use the infrared port, the phone’s display must be activated. 3. From the Connection Settings window of the Windows ActiveSync, select Infrared Port (IR).Synchronisation 46 4. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select ActiveSync. 5. Press the Menu soft key and select Connect via IR. Once the connections is established, appears on the Windows task bar. Note: If your computer doesn’t have an infrared port, you can purchase a USB-IrDA adapter. Synchronising information To start synchronisation, connect your phone to your computer. For more information on connecting the phone and the computer, see page 45. The ActiveSync screen on your computer automatically appears and synchronisation starts. Once the synchronisation is completed, the phone stays connected to the computer. If any change is made, ActiveSync automatically will begin synchronisation. To begin synchronisation, press the Sync soft key in ActiveSync on your phone. You can open the phone’s file directory by clicking Explore from the Microsoft ActiveSync window. You can then copy files quickly and easily from the phone to the computer or vice versa. Shows the synchronisation status. Shows types of information to be synchronised.Synchronisation 47 Note: To synchronize Bluetooth devices with a compatible PC, you need the Bluetooth stack for Windows XP Service Pack 2 on your PC. Customising synchronisation settings You can customise various setting options for synchronisation with a computer and a server, and set the synchronisation schedule. First, you must break the connection between the phone and computer. Disconnect the PC data cable or remove the phone from the infrared range. Changing PC Settings 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Options. 2. Highlight Window PC. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Settings. 4. Change the computer name, set how to handle a data conflict between the phone and computer, or set a event logging type and press the Done soft key. 5. Select data types to be synchronised under the selected computer. 6. Press the Done soft key. Note: For more information on the conditions that must be met on the computer and how to change synchronisation options, see ActiveSync Help.Synchronisation 48 Setting server synchronisation You can synchronise information automatically as items arrive only if your company is running Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync. Configuring an Exchange Server connection 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Add Server Source. 2. Enter the server address and select This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection to use a SSL protocol for server access. 3. Press the Next soft key. 4. Enter your Microsoft Exchange user name, password, and domain name. To save the password for subsequent accesses, select Save password. 5. Press the Next soft key. 6. Select data types to be synchronised. 7. When you have finished, press the Finish soft key. Changing the synchronisation schedule You can schedule synchronisation with the Microsoft Exchange Server on two separate times. Use the peak time schedule to synchronise during working hours or other times when you experience higher mail volumes. Use the off-peak time schedule to synchronise during times when you experience lower mail volumes.Synchronisation 49 1. In ActiveSync on your phone, press the Menu soft key and select Schedule. 2. Set each option: • To synchronise periodically during peak times, select a frequency of synchronisation in the Peak times field. • To synchronise periodically during off-peak times, select a frequency of synchronisation in the Off-peak times field. • To use the peak time and off-peak time setting while roaming, select Use above settings when roaming. • To synchronise each time you send an e-mail, select Send outgoing items immediately. • To set the days and hours for peak times, press the Menu soft key and select Peak Times. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.4 50 Call functions This chapter explains all of the call- functions provided by your phone. Turning the phone functions on and off You can choose to turn off the phone functions and just use the PDA functions at any time and then turn it back on when you want. Note: In many countries you may be required by law to turn off the phone functions while on a flight. To turn off the display of your phone does not actually turn off the phone functions; you must turn off your wireless connection to your operator’s network. To turn off the phone functions, press and select Wireless Manager. Then select Phone to set it to Off. appears on the top right corner of the screen. To turn back on the phone functions, select Phone to set it to On from the Wireless Manager screen.Call functions 51 Using the Dialling screen When you start entering a number or press , the Dialling screen opens. You can view the most recent calls you have dialled, received, and missed on the screen. When you enter a digit, the Dialling screen lists all of the numbers containing the entered digit in Contacts and Call History, as well as the phone number assigned to the corresponding Speed Dial key. Making a call You can make a phone call using the number keypad. 1. From the Home screen, enter a number including an area code using the keypad. 2. Press to make a call. When a call is connected, the call duration displays. During a call, you can use several call options. For details, see page 55. To adjust the earpiece volume during a call, press to increase or decrease the volume level. 3. To end the call, press . Advanced calling features You can make a call from Contacts, Speed Dial, and Call History.Call functions 52 Making a call from Contacts 1. On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. 2. Select a contact card from the contact list. 3. Scroll to the number you want and press . Making a call from Speed Dial Speed Dial is a list you can create of often-dialled numbers. Information on adding a number to Speed Dial is detailed on page 57. By memorising the position on the Speed Dial list, you can dial the number simply by entering that number of the Speed Dial key. The phone number assigned to the key appears on the Dialling screen. Alternatively, if you do not remember the position of a number, access the Speed Dial list: 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Speed Dial. 3. Scroll to the number you want and press .Call functions 53 Making a call using name dialling You can make a phone call by saying the name that has been assigned to a contact card in Contacts or on the SIM card. For details, see page 129. Making a call from the Call History 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Call History. The recent call list appears. Note: is for incoming calls, is for outgoing calls, and is for missed calls. To view the calls categorised by call type, press the Menu soft key, select Filter, and select a category from the pop-up list. 3. Scroll to the number you want and then press . Making an international call 1. Press and hold until the + sign appears. The + replaces the international access code. 2. Enter the full phone number you want to dial. It includes the country code, the area code (without the leading zero), and the phone number. 3. Press . Note: You can set the country or are code to be added before the number when dialling. See page 62.Call functions 54 Making an emergency call Your phone provides the emergency number 112. This number can normally be used to make an emergency call in any country, with or without a SIM card inserted, if you are within a mobile phone network’s service area. Enter the emergency number 112 and press . Notes: • Some service providers may require a SIM card to be inserted, and in some cases the PIN to be entered as well. • In some cases, other emergency numbers may also be accessed. Your service provider may save additional local emergency numbers on the SIM card. Answering or ignoring a call When a call comes in and the phone rings or vibrates, depending on the ringer setting: • Press the Answer soft key or press to answer the call. • Press the Ignore soft key or press to reject the call. You can also press and hold . Note: If you reject a call, the busy tone is sent out. Depending on your service provider, the caller may be guided to your voicemail server.Call functions 55 Options during a call Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use while a call is in progress. Putting a call on hold If a person is trying to call you when you are talking on the phone, a notification window will pop out. 1. Press the Answer soft key to answer the second call and put the first on hold. 2. To swap back and forth between the two callers, press the Swap soft key. 3. To end the second call and go back to the first, press the End soft key or press . Setting up conference calling Conference calling enables you to invite callers during a call and have a conversation with up to 5 people at the same time. 1. Put a call on hold, dial a second number, and wait for it to be picked up. Alternatively, accept a second incoming call when you already have one in progress. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Conference. If the conference connection is successful, the word “Conference” will appear at the top of the screen. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Hold to place the conference call on hold and make a new call or answer another incoming call. Call functions 56 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Conference to join together all existing calls. To talk privately to a person during a conference call, press the Menu soft key and select Private. When the list of call participants appears, select one. Switching a call to a Speakerphone During a call, you can switch to a speakerphone. In Speakerphone mode, a noisy enviroment will make it difficult to hear the person whom you are speaking with. In a noisy environment, it is better to use the normal phone mode for better audio performance. • To activate a speakerphone, press and hold for about 1 seconds. • To deactivate a speakerphone, press and hold the key again for the same length of time. Call-related features Checking your voicemail The first speed dial location is assigned to your voicemail box by default. When you insert your SIM card into the phone, it will automatically detect and set as default the voicemail centre number of your mobile service provider. To check your voicemail, press and hold from the Dialling screen. Note: You can check and change the voicemail centre number. See page 62.Call functions 57 Managing the Speed Dial list You can assign frequently-used phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web pages in Contacts to the speed dial location 2 through 99. The location 0 and 1 on the Speed Dial list is preset for the international call prefix + and the voicemail centre number, respectively. Note: You cannot create a speed dial for a phone number stored on the SIM card. Adding a contact to the Speed Dial list 1. On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. 2. Select a contact from the list. 3. Scroll to a number, e-mail address, or web page address. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Add to Speed Dial. 5. If necessary, enter the name you want. 6. In the Keypad assignment field, select a location. 7. Press the Done soft key. Deleting Speed Dial assignments 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Speed Dial. 3. On the Speed Dial list, select a number.Call functions 58 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 5. When the confirmation message appears, press the Yes soft key. Managing your Call History Call History details all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, and also provides a summary of total calls. It can also tell you when a call was initiated and how long it lasted. To open the Call History: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Call History. A list of all calls appears. If necessary, select the category of the call history to be displayed by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Filter. Calls are categorised as below: • No Filter: shows all calls made to and from the phone in chronological order. • Missed Calls: shows only calls that were not answered. • Incoming Calls: shows only calls made to the phone. • Outgoing Calls: shows only calls made from the phone. Viewing details of calls • To view the duration of a call and time and date you received or made it, scroll to the call you want to view and press . • To view contact information, scroll to a contact, press the Menu soft key, and select Find Contact. • To send an SMS message, press the Menu soft key and select Send SMS.Call functions 59 • To send an e-mail message using the e-mail address on the call history, scroll to the contacts, press the Menu soft key, and select Email. • To delete individual calls, press the Menu soft key, and then select Delete. To delete all calls, select Delete List. • To save a phone number in a call to Contacts, scroll to the call you want and press the Save soft key. Viewing call timers In Call History, you can view the duration of your calls. This option is convenient for estimating your usage. 1. On the Call History screen, press the Menu soft key and select View Timers. You can view the total call time, the last call time, the time of calls you received and made, and a lifetime counter. You can also view the time you reset the call time. 2. Press the Done soft key. You can easily erase the call time records at any time, except for Lifetime calls, by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Reset Timers. Viewing call cost This network feature lets you view the cost of calls. Viewing call cost may not be available, depending on particular SIM cards. For more information, contact your service provider. 1. On the Call History screen, press the Menu soft key and select Call Cost.Call functions 60 2. Select the option you want. • Last Call Cost: shows the cost of the last call you made. • Total Cost: shows the total cost of all calls made since the cost counter was last reset. If the total cost exceeds the maximum cost set in the Set Max Cost option, you can no longer make any calls until you reset the counter. • Max Cost: shows the maximum cost set in the Set Max Cost option. • Reset Counters: allows you to reset the cost counter. • Set Max Cost: allows you to enter the maximum cost that you authorise for your calls. Calls can be made as long as the preset max cost is not exceeded. • Price/Unit: allows you to set the cost of one unit. This price per unit is applied when calculating the cost of your calls. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Customising your phone functions You can personalise the settings of the phone functions, the services you have, and the network to which you have connected. Accessing the Phone setting options 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → Phone. 3. Select a setting menu, and then set each option.Call functions 61 4. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Available setting options • Band Selection: This option allows you to select the network band in which your phone will operate. Your phone can operate in the GSM 900/1800 or PCS 1900 band. • Call Barring: This network service allows you to restrict your incoming or outgoing calls. To set up this service, you need to enter the call barring password obtained from your service provider. All calls: No calls can be made or received. When roaming: Calls cannot be received when you are using your phone outside of your home service area. Off: Call barring is deactivated; all calls can be made and received normally. Int's except home: When abroad, calls can be made only to number within the current country and to your home country. Int'l calls: International calls cannot be made. • Call Forwarding: This network service allows you to forward your incoming calls to another phone number. Unconditional: All calls are forwarded. No Reply: Calls are forwarded when you do not answer. Busy: Calls are forwarded when you are on the phone. Unavailable: Calls are forwarded when your phone is turned off or your phone is out of the service area. Data Calls: All data calls are forward.Call functions 62 • Call Options: You can customise settings related to call functions, such as an answering option, voicemail and SMS access numbers, and auto dial codes. Any key answer: When this option is activated, you can answer incoming calls by pressing any key, except for , , , and . Show SIM contacts: With this option is activated, the contact cards stored on the SIM card display on the contact list. Phone number: Check your phone number. Voice mail number/SMS service centre: When you insert your SIM card into your phone, it automatically detects and sets your voicemail and SMS access numbers by default. If not, you can manually enter the numbers obtained from your service provider. Country code/Dialling code: You can enter a country code or area code. The code will be automatically added before a phone number when dialling. • Call Waiting: This service allows you to receive another call while you have a call in progress. Select Provided call waiting call notifications to activate this service. • Caller ID: When you place a call, your phone number can be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. Using this option, you can enable or disable the display of your caller identification. For more detailed information , press the Start soft key and then Select Settings → Phone → More.... • Channels: This option allows you to set the cell broadcast (CB) message receipt and set up broadcast channels from which you want to receive CB messages. Enable channels: Select to enable the receipt of CB messages.Call functions 63 Language: Select your preferred languages to display CB messages. To edit the channel list, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Channels. Then press the Menu soft key and select the options for adding, editing or deleting channels. • Extra Tones: You can activate or deactivate the connect tone, which alerts you when your call is connected to the system, or the minute minder tone, which alerts you every minute during a call. • Fixed Dialling: When this option is activated, your phone allows outgoing calls only to the limited set of phone numbers. You can call only those numbers that are included in the Fixed Dialling Number list or which begin with the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. • Networks: You can set the phone to automatically select a network when you are roaming out of your service area, or find and select the network you want. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options: Find a New Network: Search for all available networks. You can start searching when the phone is out of your service area. Select a Network: Select a network from the available networks Preferred Networks: Set up a list of your preferred networks. You can set priority of the networks or add networks manually by selecting them from the preset network list or entering their service ID codes.64 5 Messaging, Internet, and Messenger Messaging In Messaging, you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise: • Text messages (SMS) • Multimedia message (MMS) • E-mail messages To open Messaging: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Messaging. Working with SMS or MMS messages You can write an SMS message of up to 160 characters. When you enter more than 160 characters, your phone handles the message as a multi-part message. You can also send or receive multimedia messages (MMS). In addition to the familiar text content of text messages, multimedia messages can contain images, video clips, audio clips, and combinations of these things in more than one page. MMS also supports e-mail addressing, so that messages can be sent from phone to e-mail and vice versa.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 65 Creating and sending an SMS message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select SMS/MMS. 2. Press the New soft key and select SMS. 3. In the To field, enter the recipients’ phone numbers, separating them with a semicolon. You can retrieve numbers from the contact list by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipient. 4. Press the Down key and compose your message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, press the Menu soft key, select My Text, and select a message. 5. Press the Send soft key when you’ve finished the message. Creating and sending an MMS message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select SMS/MMS. 2. Press the New soft key and select MMS. 3. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, enter the recipients’ numbers or addresses, separating them with a semicolon. Note: The Cc or Bcc fields are above the To field. You can also retrieve numbers or the addresses from the contact list or the messages you have sent by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipients.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 66 4. Press the Down key to move to the Subject field and enter the message subject. 5. Press the Down key and enter the message text. 6. Press the Menu soft key to access the following options for composing a message: • Preview: shows the multimedia message you created. • Add Recipients: allows you to add recipients addresses. • Edit Item: allows you to edit the selected item. • Add: allows you to add a variety of contents, such as data, media files and templates. • Attach: allows you to attach a contact card or calendar item as a digital file format, or a media file. • Edit Page: allows you to add or delete pages, change the text style, or set the page order or duration. • Save to: allows you to save the message to Drafts or as an MMS template. • Cancel Message: cancels sending the message. • MMS Options: allows you to change the message options. See page 70. 7. When you have finished composing the message, press the Send soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 67 Viewing SMS/MMS messages When you receive a new SMS or MMS message, the New Message icon ( ) displays on the top line of the screen and a new message is stored in Inbox. Press the Message soft key to open the message. You can also view messages you received, sent, composed but not sent by accessing the message folders. To open the message folders: On the SMS/MMS screen, press the Menu soft key and select Folders. The following default folders display: • Deleted Items: contains messages that have been deleted on your phone. • Drafts: stores draft messages that have not been sent. • Inbox: contains received messages. • Outbox: is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. • Sent Items: stores the messages that have been sent. To view all message folder contents, press the Menu soft key and select Show All Folders. To clear the SMS/MMS messages in a specific folder, scroll to the folder, press the Menu soft key, and select Clear SMS/MMS.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 68 To view a received message: 1. On the SMS/MMS screen, open the message folder you want. The icons on the message list tells you the message type. • : SMS message • : MMS message Note: You can change the default settings for viewing an SMS message. On a message list, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Display. 2. Select the message you want to view. If you open a push message from a WAP server, press the Proceed soft key to access the URL specified in the message. To access message options: While viewing a received or sent message, you can access the following options by pressing the Menu soft key. • Delete: deletes the message. • Reply All (SMS): sends a reply to the sender and all other recipients • Reply (MMS) : sends a reply to the sender and/or all other recipients, or forwards the message to other people.. • Forward (SMS): forwards the message to other people. • Move: allows you to move the message to other folders.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 69 • Mark as Unread/Mark as Read: allows you to mark the message as unread or read. Unread messages are boldfaced on the message list. • Save to Contacts: allows you to save the sender’s number or address. • Save as MMS Template (MMS): saves the message as an MMS template for reuse. • Attached files (MMS): allows you to save attachments of the message into the phone’s memory. • MMS Options: allows you to change the MMS settings. See below. Viewing messages on the SIM card Sometimes, text messages may be stored on the SIM card, depending on their specifications. To view the messages stored on the SIM card, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1. On a message list, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Import SIM Messages. 2. Press the Done soft key. The text messages are copied from the SIM card to SMS/MMS Inbox.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 70 Configuring MMS settings You can change the default MMS settings. From composing or viewing an MMS message, press the Menu soft key and select MMS Options. The following options are available: • Sending Options: Allows you to change the settings for sending MMS messages. Priority: You can select the priority level of your messages. Validity Period: You can select the length of time your messages are stored in the message centre after they are sent. Delivery Time: You can select the time delay before messages are sent. Creation Mode:Allows you to set the phone to allow the MMS creation using unsupported files. Size: You can select the message size. Hide address: You can set your caller ID to be hidden from outgoing messages. Request delivery report: When this option is activated, the network informs you whether or not your message has been delivered. Request read report: When this option is activated, your phone sends a request for a reply along with your message to the recipient. • Receiving Options: Allows you to change the settings for receiving MMS messages. Home Network: Set how to retrieve new messages from the server in your home network. Roaming Network: Set how to retrieve new messages from the server while roaming around another network.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 71 Reject Unknown Sender:reject messages from unknown senders. Report Allowed:send a delivery report from the network to the sender. Advertisement Allowed:accept advertisements. Information Allowed:accept information messages. • MMS Profiles: Allows you to set up and activate MMS profiles which are sets of MMS parameters required to send or receive MMS messages. To activate a profile, select it from the profile list. To edit a profile, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. Change the following options: Profile Name: Enter the profile name. MMSC URL: Enter the URL address of the MMS centre. Bearer: select the network bearer type. Working with E-mail messages You can send and receive e-mail messages in one of these ways: • Synchronise e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook on your PC. • Send and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a network.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 72 Synchronising E-mail messages Use the Outlook EMail account to send and receive e-mail messages by synchronising e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook on your PC. E-mail messages can be synchronised as part of the general synchronisation process. You will need to enable Inbox synchronisation in ActiveSync. During synchronisation: • Messages are copied from the mail folders of Exchange or Outlook on your PC to the Outlook Email folders on your phone. • E-mail messages in Outbox on your phone are transferred to Exchange or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. • E-mail messages in folders must be selected in ActiveSync on your PC in order to be transferred. Connecting directly to an E-mail server You can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server. You’ll need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to your e-mail server. When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the phone’s Inbox folder. Also messages in the phone’s Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted on the e-mail server are removed from the phone’s message folders. Folder behavior with a direct connection to an E-mail server The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using POP3 or IMAP4.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 73 • If you use POP3 and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on the phone and their copies on the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server will see that the messages are missing from the phone Inbox and delete them. This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you will no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the phone. • If you use IMAP4, the folders you created and the e-mail messages you moved are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your mail server. This synchronisation of folders occurs whenever you connect to your mail server; create new folders or rename/delete folders when connected. Creating an e-mail account You need to create a new account to be used for retrieving and sending e-mail messages. To make a new account: 1. From any message folder, press the Menu soft key and select Options → New Account. 2. Enter your display name and e-mail address, and press the Next soft key. If you want to set up your account automatically from the Internet, select Attempt to obtain email settings from the Internet. 3. Enter your user information, such as user name, password, and domain name, press the Next soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 74 4. Select the e-mail server type, enter an account name, and select a network type. 5. Press the Next soft key. 6. Enter the server names and press the Next soft key. If you want to set up an outgoing server, select Outgoing Server Settings. 7. Set the options for downloading e-mail messages and press the Next soft key. You can select the number of days for which you receive e-mail messages and set the maximum data volume of e-mail messages you want to download. 8. Select how often your phone automatically connects to the server and checks for incoming e-mails, and press the Next soft key. 9. Press the Finish soft key. To edit an account: 1. From any message folder, press the Menu soft key and select Options → Account Options. 2. Select the account you want. 3. Change the account settings as you would when creating it. For SMS/MMS, you can set to send a delivery report request for outgoing messages or to use Unicode encoding.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 75 Creating and sending an E-mail message 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the e-mail account with which you want to send. 2. Press the New soft key. 3. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, enter the recipients’ e-mail addresses, separating them with a semicolon. Note: The Cc or Bcc fields are above the To field. You can retrieve addresses from the contact list by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Add Recipient. 4. Press the Down key to move to the Subject field and enter the e-mail subject. 5. Compose your e-mail message. To enter preset or frequently used sentences, press the Menu soft key, select My Text, and select a sentence. You can add a picture or voice note as an attachment by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Insert → a item type. 6. Press the Send soft key when you have finished composing the message. 7. Press the Menu soft key and select Send/Receive to connect to the network and send the message. Viewing e-mail messages You can also view messages you received, sent, composed but not sent by accessing the message folders.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 76 To open the message folders: On the Messaging main screen, access the e-mail account you want, press the Menu soft key, and select Folders. The following default folders display: • Deleted Items: contains messages that have been deleted on your phone. • Drafts: stores draft messages that have not been sent. • Inbox: contains received messages. • Outbox: is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. • Sent Items: stores the messages that have been sent. Note: When you first have synchronised e-mail messages, the Junk E-mail folder is copied from the Microsoft Outlook on your PC to Outlook E-mail on your phone. The next time you synchronise, the e-mail messages that appear to be Junk e-mail are saved in that folder according to the options you set in the Microsoft Outlook. To view all message folder contents in the selected account, press the Menu soft key and select Show All Folders. To view an e-mail message: 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the e-mail account from which you want to receive e-mail messages. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Send/Receive. The phone connects to your e-mail server and receives incoming e-mail messages or sends e-mail messages in Outbox. 3. Select the message you want to view.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 77 To access message options: While viewing a received or sent e-mail, you can access the following options by pressing the Menu soft key. • Delete: deletes the message. • Reply All: sends a reply to the senders and all other recipients. • Move: allows you to move message(s) to other folders. • Mark as Unread/Mark as Read: allows you to mark the message as unread or read. Unread messages are boldfaced on the message list. • Download Message: allows you to download the complete contents of the e-mail from the e-mail server. • Send/Receive: sends or receives the e-mail messages. Setting downloading options You can specify your downloading preferences when you set up the account or select your synchronisation options. You can change them at any time: • Change options for Inbox synchronisation using ActiveSync options. For more information, see “ActiveSync Help.” • Change options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on your phone. Press the Menu soft key and select Options → Account Options. Select the account you want and change it. Viewing e-mail attachments To download an attachment, select the attachment displayed as a list of hyperlinks in an open message. It will be downloaded the next time you synchonise or connect to your e-mail server and send or receive e-mail messages. To view an attachment, select the attachment in an open message.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 78 Switching beween message accounts While working in an account, you can switch to another message account any time you need. 1. Press the Menu soft key and select Switch Accounts. 2. Select the account to which you want to switch. Inserting signatures into messages You can specify a signature to be automatically inserted into SMS, MMS or e-mail messages that you send. To specify a signature: 1. On the Messaging main screen, select the message account you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Options → Signatures. 3. Select the account for which you want to specify from the Select an account field. 4. Select Use signature with this account. 5. To insert a signature in every messages, including when you reply or forward the message, select Include when replying and forwarding. 6. Enter a signature to be inserted and press the Done soft key.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 79 Internet Explorer Use Microsoft® Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web HTML, cHTML, and WAP pages. You can browse by connecting to an Internet service provider (ISP) or network and browse the Web. To do this, you’ll need to create the connection first as described on page 148. When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and programs from the Internet. To open Internet Explorer: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Internet → Internet Explorer. Browsing the Internet 1. To connect and start browsing, do one of the following: • Press the Menu soft key and select Address Bar. Enter the web address you want to visit • Press the Menu soft key and select History to open the list of the pages you last accessed. Select a page from the list. • Scroll to the page you want to view from the Favourites list. 2. Press the Go soft key on the browser to open the associated web page.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 80 Navigating the Internet Explorer The following table helps you browse the Internet easily: Using the Favorites list You can store your favourite link while using the Internet Browser and then access them easily. Categorising them enables you to find them more quickly. Adding a web page to the Favorites list 1. Go to the page you want to add and press the Menu soft key and select Add to Favourites. To Press scroll through browser items the Navigation keys. select a browser item . return to the previous page . refresh the connection the Menu soft key and select Refresh. To change the display options the Menu soft key, select View, and select the option you want. To change the text and image size the Menu soft key, select Zoom, and select the option you want. view information on the web page the Menu soft key and select Tools → Properties.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 81 2. Enter a name for the favourite link and the URL of the link. 3. Select a category from the Folder field under which you want to save the favourite link. You can also create a new category. See page 84. 4. Press the Add soft key. Opening a link through the Favourites list 1. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to the link you want to access. If the link you want is in the certain folder, open the folder and scroll to the link. 3. Press the Go soft key. Managing Favorites categories You can create a new category for saving favourite web pages and edit or delete the created categories. 1. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Add Folder to create a new category. Alternatively, scroll to the category and press the Menu soft key and select Edit or Delete to edit or delete the selected category.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 82 Changing Explorer options You can customise Web browsing options, change the connection settings, and clear memory. On the Internet Explorer screen, press the Menu soft key and select Tools → Options. The following options are available: • General: You can select whether or not to play sounds on web pages, view the warnings when you move from a secure web page to a non-secure one, or enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. You can also select the text encoding type to use. • Connections: You can change the network setting to connect to Internet Explorer. If you select Automatically detect settings, your phone automatically detects network settings from your service provider. • Memory: You can check the amount of memory currently being used for the Internet Explorer. To clear the memory, scroll to a type of memory and press the Clear soft key. WAP Browser Using Browser, you can browse the WAP service preset by your service provider and other WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites on your phone. Connecting to a WAP site 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Internet → WAP Browser.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 83 3. To connect and start browsing, do one of the following: • Press the Menu soft key and select Home to access the homepage of your service provider. • Press the Favourites soft key, select the category which contains the WAP site you want, and then select the WAP site. • Press the Menu soft key and select Go To. Enter the address of WAP site you want to visit and press the Go soft key. 4. While navigating through WAP pages, you can use the following options: Using the Favourites list You can store your favourite WAP sites and then access them easily. Categorising them enables you to find them more quickly. Adding a URL to the Favourites list 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Menu soft key and select Add to Favourites. To Press go to the previous visited page . go to the homepage the Menu soft key and select Home. refresh the current page the Menu soft key and select Refresh. Open the list of the WAP sites you have accessed the Menu soft key and select History.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 84 2. If there is no category created, enter a name for the category and press the Save soft key. 3. Enter a name for the favourite site and the URL of the site. 4. Select the category under which you want to save the favourite site. You can also create a new category by pressing the Menu soft key and select New Category. 5. Press the Done soft key. Opening a page through the Favourites list 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to a category from the list and press the Open soft key. 3. Scroll to the WAP site you want and press the Go soft key. Managing Favourite categories You can create a new category for saving favourite WAP sites and edit or delete the created category. 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select New to create a new category. Or scroll to the category you want, press the Menu soft key, and then select Rename or Delete to edit the selected category.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 85 Deleting a favourite item 1. On the WAP Browser screen, press the Favourites soft key. 2. Scroll to a category from the list and press the Open soft key. 3. Scroll to the WAP site you want to delete and press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 4. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. Setting the WAP options You can access options for the WAP browser. Press the Menu soft key and select Options. • Settings: You can view the current connection settings for WAP and set the selected profile as an active profile or edit a selected profile. You can also set the WAP browser to load the homepage when launching. • Cache/Cookie: Viewed pages can be cached for faster downloads and cookies are pieces of information related to a session. You can select to enable or disable the cache or cookies. You can clear information stored in the cache and cookie by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Clear Cache or Clear Cookie. • Set as Home Page: You can change the startup homepage of the WAP browser. Access the page you want and select this option.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 86 Pocket MSN Pocket MSN delivers an always-on experience that enables you to remain available to other online users and always up to date with e-mail, instant messaging (IM) and other online services without maintaining a continuous network connection to the phone. The connection will be restored when a new message arrives or when you needs the service. In addition, subscribers will receive only updates or changes to their contacts and Inbox rather than receiving entire lists when they connect to the service. You will have one-click access to MSN Hotmail® and MSN Messenger. In addition, Pocket MSN will allow you to wirelessly browse online and receive other MSN services, including MSN Alerts, which include news, sports and weather updates. In addition to always-on services, you can access, compose and answer Hotmail messages offline, maximising their time when mobile connections aren't available. To access Pocket MSN: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Internet → Pocket MSN. Signing In To use the MSN Messenger or Hotmail service, you must have a Microsoft Passport™ account or Hotmail account, or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail account. If you have a Hotmail® or MSN account, you already have a Passport. Once you have obtained either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account, you are ready to set up your account.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 87 Note: Sign up for a Microsoft Passport account at http:// www.passport.com. Get a free Microsoft Hotmail e-mail address at http://www.hotmail.com. To sign into the MSN service: 1. On the Pocket MSN main screen, select MSN Messenger, MSN Hotmail, or Compose Hotmail. 2. If you selected MSN Messenger, press the Sign In soft key. 3. Enter the e-mail address and the password of your Microsoft Passport and Hotmail account. 4. Press the Sign In soft key. Using MSN Messenger MSN® Messenger on your phone is an instant messaging program that lets you: • see who is online. • send and receive instant messages. • have instant message conversations with groups of contacts. Working with contacts The MSN Messenger screen shows all of your messenger contacts at a glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while connected, you can start a chat. • To see others who are online but not seen on the MSN Messenger screen, press the Menu soft key and select Chats.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 88 • To add a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Add Contact. • To delete a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Delete Contact. • To set the MSN Messenger to automatically update the contacts’ status when it changes, press the Menu soft key and select Auto update status. • To view the properties of a contact, press the Menu soft key and select Properties. • To block a contact from chatting with you, press the Menu soft key and select Block.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 89 Chatting with contacts 1. To open a chat window, scroll to the contact with whom you want to chat. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Send Message. 3. Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen, or press the Menu soft key and select My Text to enter a preset message. To invite another contact to a multi user chat, press the Menu soft key, select Invite, and select the contact you want to invite. To switch back to the main window, press the Menu soft key and select My contacts. To revert back to your chat window, press the Menu soft key, select Chats, and select the person whom you were chatting with. 4. To end the chat, press the Menu soft key and select End Chat. Using the Hotmail service You can send and read e-mail messages on the phone via the Microsoft Hotmail service. Composing and sending an e-mail 1. On the Pocket MSN screen, select Compose Hotmail. 2. Compose an e-mail as you would in the Messaging program.Messaging, Internet, and Messenger 90 Viewing e-mail messages 1. On the Pocket MSN screen, select MSN Hotmail. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Folders. 3. Select a message folder, and then select the message you want to view. Accessing the MSN Mobile Homepage On the Pocket MSN screen, select MSN Mobile Home. You can access various mail, information, entertainment services provided by Microsoft. Changing Pocket MSN setting options From the Pocket MSN mail screen, press the Options soft keys. The following options are available: Note: To change the settings, you may need to sign in to the MSN service. • General: You can clear the saved password, if any, or set Pocket MSN to be displayed on the Home screen. • Hotmail: You can set filters to receive or block e-mails or set Hotmail to automatically download new messages to the phone. • Messenger: You can change your display name in Messenger or set Messenger to automatically update your contacts’ presence information. • SMS: You can set Pocket MSN to temporarily use SMS when a data connection is unavailable. • Switch User: You can reset user information to sign in to the MSN service by another user account.6 91 Organiser This chapter explains how to keep track of contacts and appointments and make a list of tasks you need to do. Contacts Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you’re looking for, whether you’re at home or on the road. To open Contacts: On the Home screen, press the Contacts soft key. You can also press the Start soft key and select Contacts. You can view the list of contact cards that you have created. Creating a contact card You can save a new contact card in Contacts or on the SIM card. Creating a contact card in the phone’s memory 1. On the contact list, press the New soft key. 2. Enter a name and other contact information. To assign the contact card to a category, scroll to the Categories field and select a category. You can add a personal ringtone to a contact card. Scroll to the Custom ring tone field and select the ring melody you want. Select the Picture field to add an image for the caller ID image.Organiser 92 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a contact card on the SIM card 1. On the contact list, press the Menu soft key and select New SIM Contact. 2. Enter the name of the person you want to add. 3. Scroll to the Number field and enter the number you want to store. 4. Press the Done soft key. Creating a contact card from the Dialling screen 1. On the Home screen, enter the phone number and press the Save soft key. 2. To create a new contact card, select . To add the phone number to an existing contact card, select the contact card. 3. Scroll to the location in which you want to save the number and press the Insert soft key. 4. Fill in the other fields and press the Done soft key.Organiser 93 Viewing and editing a contact card When you access Contacts, the contact list displays the names of your contacts alphabetically, along with an abbreviation for the primary contact number or E-mail address, such as the person’s work phone number (w) or mobile phone number (m). The following table shows possible abbreviations that might be displayed on the Contacts list and their meanings: Abbreviation Meaning w/w2 work phone/work phone 2 h/h2 home phone/home phone 2 m mobile phone co company phone pgr pager car car phone ast assistant phone rdo radio phone number e/e2/e3 e-mail/e-mail 2/e-mail 3 Indicates the type of the default number or e-mail address. Indicates the contacts stored on the SIM card.Organiser 94 Note: All of the contacts saved on the SIM card follow all of the contacts saved in the phone’s memory. To open a contact card: 1. On the contact list, select the contact’s name you want to view. If the contact card is assigned to a certain category, press the Menu soft key and select Filter and then select the category from the pop-up list. 2. Select the contact card you want. A summary screen is displayed. 3. On the summary screen: • To edit the contact information, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. • To send an SMS message to the contact card, scroll to the available number and press the SMS soft key, or press the Menu soft key and then select Send SMS. • To dial a number, select the number or press the Call soft key. • To send an e-mail, select the e-mail address. • To access a web page, select the web page. im/im2/im3 IM/IM2/IM3 web web page Abbreviation MeaningOrganiser 95 Adding a number or address to Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number for speed dialling or to an e-mail or URL address for quick access. 1. On the contact list, select the contact you want. 2. Scroll to the number or address. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add to Speed Dial. 4. If necessary, change the name and select a keypad location. 5. Press the Done soft key. Copying entries between the SIM Card and Contacts You can copy the contact card or all of contact entries in a specific category to the SIM card or vice versa. Copying from Contacts to the SIM card 1. On the contact list, select the contact card stored in the phone’s memory. 2. Scroll to the phone number to be copied. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Save to SIM. 4. If necessary, change the contact name. 5. Press the Done soft key.Organiser 96 Copying from the SIM card to Contacts 1. On the contact list, select the contact card stored on the SIM card. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Save to Contacts. 3. Select to create a new contact card and add contact information. Otherwise, select a contact card to which you want to add the number, scroll to the number type, and press the Insert soft key. 4. Press the Done soft key to save the change. Beaming a contact card You can send a contact card in Contacts to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the contact list or on the summary screen, press the Menu soft key and select Beam Contact . 2. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 3. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key.Organiser 97 Deleting a contact card 1. On the contact list or on the summary screen, press the Menu soft key and select Delete Contact or Delete. 2. Press the Yes soft key to permanently delete the contact card. Note: If you delete a contact card on your phone and synchronise Contacts with your computer, the contact card in Outlook on your computer will be deleted. Calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Week, and Month). To open Calendar: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Calendar. You can view the lists of appointments that you have created in the agenda view.Organiser 98 Creating an appointment 1. Press the Menu soft key and select New Appointment. 2. Fill in the fields. • Subject: Enter a description of the appointment. • Start date, Start time, End date, and End time: If needed, change the date and time. • All day event: If checked, the appointment lasts all day. • Location: Enter the place of the appointment. • Reminder: Select a time setting for the alarm to remind you of the appointment. • Occurs: Select a repeat interval to set how often the appointment repeats. • Status: Select an appropriate status for the appointment. • Sensitivity: Select a sensitivity class by which Microsoft Exchange Server handles the appointment. • Notes: Add a note for the appointment. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key.Organiser 99 Viewing and editing an appointment On the Calendar screen, you can view and edit your appointments using the different views: Agenda, Week, or Month. By default, the Calendar first appears in the agenda view, which provides the most detail information about your appointment. Switching the view mode You can change the view mode of the calendar to cycle through the agenda, week, and month view. In each view, press the Week, Month, or Agenda soft key. • Week View: shows the calendar of your appointments. • Month View: allows you to keep track of your monthly schedule and shows which days have appointments scheduled. • Agenda View: shows you the appointments for the selected day. The entries are grouped according to their starting times. Editing an appointment 1. Select the calendar view by pressing the Week, Month, or Agenda soft key.Organiser 100 2. In each view, select the date of the appointment by pressing the Navigation keys. To go to today, press the Menu soft key and select Go to Today. To go to a certain date, press the Menu soft key and select Go to Date. Enter the date and press the Done soft key. 3. Select the appointment you want to view. 4. Press the Edit soft key. 5. If you are editing a repeating or continuous appointment, decide whether to edit all appointments in the series or just the current appointment by pressing the No or Yes soft key. 6. Edit the appointment information and press the Done soft key to save the changes to the appointment. Beaming an appointment You can send an appointment to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the calendar screen, open the appointment you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam Appointment.Organiser 101 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. Deleting an appointment 1. On the calendar screen, scroll to an appointment to delete. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete Appointment. 3. If you make deleting to a repeating or continuous appointment, decide whether to delete all appointments in the series or just the current appointment by pressing the No or Yes soft key. Or, press the Yes soft key to permanently delete the appointment. Changing calendar setting options From any view, press the Menu soft key and select Options. The following options are available: • First day of week: You can select which day the calendar starts with. • Week view: You can select a week view type. • Month view: You can set the Month view shows the current week number. • Set reminders: You can select default schedule alarm time.Organiser 102 D-Day In D-Day, you can calculate how many days are left before or have passed since a specific event. To open D-Day: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → D-Day. Creating a D-Day counter 1. Press the New soft key. 2. Set options in each field. • Date: Enter the date of the day you want to count to or from. • Title: Enter the counter title. • Category: Select one of the preset categories. You can filter counters by category from the counter list. • Repeat every year: Select to set the D-day counter to repeat every year. 3. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. The counter is added to the list and shows how many days are left or have passed.Organiser 103 Editing D-Day categories You can change the name of D-Day categories. 1. From the counter list, press the Menu soft key and select Edit Category. 2. Scroll to the category you want. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Rename. 4. Enter a new name and press the Done soft key. Deleting a D-Day counter 1. Scroll to the counter you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. Tasks Tasks is a convenient place to create task reminders. You can mark a task as completed or delete a task. To open Tasks: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Tasks. Creating a task note 1. Enter your task information in the Enter new task here field. 2. When you have finished, press twice. The task note is added to the task list.Organiser 104 Completing a task When a task is complete, mark it to indicate that the task is done. To mark, scroll to the completed task and press the Complete soft key. To unmark, press the Activate soft key. Beaming a task note You can send a task note to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. On the task list, scroll to the task you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam Task . 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 4. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key. Deleting a task 1. On the task list, scroll to the task. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete Task. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion.Organiser 105 Voice Notes In any program where you can write on the screen, you can also quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a message. In Voice Notes, you can create a recording. To open Voice Notes: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Voice Notes. Recording a voice note 1. Hold your phone’s microphone near your mouth or other source of sound. 2. Press the Record soft key to make your recording. The numbers on the centre of the screen indicate the elapsed time. 3. Press the Stop soft key to stop recording. Your phone automatically saves the voice note labelled with the title and lists the notes on the All Notes screen. Reviewing a voice note 1. On the All Notes list, select the note you want to review. Recording is playing. During playback, you can adjust the sound volume by pressing . 2. Press the Stop soft key to stop playing.Organiser 106 Setting a voice note as the ringtone 1. On the All Notes list, scroll to a voice note. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Set As Ringtone. 3. Press the OK soft key. Alarm You can use the alarm clock to set a wake-up alarm or set an alarm to remind you of an appointment. To open alarm: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and select Organizer → Alarm. Setting a wake-up alarm 1. On the Alarm screen, select Wake up alarm. 2. Select a check box, enter the time for the wake-up alarm to sound, and select the days when the wake-up alarm rings in the week viewer. Use the Navigation keys to move through each field. You can make up to 3 wake-up alarms. 3. Select a melody for the alarm in the Tone field. 4. Select a time interval to resume the alarm after the alarm is stopped in the Snooze field. 5. Press the Done soft key. Organiser 107 Setting an alarm 1. On the Alarm screen, select one of Alarm 1 to Alarm 4. 2. Set each alarm option. 3. Press the Done soft key. Stopping an alarm • When an alarm rings, press the Dismiss soft key to stop it, or press the Snooze soft key to set the alarm to ring again after the specified snooze interval. • To deactivate an alarm, access it from the Alarm screen and remove the check marks for a wake-up alarm, or set Off from the Alarm activation field for a normal alarm. WorldClock You can set up the world clock with the time zones you want, and then check the current time of the city you need at any time. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key 2. Select Organizer → WorldClock. 3. Select the clock you want. 4. Press the Left or Right key to move the time zone line. To apply daylight savings to the currently selected time zone, select Summer Time. 5. Press the Done soft key to save the selected time zone. 6. Repeat from step 3 to add time zones.7 108 Multimedia Camera With the built-in camera on your phone, you can take photos or record videos of people or events while on the move. Your phone produces JPEG photos and 3GP videos. To open Camera: Press the Start soft key , and select Camera. Taking photos 1. When you access the Camera mode, the image to be captured appears. 2. Adjust the image to be captured. • Press the Up or Down key to zoom in or out. • Press the Left or Right key to adjust the brightness of the image. • Press the Menu soft key to access the camera options. See page 109. • Use the number keypad to adjust the image quickly. See page 109. 3. Press or to take a photo. 4. Press the Save soft key to save the photo. The photo is saved to the location specified in the Default Storage option. After saving the photo, the camera automatically returns to Preview mode.Multimedia 109 Setting camera options You can customise the camera settings. Once you set the camera settings, the corresponding icons display at the top of the Preview screen. On the Preview screen, press the Menu soft key. • Camcorder: switches to Camcorder mode. • Shooting Mode: changes the camera shooting mode. Single Shot: takes a normal single shot. Multi Shot: takes a series of stills. You can select the number of photos the camera will take. Mosaic Shot: takes a series of stills and saves them in one frame. You can select a layout. • Flash On: turns the flash on or off. • Timer: selects the length of time for the camera to delay before taking a photo. • Effects: selects a colour tone for photos. • Frames: selects a decorative frame. • Options: changes the default settings for Camera. See page 112. Using the keypad shortcuts You can use the keypad to customise your camera settings when you are in the preview screen. • : switches to Camcorder mode. • : changes the shooting mode by changing the number of photos or the layout. • : changes the image size. • : changes the image quality. • : changes the white balance.Multimedia 110 • : turns the flash on or off. • : selects the length of delay time before taking a photo. • : changes the colour tone. • : allows you to add a decorative frame to the photo. • : allows you to select camera options. Viewing photos To view photos you have taken, press the Album soft key in Camera mode. The list of the photos is stored in the currently selected storage memory. For further details, see page 122. Recording video clips 1. From Camera mode, press to switch to Camcorder mode. The image to be recorded appears. 2. Adjust the image to be recorded. • Press the Up or Down key to zoom in or out on your subject. • Press the Left or Right key to adjust the brightness of the image. • Press the Menu soft key to access the camcorder options. See page 111 • Use the number keypad to adjust the image quickly. See page 111. 3. To start recording, press or . The timer on the top left of the screen shows you the elapsed time.Multimedia 111 4. To stop recording, press the Stop soft key, , or . 5. Press the Save soft key to save the video. The video clip is saved to the location specified in the Default Storage option. After saving the video, the camcorder automatically returns to Video Preview. Setting camcorder options You can customise the camcorder settings. Once you set the video settings, the corresponding icons display at the top of the Video Preview screen. On the Video Preview screen, press the Menu soft key. • Camera: switches to Camera mode. • Recording Mode: select a video recording mode. Select Limit for MMS to record a video suitable for an MMS or e-mail message. Select Normal to record a video within the limit of the currently available memory. • Flash On: turns the flash on or off. • Timer: selects the length of time for the phone to delay before recording a video. • Effects: selects a colour tone for the video. • Audio Off: selects whether or not you record audio with a video clip. • Options: changes the default settings for Camera. See page 112. Using the keypad shortcuts You can use the keypad to customise your video settings when you are on the Video Preview screen. • : switches to Camera mode. • : changes the recording mode.Multimedia 112 • : changes the image size. • : changes the image quality. • : changes the white balance. • : turns the flash on or off. • : selects the length of delay time before starting recording a video. • : changes the colour tone. • : mutes or unmutes audio. • : allows you to select camera options. Playing video clips To view the video clips you have recorded, press the Album soft key in Camcorder mode. The list of the video clips is stored in the currently selected storage memory. For further details, see page 122. Changing the default camera settings To customise the default camera settings, press the Menu soft key and select Options. The following options are available: • General: You can customise the general settings for the Camera program. Auto Save: allows you to set whether the camera will save the photo or video after taking or recording. Default Storage: allows you to select where you want to store your photos or video clips. • Camera: You can customise the settings for Camera mode.Multimedia 113 Photo Size: allows you to select an image size. Photo Quality: allows you to select an image quality. White Balance: allows you to select the white balance mode to adjust the colour balance of photos. Shutter Sound: allows you to select a sound for the shutter release. Default Name: allows you to change the default prefix of photo names. • Camcorder: You can customise the settings for Camcorder mode Video Size: allows you to select an video frame size. Video Quality: allows you to select an image quality. White Balance: allows you to select the white balance mode to adjust the colour balance of videos. Default Name: allows you to change the default prefix of video names. • Shortcuts: You can check view the functions assigned to the keys in Camera mode or Camcorder mode. • About: You can check the copyright information of the Camera program.Multimedia 114 Windows Media Player Your phone is equipped with Microsoft Windows Media Player 10. With Windows Media Player, you can play Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Video, and MP3 audio files that are stored on your phone, a memory card, or on the Web. To open Windows Media Player: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Windows Media. Preparing media files The Windows Media Player of your phone can play various file formats, such as .asf, .wma, .wmv, and .mp3. You can copy media files from your desktop computer to the phone using the Windows Media Player or ActiveSync. You can also copy media files using a memory card. Note: If you have stored too many files in memory, the operation speed of the system slows down. Using an optional memory card helps you clear up this problem and lets you enjoy more music files. About DRM, licenses, and protected files Some digital media files, such as songs downloaded from online stores, are encrypted to prevent the files from being unlawfully distributed or shared. Content providers use a technology called Digital Rights Management (DRM), to encrypt the files. During the encryption process, the content provider creates a license which specifies how and when the file can be used. Multimedia 115 For example, a content provider could create a license that allows you to play a certain file on your computer, but not on your phone. Or, a license that allows you to play a certain file on your phone, but only for a month, or perhaps only a certain number of times. Files that have licenses associated with them are called protected files. Copying media files using ActiveSync 1. Connect your phone to a computer and start synchronisation by referring to page 42. 2. Open the file directory on the phone by clicking Explore from the Microsoft ActiveSync window. 3. Drag the media files you want to copy and drop them into a folder. Windows Media Player automatically retrieves the media files from the folder where the files are copied and you can search them from the Library screen. If the media files do not appear in Library, update the library by pressing the Menu soft key and selecting Update Library. Copying media files using the desktop player You can use the desktop player to copy media files. Using the desktop player ensures that licenses are copied with protected files. Make sure that you have Windows Media Player 10 or later versions on your desktop computer. Depending on the version of your desktop player, the procedure to copy files may vary. 1. Connect your phone to the desktop computer and start synchronisation using a PC data cable.Multimedia 116 2. Open Windows Media Player on the desktop computer. 3. Click the Sync tab. 4. Click Edit Playlist. 5. Select the media files you want to synchronise from the left pane of the window. 6. Click OK. 7. Select the saving location from the right pane. 8. Click to select the quality level you want and click OK. 9. Click Start Sync. The selected files are converted and copied to the location you selected in step 7.Multimedia 117 Using libraries A library is a file list provided by Windows Media Player to retrieve media files in the phone’s memory. The Library screen contains categories, such as My Music, My Videos, My TV, and My Playlists. Using the Library screen, you can sort your content by criteria, such as artist name, album title, or genre. On the Library screen, you can use the following options by pressing the Menu soft key: • Queue Up: adds the selected file to the end of the current play list. • Delete from Library: deletes the selected file from the library. • Now Playing: Open the current play list. • Library: allows you to select the library you want to view; for example, the library of files stored on your phone or on the memory card. • Update Library: adds new files to the library by searching your phone or a memory card. • Open File: allows you to find and play files that are stored on your phone or a memory card, but those are not in the library. • Open URL: allows you to specify a URL address for a streaming service. • Properties: displays information about the selected file. • Done: closes the Library screen and displays the player screen.Multimedia 118 Playing music and video files If you have copied media files to your phone’s memory or memory card, you can play them from Media Player. Playing media files from a library 1. On the Library screen, if necessary, press the Menu soft key, select Library, and select the memory from which you want to retrieve files. 2. When libraries have been updated, press the Done soft key. 3. Select a category. 4. Scroll to the library you want to play and press the Play soft key. If the file does not appear in a library, on the Library screen, press the Menu soft key and select Open File. Then select the file you want to play. The player screen appears and the selected file plays. Use the following options during playback: • To adjust the volume, press the Up or Down key. You can view the volume level on the screen. • To adjust the earpiece volume, press . • To move backward in a file, press and hold the Left key. • To move forward in a file, press and hold the Right key. • To access the next file, press the Right key. • To access the previous file, press the Left key. • To pause or resume playback, press . • To play the files in the play list randomly or repeatedly, press the Menu soft key and select Shuffle/Repeat. • To stop playback, press the Menu soft key and select Stop.Multimedia 119 Notes: • When a Bluetooth headset is connected to the phone, the play/pause/stop button on the headset may not function properly. To control the player from the headset, first play or pause music from Media Player, and then use the button. • While playback is in progress, the multi-function key on the Bluetooth headset may not function. Playing media files on a network 1. On the Library screen, press the Menu soft key and select Open URL. 2. Enter a URL in the URL field, or scroll to one of URLs that you have used from the History field. 3. Press the OK soft key. Note: To play streaming media, you must be connected to a network. For more information on creating a remote connection between your phone and a network, see page 148. Setting up a play list You can add media files on the Library screen to a temporary play list. It lists the currently playing file, as well as any files that have been queued up to play next. Creating a play list 1. On the Library screen, select the category you want and scroll to the file you want to play. If the file does not appear on the list, press the Menu soft key and select Update Library. You can also select Open File to display the File System screen and search the files you want.Multimedia 120 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Queue Up to add the file to the play list. 3. Repeat from step 1 to add more files. 4. Press to return to the player screen. 5. Press to start playing the files. Opening the play list On the player screen, press the Now Playing soft key. You can use various options by pressing the Menu soft key. Editing the play list • To change the play order, press the Menu soft key and select Move Up or Move Down. • To delete the selected files, press the Menu soft key and select Delete from Playlist. • To clear the play list, press the Menu soft key and select Clear Now Playing. Changing the Window Media Player settings You can customise the appearance and functionality of Windows Media Player. On the player screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options. You can use the following options: • Playback: Select the options for playback. You can select the way time is displayed on the player screen, or whether or not to pause playback when you launch another program, and resume playback after a phone call.Multimedia 121 • Video: Select the viewing options for playing videos, such as shrinking oversized videos and playing videos on a full screen. Note: If there is a problem while playing MP4 files, deselect the Scale to fit window option. The problem occurs because the file has been resized. • Network: Change the connections speed and protocol for playing streaming content. • Library: Select whether the player screen or the Library screen is displayed when you open Windows Media Player. • Skins: Change the appearance of the player screen by selecting a new skin. • Buttons: Assign Windows Media Player functions to the keys on your phone to quickly control playback without having to use the menus. Customising SRS WOW XT Settings SRS WOW XT for Mobile is a suite of 3D audio, bass enhancement, and mono and stereo speaker technologies designed to improve the quality of mobile audio, e g cellular phone sound quality. To enjoy music with high audio quality, enable the WOW XT feature before playing media files. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then the More soft key, and press the WOW XT Settings. 3. On the SRS WOW XT screen, select On in the WOW XT On/Off field.Multimedia 122 4. Select the type you want in the SRS EQ field, or adjust the settings for each component. 5. Press the Done soft key. Note: • is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. • When you use a headset, the WOW XT feature is enhanced and provides a more powerful listening experience. Picture & Videos This program allows you to access all of your picture and video files stored in your phone's directory or on a memory card. To open Pictures & Videos: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Pictures & Videos. The thumbnails of the files display. Viewing a photo 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, select a photo folder, if necessary. Note: Photos captured by the camera on the phone are stored in the PIC-00 folder. 2. Scroll to the thumbnail image of the picture you want and press the View soft key. While viewing a photo, you can use the following options:Multimedia 123 • To zoom in or out, press or . • To send the picture as part of an MMS or e-mail message, press the Send soft key. • To edit the picture, press the Menu soft key and select Edit. You can then access the editing tool options by pressing the Menu soft key. • To set the picture as wallpaper for the Home screen, press the Menu soft key and select Use as Home Screen. Viewing photos as a slide show You can view all of your pictures as a slide show, a sequential presentation of each image in the current album. Press the Menu soft key and select Play Slide Show. The slide show begins on the full screen. • To change the screen to the Landscape view or Portrait view, press the Up or Down key. • To manually scroll through the pictures, press the Left or Right key. • To stop the slide show and return to the Pictures & Videos screen, press . Playing a video 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, Press the Menu soft key and select Folders → My Device → My Documents → My Videos. 2. Select a video folder, if necessary. Multimedia 124 Note: Videos captured by the camera on the phone are stored in the Mov-00 folder. 3. Scroll to the thumbnail image of the video clip you want and press the Play soft key. Beaming a file You can send a picture or video clip to another phone via an active infrared or Bluetooth connection. For an Bluetooth connection, make sure that the Bluetooth feature is active. 1. Open a folder, if necessary, and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam.... 3. For an IrDA connection, align the infrared ports on the devices so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. Wait for the phone to search for available devices. 4. Scroll to a device and press the Beam soft key. Switching to another folder You can open files in any folder in the other directory of your phone. 1. From Pictures & Videos screen, press the Menu soft key and select Folders. 2. Select a folder. If necessary, repeat this step to open a subfolder.Multimedia 125 Copying or moving files 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, open the folder you want and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit → Cut or Copy. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Folders → another folder. 4. Press the Menu soft key and select Edit → Paste. Deleting a file 1. From the Pictures & Videos screen, open the folder you want and scroll to the file you want. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Delete. 3. Press the Yes soft key to confirm the deletion. Customising settings From the Pictures & Videos screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options to access the following options: • General: allows you to select a maximum size of pictures for sending via e-mail messages, or select a rotating orientation. • Slide Show: allows you to select an orientation of a slide show or set whether or not the slide show plays as a screen saver when the phone is connected to a computer and in Idle mode.8 126 Extra programs Games Your phone includes fun games, such as Solitaire in Games. You can also download and play new Java games. To open Games: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key twice, and select Games. Solitaire The object of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up the four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with aces. Playing a game 1. On the Start screen, select Solitaire. 2. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen and then make any other available plays. To move cards, press the number or character of the card to move and then press the number or character of the stack to which you want to move the card. Note: Pressing the Up key moves a card to one of the four stacks in the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. 3. When you have made all available plays, press the Draw soft key to turn over cards.Extra programs 127 Funbox Funbox is a folder where downloaded games are stored. To download new games, press the Download soft key. Your phone launches the WAP browser and loads the preset website which provides you with the latest news and information about games and game downloads. To play a game, select one from the FunBox screen. How to play may vary from game to game. Calculator The calculator allows you to perform general mathematical functions, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Calculator. 3. Enter the numbers and perform calculations by pressing the Navigation keys (Up: +, Down: –, Left: /, Right: x). 4. To execute the calculation, press .Extra programs 128 Smart Converter In Smart Converter, you can perform unit conversions. 1. On the Home Screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → Smart Converter. 3. Select a converter type. 4. Select an original unit and enter the value to be converted in the upper Unit field. Note: Press to add a decimal point. In the temperature converter, press to change the temperature to below or above zero. 5. Select a target unit from the lower Unit field. The equivalent value appears. Notes: • To reverse the unit fields for continuous conversions, press the Menu soft key and select Reverse. • For the currency converter, you may need to change currency rates. Press the Menu soft key and Currency rates.Extra programs 129 StopWatch You can measure elapsed time interval. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories and then More soft key. Press StopWatch. 3. Press the Start soft key to start the timer. 4. Press the Record soft key to check an interval. You can do this step for a total of 99 intervals. 5. Press the Stop soft key to stop the stopwatch. Voice Assist Voice Assist is a speech recognition program that enables you to launch programs or dial contacts by speaking an associated command into the microphone. Voice tips • Speak clearly, naturally, and continuously. • If you are in a very noisy environment, use the headset. If you are not using the headset, address the internal microphone at the bottom of the phone at a distance of about 10 to 20 cm from your mouth. • Speak when Voice Assist is ready to listen, as indicated by the progress bar and after an audible beep. • If Voice Assist does not clearly hear what you said, try repeating your voice command.Extra programs 130 Using Voice Command functions On the Home screen, press the Start soft key on the Home screen and select More soft key and press Voice Assist. Dialling a number You can make a phone call by saying the name that has been assigned to a contact in Contacts or the SIM card. Note: To use the Name Dial feature, the name that you want to dial must be in Contacts or the SIM card. 1. On the Voice Command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say “Name Dial”. 2. On the Name Dial screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a name in the following manner:”” If Voice Assist does not hear anything until the progress bar moves to the end, you will be asked to repeat the command up to 3 times. Note: You can say “Call” and then a person’s name stored in Contacts or on the SIM card to make a call by voice command. 3. Your phone recognises your commnad and displays a list of one or more names in the confirmation screen. 4. Scroll to the item you want to open and press the Ok soft key.Extra programs 131 5. If the selected name has more than one number, the phone asks which number you want to dial. 6. If you press the Ok soft key or say nothing for 3 seconds, the phone dials the currently selected number. Searching for contacts You can retrieve contact information for any name in Contacts or the SIM card by saying that name. Your phone displays the information. 1. On the Voice command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say “Name Search”. 2. On the Name Search screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a name in the following manner:”” 3. Your phone recognises your command and displays a list of one or more names in the confirmation screen. Opening programs by voice You can use your voice to launch programs that exist in Start menu. 1. On the Voice Command screen, after a voice prompt followed by a short beep, say a program name in the following manner:”Open ”. 2. Your phone recognises your command and displays a list of one or more applications in the confirmation screen. Note: If Quick Launch is checked at Settings, this confirmation step will be skipped and the best recoginition result wil be excuted immediately.Extra programs 132 Customising the Voice Command settings You can customise the various settings for using Voice Assist by pressing the Settings soft key on the Voice Command screen. • Timeout: Adjust the maximum time to listen to your commands. • Voice Guides:Check for more comprehensive voice prompts and responses. • Quick Launch: Check to skip the confirmation. • Sensitivity: Ajust the sensitivity in which your phone distinguishes the current voice and noise. Change the setting if your phone has difficulty recognising your voice. Picsel Viewer Picsel Viewer allows you to view documents on your phone without any file-conversion or loss of content. To view a document, you must transfer documents from a PC. If you have installed the memory card, you can view the files stored in it. By default, Picsel Viewer supports most common desktop document formats, such as .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pdf and .wmf. Note: Some document formats, such as .xls and .ppt, are not transformed into their corresponding file types when you copy them to your phone by using ActiveSync, so that you cannot view the documents in the directory. To avoid this case, change the conversion setting on the ActiveSync screen on your computer.Extra programs 133 To open Picsel Viewer: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Picsel Viewer. Viewing a document On the Picsel Viewer screen, the file directory of the phone is displayed. 1. Select the folder containing the document you want. If you have installed a memory card, Storage Card appears to allow you to access files on the memory card. 2. Select the document you want to open. Adobe PDF: , Microsoft World: , Microsoft Power Point: , Microsoft Excel: , Plain Text: , JPEG/ BMP/GIF/PNG: Go back to the upper level directory.Extra programs 134 Using options in a document view From a document view, you can use the number keypad to quickly perform an option. These are the keys you can use and options assigned to each key. • Panning: To pan to a different part of the document, press the Navigation keys to move to the direction you want. You can also press , , , , respectively. • Zooming: To zoom in or out, press to switch to zoom mode and then press the Navigation keys. You can also press or . • Fitting to width: To fit the width of the page on screen, press the Menu soft key and select Page → Fit to width. You can also press . • Navigating: To navigate the pages, press the Menu soft key and select Page → Next Page, Previous Page, First page, or Last page. You can also press , , , or , respectively. Viewing History The history view shows you previously visited documents as a small thumbnail-image of the document, and the document’s name, location, and the date of your visiting. To open the history view, press the Menu soft key and select History. To access any of the documents from the history view, select the small picture of that page. Note: Documents will remain on the history list until a certain number of days have passed. You can control this period in the option. See page 135.Extra programs 135 Viewing the Favourites list For your favourite documents, you can keep a list in Favourites. This looks similar to the history view but includes only those pages you have explicitly added. Before viewing the Favourites list, first you must add the pages to the Favourites list. To add the current page to the Favourites list: 1. Press the Menu soft key and select Favourites to access the Favourites list. 2. Press the Add/Delete soft key and select Add. 3. Enter the name you want and then press the OK soft key. To open a favourite page: Access the Favourites list and select the thumbnail of the page you want. Changing Picsel Viewer settings On the Picsel Viewer screen, press the Menu soft key and select Settings. The following options are available: • Preferences: Set the period after which the thumbnail pictures and descriptions of pages are removed from the history memory. To clear the History list, select Clear History. • Files: Select the file types which can be displayed on the Picsel Viewer screen. Select All to select all file formats. • Help: Shows the Help screen for using Picsel Viewer. • About: Shows information about the developers of Picsel Viewer.Extra programs 136 File Manager The File Manager program allows you to open an explorer window similar to a desktop Windows based system. The explorer window allows you to navigate through your phone to locate the desired folders and files. You can also quickly manage, delete, copy, or edit any files and folders on your phone. Note: If you turn off the phone after storing some files in any folders, except for the Storage folder, using ActiveSync, all of the files in those folders will be deleted. Store important files in the Storage folder to prevent them from being deleted. Accessing files 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select File Manager. The list of the folders in the phone’s memory displays. 3. Scroll to the folder that you want to view. 4. Select an item to open it. Extra programs 137 Using file management options From the file directory, you can use the number keypad to quickly perform an option. The options can be accessed by pressing the Menu soft key. These are the keys you can use and options assigned to each key. • (Folder Tree): Returns to the folder tree screen • (Favorites): Opens the favorite file list. • (Properties): Shows the file properties. • (Scroll to Top): Moves to the top of the file list. • (Refresh): Updates the file directory. • (Scroll up): Scrolls up by one page. • (Scroll to End): Moves to the end of the file list. • (Search): Allows you to search for a file by entering a keyword. The phone will search for files under the currently accessed folder. • (Scroll down): Scrolls down by one page. • (Select): Selects a file or folder. • (Unselect All): Deselects all checked files. • (Select All): Selects all files in the current folder. In addition, you can access the following options: • To use editing tools, press the Edit soft key. • To create a new folder, press the Edit soft key and select New Folder. • To send a file, press the Menu soft key and select Send → a sending option. • To change the order of files or folders, press the Menu soft key and select View → a sort option.Extra programs 138 SIM Manager The SIM Manager program enables you to view the contact cards stored on the SIM card and to copy the contact(s) from the SIM card to the contact list on your phone. You can also create a new contact card on the SIM card, edit, and delete the contact card. Viewing SIM contacts 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 2. Select Accessories → SIM Manager. The contact list is displayed on the SIM Manager screen. 3. From the SIM contact list: • To create a new entry, press the New soft key. • To register the phone number and name as the own number on the SIM card, press the Menu soft key and select Own Number. • To view the amount of the contacts, SMS messages, and CB messages stored on the SIM card, press the Menu soft key and select Memory Status. • To refresh the SIM contacts, press the Menu soft key and select Refresh.Extra programs 139 Copying contact cards to the Contacts application You can copy a contact or all contacts stored on the SIM card to the Contacts program. 1. On the SIM Manager screen, select the check box next to the contact name you want to copy to your phone. If you want to copy all contacts, press the Menu soft key and select Check → Check All #. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select SIM Tool → Copy to Contacts. 3. To change the number category, press the Menu soft key and select Change (M/H/W). 4. Press the Copy soft key. 5. Press the OK soft key. Using the SIM Manager options On the SIM Manager screen, press the Menu soft key and select SIM Tool. The following options are available. • View: shows the selected SIM entry. • Edit: allows you to edit the selected entry. • Delete Entries: allows you to delete the selected entry(ies). • Dial: dials the number in the selected entry.Extra programs 140 • Send SMS: sends the SMS message using the number in the selected entry. • Copy to Contacts: copies the selected entries to Contacts. • Beam: allows you to send the selected entry via an infrared connection. Using the SMS Tool options Sometimes, text messages may be stored on the SIM card, depending on their specifications. To view these messages, press the Menu soft key and select SMS Tool. You can view a list of the sender’s phone numbers of the received SMS messages stored on the SIM card. On the SIM SMS Tool screen, press the Menu soft key to move SIM messages from the SIM card to the phone’s memory and view or delete an SMS message. To jump across your selection between the SIM list and the PDA list, press the Change soft key. Task Manager Your phone is a multi-tasking device. It can run more than one program at the same time. However, multi-tasking may cause hang-ups, freezing, memory problems, and additional power consumption. To avoid these problems, end unnecessary programs using Task Manager. To open Task Manager: On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories and then the More soft key. Press Task Manager. The list of all the programs currently running on your phone appears.Extra programs 141 Managing running programs • To activate a program, press the Menu soft key and select Activate. • To close a program, press the Stop soft key. To close all programs, press the Menu soft key and select Stop All. • To refresh the program list, press the Menu soft key and select Refresh. Checking the memory status You can check the memory in use for running programs or storing files and information. Press the Menu soft key and select Memory. Checking the storage memory You can check the memory in use for storing files in each storage device: Storage Card and Storage. On the Task Manager screen, press the Menu soft key and select Storage. To format the memory card, press the Menu soft key and select Format Storage Card.9 142 Getting connected You can use your phone to exchange information with other mobile devices as well as your desktop computer, a network, or the Internet. You have the following connection options: • Use the infrared (IR) port on your device to send and receive files between two devices. • Exchange information between devices with Bluetooth capabilities without a physical connection. • Connect the phone to your computer using a USB or IrDA connection to use the phone as a modem. • Connect to your Internet service provider (ISP) or the network at your company. Once connected, you can send or receive e-mail and instant messages, and browse the Internet or intranet. Beaming with infrared connections Your phone can send and receive files to and from other IR devices. In most cases, you can also receive files from your PC when it is equipped with an infrared port. The two devices must be aimed at each other approximately 10 centimetres apart.Getting connected 143 If you have difficulty getting the two devices to send or receive data, try the following: • Make sure that the infrared port windows are clear and free of any dirt or obstructions and that there are no obstacles between the infrared port windows. • Adjust the room lighting or move to another location. Some types of lighting may interfere with transmission. Note: Your phone’s IrDA function is only compatible with Microsoft Smart Phones and Windows 2000/XP computers. Activating or deactivating IrDA reception You must activate the infrared port to let your phone to detect incoming IR transmissions and receive data. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Beam. 3. Select Receive incoming beams. 4. Press the Done soft key. Receiving data 1. Make sure that your phone’s display is activate and align the infrared port on your phone with the one on another device. Note: The display on your phone must be active. 2. Have the other device send the data to your phone. 3. When prompted to receive an incoming data, press the Yes soft key.Getting connected 144 Sending data 1. Open the item you want in a program. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Beam, followed by the type of item, such as Contact or Appointment. If you send an item in File Manager, press the Menu soft key and select Send → via IR. 3. Align the infrared port on your phone with the one on the other device. The two devices starts an IrDA connection and the other device name appears on your phone. 4. Press the Beam soft key. Note: The display on your phone must be active. Beaming with Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology. Devices with Bluetooth capabilities can exchange data over a distance of about 10 metres without requiring a physical connection. Unlike infrared, you do not need to line up the phone with another device to beam information with Bluetooth. Activating Bluetooth mode 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key.Getting connected 145 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Bluetooth → Bluetooth. 3. On the Bluetooth screen, select the operating mode you want in the Bluetooth field. You can use the following operating mode: • On: The Bluetooth radio is turned on and you can use Bluetooth features. • Off: The Bluetooth radio is turned off. You can neither send nor receive data by using Bluetooth. • Discoverable: The Bluetooth radio is turned on, and all of the other Bluetooth devices within range (about 10 meters) can detect your device and attempt to beam data to your device, establish a bond, or use a Bluetooth service. 4. Press the Done soft key. Searching for and pairing with a Bluetooth device 1. On the Bluetooth screen, press the Menu soft key and select Devices. 2. To search for a new device, press the Menu soft key and select New. 3. Wait for the phone to search for Bluetooth devices. 4. Select the device you want. 5. Enter a Bluetooth passkey and press the Next soft key. This passkey is used just once and you do not need to memorise it. Getting connected 146 When the owner of the other device enters the same passkey, paring is finished. Note: Some devices, especially headsets or hands-free car kits, may have a fixed Bluetooth passkey, such as 0000. If the other device has one, you must enter the passkey. 6. Enter a display name for the other device and press the Next soft key. 7. Press the OK soft key. Using the device options When you press the Menu soft key from the device list, you can access the following options: • New: allows you to search for any devices. • Edit: allows you to change the name of the connectable device. • Delete: allows you to delete the device. • Set as Hands-free: allows you to use the connectable device as a hands-free kit. You can converse with the other person on the phone without holding the phone to your ear during a call. • Set as wireless Stereo: allows you to play the audio files.Getting connected 147 Receiving data with Bluetooth 1. When a notification that a remote device is trying to connect to your phone, press the Bluetooth passkey entered from the device and press the Next soft key. 2. When prompted to receive an incoming data, press the Yes soft key. Modem link Using Modem Link, you can set your phone to be used as an external modem for another device or computer when connected via the USB port or infrared port. 1. Make sure that your phone is not connected with another device. 2. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key. 3. Select Accessories → Modem Link. 4. If you first access this program, press the Done soft key. 5. Select the type of connection, baud rate, and access point name. 6. Press the Activate soft key to activate Modem Link. 7. Press the Done soft key. Note: • When Modem Link is activated, you cannot use ActiveSync. • When Windows Service Pack 2 is used, Internet access using Modem Link is more stable.Getting connected 148 Connecting to the Internet or your network You can use the Connections settings to create dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), GPRS, and proxy connections so that you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. By using a data connection, you can browse the Internet, download e-mails, chat by using MSN® Messenger, or synchronise remotely with an Exchange Server. Check with your service provider to see if a data connection has already been set up for you, and if over-the-air configuration is supported. Creating a dial-up connection You can create a dial-up connection to connect remotely to the Internet, a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) network, or your corporate network. Then, when you open a program that is configured to use this connection, the phone uses it to automatically connect to the network. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Dial up. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects to: Select a type of network for which the connection will be used. • Phone number: Enter the dial-up number you use to connect to the network. • User name: Enter your network user name.Getting connected 149 • Password: Enter your password. • Domain: Enter the domain name, if required. Notes: • If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your service provider. • If you subscribe to General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), you can set up a GPRS connection to access your corporate network or the Internet, which is faster than a dial-up connection. For details, see “Creating a GPRS connection.” 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a GPRS connection If you subscribe to General Packet Radio Services (GPRS), you can set up a GPRS connection to gain access to your corporate network or the Internet. This is faster than a dial-up connection. You can also use your phone as a GPRS modem for a desktop computer. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → GPRS. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects to: Select a network type for which the connection will be used.Getting connected 150 • Access point: Enter the information provided by your system administrator. • User name: Enter your user name for the GPRS network. • Password: Enter your password. • Primary DNS: Enter the primary domain naming system (DNS) address. • Secondary DNS: Enter the secondary DNS address. • IP address: Enter the Internet Protocol (IP) address. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your network administrator. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a proxy connection You can use a proxy connection to gain access to the Internet over an existing connection to your corporate network. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → Proxy. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • Connects from: Select the type of network from which you will connect. • Connects to: Select the type of network to which you will connect.Getting connected 151 • Proxy (name:port): Enter the proxy server name and port number in the form. • Type: Select a network type for which proxy connection will be used. • User name: Enter your user name for the network to which you will connect. • Password: Enter your password. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your service provider. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Creating a VPN connection If your company has set up a virtual private network (VPN), you can create a VPN connection to gain access to your corporate network over an Internet connection. 1. On the Home screen, press the Start soft key. 2. Select Settings → More... → Connections → More... → VPN. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the requested information. • Description: Enter a name for the connection. • VPN type: Select the type of VPN. • Server: Enter the VPN server name. • Connects from: Select the type of network from which you will connect to VPN (typically The Internet).Getting connected 152 • Connects to: Select the type of network to which you will connect (typically Work). • User name: Enter your user name for the VPN. • Password: Enter your password. • Domain: Enter the domain name, if required. • IPSec authentication: If you selected IPSec/L2TP for VPN type, select the type of authentication. • IPSec Pre-shared key: If you selected Pre-Shared Key for IPSec authentication, enter the shared key. Note: If you are not sure about the information to enter, ask your network administrator. 5. When you have finished, press the Done soft key. Setting up data connections After creating connection profiles, you can assign a profile to each network type. 1. On the Connections screen, press the Menu soft key and select Advanced. 2. Select a connection profile in each network. 3. Press the Done soft key.Getting connected 153 Adding a URL exception Some URLs for Web pages on your company intranet may use periods, for example: intranet.companyname.com. To view these pages in Internet Explorer, you must create a URL exception. Note: You do not need to create URL exceptions for Internet URLs. 1. On the Connections screen, press the Menu soft key and select Advanced. 2. Press the Menu soft key and select Work URL Exceptions. 3. Press the Menu soft key and select Add. 4. Enter the URL and press the Done soft key. Separate multiple URLs with a semicolon. Changing the data connection options On the Advanced screen, press the Menu soft key and select Options to access the following options: • Redial attempts: Select the redial attempt to connect the Internet or your network after an unsuccessful connection. • Idle disconnect after: Select the length of time your phone waits for connecting to the Internet or your network after the specified period, your phone will disconnect from the Internet or your network. • My desktop connects to: Select the type of network to which your desktop computer will connect.10 154 Troubleshooting General problems Problem Description & Solution “Invalid or missing SIM card. You can still make emergency calls if your service provider supports it” displays Check that the SIM card has been correctly installed. “No network coverage,” “Error unable to connect. No network coverage.” or “Message sending failed” displays • The network connection has been lost. You may be in a weak signal area (in a tunnel or surrounded by buildings). Move and try again. • You are trying to access an option for which you have not taken out a subscription with your service provider. Contact the service provider for further details. The bars next to disappear • If you have just turned on your phone, wait about 2 minutes, until your phone finds the network and receives a signal from the network. • If you are in a tunnel or in an elevator, the phone may not be able to receive the network signal properly. Move to an open place. • This may appear when you move between different service areas. It is normal. The display is not clear In direct sunlight, you may not see the display clearly. Moving to a place with different lighting should solve this problem.Troubleshooting 155 White lines appear on the display This may happen if you turn on the phone after a long period of disuse, or after removing the battery without turning off the phone. This is not related to the phone’s life or performance. The display should correct itself shortly. “PIN code” appears • You are using your phone for the first time. You must enter the Personal Identification Number (PIN) supplied with the SIM card. • The PIN check feature has been enabled. Each time the phone is switched on, the PIN has to be entered. To disable this feature, press the Start soft key and select Settings → More... → Security → Disable SIM PIN, and enter the PIN. “PUK Required” appears The PIN code was entered incorrectly three times in succession and the SIM card is now blocked. Enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. I forgot the lock, PIN, initialisation, or PUK codes If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet Service Provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 156 Call problems Problem Description & Solution I have entered a number but it was not dialled • Be sure that you have pressed • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the network is unobstructed. • You may have set an outgoing call barring option. My correspondent cannot reach me • Be sure that your phone is switched on ( pressed for more than one second) • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the network is unobstructed. • You may have set an incoming call barring option. My correspondent cannot hear me speaking • Be sure that you have switched on the microphone • Make sure that the phone is close enough to your mouth The microphone is located at the bottom of the phone. The audio quality of the call is poor • Adjust the voice volume by pressing . • Check the signal strength indicator on the display ( ); the number of bars indicates the signal strength, from strong to weak. • Try moving the phone slightly or moving closer to a window if you are in a building.Troubleshooting 157 Power and charging problems Calls to and from the phone are not connected properly, and are easily disconnected • Signals from the network are weak. Move to another area. • Touching the antenna area on the top of the phone may lower the call quality. Be careful not to touch the antenna area while using the phone. Problem Description & Solution While charging, the LED on the travel charger blinks • Disconnect the phone from the travel charger, remove the battery, and then replace it. Try charging again. • If the problem persists, clean the metal contacts on the battery and the phone. • If the actions above do not clear the problem, contact a Samsung service representative. The phone malfunctions or does not function Remove the battery and then replace it. Turn on the phone. Or press the hole on the bottom of the phone to perform a soft reset. If the problem persists, contact a Samsung service representative. The LED on the travel charger turns to yellow The travel charger is overheated. Disconnect the charger from the phone or unplug it from the power outlet. Wait until the charger cools down and then recharge the phone. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 158 The battery’s standby time is shorter than expected • Batteries are subject to wear and tear. Standby time may grow shorter as time passes. • Leaving the fully charged battery in a cold or hot place for a long period of time may reduce battery life. • Standby time depends on where you use the phone. The actual time may differ from the battery’s specifications. Is it OK if I leave the phone connected to the power outlet after it is fully charged (indicated by the green LED on the charger is on) We recommend that you disconnect the phone from the charger or unplug the charger from the power outlet. The phone becomes hot This may happen when you are on the phone or when you use programs, such as games, the Internet, or the camera, because the phone needs more power at those times. This does not affect the phone’s life and performance. The battery level seem sufficient, but the phone does not turn on • Remove the battery from the phone and reinstall it. Then turn on the phone. • Clean the metal contacts both on the battery and on the phone. Reinstall the battery and turn on the phone. The phone turns off when the charger is connected Some dust on the contacts may cause unexpected power-off or charging problems. Clean the metal contacts both on the battery and on the phone. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 159 Application problems Problem Description & Solution “Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first.” or “Memory low. Delete some data.” displays To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, press the Start soft key and then the More soft key, and select Accessories and then the More soft key , and press Task Manager. Press the Menu soft key and select Memory. Delete old items from programs. If necessary, make a backup copy of your data using ActiveSync or the memory card. Browser “Unable to connect. Verify your Dial-up or proxy settings are correct, and try again.” displays Insert proper browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. The phone is unable to connect to the Internet • Check if you have set up and are connected to an Internet service provider. • Check if your wireless connection to your mobile service provider is switched on and the signal from the GPRS network is not obstructed. • Verify with your service provider that your user name and password are correct. • Verify with your Internet service provider that the network you are trying to connect is available, or try to connect it from another PC.Troubleshooting 160 Camera Images seem smudged Check that the camera lens protection window is clean. Contacts No number is dialled when you recall a contact card • Check that a number has been stored in the contact card. • Re-store the number, if necessary. Infrared Data does not transfer via an infrared connection • Line up the infrared ports of two devices so that they are unobstructed and within close range. • Make sure that nothing is between the two infrared ports. • Adjust the room lighting. Some types of light interfere with infrared connections. Try moving to a different location or turning off some lights. Bluetooth I cannot end a Bluetooth connection If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth. Go to Bluetooth and select Bluetooth → Off. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 161 I cannot find my friend’s Bluetoothenabled device • Check that both have activated Bluetooth. • Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres or that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. • Check that the other device is not in Hidden mode. • Check that both devices are compatible. I cannot discover the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • Check if the Bluetooth functionality on the phone is turned on. • Check if the remote Bluetooth stereo headset is in the discoverable mode. • Check if the remote Bluetooth device has the capability to act as a stereo headset. I cannot connect to the remote Bluetooth stereo headset Ensure that the correct passkey was entered on the phone during the connection with the headset. Most Bluetooth headsets have a fixed passkey that would be mentioned in their user’s guide. You would need to enter the passkey when establishing a connection with the headset. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 162 I cannot listen to music on the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • Ensure that you are connected to the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Ensure that the song that you are playing is one of the supported formats. • Check the battery levels on the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Ensure that the phone and headset are within range of each other. The maximum distance between the two should not be more than 10 metres. There are breaks in the music being played on the remote Bluetooth stereo headset • You may observe breaks if there are walls that separate the phone and the Bluetooth stereo headset. • Be sure that the Bluetooth functionality on the phone is turned on and you have set the phone to be detected by other devices. Call history The call history appears empty You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press the Start soft key and select Call History. Press the Menu soft key and select Filter → No Filter. Messaging I cannot select a contact card when creating a message If the contact card does not have a phone number or e-mail address, you cannot select it. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts. Problem Description & SolutionTroubleshooting 163 If the above guidelines do not help you to solve the problem, take note of: • the model and serial numbers of your phone • your warranty details • a clear description of the problem Then contact your local dealer or Samsung after-sales service. PC connectivity Problems occur when connecting the phone to a PC Make sure that ActiveSync is installed and running on your PC. See the user’s guide for ActiveSync on the CD-ROM. For further information on how to use ActiveSync, see the help function on ActiveSync or visit www.microsoft.com. Problem Description & Solution11 164 Regulatory notices SAR certification information This phone meets European Union (EU) requirements concerning exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured so as not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio-frequency (RF) energy, as recommended by the EU Council. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through the periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as SAR (Specific Absorption Rate). The SAR limit recommended by the EU Council is 2.0W/Kg. * The highest SAR value for this model phone was 0.774 w/ Kg. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/ kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. The SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band.Regulatory notices 165 SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the phone. Before a new model phone is made available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE Directive must be shown. This directive includes as one of its essential requirements the protection of the health and safety of the user and any other person. European union notice Products with CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC), the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in brackets are the equivalent international standards): • EN 60950 (IEC 60950) - Safety of Information Technology Equipment • ETS 300 342-1 (June 1997) - Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) for European digital cellular telecommunications system (GSM 900MHz, GSM 1800MHz, and GSM 1900MHz); Part 1: Mobile and portable radio and ancillary equipmentRegulatory notices 166 • GSM11.10 • ANSI/IEEE C.95.1-1992- specific absorption rate in mobile phone emission condition for body health • FCC part 15 and part24 • prENV50166-2, 1995 for SAR • SAR: 0.774mW/10g Important safety information Retain and follow all product safety and operating instructions. Observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions. To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire, and/ or damage to the equipment, observe the following precautions: General precautions Heed service markings: Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating or Service documentation, do not service any product yourself. Service needed on components inside these compartments should be done by an authorised service technician or provider. Damage requiring service: Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and refer servicing to an authorised service technician or provider under the following conditions: • Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen into the product. • The product has been exposed to rain or water.Regulatory notices 167 • The product has been dropped or damaged. • There are noticeable signs of overheating. • The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Avoid hot areas: The product should be placed away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Avoid wet areas: Never use the product in a wet location. Avoid pushing objects into product: Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings in the product. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation. These openings must not be blocked or covered. Mounting Accessories: Do not use the product on an unstable table, cart, stand, tripod, or bracket. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid unstable mounting: Do not place the product with an unstable base. Use product with approved equipment: This product should be used only with personal computers and options identified as suitable for use with your equipment. Adjust the volume: Turn down the volume before using headphones or other audio devices. Cleaning: Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but NEVER use water to clean an LCD screen.Regulatory notices 168 Safety precautions for power supply unit Use the correct external power source: A product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of power source required, consult your authorised service provider or local power company. For a product that operates from battery power or other sources, refer to the operating instructions that are included with the product. Handle battery packs carefully: This product contains a Lithium Polymer battery. There is a risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is handled improperly. Do not attempt to open or service the battery pack. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts or circuits, dispose of in fire or water, or expose a battery pack to temperatures of higher than 60°C (140°F). Note: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with specified batteries. Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations or reference guide supplied with your product.Regulatory notices 169 Care and maintenance Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years. • Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children and pets. They may inadvertently damage these things or choke on small parts. • Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and liquids contain minerals that corrode electronic circuits. • Do not use the phone with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the phone. • Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas, as its moving parts may be damaged. • Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. • Do not store the phone in cold areas. When the phone warms up to its normal operating temperature, moisture can form inside the phone, which may damage the phone’s electronic circuit boards. • Do not drop, knock or shake the phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. • Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the phone. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.Regulatory notices 170 • Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the device’s moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Do not put the phone in or on heating devices, such as a microwave oven, a stove or a radiator. The phone may explode when overheated. • When the phone or battery gets wet, the label indicating water damage inside the phone changes colour. In this case, phone repairs are no longer guaranteed by the manufacturer's warranty, even if the warranty for your phone has not expired. • If your phone has a flash or light, do not use it too close to the eyes of people or animals. This may cause damage to their eyes. • Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas or modified accessories may damage the phone and violate regulations governing radio devices. • If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.Regulatory notices 171 Microsoft End User License Agreement • You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”), for use in connection with wireless network services provided under separate agreement between you and a wireless telecommunications provider (“Mobile Operator”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • SOFTWARE includes software already installed on the DEVICE (“DEVICE Software”) and MS software contained on the CD-ROM disk (“Companion CD”).Regulatory notices 172 GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license: DEVICE Software. You may use the DEVICE Software as installed on the DEVICE. All or certain portions of the DEVICE Software may be inoperable if you do not have and maintain a service account with an appropriate Mobile Operator, or if the Mobile Operator's network facilities are not operating or configured to operate with the DEVICE software. COMPANION CD. Additional software for your personal computer is included with your DEVICE, and you may install and use the Microsoft® ActiveSync® component on one (1) or more computers to exchange information with one (1) or more computing devices that contain a compatible version of the Microsoft® phone 2003 Software. For other software component(s) contained in the Companion CD, you may install and use such components only in accordance with the terms of the printed or online end user license agreement(s) provided with such component(s). In the absence of an end user license agreement for particular component(s) of the Companion CD, you may install and use only one (1) copy of such component(s) on the DEVICE or a single computer with which you use the DEVICE. Microsoft® Outlook® 2002. If Microsoft Outlook 2002 is included with your Device, the following terms apply to your use of Microsoft Outlook 2002: (i) regardless of the information contained in “Software Installation and Use” section of the online EULA you may install one (1) copy of Microsoft Outlook 2002 on one (1) computer to use, exchange data, share data, access and interact with the DEVICE, and (ii) the EULA for Microsoft Outlook 2002 is between the Company and the end user - not between the PC manufacturer and end user.Regulatory notices 173 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS • Speech/Handwriting Recognition. If the SOFTWARE includes speech and/or handwriting recognition component(s), you should understand that speech and handwriting recognition are inherently statistical processes; that recognition errors are inherent in the processes; and that errors can occur in the component's recognition of your handwriting, and the final conversion into text. Neither Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech and handwriting recognition processes. • Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. • Single DEVICE. The DEVICE Software is licensed with the DEVICE as a single integrated product. The DEVICE Software installed in read only memory (“ROM”) of the DEVICE may only be used as part of the DEVICE. • Single EULA. The package for the DEVICE may contain multiple versions of this EULA, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple versions of the EULA, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the DEVICE Software. Regulatory notices 174 • NOTICE REGARDING THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD. The SOFTWARE may include MPEG-4 visual decoding technology. MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires the following notice: USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C. If you have questions regarding this Notice, please contact MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 Steele Street, Suite 300, Denver, Colorado 80206; Telephone 303 331.1880; FAX 303 331.1879 • Rental. You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE. • Software Transfer. You may not permanently transfer any of your rights under this EULA with regard to the DEVICE Software or Companion CD, except as permitted by the applicable Mobile Operator. In the event that the Mobile Operator permits such transfer, you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.Regulatory notices 175 • Termination. Without prejudice to any other rights, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts. • Security Updates. The SOFTWARE may include digital rights management technology. If SOFTWARE does contain digital rights management technology, content providers are using the digital rights management technology (“Microsoft DRM”) contained in the SOFTWARE to protect the integrity of their content (“Secure Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. Owners of such Secure Content (“Secure Content Owners”) may, from time to time, request MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries to provide security related updates to the Microsoft DRM components of the SOFTWARE (“Security Updates”) that may affect your ability to copy, display and/or play Secure Content through Microsoft software or third party applications that utilize Microsoft DRM. You therefore agree that, if you elect to download a license from the Internet which enables your use of Secure Content, MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries may, in conjunction with such license, also download onto your DEVICE such Security Updates that a Secure Content Owner has requested that MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries distribute. MS, Microsoft Corporation or their subsidiaries will not retrieve any personally identifiable information, or any other information, from your DEVICE by downloading such Security Updates. Regulatory notices 176 • Consent to Use of Data. You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. • Internet Gaming/Update Features. If the SOFTWARE provides, and you choose to utilize, the Internet gaming or update features within the SOFTWARE, it is necessary to use certain computer system, hardware, and software information to implement the features. By using these features, you explicitly authorize MS, Microsoft Corporation and/or their designated agent to use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS or Microsoft Corporation may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. • Internet-Based Services Components. The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your Device.Regulatory notices 177 • Links to Third Party Sites. The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates. Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates. • Additional Software/Services. The SOFTWARE may permit Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, addon components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”). • If Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. provides or makes available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. • If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s). Regulatory notices 178 • Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA • DEVICE Software. If the DEVICE Software is provided by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only”, you may install one copy of such DEVICE Software onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing DEVICE Software and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade DEVICE Software. • COMPANION CD. If any Companion CD component(s) is provided by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. separate from the DEVICE on CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only”, you may (i) install and use one copy of such component(s) on the computer(s) you use to exchange data with the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing Companion CD component(s). Regulatory notices 179 COPYRIGHT All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and “applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS or its suppliers (including Microsoft Corporation). You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS and its suppliers (including Microsoft Corporation). EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information, see http://www.microsoft.com/ exporting/.Regulatory notices 180 PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation, Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. support number provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. FOR APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTIES AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS PERTAINING TO YOUR PARTICULAR JURISDICTION, PLEASE REFER TO YOUR WARRANTY BOOKLET INCLUDED WITH THIS PACKAGE OR PROVIDED WITH THE SOFTWARE PRINTED MATERIALS.Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE) For the following product: GSM900/GSM1800/GSM1900 with Bluetooth Portable Cellular Telephone (Product description) SGH-i320 (Model name) Manufactured at: - Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd, 94-1 Imsoo-Dong, Gumi City, Kyung Buk, Korea 730-350* (factory name, address) to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents. Safety : EN 60950-1:2001 EMC : EN 301 489-01 v1.4.1 (08-2002) EN 301 489-07 v1.2.1 (08-2002) SAR : EN 50360:2001 EN 50361:2001 Network : EN 301 511 v9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 v1.6.1 (11-2004) We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC. The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/ EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body(ies): BABT, Balfour House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK Identification mark: 168 The technical documentation kept at: Samsung Electronics QA Lab. which will be made available upon request. (Representative in the EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK 2006. 04. 28 Yong-Sang Park / S. Manager (place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person) * It is not the address of the Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your phone.World wide Web http://www.samsungmobile.com English. 02/2006. Rev. 1.0 * Depending on the software installed or your service provider or country, some of the descriptions in this guide may not match your phone exactly. 基本用户指南 SCX-340x/340xW Series SCX-340xF/340xFW Series SCX-340xFH/340xHW Series 基本用户指南本指南提供 Windows 上的安装、基本操作和故障排除相关信息。高级本指南介绍不同操作系统环境中的安装、高级配置、操作和故障排除相关信息。根据机型或国家/地区的不同，可能不提供某些功能。2 基本 1. 简介主要优点 5 不同型号的功能 7 实用须知 13 关于本用户指南 14 安全信息 15 机器概览 20 控制面板概览 24 开机 29 本地安装驱动程序 30 重新安装驱动程序 31 2. 菜单概述和基本设置菜单概述 33 机器的基本设置 38 介质与纸盘 40 基本打印 52 基本复印 57 基本扫描 61 基本传真 62 3. 维护订购耗材和配件 67 可用耗材 68 可用维护零件 69 存放墨粉盒 70 摇匀墨粉 71 更换墨粉盒 73 监控耗材寿命 75 设置墨粉不足警报 76 清洁机器 77 机器搬运与存放方法提示 83 4. 故障排除避免卡纸的提示 85 清除原件卡纸 86 清除卡纸 91 了解状态 LED 95 了解显示屏消息 973 基本 5. 附录规格 103 法规信息 113 版权所有 1251. 简介本章提供在使用本机之前需要了解的信息。 • 主要优点 5 • 不同型号的功能 7 • 实用须知 13 • 关于本用户指南 14 • 安全信息 15 • 机器概览 20 • 控制面板概览 24 • 开机 29 • 本地安装驱动程序 30 • 重新安装驱动程序 31主要优点环保 • 为节省墨粉和纸张，本机支持环保功能（请参见第 54 页上的“环保打印”）。 • 为节省纸张，可以在一张纸上打印多页（请参见第 218 页上的“使用高级打印功能”）。 • 为节省纸张，您可以在纸张的两面进行打印（双面打印，手动）（请参见第 218 页上的“使用高级打印功能”）。 • 为了省电，在不使用时，本机可以大幅降低耗电量，自动节能。快速高分辨率打印 • 您能够以最高为 1,200 x 1,200 dpi 的有效输出分辨率进行打印。 • 快速、随需打印。 - 对于单面打印，20 ppm (A4) 或 21 ppm (Letter)。便捷性 • Easy Capture Manager 允许您使用键盘上的打印屏幕键轻松编辑和打印捕获的任何内容（请参见第 254 页上的“Easy Capture Manager”）。 • Samsung Easy Printer Manager和打印状态（或Smart Panel）是一些程序，它们监视并通知您机器状态，允许您自定义机器设置（请参见第 263 页上的“使用 Samsung 打印机状态” 或第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”）。 • 与使用普通程序相比，AnyWeb Print 可帮助您更轻松地捕捉、预览、处理和打印 Windows Internet Explorer 的屏幕（请参见第 255 页上的 “Samsung AnyWeb Print”）。 • 智能更新允许您在打印机驱动程序安装过程中检查最新软件并安装最新版本。此功能仅适用于 Windows。 • 如果您能访问 Internet，就可以通过 Samsung 网站 www.samsung.com > 查找产品 > 支持或下载获得帮助、支持应用程序、机器驱动程序、手册和订购信息。主要优点各种功能和应用程序支持 • 支持各种纸张大小（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。 • 打印水印：您可以用文字（如“机密”）来自定义文档（请参见第 218 页上的“使用高级打印功能”）。 • 打印海报：文档每页的文本和图片都可以放大，并且可以跨多张纸打印，然后可将其拼成一张海报（请参见第 218 页上的“使用高级打印功能”）。 • 可以在各种操作系统中打印（请参见第 109 页上的“系统要求”）。 • 您的机器配有一个 USB 接口和/或一个网络接口。支持各种无线网络设置方法 • 使用 WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) 按钮 - 您可以使用机器上的 WPS 按钮和接入点（无线路由器）轻松连接到无线网络。 • 使用 USB 电缆或网络电缆 - 您可以使用 USB 电缆或网络电缆连接并配置各种无线网络设置。 • 使用无线直连 - 借助无线或无线直连功能，您可以从移动设备轻松实现打印。请参见第 152 页上的“介绍无线网络设置方法”。不同型号的功能视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用。操作系统 (●：包含，空白：不提供）软件操作系统 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series Windows ● ● Macintosh ● ● Linux ● ● Unix 软件 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series SPL 打印机驱动程序 ● ● PCL 打印机驱动程序不同型号的功能 PS 打印机驱动程序 XPS 打印机驱动程序a ● ● 直接打印实用程序 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 扫描至 PC 设置 ● ● 传真至 PC 设置 ● 设备设置 ● ● Samsung 打印机状态 ● ● Smart Panel ● ● AnyWeb Print ● ● SyncThru™ Web Service ● (仅限 SCX-340xW Series) ● (仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series) SyncThru Admin Web Service ● (仅限 SCX-340xW Series) ● (仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series) Easy Eco Driver ● ● 软件 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series不同型号的功能 (●：包含，空白：不提供）传真 Samsung Network PC Fax ● 扫描 Twain 扫描驱动程序 ● ● WIA 扫描驱动程序 ● ● Samsung 扫描助手 ● ● SmarThru 4 SmarThru Office ● ● a. 对于 XPS 驱动程序，只通过 Samsung 网站 (www.samsung.com) 支持 Windows。软件 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series不同型号的功能多种功能功能 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series 高速 USB 2.0 ● ● 网络接口以太网 10/100 Base TX 有线 LAN ● (仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX340xHW Series) 网络接口 802.11b/g/n 无线局域网a ● (仅限 SCX-340xW Series) ● (仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX340xHW Series) 环保打印（控制面板） ● ● 双面打印（手动）b ● ● USB 内存接口内存模块大容量存储设备 (HDD) 双面自动进稿器 (DADF) 自动进稿器（ADF） ● 话筒 ● (仅限 SCX-340xFH/SCX-340xHW Series)不同型号的功能传真多方发送 ● 延迟发送 ● 优先发送 ● 双面发送安全接收 ● 双面打印发送/接收转发-传真 ● 发送/接收转发-电子邮件发送/接收转发-服务器扫描扫描至电子邮件扫描到 SMB 服务器扫描 FTP 服务器双面扫描扫描至 PC ● ● 功能 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series不同型号的功能 (●：包含，空白：不提供）复印身份证件复印 ● ● 缩小或放大的复印 ● 分页 ● 海报 ● 克隆 ● 书本 2 页/4 页缩印 ● 调整背景 ● ● 页边距移位除边灰度增强双面复印 a. 根据您所在国家或地区的不同，可能会购买不到无线局域网卡。对于某些国家/地区，只有 802.11 b/g 适用。请与向您出售机器的本地 Samsung 经销商或零售商联系。 b. 仅限 Windows。功能 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xHW Series SCX-340xFH Series实用须知机器不能打印 • 打开打印队列列表，从中除去文档（请参见第 53 页上的“ 取消打印作业”）。 • 卸载驱动程序并重新安装它（请参见第 30 页上的“本地安装驱动程序”）。 • 在 Windows 中将您的机器选作默认打印机（请参见第 217 页上的“将机器设置为默认机器”）。哪里可以买到附件或耗材？ • 请咨询 Samsung 经销商或零售商。 • 请访问 www.samsung.com/supplies。选择您的国家/地区，以查看产品服务信息。状态 LED 指示灯闪烁或常亮。 • 关闭产品电源，然后重新打开。 • 检查本手册中的 LED 指示含义并进行相应的故障排除（请参见第 95 页上的“了解状态 LED”）。发生卡纸现象。 • 打开和关闭扫描装置（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 检查本手册中的清除卡纸说明并进行相应的故障排除（请参见第 91 页上的“清除卡纸”）。打印输出模糊不清。 • 墨粉存量可能不足或不均匀。摇动墨粉盒（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。 • 尝试其他打印分辨率设置（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 • 更换墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。哪里可以下载机器驱动程序？ • 您可以通过 Samsung 网站 www.samsung.com > 查找产品 > 支持或下载获得帮助、支持应用程序、机器驱动程序、手册和订购信息。1. 简介 14 关于本用户指南本用户指南提供信息帮助您基本了解本机，并详细介绍了使用过程中的每一步操作。 • 请在使用机器之前阅读安全信息。 • 如果您在使用本机时遇到问题，请参阅“故障排除"一章。 • 本用户指南中所使用的术语在“术语表”一章中进行解释。 • 根据所购机器的选件或型号，本用户指南中的所有图示可能与您的机器不同。 • 根据机器的固件/驱动程序版本，本管理员指南中的屏幕截图可能与您的机器不同。 • 本用户指南中的步骤主要基于 Windows7。 1 约定本指南中的某些术语可交替使用，如下所示： • 文档与原件同义。 • 纸张与介质或打印介质同义。 • 机器指打印机或 MFP。 2 常见图标图标文字描述注意为用户提供信息，以免机器出现机械损坏或故障。备注提供有关机器功能与特性的附加信息或详细规格。1. 简介 15 安全信息附带提供这些警告和警示的目的是为了防止伤及您和他人，并防止对您的机器造成任何可能的损坏。在使用机器前，请务必阅读并理解所有这些说明。阅读完本部分后，请将其保存于安全之处，以便日后参考。 3 重要的安全符号本章使用的所有图标和符号的解释 4 操作环境警告警告可能导致严重人身伤害或死亡的危险情况或危险操作。注意可能导致轻微人身伤害或财产损失的危险情况或危险操作。请勿尝试。如果电源线已损坏或者电源插座未接地，请勿使用。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。请勿将任何物体放置于机器顶部（水、小块金属或重物、蜡烛、点燃的香烟等）。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。 • 如果机器过热，则其会冒烟，发出异响或有异味生成，此时应立即关闭电源开关并拔下机器的电流插头。 • 如果出现需要用户拔出插头的情况，用户应当能操作电源插座。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。请勿弯曲电源线或将重物放置于电源线上。踩踏电源线或者使电源线受重物挤压可能导致触电或者火灾。请勿拉拽电线以拔下插头；请勿用湿手接触插头。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。安全信息 1. 简介 16 注意 5 操作方法注意雷暴期间或者长时间不使用时，请从电源插座中拔下插头。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。小心，出纸区很热。可能导致烫伤。如果机器掉落，或者机壳损坏，请从所有接口连接上拔下线缆，然后向胜任的服务人员请求协助。否则，可能导致触电或者火灾。如果在遵循这些说明的情况下机器仍不能正常运行，请拔下机器的所有接口连接线缆，然后向胜任的服务人员请求协助。否则，可能导致触电或者火灾。如果插头不能轻松地插入电源插座，请勿尝试强行插入。请联系电工以更换电源插座，否则，可能导致触电。请勿让宠物撕咬交流电源线、电话线或 PC 接口连接线。这样可能导致触电或引发火灾，并/或伤害您的宠物。请勿在打印过程中强行将纸拉出。可能会对打印机造成损坏。小心，请勿将手放在机器和托纸盘之间。可能会导致您受伤。换纸或移除卡住的纸时，请小心操作。新纸的边缘比较锋利，可能导致割伤。大量打印时，出纸区的底部可能变热。请勿让儿童触摸。可能导致烫伤。移除卡住的纸时，请勿使用镊子或锋利的金属物体。否则可能损坏机器。请勿让过多纸张堆积在出纸盘。否则可能损坏机器。安全信息 1. 简介 17 6 安装/移动警告请勿堵塞或将物体推入通风口。注意这样可能导致部件温度升高，从而造成损坏或者火灾。使用此处规定之外的控制、调整或执行步骤可能会造成危险的辐射情况。本机器的电源获取设备是电源线。要关闭电源，请从电源插座上拔下电源线。请勿将机器放在有灰尘，潮湿或漏水的环境中。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。移动机器前，请关闭电源并拔下所有线缆。以下信息只是基于单位重量的建议值。如果您的身体状况不适合抬起物体，请不要抬起机器。请寻求帮助，并且为了安全抬起机器，请始终确保使用相应数量的搬运人员。然后抬起机器： • 重量小于 20 千克的机器需要 1 个人抬。 • 重量在 20 - 40 千克之间的机器需要 2 个人抬。 • 重量大于 40 千克的机器至少需要 4 个人抬。机器可能掉落，从而导致人员受伤或机器损坏。请勿将机器放置于不稳定的台面上。机器可能掉落，从而导致人员受伤或机器损坏。仅使用 No.26 AWG a 或者线规更大的电话线（如有必要）。否则，可能会对打印机造成损坏。确保将电源线插到接地的电源插座。否则，可能导致触电或者火灾。使用机器附带的电源线可实现安全运行。如果 110V 机器使用的电线长于 2 米，则线规应为 16 AWG 或更大。否则，将损坏机器，并且可能导致触电或者火灾。请勿在机器上放置盖板或者将其放在密闭场所，如柜子。如果机器通风不畅，则可能导致火灾。安全信息 1. 简介 18 7 维护/检查注意 8 耗材使用注意请勿使壁式插座和加长电线超负荷。这样可能减损性能，并导致触电或者火灾。机器应连接至标签上规定的功率级。如果您不确定并希望检查正在使用的功率级，请联系电力公司。 a. AWG：American Wire Gauge（美国线规）清洁机器内部前，请从壁式插座中拔下插头。请勿使用苯、涂料稀释剂或酒精来清洁机器；请勿直接向机器洒水。这样可能会导致触电或者火灾。人员在机器内部更换耗材或清洁内部时，请勿操作机器。您可能会受伤。保持耗材清洁，勿让儿童接触。儿童可能会受伤。请勿自行拆卸，维修或重新组装机器。否则可能损坏机器。机器需要维修时，请联系持证技术人员。要清洁并操作机器，请严格遵循机器附带的用户指南。否则可能损坏机器。请勿让电源电缆和插头接触面有灰尘或水。否则，可能导致触电或者火灾。 • 请勿取下用螺丝固定的任何盖板或防护装置。 • 定影器装置只能由经过认证的技术服务人员维修。未经认证的技术人员进行维修可能导致火灾或电击。 • 机器应仅由 Samsung 的技术服务人员维修。请勿拆卸墨粉盒。墨粉粉尘如被吸入或吞下，可能带来危险。安全信息 1. 简介 19 请勿点燃墨粉盒或定影器装置等任何耗材。这样可能导致爆炸或火灾。存放墨粉盒等耗材时，请勿让儿童接触。墨粉粉尘如被吸入或吞下，可能带来危险。使用墨粉等回收的耗材可能会对打印机造成损坏。如果因使用回收耗材而导致损坏，则将收取服务费。如果墨粉撒到衣服上，请勿使用热水清洗。热水会使墨粉渗入到衣服纤维中。请使用冷水洗涤。更改墨粉盒或移除卡住的纸时，应小心以避免墨粉粉尘接触您的身体或衣服。墨粉粉尘如被吸入或吞下，可能带来危险。1. 简介 20 机器概览 9 附件电源线快速安装指南软件 CD a a. 软件 CD 包含打印驱动程序、用户指南和软件应用程序。话筒b b. 仅限话筒机型（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。其他附件c c. 机器随附的其他附件可能因购买所在国家/地区及具体机型不同而异。机器概览 1. 简介 21 10 正视图 • 根据机器的型号，此图可能与您的机器不同。有不同类型的机器。 • 视型号或者国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。类型 A 1 扫描仪盖 7 出纸盘 7 6 1 2 5 4 8 9 10 11 3 2 控制面板 8 扫描仪玻璃板 3 手柄 9 扫描装置a b 4 纸盘 10 内盖 5 纸盒手柄 11 墨粉盒 6 输出支架 a. 打开扫描装置前，请合上扫描仪盖。 b. 小心不要夹到手指。机器概览 1. 简介 22 类型 B 3 10 9 1 2 5 8 7 6 4 12 13 14 11 15 16 17 18 19 1 进稿器盖 11 扫描仪盖 2 进稿器导板盖 12 扫描仪玻璃板 3 进纸器出纸盘 13 进稿器上的纸张宽度导板 4 进稿器输出支架 14 进稿器输入支架 5 控制面板 15 进纸器输入纸盘 6 手柄 16 话筒a a. 仅限话筒机型（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 7 送纸器 17 扫描装置b c b. 打开扫描装置前，请合上扫描仪盖。 c. 小心不要夹到手指。 8 纸盒手柄 18 内盖 9 输出支架 19 墨粉盒 10 出纸盘机器概览 1. 简介 23 11 后视图 • 根据机器的型号，此图可能与您的机器不同。有不同类型的机器。 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。类型 A 类型 B 1 USB 端口 2 电源插口 1 2 1 USB 端口 2 网络端口a a. 仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series。 3 电话分机插槽 (EXT.) 4 电话线插槽 (LINE) 5 电源插口 1 3 4 2 51. 简介 24 控制面板概览 • 根据机器的型号，此控制面板可能与本机不同。控制面板有许多类型。 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 12 类型 A 12 13 1 环保进入环保模式以降低 PC 打印时的墨粉和纸张使用量（请参见第 54 页上的“环保打印”）。 2 WPS a 无需计算机即可轻松配置无线网络连接（请参见第 154 页上的“使用 WPS 按钮”）。打印屏幕按下此按钮，状态 LED 将开始闪烁。如果只要打印活动屏幕，请在状态 LED 停止闪烁时放开此按钮。如果要打印整个屏幕，请在它闪烁时放开此按钮。 • 打印屏幕只能在 Windows 和 Macintosh 操作系统中使用。 • 只能在通过 USB 连接的机器上使用此功能。 • 当使用“打印”按钮打印活动中的窗口/全显示器屏幕时，打印机可能会耗用更多的碳粉，其取决于要打印的内容。 • 仅当已安装机器的 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序时才能使用此功能。如果使用 Macintosh 操作系统，您需要通过 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 启用打印屏幕设置才能使用打印屏幕功能。 3 扫描到发送已扫描的数据（请参见第 61 页上的“基本扫描 ”）。控制面板概览 1. 简介 25 4 ID 复印允许您将身份证件（如驾驶执照）的两面复印到纸张的单面（请参见第 59 页上的“身份证件复印”）。 5 电源打开或关闭电源，或从节能模式中唤醒机器。如果需要关闭机器，请按住此按钮超过 3 秒钟。 6 正面 LED LED 灯亮起时，将身份证的正面向下放在扫描仪的玻璃板上（请参见第 59 页上的“身份证件复印 ”）。 7 反面 LED LED 灯亮起时，将身份证的背面向下放在扫描仪的玻璃板上（请参见第 59 页上的“身份证件复印 ”）。 8 停止/清除随时停止操作，此外还有更多功能。 • 取消当前作业。 • 打印配置报告: 按住此按钮约 2 秒钟，直至状态指示灯慢速闪烁为止，然后松开。 • 耗材信息报告: 按住此按钮约 6 秒钟，然后松开。 • 网络配置报告a : 按住此按钮约 4 秒钟，直至状态指示灯快速闪烁为止，然后松开。 9 +/- 按钮允许您增加/减少要复印的页数。可通过按 +/- 按钮确定要复印的份数（最多 99 份）。默认值为 1。 • 如果按 +/- 按钮，份数会以 1 为单位增加/减少。 • 如果按住 +/- 按钮，份数会以 10 为单位增加/减少。 10 开始开始作业。 11 状态 LED 表明机器的状态（请参见第 95 页上的“了解状态 LED”）。 12 墨粉 LED 显示墨粉状态（请参见第 95 页上的“了解状态 LED”）。 13 显示屏显示要复印的页数。 a. 仅限 SCX-340xW Series。控制面板概览 1. 简介 26 13 类型 B 1 环保进入环保模式以降低 PC 打印和复印时的墨粉和纸张使用量（请参见第 54 页上的“环保打印”）。 2 WPS a 无需计算机即可轻松配置无线网络连接（请参见第 154 页上的“使用 WPS 按钮”）。打印屏幕按此按钮，显示将在显示屏上打印银幕?。如果只要打印活动屏幕，请选择活动。如果要打印整个屏幕，请选择完全。 • 打印屏幕只能在 Windows 和 Macintosh 操作系统中使用。 • 只能在通过 USB 连接的机器上使用此功能。 • 当使用“打印”按钮打印活动中的窗口/全显示器屏幕时，打印机可能会耗用更多的碳粉，其取决于要打印的内容。 • 仅当已安装机器的 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序时才能使用此功能。如果使用 Macintosh 操作系统，您需要通过 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 启用打印屏幕设置才能使用打印屏幕功能。 3 ID 复印允许您将身份证件（如驾驶执照）的两面复印到纸张的单面（请参见第 59 页上的“身份证件复印”）。 4 电源打开或关闭电源，或从节能模式中唤醒机器。如果需要关闭机器，请按住此按钮超过 3 秒钟。控制面板概览 1. 简介 27 5 传真切换到“传真”模式。 6 复印切换到“复印”模式。 7 扫描切换到“扫描”模式。 8 菜单打开“菜单”模式，并在可用菜单间滚动（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 9 左/右箭头在选定菜单的可用选项间滚动，以及增大或减小值。 10 OK 确认屏幕上的选择。 11 反面返回上一级菜单。 12 开始开始作业。 13 停止/清除随时停止操作。 14 状态 LED 表明机器的状态（请参见第 95 页上的“了解状态 LED”）。 15 数字键盘拨号或输入字母数字字符（请参见第 212 页上的“ 键盘字母和数字”）。 16 免提拨号按下该按钮时，可以听到拨号音。然后输入传真号码。它的使用方法与扬声器电话相似（请参见第 247 页上的“在电话模式中手动接收”）。 17 重拨/暂停在就绪模式下重拨上次发送传真的号码或接收的呼叫者 ID，或在编辑模式下在传真号码间插入暂停(-)（请参见第 241 页上的“重拨传真号码”）。 18 地址簿用于存储常用传真号码，或者搜索已存储的传真号码（请参见第 210 页上的“存储电子邮件地址”或第 213 页上的“设置传真地址簿”）。 19 显示屏显示当前状态，并在操作过程中显示提示。 a. 仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series。控制面板概览 1. 简介 28 14 调节控制面板根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。1. 简介 29 开机 1 首先将机器连接到电源。如果机器有电源开关，将它打开。根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 2 自动打开电源。对于 SCX-340x/SCX-340xW Series，按控制面板上的（电源）按钮。如果要关闭电源，请按住（电源）按钮约 3 秒钟。1. 简介 30 本地安装驱动程序本地连接的打印机是使用线缆与您的计算机直接连接的机器。如果您的打印机已联网，则跳过以下步骤，继续安装联网打印机的驱动程序（请参见第 140 页上的“通过网络安装驱动程序”）。 • 如果您使用 Macintosh 或 Linux 操作系统，请参阅第 130 页上的 “Macintosh 安装”或第 132 页上的“Linux 安装”。 • 根据使用的机器和界面的不同，此用户指南中的安装窗口可能会有所差异。 • 选择自定义安装可让您选择要安装的程序。 • 仅使用长度不超过 3 米的 USB 电缆。 15 Windows 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。如果安装过程中出现“找到新硬件向导”窗口，请单击取消关闭该窗口。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。如果不显示安装窗口，单击开始 > 所有程序 > 附件 > 运行。 X:\Setup.exe，用代表您的 CD-ROM 驱动器的字母替换“X”，然后单击确定。 3 选择立即安装。 4 阅读许可协议，然后选择我接受许可协议的条款。然后单击下一步。 5 按照安装窗口内的说明进行操作。1. 简介 31 重新安装驱动程序如果打印机驱动程序不能正常工作，请执行下列步骤重新安装驱动程序。 16 Windows 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 从开始菜单选择程序或所有程序 > Samsung Printers > 打印机驱动程序名称 > 卸载。 3 按照安装窗口内的说明进行操作。 4 将软件 CD 放入 CD-ROM 驱动器中，再次安装驱动程序（请参见第 30 页上的“本地安装驱动程序”）。2. 菜单概述和基本设置本章介绍整体菜单结构和基本设置选项的相关信息。 • 菜单概述 33 • 机器的基本设置 38 • 介质与纸盘 40 • 基本打印 52 • 基本复印 57 • 基本扫描 61 • 基本传真 622. 菜单概述和基本设置 33 菜单概述使用控制面板可进入不同菜单，从而设置机器或使用机器的功能。 • SCX-340x/SCX-340xW Series 不支持此功能（请参见第 24 页上的“ 控制面板概览”）。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 根据机器的选件或机型，某些菜单的名称可能与您的机器不同。 • 高级指南中描述这些菜单（请参见第 181 页上的“实用设置菜单”）。 1 访问菜单 1 根据要使用的功能，从控制面板中选择“传真”、“复印”或“扫描”按钮。 2 选择（菜单），直至您需要的菜单出现在显示屏的最后一行，然后按OK。 3 按箭头，直到出现需要的菜单项，然后按OK。 4 如果设置项有子菜单，则重复步骤 3。 5 按OK保存所作的选择。 6 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。项目选项传真功能暗度正常深+1-深+5 浅+5-浅+1 对比度正常深+1-深+5 浅+5-浅+1 分辨率标准精细超精细照片传真颜色传真扫描范围多方发送延迟发送菜单概述 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 34 传真功能（续）优先发送转发传真 PC 安全接收关闭打开打印添加页面取消作业传真设置发送重拨次数重拨期限拨号前缀 ECM 模式发送报告图像 TCR 拨号模式a 项目选项传真设置（续）接收接收模式响铃应答接收署名盖章接收开始代码自动缩小废弃尺寸垃圾传真设置 DRPD模式a 更改默认设置分辨率暗度对比度扫描范围自动报告打开关闭复印功能扫描范围缩小/放大暗度正常深+1-深+5 浅+5-浅+1 项目选项菜单概述 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 35 复印功能（续）对比度正常深+1-深+5 浅+5-浅+1 原稿类型文本文本/ 照片照片版式正常 2页缩印单面4页 ID 复印海报复印克隆复印调节背景关闭自动增强级别 1 增强级别 2 清除级别 1-清除级别 4 项目选项复印设置更改默认设置扫描范围份数复印分页缩小/放大暗度对比度原稿类型调节背景项目选项菜单概述 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 36 系统设置设备设置设备 ID 传真号码日期和时间时钟模式语言节能叫醒事件系统超时高度调整自动继续b 纸张不匹配纸张更换b 节省炭粉环保设置纸张设置纸张大小纸张类型边距项目选项系统设置（续）声音/音量按键声音警报声音喇叭振铃音报告所有报告配置耗材信息位置簿发送传真发送的传真接收到的传真计划作业垃圾传真网路配置c 使用计数器传真选项维护清除已空消息d 耗材寿命序列号墨粉不足警报项目选项菜单概述 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 37 系统设置（续）清除设置所有设置传真设置复印设置系统设置网路设置c 位置簿发送的传真接收到的传真网路 c TCP/IP (IPv4) DHCP BOOTP 静态 TCP/IP (IPv6) 激活 IPv6 配置 DHCPv6 Ethernet 速度立即 10Mbps 半双工 10Mbps 全双工 100Mbps 半双工 100Mbps 全双工项目选项网路 c（续）无线 Wi-Fi 开/ 关 Wi-Fi Direct WPS 设置 WLAN 设置 WLAN 默认设置 WLAN 信号清除设置网路配置 a. 该选项是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。 b. 仅当启用纸张不匹配时，显示该选项。 c. 仅限 SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series。 d. 仅当墨盒中剩余少量墨粉时，显示该选项。项目选项2. 菜单概述和基本设置 38 机器的基本设置如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）：您可以在 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分配置机器的设置。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。完成安装后，可能需要设置机器的默认设置。要更改机器的默认设置，请按照以下步骤操作：对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。 1 选择控制面板上的（菜单）按钮。 2 按系统设置 > 设备设置。 3 选择所需选项，然后按 OK。 • 语言: 更改控制面板上显示的语言。 • 日期和时间: 当您设置时间与日期时，时间与日期在延迟传真与延迟打印中使用。时间与日期将被打印在报告上。但是，如果日期和时间不正确，则需要将其更改为正确的时间。使用箭头或数字键盘输入正确的时间和日期（请参见第 212 页上的“键盘字母和数字”）。 • 月 = 01 到 12 • 日 = 01 到 31 • 年 = 需要四位数 • 小时 = 01 到 12 • 分 = 00 到 59 • 时钟模式: 您可以将机器设置为以 12 小时或 24 小时格式显示当前时间。 • 节省炭粉: 墨粉节省模式可使您的机器使用较少的墨粉打印每页。与普通模式相比，激活此模式可以延长墨粉盒的使用寿命，但是会降低打印质量。进行 PC 打印时，也可在打印机属性中打开或关闭墨粉节省模式。 • 节能: 如果您长时间不使用机器，请使用此功能节能。机器的基本设置 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 39 • 按电源按钮时开始打印，或收到传真，将从节能模式中唤醒本产品。 • 依次按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 设备设置 > 叫醒事件 > 按钮 > 打开。按下除电源按钮以外的任何按钮，将从节能模式中唤醒机器。 • 高度调整: 打印质量会受大气压影响，大气压取决于机器在海平面以上的高度。在您设置海拔值之前，请确定所在地的海拔（请参见第 209 页上的“海拔调整”）。 4 选择所需选项，然后按 OK。 5 按OK保存所作的选择。 6 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。要配置通过本机实现的其他实用设置，请参阅以下链接。 • 请参见第 212 页上的“输入不同的字符”。 • 请参见第 212 页上的“键盘字母和数字”。 • 请参见第 46 页上的“设置纸张大小和类型”。 • 请参见第 213 页上的“设置传真地址簿”。2. 菜单概述和基本设置 40 介质与纸盘本章将介绍将打印介质装入机器的方法。 • 使用不符合这些规格要求的打印介质可能会引起各种问题，或导致需要维修。此类维修不在 Samsung 的保修或服务协议之列。 • 切勿将喷墨照片纸与此机器配合使用。这样做可能会对打印机造成损坏。 • 使用易燃的打印介质可能会引起火灾。 • 请使用指定的打印介质（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。使用易燃的介质或将异物留在打印机中可能会导致设备过热，在少数情况下可能会引起火灾。 2 纸盘概述要更改大小，需要调节纸张导板。 1 纸张宽度导板 2 送纸器根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。如果不调节导板，它可能导致纸张套准、图像歪斜或卡纸。 1 2介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 41 3 在纸盘中装纸根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 1 打开纸盘。然后，按照装入的介质大小调节纸盘大小（请参见第 40 页上的“纸盘概述”）。 2 请在装入纸张之前将纸摞边弯折或成扇形展开，使纸张分离。 3 将纸张打印面朝上放置。 1 2介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 42 • 请勿过度推动纸张宽度导板，否则会导致介质变形。 • 不要使用先进入打印机一端卷曲的纸张，它可能导致卡纸或纸张褶皱。 • 如果不调节纸张宽度导板，则会导致卡纸。 4 捏住纸张宽度导板，滑动它，使其触及纸叠的边缘但又不致让纸叠打弯。 5 打印文档时，请为纸盘设置纸张类型和大小（请参见第 46 页上的“ 设置纸张大小和类型”）。从打印机驱动程序进行的设置将覆盖控制面板上的设置。 a 如想在应用程序中打印，请开启应用程序，然后打开打印菜单。 b 打开打印首选项（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 c 按打印首选项中的纸张选项卡，然后选择一种适合的纸张类型。例如，如果您希望使用标签，请将纸张类型设置为标签。 d 在纸张来源中选择自动选择（或手动进纸器），然后按确定。 e 开始在应用程序中打印。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 43 4 纸盘手动进纸纸盘可放置特殊大小和类型的打印介质，如明信片、便笺卡片和信封（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。要在纸盘中手动进纸，请单击以下项：请参见第 41 页上的“在纸盘中装纸”。纸盘手动进纸的使用提示 • 如果从打印机驱动程序中选择纸张 > 来源 > 手动进纸器，则每打印一页都需要按OK。 • 在纸盘中每次只放一种类型、大小和重量的打印介质。 • 为了防止在打印时卡纸，在纸盘中还有纸张时请不要加纸。 • 打印介质应打印面朝上放入纸盘之中，顶边应先进入纸盘，同时介质应放在纸盘的中央。 • 为了确保打印质量和避免卡纸，仅装入可用纸张（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。 • 在将明信片、信封和标签装入纸盘前，请先将其压平。 • 打印特殊介质时，必须遵循装纸准则（请参见第 43 页上的“在特殊介质上打印”）。 5 在特殊介质上打印下表所示为纸盘可用的特殊介质。打印首选项中还显示介质。要获得最高打印质量，从打印首选项窗口 > 纸张选项卡 > 纸张类型中选择正确的介质类型（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。例如，如果要在标签上打印，为纸张类型选择标签。 • 当使用特殊介质时，我们建议您一次仅进一张纸（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。有关每张纸的重量，请参阅第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”。类型纸盘a 普通纸 ● 厚纸 ● 薄纸 ● 证券纸 ● 彩色 ●介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 44 (●：包含，空白：不提供）信封能否在信封上成功打印取决于信封的质量。要打印信封，如下图所示放置信封。 • 选择信封时，请考虑以下因素： - 重量: 不应超过 90 g/m2，否则会卡纸。 - 构造: 应将信封先放平，卷曲度应小于 6 毫米，且信封内不能有空气。 - 状况: 不应有褶皱、缺口或其他损坏。 - 温度: 操作过程中应当能经受机器热量和压力。 • 只使用结构合理、折叠平整的信封。 • 请勿使用贴有邮票的信封。 • 请勿使用带有夹子、咬合装置、窗口、涂层内衬、自粘性封条或其他合成材料的信封。 • 请勿使用已破损或劣质信封。卡片纸 ● 标签 ● 信封 ● 预印纸 ● 棉质纸 ● 再生纸 ● 存档纸 ● a. 纸盘中可用于手动进纸的纸张类型。类型纸盘a介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 45 • 确保信封两端的密封边一直延伸到信封角。 1 适宜 2 不适宜 • 已揭开粘合条的信封或者用多个封口叠在一起进行封合的信封必须使用符合机器熔融温度的粘合剂，该温度为 0.1 秒内约为 170°C。额外的信舌和封条会导致信封出现褶皱、折痕或卡纸现象，甚至可能损坏定影器。 • 为获得最佳打印质量，页边距与信封边缘的距离不得小于 15 毫米。 • 避免在信封接缝重叠的区域打印。标签纸请仅使用专为激光打印机设计的标签，以免损坏机器。 • 选择标签时，请考虑以下因素： - 粘合材料: 应当能在机器的热熔温度下保持稳定（约 170°C）。 - 布局: 只使用彼此之间没有露出衬纸的标签。标签间的空隙会让标签脱离衬纸，从而导致严重卡纸。 - 卷曲: 必须放平，在各个方向上的卷曲度都不能超过 13 毫米。 - 状况: 请勿使用起皱、发泡或有分离迹象的标签。 • 确保标签之间没有裸露的粘合材料。裸露区域可使标签在打印期间脱离，从而导致卡纸。暴露的粘合材料还会损坏机器组件。 • 请勿在机器上多次运行一张由多个标签组成的纸张。背胶只能通过机器一次。 • 请勿使用与衬纸分离的标签，以及起皱、起泡或损坏的标签。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 46 卡片纸/自定义大小的纸张 • 在软件应用程序中，介质页边距应至少设置为 6.4 毫米。预印纸当装入预印纸时，打印过的一面应朝上，并且让未卷曲边位于前部。如遇到进纸问题，请将纸张翻转。请注意，这种情况下无法保证打印质量。 • 必须使用耐热墨水打印，在机器的热熔温度下（约 170 °C），这种墨水在 0.1 秒内不会融化、蒸发或释放出有害气体。 • 预印纸油墨必须具有非易燃性，不得对机器辊产生不利影响。 • 在装入预印纸之前，请确认纸上的油墨已干。在定影过程中，湿油墨可能会从预印纸上脱落，从而降低打印质量。 6 设置纸张大小和类型在纸盘中装入纸张后，使用控制面板按钮设置纸张大小和类型。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 47 如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）：您可以在 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分配置机器的设置。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。 1 选择控制面板上的（菜单）按钮。 2 按系统设置 > 纸张设置 > 纸张大小或纸张类型。 3 选择纸盘和所需选项。 4 按 OK 按钮保存所作的选择。 5 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 • 从打印机驱动程序进行的设置将覆盖控制面板上的设置。 a 如果要从应用程序打印，请打开应用程序，然后打开打印菜单。 b 打开打印首选项（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 c 按纸张选项卡并选择适当的纸张。 • 如果要使用帐单纸等特殊大小的纸张，请在打印首选项中依次选择纸张选项卡 > 尺寸 > 编辑...并设置自定义纸张尺寸设置（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 48 7 使用输出支架如果一次打印份数较多，出纸盘的表面可能会发烫。请勿触摸表面，且不要让儿童靠近。打印页堆叠在输出支架上，输出支架可帮助对齐打印页。默认情况下，打印机将输出件送到出纸盘。根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 8 准备原件 • 请勿装入小于 142 × 148 毫米或大于 216 × 356 毫米的纸张。 • 为了避免卡纸、打印质量不佳以及机器受损的情况出现，不得试图装入下列类型纸张。 - 复写纸或背面可复写的纸张 - 涂层纸 - 葱皮纸或薄纸 - 起皱或有折痕的纸 - 卷曲或光泽纸 - 撕裂的纸张 • 装入前请取下所有订书钉和回形针。 • 装入前请确保纸张上的胶水、油墨或修正液完全变干。 • 请勿装入纸张大小或重量不同的原件。 • 请勿装入书册、小册子、透明胶片或其他特殊性质的文档。 9 装入原件您可以使用扫描仪玻璃板或进稿器装入原件，以进行复印、扫描和发送传真。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 49 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。在扫描仪玻璃板上使用扫描仪玻璃板，可以复印或扫描原件。可以获得最佳扫描质量，尤其是对于彩色或灰度图像。确保进纸器中无任何原件。如果在进纸器中检测到原件，则其优先级会高于扫描仪玻璃板上的原件。 1 提起并打开扫描仪盖。 2 将原件正面朝下放置在扫描仪玻璃板上。将其与玻璃板左上角的定位指示对齐。 3 合上扫描仪盖。 • 复印时如果让扫描仪盖保持打开状态，则会影响复印质量，且会增加墨粉用量。 • 扫描仪玻璃板上如有灰尘，可能会使打印件出现黑点。请务必使其保持清洁（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 如果是复印书籍或杂志中的某页，请提起扫描仪盖，直到其转轴与挡块相触，然后合上扫描仪盖。如果书籍或杂志厚度超过 30 毫米，则应打开扫描仪盖开始复印。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 50 • 请注意不要打破扫描仪玻璃板。可能会导致您受伤。 • 关闭扫描仪盖时不要将手放进扫描仪。扫描仪盖会掉在您的手上，导致受伤。 • 在复印或扫描过程中，请不要注视从扫描仪内部发出的强光。此光会对眼睛有害。在进纸器中使用进稿器时，一次作业最多可以装入 40 张纸 (80 g/m2 )。 1 打开进稿器导板盖。 2 请在装入原件之前将纸摞边弯折或成扇形展开，使纸张分离。 3 将原件正面朝上装入进稿器输入纸盘。确保原件纸叠底端与进纸纸盘上标记的纸张大小相符。介质与纸盘 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 51 4 按照纸张大小调节进纸器宽度导板。如果进纸器玻璃板上积有灰尘，则会使导致印件上出现黑线。必须始终保持玻璃板清洁（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。2. 菜单概述和基本设置 52 基本打印有关特殊打印功能，请参阅《高级指南》（请参见第 218 页上的“使用高级打印功能”）。 10 打印如果您使用 Macintosh 或 Linux 操作系统，请参阅高级指南（请参见第 226 页上的“Macintosh 打印”或第 227 页上的“Linux 打印”）。以下打印首选项窗口适用于 Windows 7 中的记事本。 1 打开要打印的文档。 2 从文件菜单中选择打印。 3 从选择打印机列表中选择机器。 4 份数与打印范围等基本打印设置可在打印窗口中选择。要充分利用高级打印功能，请在单击打印窗口中单击属性或首选项（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 5 要开始打印作业，请在打印窗口中单击打印或确定。基本打印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 53 11 取消打印作业如果打印作业在打印队列或打印假脱机服务中等候，请如下取消作业： • 您只需双击 Windows 任务栏中的机器图标（）即可访问此窗口。 • 也可以按控制面板中的（停止/清除）取消当前作业。 12 打开打印首选项 • 在本用户指南中出现的打印首选项窗口会因所使用的机器不同而有所差异。 • 当您在打印首选项中选择一个选项时，您会看到一个警示标记或。号表示您可以选择该选项，但不建议作出如此选择，号表示鉴于机器的设置或环境，您不可选择该选项。 1 打开要打印的文档。 2 从文件菜单中选择打印。将显示打印窗口。 3 从选择打印机中选择机器。 4 单击属性或首选项。可按打印机状态按钮检查机器的当前状态（请参见第 263 页上的“使用 Samsung 打印机状态”）。使用偏好设置借助各个首选项选项卡上的预设选项（只有 Samsung 选项卡上没有该选项），可以保存当前的首选项设置供日后使用。基本打印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 54 要保存预设项，请执行以下步骤： 1 按需更改各选项卡上的设置。 2 在预设输入框中输入项目名称。 3 单击（添加）。当保存预设时，当前所有驱动程序设置会随之保存。选择多个选项，然后单击（更新），设置将添加到您所做的预设中。要使用已保存的设置，请从预设下拉列表中进行选择。此时机器设置为根据您选择的设置进行打印。要删除已保存的设置，请从预设下拉列表中选择它并单击（删除）。还可以从预设下拉列表中选择默认预设值，从而恢复打印机驱动程序的默认设置。 13 使用帮助在打印首选项窗口中单击要查看的选项，然后按键盘上的 F1 键。 14 环保打印环保功能可减少墨粉消耗和纸张用量。环保功能可以帮助您节省打印资源并实现环保打印。在控制面板中按 Eco 按钮将启用环保模式。环保模式的默认设置为每面多页 (2) 以及省墨。在控制面板上设置环保模式如果机器的控制面板上有 +/- 按钮或机器不是受支持的网络（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）：您可以在 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分配置机器的设置。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。基本打印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 55 • 从打印机驱动程序进行的设置将覆盖控制面板上的设置。 • 访问菜单可能因型号不同而异（请参见第 33 页上的“访问菜单”）。 • 对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。 1 从控制面板中依次选择（菜单）> 系统设置 > 设备设置 > 环保设置。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。 • 默认模式: 选择它可打开或关闭环保模式。（省墨/2 页缩印） - 关闭：将环保模式设置为关闭。 - 打开：将环保模式设置为打开。如果通过 SyncThru™ Web Service（设置选项卡 > 机器设置 > 系统 > 环保 > 设置）或 Samsung Easy Printer Manager（设备设置 > 环保）为环保模式设置密码，将显示强制消息。必须输入密码才能更改环保模式状态。 • 选择模板：: 按照 Syncthru™ Web Service 或 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 的设置操作。选择该项之前，您必须通过 SyncThru™ Web Service（设置选项卡 > 机器设置 > 系统 > 环保 > 设置）或 Samsung Easy Printer Manager（设备设置 > 环保）设置环保功能。 - 默认 Eco：机器设置为默认 Eco 模式。 - 自定义 Eco：更改任何必要值。 3 按 OK 按钮保存所作的选择。选择驱动程序的环保模式打开 Eco 选项卡进行环保模式设置。如果看到环保图像 ( )，表明当前已启用环保模式。环保选项 • 打印机默认值: 遵循机器控制面板中的设置。 • 无: 禁用环保模式。 • 环保打印: 启用环保模式。激活要使用的各种环保项。 • 密码: 如果管理员启用环保模式，您必须输入该密码才能更改状态。结果模拟器结果模拟器显示根据所选设置二氧化碳排放、使用电量的减少情况和纸张节省情况。 • 结果计算以禁用环保模式时完整打印一百张纸（无空白页）为基础。 • 请参阅 IEA、日本总务省指数以及 www.remanufacturing.org.uk 的二氧化碳、能源和纸张计算系数。每个模型的指数不同。 • 打印模式下的耗电量是指此机器的平均打印耗电量。基本打印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 56 • 实际显示的量只是一个估算值，因为实际量可能因使用的操作系统、计算性能、应用程序软件、连接方法、介质类型[厚度]、介质尺寸、作业复杂性等不同而异。2. 菜单概述和基本设置 57 基本复印有关特殊打印功能，请参阅《高级指南》（请参见第 184 页上的“复印菜单”）。 15 基本复印如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）： a 将单页原件正面朝下放在扫描仪玻璃板上。 b 如果要自定义包括暗度、原稿类型等在内的复印设置，您可以使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。 c 依需要使用 +/- 按钮输入复印份数。 d 按（开始）。 1 选择控制面板上的（复印）。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 如果需要自定义包括缩小/放大、暗度、对比度和原稿类型等在内的复印设置，请使用控制面板按钮（请参见第 57 页上的“更改每次复印的设置”）。 4 如果需要，使用箭头或数字键盘输入复印份数。 5 按（开始）。如果需要在操作期间取消复印作业，按 (停止/清除），复印将停止。 16 更改每次复印的设置本机提供复印的默认设置，使您可以快速，轻松地进行复印。基本复印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 58 • 如果在设置复印选项时按（停止/清除）按钮两次，则为当前复印作业设置的所有选项都将取消并恢复默认状态。或者，它们将在完成正在进行的复印后自动恢复默认状态。 • 访问菜单可能因型号不同而异（请参见第 33 页上的“访问菜单”）。如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮：您可以使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分自定义暗度、原稿类型等复印设置。 - Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 - Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。 • 对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。明暗度如果原件包含模糊标记和深色图像，您可以调节亮度，使复印件易于阅读。 1 从控制面板中选择（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能 > 暗度。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。例如，浅+5为最浅，而深+5为最深。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。暗度对比度菜单允许您增加或降低图像明暗区域之间的差异。 1 从控制面板中选择（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能 > 对比度。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。选择深色增加对比度，或选择浅色降低对比度。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。原始通过为当前复印作业选择文档类型，进行原始设置，从而提高复印质量。 1 从控制面板中选择（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能 > 原稿类型。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。 • 文本：适用于内容主要是文本的原件。 • 文本/ 照片:适用于带有文本和照片的原件。如果打印输出中的文本模糊不清，请选择文本以打印出清晰的文本。 • 照片：适用于原件是照片的情况。基本复印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 59 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。缩小或放大的复印件您可以通过进稿器或扫描仪玻璃板将复印图像的大小缩放 25% 到 400%。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 • 如果机器设置为环保模式，则缩小和放大功能不可用。从预定义的复印尺寸中选择 1 从控制面板中选择（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能 > 缩小/放大。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。通过直接输入缩放比例来缩放复印件 1 从控制面板中选择（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能 > 缩小/放大 > 自定义。 2 使用数字键盘输入所需的复印大小。 3 按 OK 按钮保存所作的选择。 4 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。进行缩小复印时，复印件底部可能会出现黑线。 17 身份证件复印本机可以在一页纸上打印双面的原件。机器将在纸张的上半部分打印原件的其中一面，在下半部分打印另一面，而不会缩小原件的尺寸。对于小尺寸文档的复印（如名片），此功能非常有用。 • 要使用此功能，原件必须放置在扫描仪玻璃板上。 • 如果机器设置为环保模式，则此功能不可用。操作程序可能因型号而异。基本复印 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 60 1 按控制面板上的 ID 复印。 2 将原稿正面朝下放在扫描仪玻璃上带有箭头指示的地方（如图所示）。然后，合上扫描仪盖。 3 放入文档前端再按[开始] 出现在显示屏上。如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮，控制面板上的“正面 LED” 会点亮。 4 按（开始）。机器将开始扫描正面，并显示放入文档后端再按[开始]。如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮，控制面板上的“背面 LED” 会点亮。 5 翻转原件，并根据扫描仪玻璃板上所示的箭头将其放在扫描仪玻璃板上。然后，合上扫描仪盖。 6 按（开始）按钮。 • 如果不按（开始）按钮，将只复印正面。 • 如果原件大于可复印区域，则部分内容可能无法打印。2. 菜单概述和基本设置 61 基本扫描有关特殊扫描功能，请参阅《高级指南》（请参见第 231 页上的“扫描功能”）。 18 基本扫描这是扫描原件的常规过程。对于用 USB 方式连接的机器来说，这是一种基本扫描方法。 • 对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。 • 如果要使用网络扫描，请参阅高级指南（请参见第 232 页上的“从联网机器扫描”）。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（扫描）> 扫描到PC。或者按控制面板上的扫描到。如果看到不可用消息，请检查端口连接或选择从设备面板启用扫描（依次选择 Samsung Easy Printer Manager > 切换到高级模式 > 扫描至 PC 设置。 3 选择所需的扫描目标并按OK。默认设置为我的文档。 • 您可以创建并将常用设置另存为配置文件列表。还可以添加和删除配置文件，将每个配置文件保存到不同的路径。 • 要更改 Samsung Easy Printer Manager > 切换到高级模式 > 扫描至 PC 设置。 4 选择所需选项并按OK。 5 扫描即会开始。扫描图像保存在计算机的 C:\用户\users name\我的文档。保存文件夹可能会因您所使用的操作系统或应用程序的不同而有所差异。2. 菜单概述和基本设置 62 基本传真 • SCX-340x/SCX-340xW Series 不支持此功能（请参见第 24 页上的“ 控制面板概览”）。 • 有关特殊传真功能，请参阅《高级指南》（请参见第 241 页上的“传真功能”）。 • 不能使用此机器通过 Internet 电话发送传真。有关更多信息，请咨询您的 Internet 服务提供商。 • 在为了使用传真机而连接电话线时，建议使用传统模拟电话服务（PSTN：公用电话交换网）。如果使用其他 Internet 服务（DSL, ISDN, VolP），可以使用微过滤器提高连接质量。微过滤器可以消除不必要的噪音信号，提高连接质量或 Internet 质量。由于 DSL 微过滤器不随机提供，因此请联系 Internet 服务提供商，以了解使用 DSL 微过滤器的事宜。 1 电话线端口 2 微过滤器 3 DSL 调制解调器 / 电话线（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。 19 准备发送传真在发送或接收传真前，需将随机提供的线缆连接到墙壁上的电话插座中（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。有关连接方法，请参考快速安装指南。在不同的国家和地区，电话连接的方法可能不同。 20 发送传真当您放置原件时，可使用进纸器或扫描仪玻璃板。如果将原件同时放置在进纸器和扫描仪玻璃板上，则机器将先读取位于进纸器（其扫描优先级更高）上的原件。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（传真）。 3 根据您的传真需要调整分辨率和黑度（请参见第 64 页上的“调整文档设置”）。 4 输入目标传真号码（请参见第 212 页上的“键盘字母和数字”）。 5 按控制面板上的（开始）。机器将开始扫描并将传真发送到目标。基本传真 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 63 • 如果希望直接从计算机上发送传真，请使用 Samsung Network PC Fax（请参见第 242 页上的“发送计算机中的传真”）。 • 如果要取消传真作业，请在机器开始传送前按（停止/清除）。 • 如果使用扫描仪玻璃板，则机器将显示要求您放置另一页的消息。手动发送传真执行以下操作，使用控制面板上的（免提拨号）发送传真。如果您的机器是话筒型号，可使用话筒发送传真（请参见第 10 页上的 “多种功能”）。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（传真）。 3 根据您的传真需要调整分辨率和黑度（请参见第 64 页上的“调整文档设置”）。 4 按控制面板上的（免提拨号）或拿起话筒。 5 使用控制面板上的数字键盘输入传真号码。 6 在听到远程传真机发出高音调的传真信号时，按控制面板中的（开始）。将传真发送至多个目标您可以使用多路发送功能，将一个传真发送到多个位置。原件会自动存储在内存之中，然后发送到远程站点。发送之后，原件会自动从内存中清除。如果选择超精细作为选项或者传真为彩色，则无法使用此功能发送传真。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（传真）。 3 根据您的传真需要调整分辨率和黑度（请参见第 64 页上的“调整文档设置”）。 4 从控制面板中选择（菜单）> 传真功能 > 多方发送。 5 输入首台接收传真机的号码，然后按OK。您可以按速拨号码或使用（地址簿）按钮选择组拨号码。 6 输入第二个传真号码，然后按OK。显示屏要求输入发送文档的另一个传真号码。基本传真 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 64 7 要输入更多传真号码，在显示是时按OK，然后重复步骤 5 和 6。 • 最多可以输入 10 个目标。 • 输入一个组拨号码后，就不能再输入其他组拨号码了。 8 输入完传真号码后，按左/右箭头在另一编号?提示下选择否，然后按OK。机器开始按输入顺序将传真发送到输入的号码。发送传真后将打印多方发送报告。 21 接收传真本机器出厂时被预设为传真模式。在接收传真时，机器以指定的响铃次数应答来电，并自动接收传真。 22 调整文档设置在开始传真之前，根据原件的状态更改下列设置后，以获得最佳质量。对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。分辨率使用基于文本的典型原件时，默认文档设置可以产生良好的传真效果。但在发送质量低劣的或含有照片的原件时，可以调整分辨率以获得更高质量的传真效果。 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 分辨率。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。 • 标准:字符为正常大小的原件。 • 精细:含有小字符或细线的原件，或使用点阵式打印机打印的原件。 • 超精细:含有非常精细内容的原件。仅当与您通信的机器也支持“ 超精细”分辨率的情况下，才能启用超精细模式。 • 对于内存传输而言，超精细模式不可用。分辨率设置被自动更改为精细。 • 如果将机器分辨率设置为超精细，而与您通信的传真机不支持超精细分辨率，则机器将使用对方传真机支持的最高分辨率模式传送。 • 照片传真:含有灰色阴影或照片的原件。 • 颜色传真:带有颜色的原件。基本传真 2. 菜单概述和基本设置 65 • 此模式下，内存传输不可用。 • 发送彩色传真的两个必备条件是：对方传真机支持彩色传真接收，您手动发送传真。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。暗度可以选择原稿的暗度等级。黑度设置适用于当前传真作业。要更改默认设置（请参见第 190 页上的“传真菜单”）。 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 暗度。 2 选择所需的暗度。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。3. 维护本章介绍有关订购机器的可用耗材、配件和维护零件的信息。 • 订购耗材和配件 67 • 可用耗材 68 • 可用维护零件 69 • 存放墨粉盒 70 • 摇匀墨粉 71 • 更换墨粉盒 73 • 监控耗材寿命 75 • 设置墨粉不足警报 76 • 清洁机器 77 • 机器搬运与存放方法提示 833. 维护 67 订购耗材和配件不同国家/地区的可用配件不同。要获得可供应的耗材和维护部件的清单，请与您的销售代表联系。如想订购由 Samsung 授权的耗材，配件与维护零件，请联系购买机器所在地的 Samsung 经销商或零售商。您还可访问 www.samsung.com/supplies，然后选择您所在国家/地区，从而了解服务联系信息。3. 维护 68 可用耗材当耗材使用寿命结束时，您可以为您的机器订购以下耗材：根据选项、图像区域的百分比以及所使用的作业模式，墨粉盒的使用寿命可能不同。购买新的墨粉盒或其他耗材时，只能在您使用机器的国家/地区购买。否则新墨粉盒和其他耗材可能无法兼容您的机器，因为这些会因国家/地区不同而存在差异。 Samsung 推荐不要使用非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒，例如重新装填或改装的墨粉盒。Samsung 不能保证非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒的质量。机器保修不涵盖由于使用非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒而需要的服务或维修。类型平均打印页数a a. 额定打印量符合 ISO/IEC 19752 标准。页数会受操作环境、打印间隔、图形、介质类型和介质大小的影响。零件名称墨粉盒约 1,500 页 MLT-D101S3. 维护 69 可用维护零件如想购买维护零件，请联系您购买机器的经销商。只能售予您机器的授权服务供应商、经销商或零售商更换维护零件。保修范围不包括更换任何已达到“ 平均打印量”的维护零件。为避免零件磨损而导致打印质量和进纸问题，请定期更换维护零件（参见下表）。此举的目的是为了使打印机始终维持在最佳工作状态。对于下列维护零件，应该在达到使用寿命时进行更换。零件平均打印页数a a. 打印速度受所用操作系统、计算性能、应用软件、连接方式、介质类型、介质大小和作业复杂度影响。传墨辊约 30,000 页定影器装置约 30,000 页拾取辊约 30,000 页进纸辊约 30,000 页 ADF 进纸辊b b. 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。约 20,000 页 ADF 橡胶垫b 约 20,000 页3. 维护 70 存放墨粉盒墨粉盒包含光、温度和湿度敏感组件。Samsung 建议用户遵循这些建议使用新的 Samsung 墨粉盒来确保最佳性能、最高质量及最长寿命。请将此墨粉盒存放在与要使用打印机的环境相同的环境中。该环境应处于受控制的温度和湿度条件下。墨粉盒在安装前不应该揭开原始包装－如果无原始包装，请用纸盖住墨粉盒的顶部开口处，然后将墨粉盒存放在阴暗机柜中。揭开墨粉盒包装而不使用墨粉盒会显著缩短墨粉盒的使用寿命。不要将墨粉盒放在地板上。如果从打印机上取下墨粉盒，请按下述说明正确存放墨粉盒。 • 将墨粉盒存放在随原始包装提供的保护袋中。 • 存放时，应水平而不是垂直放置，并且与安装在机器中时具有相同朝上面。 • 切勿将耗材存放在任何以下环境中： - 温度超过 40 °C。 - 湿度范围小于 20% 或大于 80%。 - 湿度或温度急剧变化的环境。 - 阳光或室内灯光直射。 - 积满灰尘的位置。 - 不要在汽车中存放太长时间。 - 存在腐蚀性气体的环境。 - 存在盐雾的环境。 1 处理说明 • 切勿接触硒鼓中感光鼓的表面。 • 切勿使墨粉盒受到不必要的震动或冲击。 • 切勿手动旋转感光鼓，尤其是反向旋转；否则会导致内部损坏和墨粉溢出。 2 墨粉盒使用 Samsung Electronics 不建议，也不批准在本打印机中使用非 Samsung 品牌墨粉盒，包括一般、商店品牌、重新装填或改装的墨粉盒。 Samsung 的打印机保修不涵盖由于使用重新装填、改装或非 Samsung 品牌墨粉盒而导致的机器损坏。 3 预计墨粉盒寿命预计墨粉盒寿命（墨粉盒的打印时间）依赖于打印作业所需的墨粉量。实际打印量可能不同，具体取决于所打印页面的打印密度、操作环境、图像区域百分比、打印间隔、介质类型和/或介质尺寸。例如，如果您打印大量图形，则将使用较多的墨粉，因此您可能需要较频繁地更换硒鼓。3. 维护 71 摇匀墨粉当墨粉盒即将达到使用寿命时： • 出现白色条纹或字迹变淡和/或两侧密度不同。 • 状态 LED 呈红色闪烁。对于带有墨粉 LED 的机器，它会闪烁橙色。此时通过摇匀墨粉盒内剩余的墨粉，可暂时改进打印质量。在某些情况下，即使摇匀墨粉之后仍然会出现白色条纹或字迹变淡的现象。根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 为了避免对墨粉盒造成损坏，切勿将其暴露在光线下超过数分钟。如果需要，请用纸将其遮盖。 • 请勿接触墨粉盒的绿色区域。请使用墨粉盒上的手柄，以免触及此区域。 • 请勿用刀子或剪子等锋利的物体来打开墨粉盒包装。这些器具可能会划伤墨粉盒的感光鼓。 • 如果不慎将墨粉沾到衣物上，请用干布擦拭并用冷水清洗。热水会使墨粉渗入到衣服纤维中。 • 打开扫描装置，将进稿器和扫描装置一起握住。摇匀墨粉 3. 维护 72 1 23. 维护 73 更换墨粉盒 • 充分摇匀墨粉盒，这可以提高初期打印质量。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 为了避免对墨粉盒造成损坏，切勿将其暴露在光线下超过数分钟。如果需要，请用纸将其遮盖。 • 请勿接触墨粉盒的绿色区域。请使用墨粉盒上的手柄，以免触及此区域。 • 请勿用刀子或剪子等锋利的物体来打开墨粉盒包装。这些器具可能会划伤墨粉盒的感光鼓。 • 如果不慎将墨粉沾到衣物上，请用干布擦拭并用冷水清洗。热水会使墨粉渗入到衣服纤维中。 • 打开扫描装置，将进稿器和扫描装置一起握住。墨粉盒使用寿命结束时，机器将停止打印。更换墨粉盒 3. 维护 743. 维护 75 监控耗材寿命如果经常发生卡纸或打印问题，请检查您的机器已经打印或扫描的页数。如有必要，更换相应零件。 • 如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）：在就绪模式下，按住（停止/清除）按钮约 6 秒钟，然后松开。将打印一份耗材信息报告。 • 对于某些型号，可能需要按OK才能导航到下层菜单。 1 从控制面板中依次选择（菜单）> 系统设置 > 维护 > 耗材寿命。 2 选择所需选项并按OK。 • 总寿命：显示打印的总页数。 • ADF 扫描:显示使用进稿器打印的页面的数量。 • 平板扫描：显示使用扫描仪玻璃板扫描的页面的数量。 • 耗材信息：打印耗材信息页。 3 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。3. 维护 76 设置墨粉不足警报墨盒中的墨粉量较小时，会通过消息或 LED 指示灯通知用户更换墨粉盒。可设置此选项，以决定是否使用此消息或 LED 指示灯。如果您的机器在控制面板上有 +/- 按钮（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）：您可以在 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分配置机器的设置。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。 1 从控制面板中依次选择（菜单）> 系统设置 > 维护 > 墨粉不足警报。 2 选择所需选项。 3 按 OK 按钮保存所作的选择。3. 维护 77 清洁机器如果出现打印质量问题，或者您是在多尘的环境中使用您的机器，则您需要定期清洁您的机器，从而确保最佳的打印状况以及延长机器的使用寿命。 • 如果使用含有大量酒精，溶剂或其他烈性物质的清洁剂清洁机壳会造成外壳褪色或变形。 • 如果您的机器或其周边区域粘上墨粉，则我们建议您使用蘸水的布或绵纸擦拭。如果使用吸尘器，则墨粉会被吹进空气中，这会对您的身体有害。 4 清洁外部用无绒软布清洁机壳。可用水稍微蘸湿软布，但注意不要让水滴到机器上或滴入机器。清洁机器 3. 维护 78 5 清洁内部在打印过程中，纸屑、墨粉和灰尘颗粒会堆积在机器内部。这样会导致产生打印质量问题，例如：出现墨粉斑点或污点。清洁机器内部能够清除或减少这些问题。 • 为了避免对墨粉盒造成损坏，切勿将其暴露在光线下超过数分钟。如果需要，请用纸将其遮盖。 • 请勿接触墨粉盒的绿色区域。请使用墨粉盒上的手柄，以免触及此区域。 • 清洁机器内部时请使用干燥、无绒抹布，小心不要损坏传墨辊或其他任何内部零件。不得使用苯或稀释剂等溶剂。可能会出现打印质量问题，并且会导致机器损坏。 • 使用干燥的无绒抹布清洁机器。 • 关闭机器，拔掉电源线。请等待机器冷却。如果机器有电源开关，请在清洁机器前关闭电源。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 打开扫描装置，将进稿器和扫描装置一起握住。清洁机器 3. 维护 79 1 2清洁机器 3. 维护 80 6 清洁搓纸轮 • 关闭机器，拔掉电源线。请等待机器冷却。如果机器有电源开关，请在清洁机器前关闭电源。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。清洁机器 3. 维护 81 7 清洁扫描装置保持扫描装置清洁有助于获得质量最佳的复印件。我们建议您在每天开始工作时清洁扫描装置，如果需要，也可以在工作期间清洁。 • 关闭机器，拔掉电源线。请等待机器冷却。如果机器有电源开关，请在清洁机器前关闭电源。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 1 将无绒软布或纸巾用水稍微蘸湿。 2 提起并打开扫描仪盖。清洁机器 3. 维护 82 3 擦拭扫描仪表面，直至洁净干燥。 1 扫描仪盖 2 扫描仪玻璃板 3 进纸器玻璃板 4 白杆 4 合上扫描仪盖。 1 2 4 33. 维护 83 机器搬运与存放方法提示 • 搬运机器时，切勿倾斜或使其倒立。否则，机器内部可能会沾上墨粉，从而导致机器受损或降低打印质量。 • 搬运机器时，确保至少有两人牢固手扶机器。4. 故障排除本章介绍有关如何排除故障的帮助信息。 • 避免卡纸的提示 85 • 清除原件卡纸 86 • 清除卡纸 91 • 了解状态 LED 95 • 了解显示屏消息 97 本章介绍有关如何排除故障的帮助信息。如果机器有显示屏，请首先检查显示屏上的消息解决故障。如果在本章中找不到解决问题的方法，请参见高级指南中的故障排除章节（请参见第 270 页上的“故障排除”）。如果在用户指南中找不到解决方法或是问题依然存在，请拨打服务电话。4. 故障排除 85 避免卡纸的提示选择正确的介质类型可以避免大多数卡纸情况。为了避免卡纸，请参考以下准则： • 确保可调导板位于正确的位置（请参见第 40 页上的“纸盘概述”）。 • 请勿在打印过程中从纸盘取出纸张。 • 装纸前请弯折、呈扇形散开并拢齐纸张。 • 请勿使用起皱、潮湿或过度卷曲的纸张。 • 请勿在纸盘中混装不同纸张。 • 请仅使用推荐的打印介质（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。4. 故障排除 86 清除原件卡纸如果原件在进稿器中被卡住，在显示屏上将出现警告消息。为避免撕破文档，请仔细地将卡纸取出。为避免出现卡纸，请将厚、薄或混合纸型原件放到扫描仪玻璃板上。清除原件卡纸 4. 故障排除 87 1 扫描仪前端的原稿卡纸 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 视型号或可选商品，故障排除可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。清除原件卡纸 4. 故障排除 88 2 扫描仪内部的原稿卡纸 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 视型号或可选商品，故障排除可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。清除原件卡纸 4. 故障排除 89清除原件卡纸 4. 故障排除 90 3 扫描仪出纸区域的原稿卡纸 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 • 视型号或可选商品，故障排除可能不可用（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。 1 从进纸器中取出所有剩余纸张。 2 轻轻地从进稿器中取出卡纸。4. 故障排除 91 清除卡纸为避免撕破纸张，请轻缓地将卡纸抽出。 4 在纸盘中根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。清除卡纸 4. 故障排除 92 5 在机器内部 • 定影器区域温度很高。从机器中取纸时请务必小心。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的图示可能与您的机器不同。查看您的机器类型（请参见第 21 页上的“正视图”）。清除卡纸 4. 故障排除 93 1 2清除卡纸 4. 故障排除 94 如果在该区域看不到纸张，请停止并转至下一步：4. 故障排除 95 了解状态 LED LED 的颜色指示机器的当前状态。 • 根据机型或国家/地区的不同，可能不提供某些 LED 指示灯（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）。 • 要解决错误，请查找错误消息及其在故障排除部分中的说明（请参见第 97 页上的“了解显示屏消息”）。 • 也可以借助计算机 Samsung 打印机状态或Smart Panel程序窗口中的准则解决错误（请参见第 263 页上的“使用 Samsung 打印机状态”或第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”）。 • 如果问题仍然存在，请与服务代表联系。发光二极管（LED）状态描述状态熄灭机器处于脱机状态。绿色闪烁当背光灯闪烁时，表明机器正在接收或打印数据。点亮 • 机器已联机，可以使用。红色闪烁 • 发生小错误，机器正在等候清除错误。请检查显示消息。当问题解决时，机器会继续运行。 • 墨粉盒中残留墨粉。预计墨粉盒寿命a 将要结束。请准备新墨粉盒以备更换。可通过摇匀墨粉来暂时提高打印质量（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。b 点亮 • 墨粉盒已经达到其预计寿命 a 。建议更换墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 • 盖板处于打开状态。合上盖板。 • 接受或打印数据时纸盘中没有纸。在纸盘中装入纸张。 • 由于出现严重错误，机器已经停止运行。请检查显示消息（请参见第 97 页上的“了解显示屏消息”）。 • 发生卡纸现象（请参见第 91 页上的“清除卡纸”）。了解状态 LED 4. 故障排除 96 ( ) WPS b 蓝色闪烁机器正在连接无线网络。开机器连接到无线网络（请参见第 151 页上的“无线网络设置”）。关机器与无线网络断开连接。 ( ) 电源蓝色点亮机器处于节能模式。熄灭机器处于就绪模式或电源已关闭。环保绿色点亮环保模式已开启。环保模式的默认设置为 2 页缩印和省墨。熄灭环保模式已关闭。墨粉b 橙色闪烁墨粉盒中残留墨粉。墨粉盒中的墨粉a 预计将用完。请准备新墨粉盒以备更换。可通过摇匀墨粉来暂时提高打印质量（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。点亮墨粉盒已经达到其预计寿命 a 。建议更换墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。熄灭所有墨粉盒容量正常。 a. 预计墨粉盒寿命是指墨粉盒的预期或预计寿命，根据 ISO/IEC 19752 设计，表示平均打印输出能力。打印页数可能会受操作环境、图像区域百分比、打印间隔、图形、介质和介质尺寸影响。即使红色 LED 亮起且打印机停止打印，墨粉盒中仍可能残留墨粉。 b. 根据机型或国家/地区的不同，可能不提供某些 LED 指示灯（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）。发光二极管（LED）状态描述4. 故障排除 97 了解显示屏消息控制面板显示屏上出现指示机器状态或故障的信息。如果需要，请参照下表了解信息及其含义并解决问题。 • SCX-340x/SCX-340xW Series 不支持此功能。可以借助计算机的打印状态或Smart Panel程序窗口中的准则解决错误（请参见第 263 页上的“使用 Samsung 打印机状态”或第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”）。 • 如果表中没有消息，请重新启动，然后重新尝试打印。如果问题仍然存在，请与服务代表联系。 • 拨打服务电话时，将显示屏上的消息内容提供给服务代表。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些消息可能不会显示。 • [错误号码] 表示错误号码。 6 卡纸相关消息消息含义建议的解决方法文档卡纸取出卡纸装入的原稿卡在进稿器中。清除卡纸（请参见第 86 页上的“清除原件卡纸”）。卡纸或缺纸开门/关门 • 进纸区发生卡纸。 • 纸盘中无纸。 • 清除卡纸（请参见第 91 页上的“在纸盘中”）。 • 在纸盘中装入纸张（请参见第 41 页上的“在纸盘中装纸”）。机器内部卡纸机器内部卡纸。清除卡纸（请参见第 92 页上的“在机器内部”）。了解显示屏消息 4. 故障排除 98 7 墨粉相关消息消息含义建议的解决方法安装墨粉盒未安装墨粉盒。安装墨粉盒。不兼容墨粉盒安装的墨粉盒不适用于您的机器。安装适用于本机的 Samsung 原装墨粉盒。准备新的墨粉盒指示的墨盒中有少量残留墨粉。墨粉盒中的墨粉预计将用完。请准备新墨盒以备更换。可通过摇匀墨粉来暂时提高打印质量（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。了解显示屏消息 4. 故障排除 99 更换新的墨粉盒指示的墨粉盒几乎已达到其预计的墨盒寿命。墨粉盒预计寿命表示期望或估计的墨粉盒寿命，指示平均输出份数，依照 ISO/IEC 19752 进行设计（请参见第 68 页上的“可用耗材”）。页数可能会受到操作环境、图像区域百分比、打印间隔、介质和介质尺寸的影响。即使显示“更换新墨粉盒”且机器停止打印，硒鼓中仍可能残留墨粉。 • 您可以选择控制面板上显示的停止或继续。如果选择停止，则打印机将停止打印，并且如果您不更换墨盒，则无法继续打印。如果选择继续，则打印机会保持继续打印，但无法保证打印质量。 • 显示此消息时，请更换墨粉盒以获得最佳打印质量。如果在显示此消息后仍不更换墨粉盒，则会导致打印质量问题（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 Samsung 不推荐使用非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒，例如重新装填或改装的墨粉盒。Samsung 不能保证非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒的质量。机器保修不包括由于使用非原装 Samsung 墨粉盒而需要的服务或维修。指示的墨粉盒已经达到其预计的墨粉盒寿命。打印机可能会停止打印。更换墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。消息含义建议的解决方法了解显示屏消息 4. 故障排除 100 8 纸盘相关消息 9 网络相关消息消息含义建议的解决方法卡纸或缺纸开门/ 关门 • 进纸区发生卡纸。 • 纸盘中无纸。 • 清除卡纸（请参见第 91 页上的“在纸盘中”）。 • 在纸盘中装入纸张（请参见第 41 页上的“在纸盘中装纸”）。消息含义建议的解决方法网路问题： IP冲突您设置的网络 IP 地址已被他人使用。检查 IP 地址，如果必要，请重设（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”）。无线网络错误未安装无线模块。请拨打服务电话。了解显示屏消息 4. 故障排除 101 10 其他消息消息含义建议的解决方法门未关请将其关闭盖板未关紧。关闭盖板，直到锁定到位。扫描仪的门已打开。进稿器盖未关紧。关闭盖板，直到锁定到位。错误[错误号码] 关闭然后再打开无法控制机器单元。重新启动电源，然后重新尝试打印。如果问题仍然存在，请拨打服务电话。错误[错误号码] 请致电以申请维修扫描仪锁定扫描仪已锁定。重新启动。如果问题仍然存在，请拨打服务电话。5. 附录本章介绍产品规格以及适用法规的相关信息。 • 规格 103 • 法规信息 113 • 版权所有 1255. 附录 103 规格 1 总规格规格值列出如下，如有变更，恕不另行通知。有关可能发生的信息变更，请访问 www.samsung.com。项目描述尺寸宽度 x 长度 x 高度 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series 389 x 274 x 249 mm SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series 402 x 293 x 296 mm SCX-340xFH/SCX-340xHW Series a 407 x 293 x 296 mm 重量机器包括耗材 SCX-340x Series SCX-340xW Series 6.65 Kg SCX-340xF Series SCX-340xFW Series SCX-340xFH/SCX-340xHW Series a 8 Kg规格 5. 附录 104 噪声水平b 就绪模式低于 26 dB（A）打印模式低于 50 dB（A）复印模式扫描仪玻璃板低于 50 dB（A）进纸器低于 52 dB (A) 扫描模式扫描仪玻璃板低于 52 dB（A）进纸器低于 54 dB（A）温度操作 10 到 32 °C 存储器（已打包） -20 到 40 °C 湿度操作 20 到 80% 相对湿度存储器（已打包） 10 到 90% 相对湿度额定电源c 110 伏型号交流电 110 – 127 V 220 伏型号交流电 220 – 240 V 项目描述规格 5. 附录 105 功耗平均运行模式小于 310 W 就绪模式小于 30 W 节能模式 • SCX-340x Series: 小于 1.2 W • SCX-340xW Series: 小于 1.6 W • SCX-340xF/SCX-340xFH Series: 小于 1.7 W • SCX-340xFW/SCX-340xHW Series: 小于 2.1 W 电源关闭模式小于 0.45 W 无线d 模块 T77H262/SPW-B4319S a. 进行尺寸和重量测量（不含话筒）。 b. 声压级，ISO 7779。已测试配置：基本机器安装，A4 纸，单面打印。 c. 有关机器的正确电压（V）、频率（赫兹）和电流（A），请参见机器上的铭牌。 d. 仅限无线型号（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。项目描述规格 5. 附录 106 2 打印介质规格类型大小尺寸打印介质重量/容量a 纸盘在纸盘中手动进纸b 普通纸 Letter 216 x 279 mm 71 到 85 g/m2 • 150 张 80 g/m2 71 到 85 g/m2 Legal 216 x 356 mm • 1 张 US Folio 216 x 330 mm A4 210 x 297 mm Oficio 216 x 343 mm JIS B5 182 x 257 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Executive 184 x 267 mm A5 148 x 210 mm 信封 Monarch 信封 98 x 191 mm 75 到 90 g/m2 • 10 张 75 到 90 g/m2 10 号信封 105 x 241 mm • 1 张 DL 信封 110 x 220 mm C5 信封 162 x 229 mm规格 5. 附录 107 厚纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 86 到 120 g/m2 • 50 张 120 g/m2 86 到 120 g/m2 • 1 张薄纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 60 到 70 g/m2 • 160 张 60 g/m2 60 到 70 g/m2 • 1 张棉纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 75 到 90 g/m2 • 150 张 80 g/m2 75 到 90 g/m2 • 1 张彩色纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 75 到 90 g/m2 • 150 张 80 g/m2 75 到 90 g/m2 • 1 张预印纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 75 到 90 g/m2 • 150 张 80 g/m2 75 到 90 g/m2 • 1 张再生纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 60 到 90 g/m2 • 150 张 80 g/m2 60 到 90 g/m2 • 1 张标签c Letter、Legal、US Folio、A4、JIS B5、 ISO B5、 Executive、A5 请参见普通纸部分 120 到 150 g/m2 • 10 张 120 到 150 g/m2 • 1 张类型大小尺寸打印介质重量/容量a 纸盘在纸盘中手动进纸b规格 5. 附录 108 卡片纸 Letter、Legal、US Folio、A4、JIS B5、 ISO B5、 Executive、A5、 Postcard 4x6 请参见普通纸部分 121 到 163 g/m2 • 10 张 121 到 163 g/m2 • 1 张证券纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 • 10 张 • 1 张存档纸请参见普通纸部分请参见普通纸部分 • 100 张 • 1 张最小尺寸（自定义） 76 x 127 mm 60 到 163 g/m2 最大尺寸（自定义） 216 x 356 mm a. 最大容量取决于介质重量、厚度和环境因素。 b. 1 张，适用于手动进纸。 c. 本机器所使用标签的平滑度为 100 至 250 (Sheffield)。这表示平滑度的数量级别。类型大小尺寸打印介质重量/容量a 纸盘在纸盘中手动进纸b规格 5. 附录 109 3 系统要求 Microsoft® Windows® • 对于所有的 Windows 操作系统，最低要求为 Internet Explorer 6.0 或更高版本。 • 具有管理员权限的用户可以安装该软件。 • Windows Terminal Services 与该机器兼容。 • Windows 2000 需要 Service Pack 4 或更高版本。操作系统要求（推荐） CPU RAM 可用硬盘空间 Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB（128 MB） 600 MB Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB（256 MB） 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB 到 2 GB Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB（2 GB） 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB（1 GB） 15 GB Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32 位或 64 位处理器或更高配置 1 GB（2 GB） 16 GB • 支持使用 128 MB 内存的 DirectX® 9 图形（用于启用 Aero 主题）。 • DVD-R/W 光驱 Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) 或 1.4 GHz (x64) 处理器（2 GHz 或更快） 512 MB（2 GB） 10 GB规格 5. 附录 110 Macintosh 操作系统要求（推荐） CPU RAM 可用硬盘空间 Mac OS X 10.4 • Intel® 处理器 • PowerPC G4/G5 • 基于 PowerPC 的 Mac（512 MB）需要 128 MB • 基于 Intel 的 Mac（1 GB）需要 512 MB 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 • Intel® 处理器 • 867 MHz 或更快速的 Power PC G4/G5 512 MB（1 GB） 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® 处理器 1 GB（2 GB） 1 GB Mac OS X 10.7 • Intel® 处理器 2 GB 4 GB规格 5. 附录 111 Linux 项目要求操作系统 Redhat® Enterprise Linux WS 4、5（32/64 位） Fedora 5~13（32/64 位） SuSE Linux 10.1（32 位） OpenSuSE® 10.2、10.3、11.0、11.1、11.2（32/64 位） Mandriva 2007、2008、2009、2009.1、2010（32/64 位） Ubuntu 6.06、6.10、7.04、7.10、8.04、8.10、9.04、9.10、10.04（32/64 位） SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10、11（32/64 位） Debian 4.0、5.0（32/64 位） CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz（Intel Core™2） RAM 512 MB（1 GB）可用硬盘空间 1 GB（2 GB）规格 5. 附录 112 4 网络环境仅限网络和无线机型（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。您需要在打印机上设置网络协议方可将其用作网络打印机。下表显示了机器所支持的网络环境。项目规格网络接口 • 以太网 10/100 Base-TX 有线局域网 • 802.11b/g/n 无线局域网网络操作系统 • Windows 2000/Server 2003/Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2 • 各种 Linux 操作系统 • Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.7 网络协议 • TCP/IPv4 • DHCP，BOOTP • DNS，WINS，Bonjour，SLP，UPnP • 标准 TCP/IP 打印（RAW），LPR，IPP，WSD • SNMPv 1/2/3，HTTP，IPSec • TCP/IPv6（DHCP，DNS，RAW，LPR，SNMPv 1/2/3，HTTP，IPSec）无线安全 • 验证：开放系统，共享密钥，WPA 个人，WPA2 个人（PSK） • 加密：WEP64，WEP128，TKIP 和 AES5. 附录 113 法规信息本机器专为通常的工作环境设计，并通过多项强制性标准认证。 5 激光安全声明本打印机在美国已通过认证，符合 DHHS 21 CFR 的第 1 章，第 J 节关于 I （1）类激光产品的要求，在其它国家/地区已通过 I 类激光产品认证，符合 IEC 60825-1：2007 的要求。 I 类激光产品被视为非危害性产品。激光系统和打印机的设计原则是在日常操作、用户维护或指定维修条件下，所受的激光辐射不超过 I 类级别规定的标准。警告请勿在激光/扫描仪组件的保护盖拆掉的情况下操作或维修。虽然反射的光束不可见，但却能损伤您的眼睛。使用本产品时，请务必遵循这些基本安全预防措施，以减少火灾、电击和人身伤害的危险：法规信息 5. 附录 114 6 臭氧安全 7 汞安全性 8 节能 9 回收本产品的臭氧排放率低于 0.1 ppm。因为臭氧比空气重，所以请将本产品放置在通风良好处。含有汞，请按照联邦、洲或地方法规（仅限美国）要求处理。本打印机采用先进的节能技术，可降低打印机处于非活动状态时的功耗。如果长时间不接收数据，打印机会自动降低功耗。 ENERGY STAR 和 ENERGY STAR 商标为美国注册商标。要获得有关 ENERGY STAR 程序的更多信息，请查看 http:// www.energystar.gov 对于 ENERGY STAR 认证型号，机器上贴有 ENERGY STAR 标签。检查您的机器是否经过 ENERGY STAR 认证。请本着对环境负责的态度回收或处理本产品的包装材料。法规信息 5. 附录 115 10 仅限中国 11 正确处理本产品（废弃的电气和电子设备）（适用于欧盟及单独施行收集体系的其他欧洲国家/ 地区）（仅限美国）通过获得批准的回收机构处理废弃的电子设备。要找到最近的回收地点，请访问我们的网站：www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect 或致电 (877) 278 - 0799 产品、配件或资料文献上的这个标记指示产品及其电子配件（例如充电器、耳机和 USB 电缆）在报废时不应该与其他生活废品一同处置。为了防止非受控的废品处置导致对环境或人类健康造成损害，请将这些元件与其他类型的废品隔开，并负责回收这些元件以促进物质资源的可持续重复利用。家庭用户应该联系销售此产品的零售商或当地的政府机构，以了解有关在何处及如何处置这些元件以进行环保回收的详细信息。企业用户应该联系供应商，并参阅有关购买合同的条款和条件。不应该将此产品及电子配件与其他商业废品一并处置。法规信息 5. 附录 116 12 仅限台湾地区 13 射频发射为用户提供的 FCC 信息本设备符合 FCC 规则中的第 15 条。其操作受下列两种条件制约： • 本设备不会导致有害干扰 • 本设备必须耐受受到的任何干扰，包括可能造成不正常运行的干扰。本设备已经过检验，证明符合 FCC 规章第 15 条有关 B 类数字设备的限制。这些限制旨在对住宅安装时出现的有害干扰提供合理保护。本设备会产生、使用和辐射射频能量，如果未按照说明安装和使用，可能会对无线电通信产生有害干扰。但我们不保证在特定安装情况下不会产生干扰。如果此设备对无线电和电视接收产生有害干扰（可通过开关设备来确定），则建议用户通过采取以下一项或多项措施来尽量消除干扰： • 接收天线重新定向或重新安置。 • 增加设备与接收器之间的距离。 • 将设备连接到电路上的插座中，该插座应当与接收器所连接的插座不同。 • 咨询经销商和专业广播电视技术人员寻求帮助。任何未经负责产品合格性制造商明确认可的更改或修改，均有可能导致用户对本设备的操作授权失效。加拿大无线电干扰规章本数字设备符合加拿大工业和科学部颁布的 ICES-003 “数字设备” 干扰标准中数字设备无线电噪音排放 B 类限制条件。 Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur:« Appareils Numériques », ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.法规信息 5. 附录 117 14 美国联邦通信委员会（FCC）受 FCC 第 15 节制约的意图发射器本款打印机系统中可能内置有以 2.4 GHz/5 GHz 波段运行的低耗电、无线电局域网设备（射频 [RF] 无线通信设备）。本部分说明只在具备此类设备的情况下才适用。请查看系统标签，核对是否装有无线设备。只有当系统标签上标有 FCC ID 号码时，系统中的无线设备才允许在美国使用。在人体（不包括四肢）附近使用无线设备时，FCC 制定了一个基本准则，要求设备和人体要保持 20 厘米的距离。无线设备处于打开状态时，应在距人体 20 厘米以外的地方使用此设备。内置于打印机中的无线设备功率输出远低于 FCC 规定的射频暴露限值。此发射器不得与其他任何天线或发射器一起配置或操作。此设备的运行必须符合下列两个条件：（1）此设备不会产生有害的干扰，（2）此设备可以承受任何干扰，包括可能引起此设备不正常运行的干扰。用户不可以维修无线设备。请勿以任何方式进行改动。改动无线设备将使您丧失使用此设备的授权。维修时，请与制造商联系。 FCC 关于使用无线局域网的声明在同时安装和运行此种发射器和天线时，天线安装位置附近可能会有超过 1m W/cm2 的无线电频率暴露限值。因此，用户必须始终与天线保持至少 20 厘米的距离。不可以把此种设备与其他发射器和发射天线安装在同一个地方。 15 仅限俄罗斯法规信息 5. 附录 118 16 仅限德国 17 仅限土耳其 18 仅限加拿大本产品符合加拿大工业部的相关技术要求。/ Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada. 振铃等效值 (REN) 用于确定一个电话接口所能连接的设备数量。接口上的终端可以是任意设备的组合，只要所有设备的 REN 总和不超过 5 即可。/ L’indice d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique.La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq. 19 传真标志按照 1991 年颁布实施的“电信业消费者保护法案”规定，任何人使用计算机或其他电子设备通过电话传真机发送消息时，必须在发送的每一页的顶端或底部的页边空白处，或者在发送的第一页中明确地包含以下信息，否则将视为非法： 1 发送日期和时间 2 标明是企业、企业实体或个人发送的信息；以及 3 传真机、企业、企业实体或个人的电话号码。电话公司可以对其通讯设施、设备运行或程序进行改造，这些改造是其公司运作合理需要的，而且不违反 FCC 第 68 条的管制条款。如果可以预期到这些改造会使任何客户终端设备与电话公司的通讯设施不兼容，或需要修改或变更这些终端设备，或者在整体上会影响到其使用性能，则电话公司应提前书面通知客户，使客户有足够的时间来保证服务不中断。法规信息 5. 附录 119 20 振铃等效数本机器的振铃等效数和 FCC 注册号可以在机器底部或后面的标签上找到。在某些情况下，您需要将此号码提供给电话公司。振铃等效数（REN）用于衡量电话线路上的电负荷，可用于确定线路是否出现“超载”情况。在相同电话线路上安装多种设备可能会引起拨打和接听电话问题，尤其是当您的线路被叫时响铃的情况。电话线路上设备的振铃等效数总和不能超过 5，以确保电话公司提供的服务正常运行。在某些情况下，总和为 5 时线路将无法使用。如果您的任何电话设备不能正常运行，应立即将其从线路中拆除，因为此设备可能会对电话网络造成损坏。本设备符合 ACTA 采纳的 FCC 68 条的规定和要求。本机背面的标签上标有产品的识别号码 US:AAAEQ##TXXXX。如有要求，该号码须提供给电话公司。 FCC 规章声明，任何未经制造商明确许可的变更或修改，均有可能导致用户对操作本设备的授权无效。在终端设备对电话网络造成损坏的情况下，电话公司应提前告知用户服务有可能被终止。然而，如果无法事先通知，公司可以将服务暂停，但前提是电话公司： a 立即通知客户。 b 为客户提供更正设备问题的机会。 c 告知客户具有依照 FCC 规则和规章第 68 条 E 子部分中规定的步骤向联邦通信委员会申诉的权利。您还应了解： • 本机器不适合与数字专用分组交换机系统连接。 • 如果您有意要在与机器相连的同一条线路上使用计算机调制解调器或传真调制解调器，则所有设备都可能出现传输和接收问题。建议在与机器相连的线路上不要共享其他设备，常规电话除外。 • 如果您处在闪电或电涌多发地区，建议您在电源和电话线路上安装电涌保护装置。电涌保护装置可以从经销商处购买，也可通过电话和从电子专卖店购买。 • 在设置紧急电话号码和/或向紧急电话号码拨打测试电话时，请使用非紧急电话号码通知紧急服务调度员。调度员会给您进一步的说明，告知您如何实际测试紧急电话号码。 • 此机器不能在投币电话或合用线路上使用。 • 此机器提供助听器的磁耦合。您可以通过标准组合插口 USOC RJ－11C 将此设备安全连接到电话网络上。法规信息 5. 附录 120 21 更换原配插头（仅限英国）重要的本机器的电源线带有标准的（BS 1363）13 安培插头及 13 安培的保险丝。更换或检查保险丝时，您必须重装合适的 13 安培保险丝，然后需要更换保险丝盖。如果不慎丢失了保险丝盖，在找到新的保险丝盖之前不要使用此插头。请联系此机器的销售人员。在英国，13 安培的插头是最常用的类型，因而应该适用。但是，有些建筑（主要是老式建筑）没有配置常用的 13 安培插座。您需要购买合适的插头转接器。请勿拆卸模压插头。如果模压插头处断线，请立即丢弃。切勿重新接线，以免插入插座时遭受电击。重要警告如果电源线导线颜色与插头颜色不匹配，请执行如下操作：必须将黄绿色导线与标有字母“E”或标有安全“地线符号”或颜色为黄绿色或绿色的针脚相连。必须将蓝色导线与标有字母“N”或颜色为黑色的针脚相连。必须将棕色导线与标有字母“L”或颜色为红色的针脚相连。在插头、转接器或配电箱内必须安装 13 安培的保险丝。必须将此机器接地。电源线导线色码如下： • 黄绿色: 地线 • 蓝色: 零线 • 棕色: 火线法规信息 5. 附录 121 22 符合性声明（欧洲国家）认可和认证 1995 年 1 月 1 日：委员会指令 2006/95/EC 统一成员国有关低电压设备的法律。 1996 年 1 月 1 日：委员会指令 2004/108/EC，统一成员国有关电磁兼容性的法律。 1999 年 3 月 9 日：委员会指令 1999/5/EC 关于无线电设备和电信终端设备及相互认可一致性的规定。您可以从 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 代表处获取完整的声明，该声明定义了相关的指令和参考标准。 EC 认证通过 1999/5/EC 无线电设备和无线电通讯终端设备指令（FAX）认证 Samsung 依据 1999/5/EC 指令自行证明本款 Samsung 产品适用于泛欧洲模拟公共交换电话网（PSTN）的单终端连接。此产品设计用于欧洲国家/ 地区的 PSTN 并与 PBX 兼容：出现问题时，应先与 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 的欧洲质量保证实验室联系。产品已依照 TBR21 进行测试。为协助使用符合本标准的终端设备，欧洲电信标准协会（ETSI）已发布咨询文件（EG 201 121），其中包括确保 TBR21 终端具有网络兼容性的注意事项及附加要求。本产品已根据此文档中的所有相关指令说明设计，并完全符合这些要求。欧洲无线认证信息（适用于配备欧盟认证的无线电设备的产品）以 2.4 GHz/5 GHz 波段运行的低功率、无线局域网类型设备（射频无线通信设备），可以置于（内置）家用或办公打印机系统之内。本部分说明只在具备此类设备的情况下才适用。请查看系统标签，核对是否装有无线设备。 Samsung Electronics 特此声明，该 [SCX-340x Series] 符合低电压指令 (2006/95/EC) 和 EMC 指令 (2004/108/EC) 的基本要求和其他相关规定。 Samsung Electronics 在此声明，本 [SCX-340xW Series/SCX- 340xF Series/SCX-340xFH Series/SCX-340xFW Series/SCX- 340xHW Series] 符合 R&TTE 指令 1999/5/EC 的关键要求和其他相关规定。有关此一致性声明，可到 www.samsung.com 查询，请访问“支持”>“下载中心”，然后输入您的打印机 (MFP) 名称即可浏览 EuDoC。系统中的无线设备只授权在欧盟地区使用和相关地区使用（如果系统标签上有指定机构注册号和警告符号的 CE 标志）。法规信息 5. 附录 122 打印机中内置的无线设备的输出功率远低于欧盟委员会 R&TTE 指令所设定的射频暴露限值。可用无线装置的欧洲国家/地区：欧盟国家有使用限制的欧洲国家/地区：欧盟在法国，超过 10 mW 传输功率的无线设备，其频率范围被限制为 2454- 2483.5 兆赫 EEA/EFTA 国家/地区此时无任何限制 23 仅限以色列 24 法规符合性声明无线准则本款打印机系统中可能内置有以 2.4 GHz/5 GHz 波段运行的低耗电、无线电局域网设备（射频 [RF] 无线通信设备）。以下部分概述了操作无线设备的注意事项。特定国家/地区的附加限制，注意事项和相关事项在特定国家/地区部分（或国家/地区分组部分）列出。本系统中的无线设备只允许在系统额定标签上的无线电认证标志所标识的国家/地区内使用。如果系统标签上未列出您要使用无线设备的国家/地区，请与您当地无线电认证机构联系，了解具体要求。无线设备受到严格管制，可能不允许使用。内置于打印机中的无线设备的功率输出远低于当前的射频暴露限值。由于无线设备（可能内置于打印机之中）所发射的能量低于射频安全标准和建议的限度，因此制造商确信这些设备可安全使用。不管功率级如何，在正常操作时都应注意尽量减少人体接触。作为一般准则，在人体（不包括四肢）附近使用无线设备时，无线设备和人体之间通常应保持 20 厘米间隔。当无线设备打开和发送时，设备与人体之间的间隔应大于 20 厘米。此发射器不得与其他任何天线或发射器一起配置或操作。某些环境要求限制无线设备的使用。下面列举常见的限制例子：法规信息 5. 附录 123 射频无线通信会对商用飞机上的设备产生干扰。目前的航空规定要求在乘坐飞机旅行时关闭无线设备。例如，IEEE 802.11（也称为无线以太网）和蓝牙通信设备都是提供无线通信的设备。在对其他设备或服务的干扰是有害的或被认为是有害的环境中，可能会限制或禁止使用无线设备。例如，在机场，医院和存放有氧气或易燃气体的环境中，可能会限制或禁止使用无线设备。当您处在无法确定是否允许使用无线设备的环境中时，在使用和打开无线设备之前请咨询有关部门。每个国家/地区对无线设备的使用限制不同。由于系统配有无线设备，在携带此系统进行跨国旅行之前，请向目的地国家的无线认证机构咨询目的地国家对使用无线设备的限制。如果系统配有内置的无线设备，则除非所有的护盖和护罩都在原位且系统装配完整，否则不得操作无线设备。用户不可以维修无线设备。请勿以任何方式进行改动。改动无线设备将使您丧失使用此设备的授权。维修时，请与制造商联系。只在允许使用此设备的国家/地区内使用驱动程序。请参见制造商的系统恢复套件，或与制造商的技术支持部门联系，获取详细信息。法规信息 5. 附录 124 25 仅限中国5. 附录 125 版权所有 © 2011 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 保留所有权利。本用户指南仅供参考。用户指南中的任何信息如有变更，恕不另行通知。 Samsung Electronics 对由于使用本用户指南引起的或与使用本用户指南相关的任何直接或间接损坏不承担任何责任。 • Samsung 和 Samsung 徽标是 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 的商标。 • Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 和 Windows Server 2008 R2 是 Microsoft Corporation 的注册商标或商标。 • True、LaserWriter 和 Macintosh 是 Apple Computer, Inc. 的商标。 • 所有其他品牌或产品名称为其各自公司或组织的商标。请参阅所提供 CD-ROM 中的“LICENSE.txt”文件，以取得有关开放源代码的许可信息。 REV. 1.00高级用户指南 SCX-340x/340xW Series SCX-340xF/340xFW Series SCX-340xFH/340xHW Series 高级用户指南本指南介绍不同操作系统环境中的安装、高级配置、操作和故障排除相关信息。根据机型或国家/地区的不同，可能不提供某些功能。基本本指南提供 Windows 上的安装、基本操作和故障排除相关信息。127 高级 1. 软件安装 Macintosh 安装 130 Macintosh 重新安装 131 Linux 安装 132 Linux 重新安装 134 2. 使用联网机器实用网络程序 136 有线网络设置 137 通过网络安装驱动程序 140 IPv6 配置 148 无线网络设置 151 Samsung MobilePrint 180 3. 实用设置菜单开始阅读章节前 182 打印菜单 183 复印菜单 184 传真菜单 190 扫描菜单 193 系统设置 195 管理员设置 206 自定义设置 207 4. 特殊功能海拔调整 209 存储电子邮件地址 210 输入不同的字符 212 设置传真地址簿 213 注册授权用户 216 打印功能 217 扫描功能 231 传真功能 241 使用共享文件夹功能 251 使用内存/硬盘驱动器功能 252 5. 实用管理工具 Easy Capture Manager 254 Samsung AnyWeb Print 255 Easy Eco Driver 256128 高级使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 257 使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 260 使用 Samsung 打印机状态 263 使用Smart Panel 265 使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator 266 6. 故障排除进纸问题 271 电源和电缆连接问题 272 打印问题 273 打印质量问题 276 复印问题 283 扫描问题 284 传真问题 285 操作系统问题 2871. 软件安装本章介绍安装基本及实用软件的说明，它们用于机器通过电缆连接的环境中。本地连接的打印机是使用线缆与您的计算机直接连接的机器。如果您的打印机已联网，则跳过以下步骤，继续安装联网打印机的驱动程序（请参见第 140 页上的“通过网络安装驱动程序”）。 • Macintosh 安装 130 • Macintosh 重新安装 131 • Linux 安装 132 • Linux 重新安装 134 • 如果您使用 Windows 操作系统，请参阅基本指南了解如何安装机器的驱动程序（请参见第 30 页上的“本地安装驱动程序”）。 • 仅使用长度不超过 3 米的 USB 电缆。1. 软件安装 130 Macintosh 安装 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 4 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Installer OS X 图标。 5 单击继续。 6 阅读许可协议，然后单击继续。 7 单击同意接受许可协议。 8 当屏幕上出现关于计算机上的所有应用程序将被关闭的警告消息时，请单击继续。 9 在用户选项窗格中单击继续。 10 单击安装。将安装打印机运行所需的所有组件。如果单击自定义，则可以选择要安装的各个组件。 11 输入密码并单击确定。 12 安装软件需要重新启动计算机。单击继续安装。 13 安装完成后，请单击退出或重新启动。 14 打开应用程序文件夹 > 实用工具 > 打印设置实用程序。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，打开应用程序文件夹 > 系统预置并单击打印与传真。 15 在添加上单击打印机列表。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，请单击“+”文件夹图标，随即会弹出显示窗口。 16 单击预设浏览器并找到 USB 连接。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，请单击默认并找到 USB 连接。 17 若是 Mac OS X 10.4，如果“自动选择”无法正常运行，请在 Samsung 中选择打印使用，并在型号中选择您的机器名称。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，如果“自动选择”无法正常运行，请在选择要使用的驱动程序中选择打印使用和您的机器名称。打印机将显示在打印机列表中并被设置为默认机器。 18 单击添加。要安装传真驱动程序： a 打开应用程序文件夹 > Samsung > 传真队列创建器。 b 您的机器会显示在打印机列表中 c 选择要使用的机器，然后单击创建按钮1. 软件安装 131 Macintosh 重新安装如果打印机驱动程序无法正常运行，请先将其卸载，然后重新安装。 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 4 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Uninstaller OS X 图标。 5 输入密码并单击确定。 6 卸载完毕后，请单击确定。如果已添加机器，请从打印设置实用程序或打印与传真中删除它。1. 软件安装 132 Linux 安装您需要从 Samsung 网站下载 Linux 软件包来安装打印机软件（http:// www.samsung.com > 查找产品 > 支持或下载）。 1 安装 Unified Linux Driver 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 出现 Administrator Login 窗口时，在 Login 字段中键入“root”，并输入系统密码。必须以超级用户（root）身份登录才能安装机器软件。如果不是超级用户，请咨询系统管理员。 3 从 Samsung 网站下载 Unified Linux Driver 程序包至您的计算机。 4 右键单击 Unified Linux Driver 程序包，然后解压缩该程序包。 5 双击 cdroot > autorun。 6 显示欢迎屏幕时，请单击 Next。 7 安装完成后，单击 Finish。为了使用方便，安装程序已将 Unified Driver Configurator 桌面图标和 Unified Driver 组添加到系统菜单中。如果有问题，请通过您的系统菜单或驱动程序包 Windows 应用程序（比如 Unified Driver Configurator 或 Image Manager）查询屏幕帮助。 2 安装智能面板 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 出现 Administrator Login 窗口时，在 Login 字段中键入 root，并输入系统密码。必须以超级用户（root）身份登录才能安装机器软件。如果不是超级用户，请咨询系统管理员。 3 从 Samsung 网站，下载 Smart Panel 软件包至您的计算机上。 4 右键单击智能面板程序包，然后解压缩该程序包。 5 双击 cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh。Linux 安装 1. 软件安装 133 3 安装 Printer Settings Utility 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 出现 Administrator Login 窗口时，在 Login 字段中键入“root”，并输入系统密码。必须以超级用户（root）身份登录才能安装机器软件。如果不是超级用户，请咨询系统管理员。 3 从 Samsung 网站下载打印机设置实用程序程序包至计算机。 4 右键单击 Printer Settings Utility 程序包，然后解压缩该程序包。 5 双击 cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh。1. 软件安装 134 Linux 重新安装如果打印机驱动程序无法正常运行，请先将其卸载，然后重新安装。 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 出现 Administrator Login 窗口时，在 Login 字段中键入“root”，并输入系统密码。您必须以超级用户（root）身份登录才能卸载打印机驱动程序。如果不是超级用户，请咨询系统管理员。 3 单击桌面底部的图标。出现“终端”屏幕时，键入下列内容。 [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh 4 单击 Uninstall。 5 单击 Next。 6 单击 Finish。2. 使用联网机器本章将分步向您介绍安装联网机器与软件的步骤。 • 实用网络程序 136 • 有线网络设置 137 • 通过网络安装驱动程序 140 • IPv6 配置 148 • 无线网络设置 151 • Samsung MobilePrint 180 受支持的可选设备和功能可能因型号不同而异（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。2. 使用联网机器 136 实用网络程序提供多种便于在网络环境中设置网络设置的程序。尤其是对于网络管理员而言，可实现通过网络对多台打印机进行管理。 • 在使用下列程序之前，请先设置 IP 地址。 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 1 SyncThru™ Web Service 内嵌在网络机器上的 Web 服务器，借助它可执行下述任务（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 • 检查耗材信息和状态。 • 自定义机器设置。 • 设置电子邮件通知选项。设置该选项时，机器状态（墨粉盒墨粉不足或机器错误）将自动发送到指定人员的电子邮件。 • 配置将打印机连接到不同网络环境所必需的网络参数。 2 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 供网络管理员使用的基于 Web 的机器管理解决方案。SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 提供了一种管理网络设备的有效方法，您可以从具有公司 Internet 访问权限的任何站点远程监控网络打印机并排除故障。 • 从 http://solution.samsungprinter.com 中下载该程序。 3 SetIP 有线网络设置这种实用程序可用于选择网络接口以及搭配 TCP/IP 协议使用的 IP 地址。 • 请参见第 137 页上的“使用 SetIP（Windows）进行 IPv4 配置”。 • 请参见第 138 页上的“使用 SetIP 进行 IPv4 配置（Macintosh）”。 • 请参见第 139 页上的“使用 SetIP (Linux) 进行 IPv4 配置”。 • 不支持网络端口的机器无法使用此功能（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。 • 此程序不支持 TCP/IPv6。2. 使用联网机器 137 有线网络设置 4 打印网络配置报告您可以从机器的控制面板打印一份网络配置报告，其中将显示当前机器的网络设置。这将有助于您设置网络。 • 机器有显示屏: 按控制面板上的（菜单）按钮，选择网路 > 网路配置(网络配置)。 • 机器有触摸屏: 从主屏幕 > 网络 > 下步 > 网络配置中按设置。 • 机器没有显示屏: 按控制面板上的（取消或停止/清除）按钮超过 4~5 秒。您可使用这份网络配置报告找到您的机器 MAC 地址与 IP 地址。例如： • MAC 地址：00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP 地址： 169.254.192.192 5 设置 IP 地址 • 机器不支持网络接口，它无法使用此功能（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。 • 此程序不支持 TCP/IPv6。首先，必须设置用于网络打印与管理的 IP 地址。在大多数情况下，新的 IP 地址将由位于网络上的 DHCP（动态主机配置协议）服务器自动分配。使用 SetIP（Windows）进行 IPv4 配置使用 SetIP 程序之前，请从控制面板 > 安全中心 > Windows 防火墙禁用计算机防火墙。 1 从提供的 CD-ROM 双击 Application > SetIP > Setup.exe 安装该程序。 2 按照安装窗口内的说明进行操作。 3 使用网线将打印机联网。 4 打开打印机。 5 在 Windows 开始菜单中选择所有程序 > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP。有线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 138 6 在 SetIP 窗口中单击图标（左起第三个）打开“TCP/IP 配置”窗口。 7 按以下说明将机器的新信息输入配置窗口。在公司局域网中，可能需要首先由网络管理者分配此信息，然后才能继续下一步。从网络配置报告中找到机器的 MAC 地址（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”），然后输入（去掉冒号）。例如：00:15:99:29:51:A8 变为 0015992951A8。 8 单击应用，然后单击确定。打印机将自动打印网络配置报告。确认所有设置均正确无误。使用 SetIP 进行 IPv4 配置（Macintosh）使用 SetIP 程序之前，请从系统偏好设置 > 安全 > 防火墙禁用计算机防火墙。下列说明可能会因您机型的不同而有所差异。 1 使用网线将打印机联网。 2 插入安装光盘，然后打开光盘窗口，选择 MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html。 3 双击文件后，Safari 将自动打开，然后选择信任。浏览器将打开显示打印机名称与 IP 地址信息的 SetIPapplet.html 页。 4 在 SetIP 窗口中单击图标（左起第三个）打开“TCP/IP 配置”窗口。 5 将机器的新信息输入配置窗口。在公司局域网中，可能需要首先由网络管理者分配此信息，然后才能继续下一步。从网络配置报告中找到机器的 MAC 地址（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”），然后输入（去掉冒号）。例如：00:15:99:29:51:A8 变为 0015992951A8。 6 选择 Apply 后选择 OK，然后再次选择 OK。有线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 139 7 退出 Safari。使用 SetIP (Linux) 进行 IPv4 配置使用 SetIP 程序之前，请从 System Preferences 或 Administrator 禁用计算机防火墙。下列说明可能会因您机型或操作系统的不同而有所差异。 1 打开 /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/。 2 双击 SetIPApplet.html 文件。 3 单击以打开 TCP/IP 配置窗口。 4 将机器的新信息输入配置窗口。在公司局域网中，可能需要首先由网络管理者分配此信息，然后才能继续下一步。从网络配置报告中找到机器的 MAC 地址（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”），然后输入（去掉冒号）。例如：00:15:99:29:51:A8 变为 0015992951A8。 5 打印机将自动打印网络配置报告。2. 使用联网机器 140 通过网络安装驱动程序 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 机器不支持网络接口，它无法使用此功能（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。 6 Windows 1 确保打印机与网络连接，并打开电源。此外，打印机的 IP 地址也应设置完毕（请参见第 137 页上的“设置 IP 地址”）。如果安装过程中出现“找到新硬件向导”窗口，请单击取消关闭该窗口。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 选择立即安装。自定义安装可用于选择机器的连接并选择要安装的单个组件。按照窗口上的说明进行操作。 4 阅读许可协议，然后选择我接受许可协议的条款。然后单击下一步。此程序可以搜索整个机器。通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 141 如果在网络中或在本地找不到机器，则会显示错误消息。选择您想需选项，然后点击下一步。 5 搜索到的机器将显示在屏幕上。选择想要使用的打印机，然后单击确定。如果驱动程序只搜索到一台机器，则会出现确认窗口。 6 按照安装窗口内的说明进行操作。无提示安装模式无提示安装模式是一种不需要用户进行任何干预的安装方法。一旦启动安装后，打印机驱动程序和软件将自动安装在您的计算机上。您可以通过在命令窗口中键入 /s 或 /S 来启动无提示安装。命令行参数下表列出了命令窗口中可以使用的命令。当命令与 /s 或 /S 一起使用时，以下命令行很有效并且可运行。但 /h、 /H 或 /? 是可以单独运行的例外命令。命令行定义描述 /s 或 /S 启动无提示安装。安装打印机驱动程序的过程中不提示任何 UI 或进行用户干预。 /p“<端口名称>”或 / P“<端口名称>” 指定打印机端口。网络端口将通过使用标准 TCP/IP 端口监控器来创建。对于本地端口，此端口必须在通过命令指定前存在于系统中。可以将打印机端口名称指定为 IP 地址、主机名、 USB 本地端口名称或 IEEE1284 端口名称。例如： • /p“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”，其中“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”表示网络打印机的 IP 地址。/p“USB001”、/ P“LPT1:”、/ p“hostname” • 在使用韩语无提示安装驱动程序时，键入 Setup.exe /s / L"0x0012" 或 Setup.exe /s。 /a“<目标_路径>”或 /A“<目标_路径>” 指定安装的目标路径。目标路径应为完全限定的路径。由于打印机驱动程序应安装在操作系统的特定位置，因而此命令仅适用于应用软件。通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 142 /i“<脚本文件名>”或 /I“<脚本文件名>” 指定用于自定义运行的自定义安装脚本文件。脚本文件名应为完全限定的文件名。可以分配用于自定义无提示安装的自定义脚本文件。可以通过随附的安装程序自定义实用程序或文本编辑器来创建或修改此脚本文件。此自定义脚本文件先于安装包中的默认安装程序设置，但并不先于命令行参数。 /n“<打印机名称>” 或 /N“<打印机名称 >” 指定打印机名称。打印机实例将创建为指定的打印机名称形式。通过此参数，您可以根据需要添加打印机实例。命令行定义描述 /nd 或 /ND 命令未将安装的驱动程序设置为默认打印机驱动程序。它表示如果安装了一个或多个打印机驱动程序，则安装的打印机驱动程序将不会成为系统中的默认打印机驱动程序。如果您的系统中没有安装打印机驱动程序，则此选项将不适用，原因是 Windows 操作系统会将安装的打印机驱动程序设置为默认打印机驱动程序。 /x 或 /X 使用现有打印机驱动程序文件来创建打印机实例（如果打印机已安装）。此命令提供一种安装打印机实例的方法，该方法使用安装的打印机驱动程序文件而不安装其他驱动程序。 /up”<打印机名称>” 或 /UP”<打印机名称>” 仅删除指定的打印机实例，而不删除驱动程序文件。此命令提供从系统中仅删除指定的打印机实例而不影响其他打印机驱动程序的方法。它不会删除您系统中的打印机驱动程序文件。 /d 或 /D 从系统中卸载全部设备驱动程序和应用程序。此命令将从系统中删除安装的所有设备驱动程序和应用软件。命令行定义描述通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 143 7 Macintosh 1 确保打印机与网络连接，并打开电源。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 4 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Installer OS X 图标。 5 单击继续。 6 阅读许可协议，然后单击继续。 7 单击同意接受许可协议。 8 当屏幕上出现关于计算机中的所有应用程序将被关闭的警告消息时，请单击继续。 9 在用户选项窗格中单击继续。如果尚未设置 IP 地址，请单击“设置 IP 地址”并参阅第 138 页上的“使用 SetIP 进行 IPv4 配置（Macintosh）”。如果要设置无线设置，请参阅第 165 页上的“使用 Macintosh 设置”。 10 单击安装。将安装打印机运行所需的所有组件。如果单击自定义，则可以选择要安装的各个组件。 11 输入密码并单击确定。 12 安装软件需要重新启动计算机。单击继续安装。 13 安装完成后，请单击退出或重新启动。 /v“<共享名称>”或 / V“<共享名称>” 共享安装的打印机，并添加针对“指向并打印”的其他可用平台驱动程序。它将受支持的 Windows 操作系统平台的所有打印机驱动程序都安装到系统中，然后通过指定的 <共享名称> 来共享它以实现“ 指向并打印”。 /o 或 /O 完成安装后，打开打印机和传真文件夹。完成无提示安装后，此命令将打开打印机和传真文件夹。 /f“<日志文件名>”或 /F“<日志文件名>” 指定日志文件名。如果未指定默认日志文件，则在系统临时文件中进行创建。它会将日志文件创建到指定的文件夹。 /h、/H 或 /? 显示命令行用法。命令行定义描述通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 144 14 打开应用程序文件夹 > 实用工具 > 打印设置实用程序。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，打开应用程序文件夹 > 系统偏好设置并单击打印与传真。 15 在添加上单击打印机列表。 • 对于 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，单击“+”图标。随即将弹出一个显示窗口。 16 若是 Mac OS 10.4，请单击 IP 打印机。 • 若是 Mac OS X 10.5-10.7，请单击 IP。 17 在协议中选择 HP Jetdirect - Socket。当打印包含多页的文档时，可通过为 Socket 选项选择打印机类型提高打印性能。 18 在地址输入字段中输入机器的 IP 地址。 19 在队列输入字段内输入队列名称。如果无法确定打印机服务器的队列名称，请首先尝试使用默认队列。 20 若是 Mac OS X 10.4，如果“自动选择”无法正常运行，请在 Samsung 中选择打印使用，并在型号中选择您的机器名称。 • 若是 Mac OS 10.5-10.7，如果“自动选择”无法正常运行，请在选择打印机软件中选择打印使用和您的机器名称。 21 单击添加。打印机将显示在打印机列表中并被设置为默认机器。要安装传真驱动程序： a 打开应用程序文件夹 > Samsung > 传真队列创建器。 b 您的机器会显示在打印机列表中。 c 选择要使用的机器，然后单击创建按钮。 8 Linux 您需要从 Samsung 网站下载 Linux 软件包来安装打印机软件（http:// www.samsung.com > 查找产品 > 支持或下载）。安装其他软件： • 请参见第 132 页上的“安装智能面板”。 • 请参见第 133 页上的“安装 Printer Settings Utility”。通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 145 安装 Linux 驱动程序并添加网络打印机 1 确保打印机与网络连接，并打开电源。此外，机器的 IP 地址也应设置完毕。 2 从 Samsung 网站下载 Unified Linux Driver 包。 3 解压缩 UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz 文件并打开新目录。 4 双击 Linux 文件夹 > install.sh 图标。 5 Samsung 安装程序窗口将会打开。单击 Continue。 6 “add printer wizard” 窗口会打开。单击 Next。 7 选择网络打印机，然后单击 Search 按钮。 8 机器的 IP 地址与型号名称显示在列表字段上。 9 选择机器并单击 Next。 10 输入打印机描述，然后单击 Next。 11 添加机器后，单击 Finish。 12 安装完成后，单击 Finish。添加网络打印机 1 双击 Unified Driver Configurator。 2 单击 Add Printer.。 3 Add printer wizard 窗口打开。单击 Next。 4 选择 Network printer，然后单击 Search 按钮。 5 打印机的 IP 地址与型号显示在列表字段上。 6 选择机器并单击 Next。 7 输入打印机描述，然后单击 Next。 8 添加机器后，单击 Finish。 9 UNIX • 确保机器支持 UNIX 操作系统，然后安装 UNIX 打印机驱动程序（请参见第 7 页上的“操作系统”）。 • 命令以双引号标出，但是键入命令时，切勿键入双引号。 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“操作系统”）。通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 146 要使用 UNIX 打印机驱动程序，您必须首先安装 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包，然后设置打印机。您需要从 Samsung 网站下载 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包（http://www.samsung.com > 查找产品 > 支持或下载）。安装 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包安装步骤对于提及的所有 UNIX 操作系统变体都通用。 1 从 Samsung 网站，下载 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包并解压到您的计算机上。 2 获取 root 权限。 “su -” 3 将相应的驱动程序压缩包复制到目标 UNIX 计算机。有关详细信息，请参见 UNIX 操作系统的管理指南。 4 打开 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包。例如，在 IBM AIX 上，使用下列命令。 “gzip -d < 输入包名称 | tar xf -” 5 转到解压缩的目录。 6 运行安装脚本。 “./install” install 是用于安装或卸载 UNIX 打印机驱动程序包的安装程序脚本文件。使用“chmod 755 install”命令提供安装程序脚本的许可。 7 执行 “./install –c”命令以验证安装结果。 8 从命令行运行“installprinter”。这将打开“Add Printer Wizard”窗口。请根据以下步骤在此窗口中设置打印机：在某些 UNIX 操作系统（如 Solaris 10）中，刚添加的打印机可能未启用和/或可能不接受作业。在这种情况下，在 root 终端上运行以下两个命令： “accept ” “enable ”通过网络安装驱动程序 2. 使用联网机器 147 卸载打印机驱动程序包应使用实用程序来删除系统中安装的打印机。 a 从终端运行“uninstallprinter”命令。这将打开 Uninstall Printer Wizard。已安装的打印机将会在下拉列表中列出。 b 选择要删除的打印机。 c 单击 Delete 将该打印机从系统中删除。 d 执行 “./install –d”命令卸载整个包。 e 要验证卸载结果，请执行“./install –c”命令。要重新安装它，使用命令“./install”重新安装二进制文件。设置打印机要将打印机添加到您的 UNIX 系统，请从命令行运行“installprinter”。这将打开“Add Printer Wizard”窗口。请根据以下步骤在此窗口中设置打印机： 1 键入打印机的名称。 2 从型号列表中选择相应的打印机型号。 3 在 Type 字段中输入与打印机类型对应的任何描述。这是可选的。 4 在 Description 字段中，指定任何打印机描述。这是可选的。 5 在 Location 字段中，指定打印机的位置。 6 在联网打印机对应的 Device 文本框中，键入打印机的 IP 地址或 DNS 名称。jetdirect Queue type 的 IBM AIX 上只允许使用 DNS 名称，而不允许使用数字 IP 地址。 7 Queue type 以 lpd 或 jetdirect 的形式在相应的列表框中显示连接。此外，Sun Solaris 操作系统中也可以使用 usb 类型。 8 选择 Copies 以设置份数。 9 选中 Collate 选项以接收已排序的副本。 10 选中 Reverse Order 选项以反序接收副本。 11 选中 Make Default 选项以将此打印机设为默认打印机。 12 单击 OK 以添加打印机。2. 使用联网机器 148 IPv6 配置仅 Windows Vista 或更高版本可以正确支持 IPv6。 • 视型号或国家/地区而定，部分功能和可选商品可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”或第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 如果 IPv6 网络似乎未正常工作，则将所有网络设置均设为出厂默认值，然后使用清除设置重试。在 IPv6 网络环境中，请按照下列步骤使用 IPv6 地址。 10 使用控制面板 1 使用网线将打印机联网。 2 打开打印机。 3 打印网络配置报告，它将检查 IPv6 地址（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”）。 4 选择开始 > 控制面板 > 打印机和传真。 5 单击打印机和传真窗口的左窗格中的添加打印机。 6 在添加打印机窗口中单击添加本地打印机。 7 将显示添加打印机向导窗口。按照窗口中的说明进行操作。如果打印机无法在网络环境中运行，则激活 IPv6。请参阅下一节。激活 IPv6 1 按控制面板上的（菜单）按钮。 2 按网路 > TCP/IP (IPv6) > 激活 IPv6。 3 选择打开并按OK。 4 关闭打印机，然后重新打开。 5 重新安装您的打印机驱动程序。设置 IPv6 地址机器支持使用下列 IPv6 地址进行网络打印和管理。 • Link-local Address:自行配置的本地 IPv6 地址（以 FE80 开头的地址）。 • Stateless Address:网络路由器自动配置的 IPv6 地址。 • Stateful Address:DHCPv6 服务器配置的 IPv6 地址。IPv6 配置 2. 使用联网机器 149 • Manual Address:用户手动配置的 IPv6 地址。 DHCPv6 地址配置（有状态）如果您的网络上有 DHCPv6 服务器，则可以设置下列任何一个选项作为默认的动态主机配置。 1 按控制面板上的（菜单）按钮。 2 按网路 > TCP/IP (IPv6) > 配置 DHCPv6。 3 按 OK 选择所需值。 • DHCPv6 地址：不管路由器是否请求，始终使用 DHCPv6。 • 关闭 DHCPv6：不管路由器是否请求，从不使用 DHCPv6。 • 路由器：路由器请求时仅使用 DHCPv6。 11 从 SyncThru™ Web Service 对于控制面板上没有显示屏的机型，您需要使用 IPv4 地址首先访问 SyncThru™ Web Service 并按照以下步骤操作才能使用 IPv6。 1 从 Windows 访问 web 浏览器，如 Internet Explorer。在地址字段中输入机器的 IP 地址（http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx），然后按“回车”键或单击执行。 2 如果是首次登录 SyncThru™ Web Service，您需要以管理员身份登录。键入以下默认 ID 和密码。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 3 当 SyncThru™ Web Service 窗口打开时，将鼠标光标移到顶部菜单栏的设置上，然后单击网络设置。 4 单击网站左窗格上的 TCP/IPv6。 5 选中 IPv6 协议复选框以激活 IPv6。 6 选中手册地址复选框。地址/前缀文本框随即被激活。 7 输入地址的其余部分（例如：3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA。“A”为十六进制 0 到 9，A 到 F）。 8 选择 DHCPv6 配置。 9 单击应用按钮。IPv6 配置 2. 使用联网机器 150 使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 1 启动 Internet Explorer 等 Web 浏览器，该浏览器必须支持将 IPv6 寻址为 URL。 2 从网络配置报告中选择一个 IPv6 地址（Link-local Address、 Stateless Address、Stateful Address、Manual Address）（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”）。 3 输入 IPv6 地址（例如：http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]）。地址必须括在“[ ]”括号中间。2. 使用联网机器 151 无线网络设置 • 确保机器支持无线联网。根据型号，无线联网可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 如果 IPv6 网络似乎无法正常工作，则将所有网络设置设置为出厂默认值，然后使用清除设置重试。 12 入门理解您的网络类型通常，计算机和打印机之间每次只能有一个连接。无线网络名称和网络密钥无线网络对安全性要求较高，因此在首次设置接入点时，要为网络创建网络名称（SSID），所用安全级别类型和网络密钥。在继续机器安装之前，向网络管理员咨询此信息。基础结构模式这种环境通常用于家庭和 SOHO（小型办公室/家庭办公室）。该模式使用接入点与无线设备通信。特别模式该模式不使用接入点。无线计算机和无线设备直接通信。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 152 13 介绍无线网络设置方法您可以从机器或计算机配置无线设置。从下表选择设置方法。视型号或国家/地区而定，部分无线网络安装类型可能不可用。设置方法连接方法描述与参考从机器的控制面板使用 WPS（推荐） ( ) • 请参见第 155 页上的“有显示屏的机器”。 • 请参见第 156 页上的“没有显示屏的机器”。使用菜单按钮 ( ) • 请参见第 157 页上的“使用菜单按钮”。从计算机安装接入点（通过 USB 电缆，推荐） ( ) • Windows 用户，请参见第 158 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 • Macintosh 用户，请参见第 166 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。接入点（通过 WPS 按钮，无 USB 电缆连接） ( , ) • Windows 用户，请参见第 161 页上的“接入点（通过 WPS 按钮，无 USB 电缆连接）”。 • Macintosh 用户，请参见第 169 页上的“使用 WPS 按钮设置接入点”。点对点（通过 USB 电缆） ( ) • Windows 用户，请参见第 163 页上的“点对点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 • Macintosh 用户，请参见第 170 页上的“点对点（通过 USB 电缆）”。使用网络电缆 • 请参见第 173 页上的“使用网络电缆”。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 153 如果在无线设置或驱动程序安装过程中发生问题，请参阅故障排除章节（请参见第 177 页上的“故障排除”）。其他设置方法为移动打印设置无线直连 • 请参见第 176 页上的“设置无线直连”。设置方法连接方法描述与参考无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 154 14 使用 WPS 按钮如果打印机和接入点（或无线路由器）支持 WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™)，则可以在没有计算机的情况下，通过按控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮，轻松配置无线网络设置。 • 如果要使用基础结构模式的无线网络，请确保网线已从打印机断开。使用 WPS (PBC) 按钮还是从计算机输入 PIN 连接到接入点（或无线路由器）因使用的接入点（或无线路由器）不同而异。请参考所用接入点（或无线路由器）的用户指南。 • 使用 WPS 按钮设置无线网络时，安全设置可能改变。为了防止这种情况，请为当前无限安全设置锁定 WPS 选项。选项名称可能因所使用的接入点（或无线路由器）不同而异。准备事项 • 检查接入点（或无线路由器）是否支持 Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ （WPS）。 • 检查打印机是否支持 Wi-Fi Protected Setup™（WPS）。 • 联网计算机（仅限 PIN 模式）选择类型可以通过两种方法，使用控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮将机器连接到无线网络。按钮配置 (PBC) 法–用户可分别按下机器控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮和支持 Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) 的接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮，从而将机器连接到无线网络。个人识别码 (PIN) 法 - 用户可在启用 WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) 的接入点（或无线路由器）上输入所提供的 PIN 信息，从而将打印机连接到无线网络。打印机的出厂默认设置为 PBC 模式，该模式推荐用于典型无线网络环境。您可以在控制面板中更改 WPS 模式（（菜单) > 网路 > 无线 > OK > WPS 设置。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 155 有显示屏的机器以 PBC 模式连接 1 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮超过 2 秒钟。机器启动并最多等待两分钟，在此期间，请按接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS（PBC）按钮。 2 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。消息按以下顺序出现在显示屏上： a 正在连接: 打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 b 连接: 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。 c SSID 类型: 完成无线网络连接过程后，在显示屏上会显示接入点的 SSID 信息。以 PIN 模式连接 1 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮超过 2 秒钟。 2 随即在显示屏上显示八位数的 PIN。您需要在两分钟内在连接到接入点（或无线路由器）的计算机上输入八位 PIN。消息按以下顺序出现在显示屏上： a 正在连接: 机器连接至无线网络。 b 连接: 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。 c SSID 类型: 完成无线网络连接过程后，LCD 显示屏上会显示接入点的 SSID 信息。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 156 没有显示屏的机器以 PBC 模式连接 1 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮约 2 到 4 秒钟，直至状态 LED 快速闪烁。机器开始连接无线网络。LED 在按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 PBC 按钮前最多缓慢闪烁两分钟。 2 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。 a WPS LED 的灯光快速闪烁。打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 b 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。以 PIN 模式连接 1 必须打印包含 PIN 的网络配置报告（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”）。在就绪模式下，按住控制面板上的（取消或停止/清除）按钮约 5 秒钟。可以找到机器的 PIN。 2 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮超过 4 秒钟，直至状态 LED 点亮。机器开始连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 3 您需要在两分钟内在连接到接入点（或无线路由器）的计算机上输入八位 PIN。 LED 将缓慢闪烁（最多两分钟），直到您输入八位 PIN。 WPS LED 按以下顺序闪烁： a WPS LED 的灯光快速闪烁。打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 b 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。重新连接到网络当无线功能关闭后，本机将使用先前的无线连接设置和地址自动尝试重新连接接入点（或无线路由器）。在以下情形中，本机会自动重新连接无线网络： • 关闭机器后又重新打开时。 • 关闭接入点（或无线路由器）后又重新打开时。取消连接进程要在打印机连接无线网络时取消无线网络连接，请按下并松开控制面板上的（取消或停止/清除）。需要等待 2 分钟才能重新连接无线网络。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 157 从网络断开连接要断开无线网络连接，请按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮超过 2 秒钟。 • Wi-Fi 网络处于空闲模式时: 机器立即断开无线网络连接，并且 WPS LED 熄灭。 • 正在使用 Wi-Fi 网络时: 当打印机在等待当前作业完成时，WPS LED 的灯光将会快速闪烁。随后自动断开无线网络连接，并且 WPS LED 熄灭。 15 使用菜单按钮根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。开始之前，您需要了解您无线网络的网络名称（SSID），如果经过加密，则还需要了解网络密钥。当安装接入点（或无线路由器）后设置该信息。如果不了解无线网络，请咨询网络的设置人员。完成无线网络连接后，需要安装打印机驱动程序才能从应用程序进行打印（请参见第 140 页上的“通过网络安装驱动程序”）。 1 按控制面板上的（菜单）按钮。 2 按网路 > 无线 > WLAN 设置。 3 按 OK 选择所需的设置方法。 • 向导（推荐）: 此模式中，设置是自动的。机器将显示可供选择的网络列表。选择一个网络后，打印机将提示您输入相应的安全密钥。 • 自定义: 在该模式中，用户可以手动提供或编辑自己的 SSID 或选择具体的安全选项。 16 使用 Windows 设置无线设置程序的快捷方式（没有 CD）：如果安装过一次打印机驱动程序，则无需 CD 即可访问无线设置程序。从“开始”菜单中选择程序或所有程序 > Samsung Printers > 您的打印机驱动程序名称 > 无线设置程序。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 158 接入点（通过 USB 电缆）准备事项 • 接入点 • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器 • USB 线创建基础结构网络 1 检查 USB 线是否连接到打印机。 2 打开计算机，接入点和打印机。 3 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 4 选择无线设置和安装选项。 5 阅读许可协议，然后选择我接受许可协议的条款。然后单击下一步。 6 软件会搜索无线网络。如果软件无法搜索到网络，请检查计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接是否正确，并遵照屏幕上的说明操作。 • 如果之前配置过无线网络设置，将显示无线网络设置信息窗口。如果要重置无线设置，请选中复选框并单击下一步。 • 要查看支持 WPS 按钮（不使用 USB 电缆连接）的型号，将显示以下窗口。 - 使用 USB 线缆：连接 USB 电缆并单击“下一步”，然后转到步骤 7。 - 使用 WPS 按钮：请参见第 161 页上的“接入点（通过 WPS 按钮，无 USB 电缆连接）”。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 159 7 从无线设置方法窗口中选择要使用的方法。 • 手动配置无线设置。：转到步骤 8。 • 通过按下接入点的 WPS 按钮配置无线设置。：通过按接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS 按钮连接到无线网络。 - 按照窗口中的说明进行操作。配置完无线网络设置后，转到步骤 11。 8 搜索后，窗口中会显示无线网络设备。选择正在使用的接入点名称（SSID），然后单击下一步。如果找不到希望选择的网络名称，或者希望手动设置无线配置，请单击高级设置。 • 输入无线网络名称: 输入接入点的 SSID（SSID 区分大小写）。 • 操作模式: 选择基础结构。 • 验证: 选择验证类型。开放系统: 不使用验证，并且是否采用加密，视数据安全的需要而定。共享密钥: 使用验证。只有拥有正确 WEP 密钥的设备才可访问网络。 WPA Personal 或 WPA2 Personal: 选择该选项，根据“WPA 预共享密钥”验证打印服务器。此验证使用在接入点及其每个客户端上手动配置的共享密钥（通常称为预共享密钥口令）。 • 加密: 选择加密（无，WEP64，WEP128，TKIP，AES，TKIP AES）。 • 网络密钥: 输入加密网络密钥值。 • 确认网络密钥: 确认加密网络密钥值。 • WEP 密钥索引: 如果使用 WEP 加密，请选择相应的 WEP 密钥索引。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 160 当接入点有安全设置时，会显示无线网络安全窗口。出现无线网络安全窗口。该窗口可能会根据安全模式的不同而异： WEP 或 WPA。 • 有线等效加密（WEP）验证方法选择开放系统或共享密钥，然后输入 WEP 安全密钥。单击下一步。 WEP（有线等效保密）是一种防止非法访问无线网络的安全协议。 WEP 使用 64 位或 128 位 WEP 加密密钥，对在无线网络上交换的每个数据包的数据部分进行加密。 • Wi-Fi 保护访问（WPA）输入 WPA 共享密钥，然后单击下一步。 WPA 根据定期自动变更的密钥对用户授权和识别用户。WPA 还使用 TKIP（暂时密钥完整性协议）和 AES（高级加密标准）进行数据加密。 9 该窗口会显示无线网络设置并检查设置是否正确。单击下一步。 • 对于 DHCP 方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为 DHCP，检查窗口中是否显示 DHCP。如果显示为静态，则单击更改 TCP/IP 将分配方法更改为 DHCP。 • 对于静态方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为静态，则检查“静态”是否显示在窗口中。如果显示 DHCP，请单击更改 TCP/IP 以输入打印机的 IP 地址和其他网络配置值。在输入打印机的 IP 地址之前，必须了解计算机的网络配置信息。如果计算机设置为 DHCP，则必须联系网络管理员以获取静态 IP 地址。例如：如果计算机的网络信息如下所示， - IP 地址： 169.254.133.42 - 子网掩码： 255.255.0.0 则打印机的网络信息应如下： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.43 - 子网掩码：255.255.0.0（使用计算机的子网掩码） - 网关： 169.254.133.1 10 当告诉您网络电缆连接已确认的窗口显示时，断开网络电缆连接并单击下一步。如果接上网络电缆，它在配置无线网络时可能较难找到机器。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 161 11 无线网络设置完成。要从支持无线直连的移动设备进行打印，请设置无线直连选项（请参见第 176 页上的“设置无线直连”）。 Wi-Fi Direct 选项: • 无线直连选项仅在打印机支持此功能时显示在屏幕上。 • 可以通过 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 开始构建无线直连（请参见第 176 页上的“设置无线直连”）。 • 网络名称 (SSID)：默认网络名称是型号名，最大长度为 22 个字符（不包括“Direct-xx-”）。 • 网络密钥是一个数字字符串，大小为 8~64 个字符。 12 无线网络设置完成后，断开计算机与打印机之间的 USB 电缆连接。单击下一步。 13 当出现确认打印机连接窗口时，单击下一步。 14 选择要安装的组件。单击下一步。 15 选择组件后，还可以更改打印机的名称，设置要在网络上共享的打印机，将打印机设置为默认打印机以及更改每台打印机的端口名称。单击下一步。 16 完成安装后，将出现一个窗口，询问您是否打印测试页。如果要打印测试页，请单击打印测试页。否则，只需单击下一步，然后转到步骤 18。 17 如果测试页打印正确，请单击是。否则，请单击否重新打印。 18 如果要在 Samsung 网站上注册您的打印机并接收实用信息，请单击在线注册。否则单击完成。接入点（通过 WPS 按钮，无 USB 电缆连接）对于带 WPS 按钮的型号，您可以使用 WPS 按钮（不使用 USB 连接）和接入点（或路由器）WPS 按钮设置无线网络。准备事项 • 接入点（或无线路由器） • 已连接网络的计算机无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 162 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的打印机创建基础结构网络 1 打开计算机、接入点和机器。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 选择无线设置和安装选项。 4 阅读许可协议，然后选择我接受许可协议的条款。然后单击下一步。 5 选择使用 WPS 按钮选项并单击下一步。 • 对于支持 WPS 按钮的型号，将显示以上窗口。 • 如果机器通过 USB 电缆连接，则不显示以上窗口。如果要使用 WPS 按钮设置无线网络，请断开 USB 电缆的连接。 • 如果要使用 USB 电缆设置无线网络，请参阅第 158 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 6 下一个窗口将要求您检查接入点（或无线路由器）是否支持 WPS。如果接入点或（无线路由器）有 WPS 按钮，请选择是并单击下一步。 7 按照窗口中的说明设置无线网络。 • 对于带显示屏的型号，请按照以下步骤操作。 a 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮约 2-4 秒钟。机器最长会等待 2 分钟，在此期间您必须按下接入点（或路由器）上的 WPS 按钮。 b 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。消息按以下顺序出现在显示屏上： - 正在连接: 打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 - 连接: 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 163 - SSID 类型: 完成无线网络连接过程后，在显示屏上会显示接入点的 SSID 信息。 • 对于不带显示屏的型号，请按照以下步骤操作。 a 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮约 2 到 4 秒钟，直至状态 LED 快速闪烁。机器开始连接无线网络。LED 在按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 PBC 按钮前最多缓慢闪烁两分钟。 b 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。 - 连接到接入点（或无线路由器）时，WPS LED 会快速闪烁。 - 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。 8 将显示无线网络设置完成窗口。单击下一步。 9 当出现确认打印机连接窗口时，单击下一步。 10 选择要安装的组件。单击下一步。 11 选择组件后，还可以更改打印机的名称，设置要在网络上共享的打印机，将打印机设置为默认打印机以及更改每台打印机的端口名称。单击下一步。 12 完成安装后，将出现一个窗口，询问您是否打印测试页。如果要打印测试页，请单击打印测试页。否则，只需单击下一步，然后转至步骤 14。 13 如果测试页打印正确，请单击是。否则，请单击否重新打印。 14 如果要在 Samsung 网站上注册您的打印机并接收实用信息，请单击在线注册。否则单击完成。点对点（通过 USB 电缆）如果没有接入点（AP），通过执行下面的简单步骤设置点对点无线网络，仍可将机器无线连接到计算机。准备事项 • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器 • USB 线在 Windows 中创建点对点网络 1 检查 USB 线是否连接到打印机。 2 打开计算机和无线网络打印机。 3 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 164 4 选择无线设置和安装选项。 5 阅读许可协议，然后选择我接受许可协议的条款。然后单击下一步。 6 软件会搜索无线网络。如果软件无法搜索到网络，请检查计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接是否正确，并遵照屏幕上的说明操作。 7 搜索无线网络之后，将会显示打印机所搜索到的无线网络列表。如要使用 Samsung 默认点对点设置，请选择列表中的最后一个无线网络，即网络名称 (SSID) 为 Portthru，信号为打印机自我网络。然后单击下一步。如要使用其他点对点设置，请从列表中选择其他无线网络。如果要更改点对点设置，请单击高级设置按钮。 • 输入无线网络名称: 输入所需 SSID 名称（SSID 区分大小写）。 • 操作模式: 选择“点对点”。 • 通道: 选择通道。(自动设置或 2412 MHz 到 2467 MHz）。 • 验证: 选择验证类型。开放系统: 不使用验证，并且是否采用加密，视数据安全的需要而定。共享密钥: 使用验证。只有拥有正确 WEP 密钥的设备才可访问网络。 • 加密: 选择加密（无，WEP64，WEP128）。 • 网络密钥: 输入加密网络密钥值。 • 确认网络密钥: 确认加密网络密钥值。 • WEP 密钥索引: 如果使用 WEP 加密，请选择相应的 WEP 密钥索引。当点对点网络启用安全性时，会出现无线网络安全窗口。验证方法选择开放系统或共享密钥，然后单击下一步。 • WEP（有线等效保密）是一种防止非法访问无线网络的安全协议。 WEP 使用 64 位或 128 位 WEP 加密密钥，对在无线网络上交换的每个数据包的数据部分进行加密。 8 出现显示无线网络设置的窗口。检查设置，然后单击下一步。在输入打印机的 IP 地址之前，必须了解计算机的网络配置信息。如果将计算机的网络配置设置为 DHCP，则无线网络设置也应为 DHCP。同样，如果将计算机的网络配置设置为静态，则无线网络设置也应为静态。如果计算机设置为 DHCP，但用户想要使用“静态”无线网络设置，则必须联系网络管理员以获取静态 IP 地址。 • 对于 DHCP 方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为 DHCP，请检查 DHCP 是否显示在无线网络设置确认窗口中。如果显示为静态，则单击更改 TCP/IP 将分配方法更改为自动接收 IP 地址 (DHCP)。 • 对于静态方法无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 165 如果 IP 地址分配方法“静态”，请检查无线网络设置确认窗口中是否显示“静态”。如果显示 DHCP，请单击更改 TCP/IP 以输入打印机的 IP 地址和其他网络配置值。例如：如果计算机的网络信息如下所示： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.42 - 子网掩码： 255.255.0.0 则打印机的网络信息应如下： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.43 - 子网掩码：255.255.0.0（使用计算机的子网掩码） - 网关： 169.254.133.1 9 将显示无线网络设置完成窗口。单击下一步。 10 无线网络设置完成后，断开计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接。单击下一步。如果出现更改 PC 网络设置窗口，请按照窗口上的步骤进行操作。完成计算机的无线网络设置后，请单击下一步。如果将计算机的无线网络设置为 DHCP，则需要几分钟才能接收到 IP 地址。 11 当出现确认打印机连接窗口时，单击下一步。 12 选择要安装的组件。单击下一步。 13 选择组件后，还可以更改打印机的名称，设置要在网络上共享的打印机，将打印机设置为默认打印机以及更改每台打印机的端口名称。单击下一步。 14 完成安装后，将出现一个窗口，询问您是否打印测试页。如果要打印测试页，请单击打印测试页。否则，只需单击下一步，然后转至步骤 16。 15 如果测试页打印正确，请单击是。否则，请单击否重新打印。 16 如果要在 Samsung 网站上注册您的打印机并接收实用信息，请单击在线注册。否则单击完成。 17 使用 Macintosh 设置准备事项 • 接入点 • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器 • USB 线无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 166 接入点（通过 USB 电缆） 1 检查 USB 线是否连接到打印机。 2 打开计算机，接入点和打印机。 3 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 4 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 5 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Installer OS X 图标。 6 单击继续。 7 阅读许可协议，然后单击继续。 8 单击同意接受许可协议。 9 当屏幕上出现关于计算机上的所有应用程序将被关闭的警告消息时，请单击继续。 10 在用户选项窗格中单击无线网络设置。 11 软件会搜索无线网络。如果软件无法搜索到网络，请检查计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接是否正确，并遵照屏幕上的说明操作。 • 如果之前配置过无线网络设置，将显示无线网络设置信息窗口。如果要重置无线设置，请选中复选框并单击下一步。 • 要查看支持 WPS 按钮（不使用 USB 电缆连接）的型号，将显示以下窗口。 - 使用 USB 线缆：连接 USB 电缆并单击“下一步”，然后转到步骤 7。 - 使用 WPS 按钮：请参见第 161 页上的“接入点（通过 WPS 按钮，无 USB 电缆连接）”。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 167 12 从无线设置方法窗口中选择要使用的方法。 • 手动配置无线设置。：转到步骤 13。 • 通过按下接入点的 WPS 按钮配置无线设置。：通过按接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS 按钮连接到无线网络。 - 按照窗口中的说明进行操作。配置完无线网络设置后，转到步骤 16。 13 搜索后，窗口中会显示无线网络设备。选择正在使用的接入点名称（SSID），然后单击下一步。如果手动设置无线配置，则单击高级设置。 • 输入无线网络名称: 输入接入点的 SSID（SSID 区分大小写）。 • 操作模式: 选择基础结构。 • 验证: 选择验证类型。开放系统: 不使用验证，并且是否采用加密，视数据安全的需要而定。共享密钥: 使用验证。只有拥有正确 WEP 密钥的设备才可访问网络。 WPA Personal 或 WPA2 Personal: 选择该选项，以根据“WPA 预共享密钥”验证打印服务器。此验证使用在接入点及其每个客户端上手动配置的共享密钥（通常称为预共享密钥口令）。 • 加密: 选择加密（无、WEP64、WEP128、TKIP、AES、TKIP、AES） • 网络密钥: 输入加密网络密钥值。 • 确认网络密钥: 确认加密网络密钥值。 • WEP 密钥索引: 如果使用 WEP 加密，请选择相应的 WEP 密钥索引。当接入点启用安全性时，会显示无线网络安全窗口。出现无线网络安全窗口。该窗口可能会根据安全模式的不同而异： WEP 或 WPA。 • WEP 针对验证选择开放系统或共享密钥，然后输入 WEP 安全密钥。单击下一步。 WEP（有线等效保密）是一种防止非法访问无线网络的安全协议。 WEP 使用 64 位或 128 位 WEP 加密密钥，对在无线网络上交换的每个数据包的数据部分进行加密。 • WPA 输入 WPA 共享密钥，然后单击下一步。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 168 WPA 根据定期自动变更的密钥对用户授权和识别用户。WPA 还使用 TKIP（暂时密钥完整性协议）和 AES（高级加密标准）进行数据加密。 14 该窗口会显示无线网络设置并检查设置是否正确。单击下一步。 • 对于 DHCP 方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为 DHCP，检查窗口中是否显示 DHCP。如果显示为静态，则单击更改 TCP/IP 将分配方法更改为 DHCP。 • 对于静态方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为静态，则检查“静态”是否显示在窗口中。如果显示 DHCP，请单击更改 TCP/IP 以输入打印机的 IP 地址和其他网络配置值。在输入打印机的 IP 地址之前，必须了解计算机的网络配置信息。如果计算机设置为 DHCP，则必须联系网络管理员以获取静态 IP 地址。例如：如果计算机的网络信息如下所示： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.42 - 子网掩码： 255.255.0.0 则机器的网络信息应如下： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.43 - 子网掩码：255.255.0.0（使用计算机的子网掩码） - 网关： 169.254.133.1 15 当告诉您网络电缆连接已确认的窗口显示时，断开网络电缆连接并单击下一步。如果接上网络电缆，它在配置无线网络时可能较难找到机器。 16 无线网络设置完成。要从支持无线直连的移动设备进行打印，请设置无线直连选项（请参见第 176 页上的“设置无线直连”）。 Wi-Fi Direct 选项: • 无线直连选项仅在打印机支持此功能时显示在屏幕上。 • 可以通过 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 开始构建无线直连（请参见第 176 页上的“设置无线直连”）。 • 网络名称 (SSID)：默认网络名称是型号名，最大长度为 22 个字符（不包括 “Direct-xx-”）。 • 网络密钥是一个数字字符串，大小为 8~64 个字符。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 169 17 无线网络设置完成后，断开计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接。 18 无线网络设置完成。安装完成后，请单击退出。完成无线网络连接后，需要安装打印机驱动程序才能从应用程序进行打印（请参见第 130 页上的“Macintosh 安装”）。使用 WPS 按钮设置接入点对于带 WPS 按钮的型号，您可以使用 WPS 按钮（不使用 USB 连接）和接入点（或路由器）WPS 按钮设置无线网络。准备事项 • 接入点（或无线路由器） • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器创建基础结构网络 1 打开计算机、接入点和机器。 2 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 3 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 4 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Installer OS X 图标。 5 单击继续。 6 阅读许可协议，然后单击继续。 7 单击同意接受许可协议。 8 当屏幕上出现关于计算机上的所有应用程序将被关闭的警告消息时，请单击继续。 9 在用户选项窗格中单击无线网络设置。 10 选择使用 WPS 按钮选项并单击下一步。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 170 • 对于支持 WPS 按钮的型号，将显示以上窗口。 • 如果机器通过 USB 电缆连接，则不显示以上窗口。如果要使用 WPS 按钮设置无线网络，请断开 USB 电缆的连接。 • 如果要使用 USB 电缆设置无线网络，请参阅第 166 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 11 下一个窗口将要求您检查接入点（或无线路由器）是否支持 WPS。如果接入点或（无线路由器）有 WPS 按钮，请选择是并单击下一步。 12 按照窗口中的说明设置无线网络。 • 对于带显示屏的型号，请按照以下步骤操作： a 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮约 2-4 秒钟。机器最长会等待 2 分钟，在此期间您必须按下接入点（或路由器）上的 WPS 按钮。 b 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。消息按以下顺序出现在显示屏上： - 正在连接: 打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 - 连接: 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。 - SSID 类型: 完成无线网络连接过程后，在显示屏上会显示接入点的 SSID 信息。 • 对于不带显示屏的型号，请按照以下步骤操作： a 按住控制面板上的 (WPS) 按钮约 2 到 4 秒钟，直至状态 LED 快速闪烁。机器开始连接无线网络。LED 在按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 PBC 按钮前最多缓慢闪烁两分钟。 b 按下接入点（或无线路由器）上的 WPS (PBC) 按钮。 - WPS LED 的灯光快速闪烁。打印机正在连接接入点（或无线路由器）。 - 当打印机成功连接到无线网络时，WPS LED 灯将保持点亮状态。 13 无线网络设置完成。安装完成后，请单击退出。完成无线网络连接后，需要安装打印机驱动程序才能从应用程序进行打印（请参见第 130 页上的“Macintosh 安装”）。点对点（通过 USB 电缆）如果没有接入点（AP），通过执行下面的简单说明设置点对点无线网络，仍可将机器无线连接到计算机。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 171 准备事项 • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器 • USB 线在 Macintosh 中创建点对点网络 1 检查 USB 线是否连接到打印机。 2 打开计算机和无线网络打印机。 3 在 CD-ROM 驱动器中插入随附的软件光盘。 4 双击在您 Macintosh 桌面上出现的光盘图标。 5 双击 MAC_Installer 文件夹 > Installer OS X 图标。 6 单击继续。 7 阅读许可协议，然后单击继续。 8 单击同意接受许可协议。 9 当屏幕上出现关于计算机上的所有应用程序将被关闭的警告消息时，请单击继续。 10 在用户选项窗格中单击无线网络设置。 11 软件会搜索无线网络设备。如果搜索失败，可检查计算机和打印机之间的 USB 线连接是否正确，然后遵照窗口中的说明进行操作。 12 搜索无线网络之后，将会显示打印机所搜索到的无线网络列表。如要使用 Samsung 默认点对点设置，请选择列表中最后一个无线网络，即网络名称 (SSID) 为 Portthru，信号为打印机自我网络。然后单击下一步。如要使用其他点对点设置，请从列表中选择其他无线网络。如要更改点对点设置，请单击高级设置按钮。 • 输入无线网络名称: 输入 SSID 名称（SSID 区分大小写）。 • 操作模式: 选择“点对点”。 • 通道: 选择通道（自动设置或 2412 MHz - 2467 MHz）。 • 验证: 选择验证类型。开放系统: 不使用验证，并且是否采用加密，视数据安全的需要而定。共享密钥: 使用验证。只有拥有正确 WEP 密钥的设备才可访问网络。 • 加密: 选择加密（无，WEP64，WEP128）。 • 网络密钥: 输入加密网络密钥值。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 172 • 确认网络密钥: 确认加密网络密钥值。 • WEP 密钥索引: 如果使用 WEP 加密，请选择相应的 WEP 密钥索引。当点对点网络拥有安全设置时，会出现无线网络安全窗口。验证方法选择开放系统或共享密钥，然后单击下一步。 • WEP（有线等效保密）是一种防止非法访问无线网络的安全协议。 WEP 使用 64 位或 128 位 WEP 加密密钥，对在无线网络上交换的每个数据包的数据部分进行加密。 13 出现显示无线网络设置的窗口。检查设置，然后单击下一步。在输入打印机的 IP 地址之前，必须了解计算机的网络配置信息。如果将计算机的网络配置设置为 DHCP，则无线网络设置也应为 DHCP。同样，如果将计算机的网络配置设置为静态，则无线网络设置也应为静态。如果计算机设置为 DHCP，却要使用静态无线网络设置，则必须联系网络管理员以获取静态 IP 地址。 • 对于 DHCP 方法如果 IP 地址分配方法为 DHCP，请检查 DHCP 是否显示在无线网络设置确认窗口中。如果显示为静态，则单击更改 TCP/IP 将分配方法更改为自动接收 IP 地址 (DHCP)。 • 对于静态方法如果 IP 地址分配方法“静态”，请检查无线网络设置确认窗口中是否显示“静态”。如果显示 DHCP，请单击更改 TCP/IP 以输入打印机的 IP 地址和其他网络配置值。例如：如果计算机的网络信息如下所示： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.42 - 子网掩码： 255.255.0.0 则机器的网络信息应如下： - IP 地址： 169.254.133.43 - 子网掩码：255.255.0.0（使用计算机的子网掩码） - 网关： 169.254.133.1无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 173 14 当告诉您网络电缆连接已确认的窗口显示时，断开网络电缆连接并单击下一步。如果接上网络电缆，它在配置无线网络时可能较难找到机器。 15 无线网络根据网络配置进行连接。 16 无线网络设置完成。安装完成后，请单击退出。完成无线网络连接后，需要安装打印机驱动程序才能从应用程序进行打印（请参见第 130 页上的“Macintosh 安装”）。 18 使用网络电缆不支持网络端口的机器无法使用此功能（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图 ”）。本产品是一款网络兼容打印机。要使机器能够联网使用，需要执行一些配置步骤。 • 完成无线网络连接后，需要安装打印机驱动程序才能从应用程序进行打印（请参见第 140 页上的“通过网络安装驱动程序”）。 • 有关网络配置的信息，请询问网络管理员或无线网络的安装人员。准备事项 • 接入点 • 已连接网络的计算机 • 本机随附软件光盘 • 装有无线网络接口的机器 • 网线打印网络配置报告可以通过打印网络配置报告来确认打印机的网络设置。请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”。使用 SetIP 程序（Windows）进行 IP 设置该程序用于使用打印机的 MAC 地址手动设置网络 IP 地址，以便与打印机通信。MAC 地址是网络接口的硬件序列号，可在网络配置报告中找到。请参见第 137 页上的“设置 IP 地址”。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 174 配置机器的无线网络开始之前，需要了解无线网络的网络名称（SSID），如果经过加密，则还需要了解网络密钥。当安装接入点（或无线路由器）后设置该信息。如果不了解无线网络，请咨询网络的设置人员。要配置无线参数，可以使用 SyncThru™ Web Service。使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 在开始配置无线参数之前，先检查线缆连接状态。 1 检查打印机是否连接网线。如果未连接，请为打印机连接标准网线。 2 启动 Internet Explorer，Safari 或 Firefox 等 Web 浏览器，并在机器窗口中输入打印机的新 IP 地址。例如： 3 单击 SyncThru™ Web Service 网站右上角的登录。 4 键入 ID 和密码，然后单击登录。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 5 当 SyncThru™ Web Service 窗口打开时，单击网络设置。 6 单击无线 > 向导。向导将帮助您设置无线网络配置。然而，如果您希望直接设置无线网络，请选择自定义。 7 在列表中选择一个网络名称 (SSID)。 • SSID:SSID（服务集标识符）是标识无线网络的名称。接入点和试图连接至特定无线网络的无线设备必须使用相同的 SSID。 SSID 区分大小写。 • 操作模式:操作模式是指无线连接的类型（请参见第 151 页上的“ 无线网络名称和网络密钥”）。 - 点对点:允许无线设备在对等环境中彼此直接进行通信。 - 基础结构:允许无线设备通过接入点彼此进行通信。如果网络的操作模式为基础结构，请选择接入点的 SSID。如果操作模式为点对点，请选择机器的 SSID。请注意，“portthru”为机器的默认 SSID。 8 单击下一步。如果出现无线安全设置窗口，请输入注册的密码（网络密钥），然后单击下一步。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 175 9 确认窗口出现后，请检查无线设置。如果设置正确，则单击应用。断开网线连接（标准或网络）。打印机然后将开始与网络进行无线通信。在点对点模式下，您可以同步使用无线 LAN 和有线 LAN。 19 开关 Wi-Fi 网络如果机器带显示屏，您也可以从机器的控制面板中通过网络菜单打开/ 关闭无线。 1 检查网线是否连接到打印机。如果未连接，请为打印机连接标准网线。 2 启动 Internet Explorer，Safari 或 Firefox 等 Web 浏览器，并在机器窗口中输入打印机的新 IP 地址。例如： 3 单击 SyncThru™ Web Service 网站右上角的登录。 4 键入 ID 和密码，然后单击登录。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 5 当 SyncThru™ Web Service 窗口打开时，单击网络设置。 6 单击无线 > 自定义。也可开关 Wi-Fi 网络。 20 为移动打印设置无线直连无线直连是打印机和移动设备之间的一种简单易用的对等连接方法，它提供安全连接并且吞吐量优于点对点模式。借助无线直连，您可以将打印机连接到无线直连网络，同时连接的接入点。您还可以同时使用有线网络和无线直连网络，这样多个用户可以通过无线直连和有线网络访问和打印文档。 • 无法通过打印机的无线直连连接到 Internet。 • 支持的协议列表可能因型号不同而异，无线直连网络不支持 IPv6、网络过滤、IPSec、WINS 和 SLP 服务。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 176 设置无线直连您可以通过以下方法之一启用无线直连功能。从 USB 电缆连接的计算机（推荐） • 通过提供的软件 CD 设置时，您将看到通过 USB 电缆的接入点。 - Windows 用户，请参见第 158 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 - Macintosh 用户，请参见第 166 页上的“接入点（通过 USB 电缆）”。 • 完成驱动程序安装后，可以设置 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 并在无线直连中做出更改。 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 只适用于 Windows 和 Macintosh OS 用户。 - 从开始菜单中，选择程序或所有程序 > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > 设备设置 > 网络。 ▪ Wi-Fi Direct 打开/关闭：选择开启用它。 ▪ 设备名称：输入打印机的名称，在无线网络上搜索您的打印机。默认情况下，设备名称是型号名称。 ▪ IP 地址：输入打印机的 IP 地址。这个 IP 地址只适用于本地网络，不适用于基础设施有限或无线网络。我们推荐使用默认的本地 IP 地址（打印机无线直连的默认本地 IP 地址是 192.168.3.1） ▪ 组所有者：激活此选项，将打印机分配到无线直连组的所有人。组所有者类似于无线接入点。我们推荐激活此选项。 ▪ 网络密钥：如果您的打印机是组所有者，则其他移动设备连接到您的打印机就需要网络密钥。您可以自己配置网络密钥，或是记住默认情况下随机生成的给定网络密钥。从机器（带显示屏的机器） • 从控制面板中选择网路 > 无线 > 无线直连。 • 启用无线直连。从连接到网络的计算机如果打印机使用网络电缆或无线接入点，您可以从 SyncThru™ Web Service 启用和配置无线直连。 • 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service，选择设置 > 网络设置 > 无线 > 无线直连。 • 启用或禁用无线直连并设置其他选项。 • 对于 Linux OS 用户， - 打印 IP 网络配置报告可检查输出（请参见第 137 页上的“打印网络配置报告”）。 - 访问 SyncThru Web 服务，选择设置 > 网络设置 > 无线 > Wi-Fi Direct。 - 启用或禁用Wi-Fi Direct。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 177 设置移动设备 • 从打印机设置无线直连后，请参阅使用的移动设备的用户手册设置它的无线直连。 • 设置无线直连后，您需要下载移动打印应用程序（例如：Samsung Mobile 打印机）以便从智能手机上进行打印。 • 当找到要连接到移动设备的打印机时，选择打印机，打印机的 LED 会闪烁。按打印机上的 WPS 按钮，它将连接到您的移动设备。 • 如果移动设备不支持 WPS，您需要输入打印机的网络密钥而不是按 WPS 按钮。 21 故障排除设置或安装驱动程序时的问题未找到打印机 • 可能未打开打印机。打开计算机和打印机。 • 计算机和打印机之间未连接 USB 线。使用 USB 电缆将打印机连接到计算机。 • 打印机不支持无线联网。查看本机随附软件光盘中的用户指南，并准备好无线网络机器。连接失败 - 找不到 SSID • 打印机找不到您选择或输入的网络名称 (SSID)。检查接入点上的网络名称（SSID）并尝试重新连接。 • 接入点可能未打开。打开接入点。连接失败 - 无效的安全性 • 未正确配置安全性。检查接入点和打印机的安全性配置。连接失败 - 一般连接错误 • 计算机无法从机器收到信号。检查 USB 线以及打印机电源。连接失败 - 已连接有线网络 • 打印机已连接有线网线。请从打印机上拔下有线网线。 PC 连接错误 • 配置的网络地址无法在计算机和打印机之间建立连接。 - 对于 DHCP 网络环境如果计算机配置为采用 DHCP，则会自动接收 IP 地址（DHCP）。 - 对于静态网络环境如果计算机配置为采用静态地址，则打印机使用静态地址。例如：如果计算机的网络信息如下所示：无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 178 ▪ IP 地址： 169.254.133.42 ▪ 子网掩码： 255.255.0.0 则打印机的网络信息应如下： ▪ IP 地址： 169.254.133.43 ▪ 子网掩码：255.255.0.0（使用计算机的子网掩码） ▪ 网关： 169.254.133.1 其他问题如果在网络中使用打印机时出现问题，请检查以下几方面：有关接入点（或无线路由器）的信息，请参阅其用户指南。 • 计算机，接入点（或无线路由器）或打印机可能未开启。 • 检查打印机周围的无线接收。如果路由器远离打印机或中间有障碍，就可能给信号接收带来困难。 • 关闭接入点（或无线路由器），打印机和计算机的电源，然后再重新启动。有时重新启动会恢复网络通信。 • 检查防火墙软件（V3 或 Norton）是否封锁通信。如果计算机和打印机连接在同一网络中却搜索不到，可能是因为防火墙软件封锁了通信。请参阅防火墙软件的用户指南，将防火墙关闭，然后重新尝试搜索打印机。 • 检查打印机 IP 地址的分配是否正确。可打印网络配置报告来检查 IP 地址。 • 检查接入点（或无线路由器）是否配置了安全性（密码）。如果有密码，请询问接入点（或无线路由器）的管理员。 • 检查打印机的 IP 地址。重新安装打印机驱动程序并更改设置，以连接到网络中的打印机。鉴于 DHCP 的特性，如果机器长时间不使用，或者接入点被重置，则分配的 IP 地址可能会变化。在接入点（或无线路由器）上配置 DHCP 服务器时，请注册产品的 MAC 地址。然后就始终可以使用根据 MAC 地址设置的 IP 地址。可以通过打印网络配置报告识别打印机的 Mac 地址（请参见第 137 页上的 “打印网络配置报告”）。 • 检查无线环境。您可能无法在基础结构环境下连接网络，在该环境下连接到接入点（或无线路由器）之前，需要输入用户信息。 • 此机器仅支持 IEEE 802.11 b/g/n 和 Wi-Fi。不支持其他无线通信类型（如，蓝牙）。 • 在 Windows Vista 等操作系统下，使用点对点模式时，每次使用无线打印机都需要设置无线连接设置。 • Samsung 无线网络打印机不能同时使用基础结构模式和点对点模式。 • 机器位于无线网络的范围内。 • 应让机器避开那些可能阻碍无线信号的障碍。移除接入点（或无线路由器）同机器之间的任何大型金属物体。确保机器和无线接入点（或无线路由器）没有被含有金属或水泥的立柱、墙面或支柱隔开。无线网络设置 2. 使用联网机器 179 • 应让机器避开其他可能干扰无线信号的电子设备。许多设备会干扰无线信号，包括微波炉和一些蓝牙设备。 • 每当接入点（或无线路由器）的配置发生变化时，您必须重新设置产品的无线网络。2. 使用联网机器 180 Samsung MobilePrint 22 什么是 Samsung MobilePrint？ Samsung MobilePrint 是一款免费应用程序，它允许用户从智能手机或 Tablet 直接打印照片、文档和网页。Samsung MobilePrint 不仅与您的 Android、Windows 及 iOS 智能手机兼容，还与 iPod Touch 及 Tablet PC 兼容。它将您的移动设备连接到联网的 Samsung 打印机，或通过 Wi-Fi 接入点连接到无线打印机。无需安装新的驱动程序或配置网络设置－只需安装 Samsung MobilePrint 应用程序，它将自动检测兼容的 Samsung 打印机。除了打印照片、网页和 PDF，还支持扫描。如果您有 Samsung 多功能打印机，将任何文档扫描为 JPG、PDF 或 PNG 格式即可在移动设备上实现快速、轻松的查看。 23 下载 Samsung MobilePrint 要下载 Samsung MobilePrint，通过移动设备访问应用程序商店并搜索 “Samsung MobilePrint”。也可以通过计算机访问 iTunes（Apple 设备）或 Marketplace（Windows 设备）。 24 支持的移动操作系统 • Android OS 2.1 或更高版本 • iOS 4.0 或更高版本 • Windows Phone 7 或更高版本 25 支持的设备 • iOS 4.0 或更高版本: iPod Touch、iPhone、iPad • Android 2.1 或更高版本: Galxy S、Galaxy S2、Galaxy Tab 和 Android 移动设备 • Windows Phone 7 或更高版本: Samsung Windows Phone（Focus、 Omnia7 和 OmniaW）3. 实用设置菜单本章介绍如何浏览机器的当前状态，以及对高级机器设置进行配置的方法。 • 开始阅读章节前 182 • 打印菜单 183 • 复印菜单 184 • 传真菜单 190 • 扫描菜单 193 • 系统设置 195 • 管理员设置 206 • 自定义设置 2073. 实用设置菜单 182 开始阅读章节前本章解释这一系列型号提供的所有功能，帮助用户轻松理解这些功能。您可以通过基本指南（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）检查各个型号提供的功能。以下是使用本章的一些提示 • 使用控制面板可进入不同菜单，从而设置机器或使用机器的功能。按（菜单）可以访问这些菜单。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 对于控制面板没有（菜单）的型号，此功能不适用（请参见第 24 页上的“控制面板概览”）。 • 根据机器的选件或机型，某些菜单的名称可能与您的机器不同。3. 实用设置菜单 183 打印菜单根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 打印设置。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 打印设置。项目描述方向选择在页面上打印信息的方向。份数您可以使用数字键盘输入复印份数。分辨率指定每英寸的打印点数 (dpi)。分辨率设置越高，打印的字符和图形就越清晰。暗度减淡或加深页面上的打印内容。正常设置通常可以获得最佳效果。使用浅色墨粉密度可以节省墨粉。加黑文本打印文本时使其颜色比正常文档更深。模拟设置模拟类型和选项。3. 实用设置菜单 184 复印菜单 1 复印功能根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（复印）> （菜单）> 复印功能。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 复印默认值。 • 或按触摸屏上的复印 > 选择所需菜单项。项目描述 • 扫描范围 • 原始尺寸设置图像大小。份数您可以使用数字键盘输入复印份数。缩小/放大缩小或放大复印图像的尺寸（请参见第 59 页上的“ 缩小或放大的复印件”）。如果机器设置为环保模式，则缩小和放大功能不可用。暗度当原件包含模糊标记和深色图像时，可以调整亮度使复印件清晰易读（请参见第 58 页上的“明暗度 ”）。对比度当原稿包含的内容太浅或太深时，可以调整对比度等级，使原稿更容易读取（请参见第 58 页上的“暗度”）。原稿类型通过为当前复印作业选择文档类型，从而提高复印质量（请参见第 58 页上的“原始”）。方向设置原件图像的方向。版式调整海报、克隆、ID 复印、2/4 页缩印、小册子等版式格式。项目描述复印菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 185 • 复印分页 • 校对副本设置机器，对复印作业进行排序。例如，如果复印 2 份 3 页的原件，一份完整的 3 页文档复印完毕后，才会开始复印第二份完整的文档。 • 打开: 以成套方式打印输出，以符合原件的顺序。 • 关闭: 将打印输出按页分摞。 • 2页缩印或单面4页 • N 份副本缩小原始图像的尺寸，并在一张纸上打印 2 页或 4 页。只有当您将原件装入进稿器时，才能使用这个复印功能。项目描述 1 2 1 2 3 4 海报复印将单页文档打印到 4（海报 2x2）、9（海报 3x3）或 16（海报 4x4）页纸上，这样可以将纸张粘贴到一起形成海报大小的文档。 • 只有当您将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才可以使用此复印功能。 • 原件分为 9 部分。每一部分按以下顺序逐份扫描并打印：项目描述复印菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 186 克隆复印在一页上打印多个原始图像。图像数量根据原件图像和纸张大小自动确定。 • 只有当您将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才可以使用此复印功能。 • 不能使用缩小/放大功能的克隆复印调节复印尺寸。项目描述书本复印书籍复印功能允许您复印整本书籍。如果书籍过厚，请抬起盖板，直到转轴与挡块相触，然后合上扫描仪盖。如果书籍或杂志厚度超过 30 毫米，则应打开盖板复印。 • 关闭: 不使用此功能。 • 左页: 使用此选项打印书籍的左页。 • 右页: 使用此选项打印书籍的右页。 • 底页: 使用此选项打印书籍的左右页。只有当您将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才可以使用此复印功能。项目描述复印菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 187 书册机器将自动进行单面或双面打印，然后折叠制作成所有页面按正确顺序排列的书册。机器将缩小图像并正确调整每个图像的位置，以便适应选定的纸张。调节背景打印图像（但不打印背景）。此复印功能可以去掉背景色，在复印带有彩色背景的原件（如报纸或编录）时很有帮助。 • 关闭: 不使用此功能。 • 自动: 优化背景。 • 增强级别 1~2: 数字越大，背景越鲜艳。 • 清除级别 1~4: 数字越大，背景越亮。项目描述页边距移位复印允许您为文档创建装订边。可将图像在页面上进行上下和（或）左右移动。 • 关闭: 不使用此功能。 • 自动居中: 自动复印到纸张中心。只有将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才能使用此功能。 • 自定义页边距: 使用数字键盘输入左、右、上、下边距。项目描述复印菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 188 除边复印允许您擦除文档四边中任意一边的斑点、孔、折痕和装订印记。 • 关闭: 不使用此功能。 • 较小原稿: 如果原稿较小，则擦除边缘。只有将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才能使用此功能。 • 打孔: 擦除书籍装订孔印记。 • 书册居中: 复印书籍时，擦除纸张中间的黑色水平痕迹。只有将原件放在扫描仪玻璃板上时，才能使用此功能。 • 去除边界: 使用数字键盘输入左、右、上、下边距。灰度增强复印进行灰度复印时，使用该功能可获得质量更好的复印件。水印复印水印选项可允许在已有文档上打印文字。例如，如果您希望有大的灰色字母“草稿”或“机密”在文档的第一页或所有页上对角打印，则可以使用此功能。项目描述双面您可以设置机器以便在纸张的双面打印文档。 • 关闭: 正常模式打印。 • 1->2 面短边 • 1->2 面长边双面（续） • 2->1 面 • 2->2 面 • 2->1 面旋转 2 项目描述 2 5 3复印菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 189 2 复印设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项：按控制面板上的（复印）> （菜单）> 复印设置。项目描述更改默认设置将值或设置重置为打印机的开箱状态。3. 实用设置菜单 190 传真菜单 3 传真功能根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 传真默认值。 • 或按触摸屏上的传真 > 选择所需菜单项。项目描述 • 扫描范围 • 原始尺寸设置图像大小。对比度当原稿包含的内容太浅或太深时，可以调整对比度等级，使原稿更容易读取。暗度当原稿包含模糊标记和深色图像时，可以调整亮度，使原稿更容易读取（请参见第 65 页上的“暗度 ”）。分辨率使用基于文本的典型原件时，默认文档设置可以产生良好的传真效果。但在发送质量低劣的或含有照片的原件时，可以调整分辨率以获得更高质量的传真效果（请参见第 64 页上的“分辨率”）。双面在一张纸的两面打印接收的传真。多方发送将一份传真发送到多个目标（请参见第 63 页上的“ 将传真发送至多个目标”）。不能使用此功能发送彩色传真。延迟发送可以将机器设置为在您离开后发送传真（请参见第 243 页上的“延迟传真传送”）。不能使用此功能发送彩色传真。优先发送将原件扫描到内存中，并在当前操作结束时立即传送。在站点之间（例如，向站点 A 的传送结束之后，在向站点 B 传送开始之前）或在重拨操作之间，优先级传送将中断向多个目标发送（请参见第 244 页上的“发送优先传真”）。项目描述传真菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 191 4 发送设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 发送。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 传真默认值。转发将收到或发出的传真通过传真或 PC 转发到其他目标。如果不在办公室但必须接收传真，则该功能可能会有用。 • 请参见第 244 页上的“将已发传真转发到另一个目标”。 • 请参见第 245 页上的“转发已接收的传真”。安全接收将收到的传真存储在内存中，并且不打印出来。要打印收到的文档，您需要输入密码。您可以防止未经授权的人员查看收到的传真（请参见第 249 页上的“以安全接收模式接收”）。添加页面将其他文档添加到预定的延迟传真作业（请参见第 243 页上的“在预定传真中添加文档”）。取消作业取消保存在内存中的延迟传真作业（请参见第 244 页上的“取消预定传真作业”）。项目描述项目描述重拨次数设置重拨尝试次数。如果您输入 0，则机器将不会重拨。重拨期限设置自动重拨前的时间间隔。拨号前缀最多可以设置 5 位数的前缀。在自动拨号之前，系统先拨打此号码。这用于接入 PABX 交换系统。 ECM 模式使用错误校正模式 (ECM) 发送传真，确保传真顺利发出。它所用的时间可能更长。发送报告将机器设置为无论成功发送与否，都打印报告。如果选择打开-错误，则机器只在传输不成功时打印报告。图像 TCR 打印传送报告，其中包含已发送的第一页传真的最小化图像。拨号模式将拨号模式设置为音调或脉冲。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。节省话费在预设的廉价通话时间发送传真，从而节省电话费。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。传真菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 192 5 接收设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 接收。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 传真默认值。安装向导使您能轻松配置必要的传真选项，如设备 ID、传真号码等。项目描述接收模式选择默认传真接收模式。响铃应答指定应答来电之前机器响铃的次数。接收署名盖章在接收的每页传真的底部自动打印页码、接收日期和时间。项目描述接收开始代码从插入机器背部 EXT（分机）插槽的电话分机上接收传真。如果拿起电话分机并听到传真音，请输入此代码。出厂时此代码预设为 *9*。自动缩小自动缩小收到的传真页，使它适合装入机器中的纸张大小。废弃尺寸废弃收到的传真末尾的特定长度。垃圾传真设置屏蔽作为垃圾传真号存储在内存中的任何不想接收的传真。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。 DRPD模式允许用户使用一条线路应答多个不同的电话号码。您可以将机器设置为可识别各个号码的不同响铃模式。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区（请参见第 248 页上的“使用 DRPD 模式接收传真”）。双面打印双面打印接收到的传真数据。这样可以节省用纸。 • 文档箱保存 • 文档框保存将收到的传真存储在公共箱中。仅当已安装可选的大容量存储设备 (HDD) 驱动器时显示此菜单（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。项目描述3. 实用设置菜单 193 扫描菜单 6 扫描功能根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（扫描）> （菜单）> 扫描功能。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 扫描默认值。 • 或按触摸屏上的扫描 > 选择所需菜单项。 7 扫描设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。项目描述 • USB 默认值 • USB 将扫描目标设置为 USB。扫描原件并将扫描的图像保存到 USB 设备。 • 电子邮件默认 • 发送电子邮件 • 自定义电子邮件将扫描目标设置为电子邮件。扫描原件并将扫描的图像通过电子邮件发送到目标（请参见第 233 页上的“扫描至电子邮件”）。 • FTP 默认值 • FTP 将扫描目标设置为 FTP 服务器。扫描原件并将扫描的图像发送到 FTP 服务器（请参见第 234 页上的“ 扫描至 FTP/SMB 服务器”）。 • SMB 默认值 • SMB 将扫描目标设置为 SMB 服务器。扫描原件并将扫描的图像发送到 SMB 服务器（请参见第 234 页上的“扫描至 FTP/SMB 服务器”）。发送报告打印确认报告，表明已扫描图像的发送是否成功。本地 PC 将扫描目标设置为通过 USB 连接的计算机。扫描原稿并将扫描出的图像保存到我的文档等目录（请参见第 61 页上的“基本扫描”）。网络 PC 将扫描目标设置为通过网络连接的计算机。扫描原稿并将扫描出的图像保存到我的文档等目录（请参见第 232 页上的“从联网机器扫描”）。文档框将扫描目标设置为文档框。扫描原稿并将扫描出的图像发送到机器中名为文档框的存储位置。共享框将扫描目标设置为一个共享文件夹。您可以创建并使用共享文件夹（请参见第 251 页上的“使用共享文件夹功能”）。项目描述扫描菜单 3. 实用设置菜单 194 要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板上的（扫描）> （菜单）> 扫描设置。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 默认设置 > 扫描默认值。项目描述 • 扫描范围 • 原始尺寸设置图像大小。原稿类型设置原件文档的类型。分辨率设置图像分辨率。颜色模式设置颜色模式。文件格式设置要保存图像的文件格式。如果选择 BMP、 JPEG、TIFF 或 PDF，您可以选择扫描多页。暗度调整扫描的亮度等级。对比度调整对比度等级，使扫描件比原件略浅或略深。3. 实用设置菜单 195 系统设置 8 机器设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 设备设置。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 初始设置。项目描述设备 ID 设置机器 ID，将在发送的每个传真页顶部打印它。传真号码设置传真号码，将在发送的每个传真页顶部打印它。日期和时间设置日期和时间。时钟模式在 12 小时制和 24 小时制之间选择时间显示格式。表单菜单 • 关闭: 正常模式打印。 • 单表单: 使用第一个表单打印所有页。 • 双表单: 使用第一个表单打印封面，使用第二个表单打印封底。选择表单表单叠加是指以特殊文件格式存储在打印机大容量存储设备 (HDD) 中的图像，可以在任何文档的层中打印它们。 HDD 假脱机如果是打开，则将文档存储在大容量存储设备 (HDD) 中进行网络打印。语言设置控制面板显示屏上出现的文本所使用的语言。默认模式将机器的默认模式设置为传真模式、复印模式或扫描模式。默认纸张尺寸您可以设置要使用的默认纸张大小。节能设置机器在进入节能模式之前需要等待的时间。机器在一定时间内不接收数据时，耗电量会自动降低。扫描节能设置机器的扫描仪部件在进入省电模式之前等待的时间。如果扫描仪长时间不接收数据，将自动降低功耗。系统超时设置机器记住之前所用的复印设置的时间。超时后，机器将恢复默认复印设置。作业超时设置在打印机未以打印最后一页作为命令结束打印作业时，打印机等待打印该页面的时间。项目描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 196 叫醒事件您可以设置从节能模式唤醒机器的条件。将该项设置为开。 • 按钮: 按下除电源按钮以外的任何按钮，将从节能模式中唤醒机器。 • 扫描仪: 将纸张放入进稿器时，将从节能模式中唤醒机器。 • 打印机: 打开或关闭纸盘时，将从节能模式中唤醒机器。自动继续决定机器在检测到纸张与纸张设置不匹配时是否继续打印。 • 关闭: 如果纸张不匹配，机器将等待直至放入正确的纸张。 • 打开: 如果纸张不匹配，将显示错误消息。机器将等待约 30 秒，然后自动清除消息并继续打印。 • 高度调整 • 高度调整根据机器海拔优化打印质量。自动归位允许您在每次换行后添加必要的回车，这对 Unix 用户或 DOS 用户很有用。固件版本显示产品的固件版本。自动完成当您键入电子邮件地址或传真号码时提供建议。您无需完全键入数据，就可以找到并选择它。项目描述 • 自动更换纸盘 • 自动纸盘开关决定机器在检测到纸张不匹配时是否继续打印。例如，如果纸盘 1 和纸盘 2 都装有相同大小的纸张，机器在纸盘 1 中的纸张用完后将自动从纸盘 2 打印。如果从打印机驱动程序为纸张来源选择自动，则不显示该选项。纸张更换纸张更换自动代替打印机驱动程序的纸张大小，防止 Letter 与 A4 之间的纸张不匹配。例如，如果纸盘中为 A4 纸张，但您在打印机驱动程序中将纸张大小设置为 Letter，机器将在 A4 纸张上打印，反之亦然。纸张不匹配决定是否忽略纸张不匹配错误。如果选择关闭，即使纸张不匹配，机器仍将打印。打印空白页打印机检测计算机发出的打印数据，判断是否为空白页。您可以将它设置为打印或跳过空白页。多槽 • 模式: 选择要使用的多槽模式。 • 默认纸槽: 选择要作为默认纸槽的纸槽。默认来源选择要作为默认纸盒的纸盒。通讯簿查看或打印电话簿或电子邮件地址列表。项目描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 197 9 纸张设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 纸张设置。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 纸张设置。维护 • 清洁感光鼓: 通过打印一页，清洁炭粉盒的 OPC 硒鼓。 • 清洁定影器: 通过打印一页，清洁定影器。 • 清除已空消息: 仅当墨粉盒为空时出现此选项。 • 耗材信息: 允许您检查已经打印的页数以及墨粉盒内剩余的墨粉数量。 • “墨粉不足”警报: 如果墨粉盒中的墨粉已用完，会显示一则提示用户更换墨粉盒的消息。可设置此选项，以选择是否显示此消息。 • 纸张堆放: 如果您在潮湿地区使用机器，或者使用由于湿度高而受潮的打印介质，则出纸盘上的打印件可能会卷曲并且不能正确堆叠。在这种情况下，可以将机器设置为使用功能，以便使打印件能够紧密地堆叠。但是，使用此功能会降低打印速度。导入设置将 USB 记忆棒中存储的数据导入机器。导出设置将 USB 记忆棒中存储的数据导出到机器。节省炭粉激活此模式可以延长墨粉盒的寿命并降低每页的成本（与普通模式相比），但打印质量也会降低。静音模式开启此菜单可降低打印噪声。但打印速度和质量可能下降。项目描述环保设置允许您节省打印资源并实现环保打印。 • 默认模式: 选择是否开启 Eco 模式。强制（打开-强制）：将 Eco 模式设置为使用密码。如果用户要开启/关闭 Eco 模式，则必须输入密码。 • 选择模板（选择模板）: 从 SyncThru™ Web Service 中选择环保模板集。清除设置恢复机器的出厂默认设置。项目描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 198 10 声音/音量根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 声音/音量。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 初始设置 > 声音/音量。项目描述纸张大小根据您的需要将纸张大小设置为 A4、Letter 或其他纸张大小。纸张类型为每个纸盘选择纸张类型。纸张来源选择使用哪个纸盘中的纸张。边距设置文档页边距。纸盘确认激活纸盘确认消息。如果打开或关闭某个纸盘，会显示一个窗口询问您是否为刚才打开的纸盘设置纸张大小和类型。项目描述按键声音打开或关闭按键声音。如果此选项设置为“开”，则每次按键时都会发出提示音。警报声音打开或关闭警报音。如果此选项设置为“开”，每当发生错误或传真通讯结束时就会发出警告音。喇叭打开或关闭电话线中通过扬声器发出的声音，如拨号音或传真音。如果此选项设置为通信，则意味着扬声器将一直处于打开状态，直至远程机器应答。您可以使用免提拨号调节音量。只有在已连接电话线的情况下才可以调节扬声器的音量。 a 按控制面板上的（传真）。 b 按免提拨号。扬声器即发出拨号音。 c 按箭头，直到听到所需的音量。 d 按免提拨号保存更改并返回就绪模式。振铃音调节振铃音量。对于振铃音量，您可以选择关、低、中和高。系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 199 11 报告根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 报告。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 报告。项目描述菜单图打印显示本机器布局和当前设置的菜单图。所有报告打印此机器提供的各种报告。配置打印有关机器全面配置的报告。 • 耗材信息 • 耗材信息打印耗材信息页。位置簿打印当前存储在机器内存中的所有电子邮件地址。演示页打印演示页，检查机器打印是否正常。发送传真打印传送报告，它包含传真作业的传真号码、页数、作业用时、通信模式与通信结果。您可以将机器设置为在每个传真作业之后自动打印传送确认报告。发送的传真打印您最近发送的传真的相关信息。接收到的传真打印您最近收到的传真的相关信息。发送电子邮件打印您最近发送的电子邮件的相关信息。 • 计划作业 • 传真计划作业打印当前为延迟传真存储的文档的列表，以及每次操作的开始时间和类型。垃圾传真打印指定为垃圾传真号码的传真号码。 • 网路配置 • 网络配置打印机器网络连接和配置的相关信息。 • 用户验证 • 本地用户身份验证打印可以使用电子邮件功能的授权用户。 PCL 字体打印 PCL 字体列表。 • PS 字体 • PS3字体列表打印 PS/PS3 字体列表。 EPSON 字体打印 EPSON 字体列表。 KSC5843 字体打印 KSC5843 字体列表。 KSC5895 字体打印 KSC5895 字体列表。项目描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 200 12 维护根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 维护。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 初始设置。 KSSM 字体列表打印 KSSM 字体列表。 • 网路用户验证 • 网络用户身份验证打印域中的已登录用户及其 ID。使用计数器打印使用页。使用页包括打印的总页数。传真选项打印传真报告的信息。 • 已存储的作业 • 存储的作业打印可选内存或大容量存储设备 (HDD) 中目前存储的作业。 • 已完成的作业 • 已完成的作业打印已完成作业的列表。统计报告仅当从 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 启用作业统计时可以使用它。可以为每个用户打印打印输出计数报告。项目描述项目描述清除已空消息墨粉盒用尽时显示该选项。可清除空消息。忽略炭粉您可以将机器设置为忽略墨粉用尽消息，并继续打印除即将进入的传真以外的内容。耗材寿命显示耗材寿命指示器（请参见第 75 页上的“监控耗材寿命”）。 “墨粉不足”警报自定义发出墨粉不足或墨粉用尽警报的余量（请参见第 76 页上的“设置墨粉不足警报”）。 • 序列号 • 序列号显示机器的序列号。拨打服务电话或在 Samsung 网站上作为用户进行注册时，可以找到它。纸张堆放启用纸盘的自动链接功能。当一个纸盘因纸张用尽或不匹配而无法使用时，该选项允许打印机从另一个可用纸盘进纸。彩色纸允许您调整颜色设置，如对比度等级、校色、色密度等。 Ram 磁盘将部分 ram 磁盘设置为作业存储区域。使用存储区域激活作业管理菜单（请参见第 201 页上的“作业管理 ”）。这样，数据可以从计算机发送到 ram 磁盘的打印队列。系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 201 13 清除设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 清除设置。 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 恢复选项。 14 作业管理根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。项目描述所有设置清除存储在内存中的全部数据，并将所有设置重置为出厂默认值。打印机设置将所有打印机选项恢复为出厂默认值。纸张设置将所有纸张选项恢复为出厂默认值。 • 传真设置 • 传真默认值将所有传真选项恢复为出厂默认值。 • 复印设置 • 复印默认值将所有复印选项恢复为出厂默认值。 • 扫描设置 • 扫描默认值将所有扫描选项恢复为出厂默认值。系统设置将所有系统选项恢复为出厂默认值。网路设置将所有网络选项恢复为出厂默认值（需要重新引导）。位置簿清除存储在内存中的所有电子邮件。 • 发送的传真 • 发送的报告清除所有已发送传真的记录。发送电子邮件清除所有已发送电子邮件的记录。 • 传真已接收 • 传真接收报告 • 接收的报告清除所有已接收传真记录。项目描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 202 要更改菜单选项： • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 作业管理。 15 图像覆盖根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 图像覆盖。 16 USB 设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按触摸屏上的 USB。项目描述当前作业显示等待打印的打印作业列表。存储作业显示磁盘中存储的打印作业列表。文件策略如果在输入新文件名时，内存中已存在相同的文件名，则可以重命名或覆盖该文件。项目描述手动您可以覆盖内嵌 USB 内存，以清除其中存储的所有数据。选项描述打印来源从文件导航查看文件列表。选择要打印的文件。扫描到USB 将扫描目标设置为 USB。扫描原件并将扫描的图像保存到 USB 设备。文件管理从文件导航查看文件列表。选择要删除的文件。您可以格式化 USB 设备。显示空间显示剩余空间。系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 203 17 模拟设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 打印设置 > 模拟。 18 电子邮件设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 电子邮件设置。 19 地址簿设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 通讯簿。项目描述模拟类型机器语言定义了计算机与机器的通信方式。设置为选定的模拟类型设置具体设置。选项描述 SMTP 服务器设置 SMTP 服务器配置。发送到自身设置为将邮件发给自己，以便备份电子邮件或将它用来提醒自己。默认为地址将某个电子邮件目标地址设置为默认地址。默认来源将某个发件人的电子邮件地址设置为默认地址。默认主题将某个电子邮件的主题设置为默认主题。选项描述电话簿添加、查看、打印或删除电话簿列表。您还可以创建组。电子邮件添加、查看、打印或删除电子邮件列表。您还可以创建组。选项描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 204 20 文档框设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。文档邮箱功能 • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 文档邮箱 > 文档邮箱功能。文档箱设置 • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 文档邮箱 > 文档邮箱设置。 21 网络设置根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 网路。选项描述 • 或按触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 网络设置。从扫描添加将已扫描的文档存储在箱中。存储的文件将自动命名为“yearmonthdayhourminutesecond”。任务发件人邮箱打印箱中的文档。选项描述从扫描添加设置将文档存储到箱中的默认设置。任务发件人邮箱设置打印箱中文档的默认设置。选项描述 TCP/IP (IPv4) 选择适当的协议并配置参数以使用网络环境。有许多参数可供设置。如果您不确定，请保留原始设置，或者咨询网络管理员。 TCP/IP (IPv6) 选择此选项以通过 IPv6 使用网络环境（请参见第 148 页上的“IPv6 配置”）。 Ethernet 速度配置网络传输速度。选项描述系统设置 3. 实用设置菜单 205 802.1x 您可以为网络通信选择用户身份验证。有关详细信息，请咨询网络管理员。无线要使用无线网络，请选择此选项。清除设置将网络设置恢复为默认值（需要重新引导）。 • 网路配置 • 网络配置此列表显示有关机器网络连接和配置的信息。网络激活您可以设置是否使用以太网。 Http 激活您可以设置是否使用 SyncThru™ Web Service。选项描述3. 实用设置菜单 206 管理员设置项目描述密码保护设置用于访问管理员设置菜单的密码。选择打开可使用该选项并输入密码。更改密码更改用于访问管理员设置的机器密码。维护 • 清洁定影器: 通过打印一页，清洁定影器。打印出的纸上有墨粉碎屑。 • 清除已空消息: 避免墨粉不足警报消息出现在显示屏上。 • 耗材信息: 允许您检查已经打印的页数以及墨粉盒内剩余的墨粉数量。 • 墨粉不足警报: 如果墨粉盒中的墨粉已用完，会显示一则提示用户更换墨粉盒的消息。可设置此选项，以选择是否显示此消息。 • Ram 磁盘: 启用/禁用 RAM 磁盘管理作业。根据安装的可选内存的大小，可以将 RAM 磁盘大小设置为 32 到 64 MB。如果已安装大容量存储设备 (HDD)，则不显示此选项。3. 实用设置菜单 207 自定义设置仅当安装 XOA (eXtensible Open Architecture) web 应用程序时，显示此菜单。要使用此菜单，请与管理员联系。根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器（请参见第 33 页上的“菜单概述”）。 • 按控制面板上的（菜单）> 自定义。4. 特殊功能本章说明特殊的复印、扫描、传真和打印功能。 • 海拔调整 209 • 存储电子邮件地址 210 • 输入不同的字符 212 • 设置传真地址簿 213 • 注册授权用户 216 • 打印功能 217 • 扫描功能 231 • 传真功能 241 • 使用共享文件夹功能 251 • 使用内存/硬盘驱动器功能 252 • 本章中的程序主要基于 Windows 7。 • 对于某些型号，可能需要按确定才能导航到下层菜单。4. 特殊功能 209 海拔调整打印质量会受大气压影响，而大气压取决于机器在海平面以上的高度。下列信息将指导您如何设置机器以获得最佳打印质量。在您设置海拔值之前，请确定所在地的海拔。 1 高 3 2 高 2 3 高 1 4 正常您可以在 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 程序中的设备设置或打印机设置工具程序中的 Machine 部分设置海拔值。 • Windows 和 Macintosh 用户请参见第 261 页上的“设备设置”。 • Linux 用户请参见第 265 页上的“使用Smart Panel”。 • 如果机器连接到网络，则可以通过 SyncThru™ Web Service 设置海拔值（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 • 也可以在机器显示屏上的系统设置选项中设置海拔（请参见第 38 页上的“机器的基本设置”）。 0 4,000 m (13,123 ft) 3,000 m (9,842 ft) 2,000 m (6,561 ft) 1,000 m (3,280 ft) 4 3 2 14. 特殊功能 210 存储电子邮件地址视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。通过 SyncThru™ Web Service，您可以用常用电子邮件地址创建地址簿，然后通过输入在地址簿中为它们分配的位置号来轻松快捷地输入电子邮件地址。 1 在您的机器上存储要扫描图像并将其作为电子邮件附件发送，您需要使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 设置电子邮件地址。 1 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 2 单击 SyncThru™ Web Service 网站右上角的登录。 3 键入 ID 和密码，然后单击登录。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 4 单击地址簿 > 单人 > 添加。 5 选择快速拨号号码并输入电子邮件地址和传真号码。如果需要设置 SMB 或 FTP 服务器信息，请选中 SMB 或 FTP 并设置信息。 6 单击应用。 7 如果创建一个组，请单击地址簿 > 电子邮件组 > 添加组。 8 选择快速拨号号码并输入组名。如果为在创建此组后添加单人选择是，则可以轻松添加单人地址。 9 单击应用。 2 搜索电子邮件地址按顺序搜索内存 1 从控制面板中选择（扫描）> （地址簿）> 查找和发送 > 选择地址组 > 所有。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 通讯簿 > 电子邮件 > 查看列表 > 个人或群组。 2 按照索引（数字）顺序搜索整个内存，选择所需的名称和地址。存储电子邮件地址 4. 特殊功能 211 用特定首字母搜索 1 从控制面板中选择（扫描）。 2 按控制面板中的（地址簿）> 查找和发送 > 选择地址组 > ID。 3 输入您需要名称的前几个字母。 4 按箭头，直到出现所需的名称和号码。4. 特殊功能 212 输入不同的字符执行某些任务时，可能需要输入姓名和号码。例如，在设置机器时输入您的姓名（或公司名称）和传真号码。在内存中存储传真号码或电子邮件地址时，也可输入相应名称。 3 输入字母数字字符按此按钮，直到显示屏上显示正确的字母。例如，要输入字母 O，请按标有 “MNO”的 6 按钮。每次按 6 按钮，显示屏就会显示不同的字母，依次是 M、 N、O、m、n、o 和 6。要找到想输入的字母，请参见第 212 页上的“键盘字母和数字”。 • 按两次 1 可输入一个空格。 • 要删除最后一个数字或字符，请按向左/向右或向上/向下箭头按钮。 4 键盘字母和数字 • 根据机器的选件或机型，特殊字符集可能与您的机器不同。 • 以下部分键值可能不出现，这取决于您正在执行的作业。按键指定数字、字母或字符 1 @ / . ’ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r s 7 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 0 & + - , 0 * * % _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ] （当您键入网络验证时，这些符号可用） # # = | ? " : { } < > ; （当您键入网络验证时，这些符号可用）4. 特殊功能 213 设置传真地址簿通过 SyncThru™ Web Service，您可以用常用传真号码创建快速拨号号码，然后通过输入地址簿中为它们分配的位置编号轻松快捷地输入传真号码。 5 登记快速拨号号码 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （地址簿) > 新建和编辑 > 快速拨号。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下一步> 通讯簿 > 电话簿 > 查看列表 > 个人> （选项）> 添加。 2 输入快速拨号号码，然后按OK。如果选择的号码中已经存储了条目，则显示屏会显示该信息，以便进行更改。要使用另一个快速拨号号码重新开始，请按（反面）。 3 输入您需要的名称，然后按OK。 4 输入您需要的传真号码，然后按OK。 5 按（取消或停止/清除）按钮返回就绪模式。 6 使用速拨号码发送传真时，如果提示您输入目标号码，请输入存储所需号码的速拨号码。 • 对于一位数（0-9）的速拨号码，请按住数字键盘上相应的数字按钮超过 2 秒。 • 对于两位数或三位数的速拨号码，则按首位按钮，然后按住末位按钮超过 2 秒。 • 可以通过选择（传真）> （地址簿）> 打印打印地址簿列表。 7 编辑速拨号码 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （地址簿) > 新建和编辑 > 快速拨号。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 通讯簿 > 电话簿 > 查看列表 > 个人。 2 输入要编辑的速拨号码，然后按OK。 3 更改名称，然后按 OK。设置传真地址簿 4. 特殊功能 214 4 更改传真号码，然后按OK。 5 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 8 登记组拨号码 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （地址簿) > 新建和编辑 > 群组拨号。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下一步 > 通讯簿 > 电话簿 > 查看列表 > 群组 > （选项）> 添加。 2 输入群组拨号号码，然后按OK。如果选择的号码中已经存储了条目，则显示屏会显示该信息，以便进行更改。要使用另一个快速拨号号码重新开始，请按（反面）。 3 通过输入要放入组中的快速拨号名称的前几个字母进行搜索。 4 选择所需的名称和号码，然后按OK。 5 出现添加?时，选择是。 6 重复步骤 3 将其他速拨号码纳入组中。 7 完成后，在出现另一编号?时选择否并按OK。 8 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 9 编辑组拨号码 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （地址簿) > 新建和编辑 > 群组拨号。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 通讯簿 > 电话簿 > 查看列表 > 群组。 2 输入需要编辑的组拨号码，然后按OK。 3 输入要添加的新速拨号码并按OK，然后会出现添加？。输入存储在组中的速拨号码并按OK，则将出现删除？。 4 按 OK 添加或删除号码。 5 重复第 3 步，添加或删除更多号码。 6 出现另一编号?时选择否，然后按OK。 7 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。设置传真地址簿 4. 特殊功能 215 10 在地址薄中搜索条目搜索内存中的号码可采用两种方法。可以依次从 A 扫描到 Z，也可以通过输入与号码相关名称的前几个字母进行搜索。 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （地址簿) > 查找和拨号 > 快速拨号或群组拨号。 2 输入所有或 ID并按OK。 3 按标有要查找的字母的名称和号码或键盘按钮。例如，如果想要找到“MOBILE”这个名字，按 6 按钮，此按钮上标有 “MNO”。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 11 打印地址簿您可以通过打印列表来查看（地址簿）设置。 1 选择控制面板上的（传真）> （地址簿）> 打印。 2 按 OK。机器开始打印。4. 特殊功能 216 注册授权用户视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。如果您已将机器联网，并且正确地设置了网络参数，则您可扫描并通过网络扫描图像。要通过电子邮件或通过网络服务器安全发送扫描图像，则您必须使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 向您的本地机器注册授权用户的帐户信息。 1 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 2 单击 SyncThru™ Web Service 网站右上角的登录。 3 键入 ID 和密码，然后单击登录。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 4 单击安全 > 用户访问控制 > 验证。 5 从验证方法中选择本地验证，然后单击应用。 6 在确认弹出窗口中单击确定。 7 单击用户配置文件 > 添加。 8 输入用户名、登录 ID、密码、确认密码、电子邮件地址和传真号码。如果为在创建此组后添加单人选择是，则可以轻松添加单人地址。 9 单击应用。4. 特殊功能 217 打印功能 • 有关基本打印功能，请参阅基本指南（请参见第 52 页上的“基本打印”）。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 12 更改默认打印设置 1 单击 Windows 开始菜单。 2 选择控制面板 > 设备与打印机。 3 右键单击机器。 4 选择打印首选项。如果打印首选项有 ► 标记，则您可以选择与所选打印机连接的其他打印机驱动程序。 5 更改每个选项卡上的设置。 6 单击确定。如果您希望更改各打印作业的设置，请在打印首选项中进行更改。 13 将机器设置为默认机器 1 单击 Windows 开始菜单。 2 选择控制面板 > 设备与打印机。 3 选择机器。 4 右键单击您的机器，然后选择设置为默认打印机。如果打印首选项有 ► 标记，则您可以选择与所选打印机连接的其他打印机驱动程序。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 218 14 使用高级打印功能 XPS 打印机驱动程序：用于打印 XPS 文件格式。 • 请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”。 • XPS 打印机驱动程序只能安装在 Windows Vista 操作系统或更高版本上。 • 当无法打印 XPS 作业时，表明打印机内存不足，请安装可选内存。 • 对于软件 CD 提供 XPS 驱动程序的型号： - 将软件 CD 插入 CD-ROM 驱动器时，可安装 XPS 打印机驱动程序。安装窗口打开时，选择高级安装 > 自定义安装。可在选择要安装的软件和实用程序窗口中选择 XPS 打印机驱动程序。 • 对于通过 Samsung 网站提供 XPS 驱动程序的型号， www.samsung.com > 查找产品> 支持或下载。打印到文件（PRN）有时需要将打印数据保存为文件。 1 在打印到文件窗口选中打印框。 2 单击打印。 3 键入目标路径和文件名，然后单击确定。例如，c:\Temp\file name。如果您仅键入文件名，则文件将自动保存在我的文档、Documents and Settings 或用户中。保存文件夹可能会因您所使用的操作系统或应用程序的不同而有所差异。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 219 理解特殊打印功能使用机器时可以使用其高级打印功能。要充分利用打印机驱动程序提供的打印机功能，请在应用程序的打印窗口中单击属性或首选项更改打印设置。打印机属性窗口中显示的打印机名称可能因所用的机器而有差异。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，可能不会显示某些菜单。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 选择帮助菜单或单击窗口中的按钮或按键盘上的 F1 键并单击要了解的任何选项（请参见第 54 页上的“使用帮助”）。项目描述每面多页选择要在一张纸上打印的页数。要在一张纸上打印多页，这些页面将会缩小并按指定的顺序排列。一张纸上最多可打印 16 页。海报打印将单页文档打印到 4（海报 2x2）、9（海报 3x3）或 16（海报 4x4）页纸上，这样可以将纸张粘贴到一起形成海报大小的文档。选择海报重叠值。选择基本选项卡右上方的单选按钮以毫米或英寸为单位指定海报重叠，以便于将各页粘贴在一起。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 220 书册打印a 在一张纸的两面打印您的文档，并对页面进行排序，以便在打印之后将纸张对折，从而生成一本小册子。 • 如果您想要制作一本小册子，您需要在 Letter、Legal、A4、US Folio 或 Oficio 大小的打印介质上打印。 • 书册打印选项对于所有纸张大小均不可用。从纸张选项卡中选择可用纸张尺寸选项，了解可以使用哪些纸张大小。 • 如果您选择的是一种不可用的纸张大小，则该选项可自动删除。仅选择可用纸张（无或标记的纸张）。 • 双面打印 • 双面打印（手动）a 在一张纸的两面打印（双面打印）。打印之前，请决定文档的打印方向。 • 您可以将 Letter、Legal、A4、US Folio 或 Oficio 大小的纸张与此功能配合使用。 • 如果您的机器不具有双面打印单元，则应手动完成打印作业。机器首先打印文档的每一张其他页面。之后，计算机上将显示一条信息。 • 跳过空白页功能在您选择双面选项时不可用。项目描述 8 9打印功能 4. 特殊功能 221 • 双面打印 • 双面打印（手动）a • 打印机默认值: 如果选择此选项，则此功能由您在机器控制面板上所进行的设置来决定。此选项仅在使用 PCL/XPS 打印机驱动程序时可用。 • 无: 禁用此功能。 • 长边: 此选项为装订中所使用的常规布局。 • 短边: 此选项为日历中所使用的常规布局。 • 反转双面打印: 选择此选项在双面打印时逆序打印。当您使用D双面打印（手动）时，此选项不可用。纸张选项输入放大或缩小文档的百分比可以更改文档在打印页面上的显示大小。水印水印选项可允许在已有文档上打印文字。例如，如果您希望在文档的第一页或所有页上对角打印大写的灰色字母“DRAFT”或 “CONFIDENTIAL”，则可以使用此功能。项目描述打印功能 4. 特殊功能 222 水印 (创建水印） a 要从软件应用程序更改打印设置，请访问打印首选项。 b 单击高级选项卡，在水印下拉列表中选择编辑。将显示编辑水印窗口。 c 在水印消息框中输入文字信息。最多可输入 256 个字符。此信息会在预览窗口中显示。水印 (编辑水印） a 要从软件应用程序更改打印设置，请访问打印首选项。 b 单击高级选项卡，在水印下拉列表中选择编辑。将显示编辑水印窗口。 c 在当前水印列表中选择想要编辑的水印，然后更改水印信息和选项。 d 单击更新，保存更改内容。 e 单击确定或打印，直到退出打印窗口。水印 (删除水印） a 要从软件应用程序更改打印设置，请访问打印首选项。 b 单击高级选项卡，在水印下拉列表中选择编辑。将显示编辑水印窗口。 c 从当前水印列表中选择想要删除的水印，然后单击删除。 d 单击确定或打印，直到退出打印窗口。覆盖页a 此选项仅在使用 PCL/SPL 打印机驱动程序时可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。叠加是指作为一种特殊文件格式存储在计算机硬盘驱动器（HDD）中的文字和/或图像，可以打印在任何文档上。叠加常用于替换信头纸。可以不使用预印的信头纸，而是创建一个包含与目前信头完全相同信息的叠加。要打印一封带有您的公司信头的信，不需要在打印机中放置预打印的信头纸：只需在文档中打印信头叠加。要使用页面叠加，必须创建包含徽标或图像的新页叠加。 • 叠加文档大小必须与使用叠加打印的文档大小相同。不要创建带水印的叠加。 • 叠加文档的分辨率必须与使用叠加所打印文档的分辨率相同。项目描述打印功能 4. 特殊功能 223 覆盖页a (创建新页叠加） a 要将文档保存为叠加，请访问打印首选项。 b 单击高级选项卡，在文本下拉列表中选择编辑。将显示编辑覆盖页窗口。 c 在编辑覆盖页窗口中单击创建。 d 在另存为窗口中的文件名框中键入名称（最多包含 8 个字符）。如果需要，请选择目标路径（默认路径为 C:\Formover）。 e 单击保存。该名称出现在覆盖页目录上。 f 单击确定或打印，直到退出打印窗口。不打印文件。而是将其储存在计算机的硬盘驱动器上。覆盖页a (使用页面叠加） a 单击高级选项卡。 b 从文本下拉列表框中选择所需的叠加。 c 如果您希望的叠加文件未在文本下拉列表中出现，请从列表中选择编辑...，然后单击加载。选择希望使用的叠加文件。如果您已将希望使用的叠加文件存储在外部，您也可在访问打开窗口时加载此文件。选择文件之后，单击打开。该文件会出现在覆盖页目录框中以供进行打印。从覆盖页目录框中选择叠加。 d 如有必要，请选中打印时确认覆盖页框。如果该框被选中，则您每次提交文档进行打印时都会出现一个信息窗口，要求您确认是否要在文档上打印叠加。如果未选中此框，但又选择了叠加，则将会在文档上自动打印叠加。 e 单击确定或打印，直到退出打印窗口。覆盖页a (删除页面叠加） a 在打印首选项窗口中单击高级选项卡。 b 在文本下拉列表中选择编辑。 c 从覆盖页目录框中选择要删除的叠加。 d 单击删除。 e 出现确认消息窗口时，请单击是。 f 单击确定或打印，直到退出打印窗口。可以删除不再使用的页面叠加。项目描述打印功能 4. 特殊功能 224 打印模式 • 仅当您安装可选内存或大容量存储设备 (HDD) 时可使用该功能（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 打印模式: 打印模式默认为正常，在该模式下打印时不会将打印文件保存到内存中。 - 正常: 此模式下进行打印时不会将您的文档存储在选装内存中。 - 校样: 在进行多份打印时，此模式将非常有用。您可以先打印一份进行检查，然后再打印其余份数。 - 机密: 此模式用于打印机密文档。您需要输入密码才能进行打印。 - 存储: 选择此设置在大容量存储设备 (HDD) 中保存文档而不打印。 - 存储并打印: 同时打印和存储文档时使用此模式。 - 缓冲: 处理大量数据时，该选项可能较实用。如果选择该设置，打印机将文档放入大容量存储设备 (HDD) 中，然后从大容量存储设备 (HDD) 队列打印它，从而降低了计算机的工作负荷。 - 打印计划: 选择此设置在指定时间打印文档。 • 用户 ID: 在需要使用控制面板查找保存的文件时，要用到此选项。 • 作业名称: 在需要使用控制面板查找保存的文件时，要用到此选项。作业加密首先加密打印数据，然后将它传送到机器。即使数据在网络中被截获，该功能也可以保护打印信息。仅当安装大容量存储设备 (HDD) 时，启用作业加密功能。大容量存储设备 (HDD) 用于解密打印数据（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 a. 当您使用 XPS 驱动程序时，此选项不可用。项目描述打印功能 4. 特殊功能 225 15 使用直接打印实用程序 • 视型号或可选商品，直接打印实用程序可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 操作系统用户。什么是直接打印实用程序？直接打印实用程序是在无需打开 PDF 文件的情况下，直接将文件发送到机器打印的实用程序。要安装本程序，应在安装打印机驱动程序时，选择高级安装 > 自定义安装并在本程序中放置复选标记。 • 大容量存储设备 (HDD) 应安装在机器上，以使用此程序打印文件。（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 • 无法打印受限 PDF 文件。解除打印限制功能，然后重试打印。 • 无法打印密码限制的 PDF 文件。解除密码保护功能，然后重试打印。 • 能否使用直接打印实用程序打印 PDF 文件取决于创建 PDF 的方式。 • 直接打印实用程序支持 PDF 版本 1.7 和更低版本。对于更高版本，您必须打开文件进行打印。打印使用直接打印实用程序进行打印的方法有以下几种。 1 从开始菜单中选择程序或所有程序 > Samsung Printers > 直接打印实用程序 > 直接打印实用程序。直接打印实用程序窗口将出现。 2 从选择打印机下拉列表选择您的机器并单击浏览。 3 选择要打印的文件并单击打开。文件将添加到选择文件部分中。 4 根据需要设定打印机设置。 5 单击打印。所选的 PDF 文件将发送到打印机。使用右键快捷菜单 1 右键单击要打印的 PDF 文件，然后选择直接打印。直接打印实用程序窗口将出现，其中显示添加的 PDF 文件。 2 选择要使用的机器。 3 自定义机器设置。 4 单击打印。所选的 PDF 文件将发送到打印机。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 226 16 Macintosh 打印根据机型或选项不同，可能不提供某些功能。它表示不支持这些功能。打印文档当使用 Macintosh 打印时，需要检查所用每个应用程序中的打印机驱动程序设置。按以下步骤从 Macintosh 进行打印： 1 打开要打印的文档。 2 打开文件菜单并单击页面设置（某些应用程序为文档设置）。 3 选择纸张大小、方向、缩放比例及其他选项，并确保已选择机器。单击确定。 4 打开文件菜单并单击打印。 5 选择打印份数，并指示要打印哪些页。 6 单击打印。更改打印机设置使用机器时可以使用其高级打印功能。打开应用程序，在文件菜单选择打印。打印机属性窗口中显示的打印机名称可能因所用的机器而有差异。除名称之外，打印机属性窗口的构成与下列构成基本相同。在一张纸上打印多页可以在一张纸上打印多页。通过此功能打印草稿，可以节省成本。 1 打开应用程序，在文件菜单中选择打印。 2 在打印方向下方的下拉列表中选择布局。在每张页数下拉列表中选择要在一张纸上打印的页数。 3 选择要使用的其他选项。 4 单击打印。机器在一张纸上打印选定的页数。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 227 双面打印根据机型或选项不同，可能不提供某些功能。它表示不支持这些功能（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。在进行双面打印之前，请先确定打印后文档的装订边。装订选项如下： • 长边装订: 此选项为装订中所使用的常规布局。 • 短边装订: 该选项为日历常用的类型。 1 在 Macintosh 应用程序中，从文件菜单选择打印。 2 在打印方向下方的下拉列表中选择布局。 3 从双面选项中选择装订方向。 4 选择要使用的其他选项。 5 单击打印，机器会进行双面打印。如果您打印 2 份以上文件，第一份与第二份可在同一张纸上打印。当您打印一份以上文件时，请避免双面打印。使用帮助从窗口的左下角单击问号，然后单击希望了解的主题。将显示一个弹出窗口，上面显示有关驱动程序所提供选项功能的信息。 17 Linux 打印根据机型或选项不同，可能不提供某些功能。它表示不支持这些功能。从应用程序打印有许多可使您使用“通用 UNIX 打印系统”（CUPS）进行打印的 Linux 应用程序。可利用任何此类应用程序在机器上进行打印。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 228 1 打开应用程序，从 File 菜单选择 Print 2 直接使用选择 Print。 3 在 LPR GUI 窗口中，从打印机列表中选择打印机的型号名称，然后单击 Properties。 4 使用在窗口顶部显示的下列四个选项卡更改打印任务属性。 • General: 更改纸张大小、纸张类型和文档打印方向。可实现双面打印、添加启动与结束图标以及更改每张纸的打印页数。某些型号可能不提供自动/手动双面打印。您可以使用 lpr 打印系统或其他应用程序进行奇偶页打印。 • Text: 指定页边距和设置文本选项，如间隔或栏数。 • Graphics: 设置打印图像文件时使用的图像选项，如：颜色选项、图像大小或图像位置。 • Advanced: 设置打印分辨率、纸张来源和目标。 5 单击 Apply 应用更改，然后关闭 Properties 窗口。 6 单击 LPR GUI 窗口中的 OK 开始打印。 7 会出现 “Printing” 窗口，您可在此监控打印作业的状态。要放弃当前作业，请单击 Cancel。打印文件利用标准的 CUPS，您可以在机器上直接从命令行接口打印许多不同类型的文件。CUPS lpr 实用程序允许您这样做，但驱动程序包会将标准 lpr 工具替换为一个更友好的 LPR GUI 程序。如要打印任何文档，请执行以下步骤： 1 在 Linux shell 命令行中输入 lpr ，然后按 Enter 键。将显示 LPR GUI 窗口。如果仅键入 lpr 并按 Enter 键，则会首先出现 Select file(s) to print 窗口。仅选择您要打印的文件，然后单击 Open。 2 在 LPR GUI 窗口，从列表中选择您的机器，然后更改打印作业属性。 3 单击 OK 开始打印。配置打印机属性使用 Printer Properties 所提供的 Printers configuration 窗口而更改您打印机的各种属性。 1 打开 Unified Driver Configurator。如有必要，请切换到 Printers configuration。 2 请在可用打印机列表中选择您的机器，然后单击 Properties。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 229 3 Printer Properties 窗口出现。窗口顶部会显示以下五个选项卡： • General: 更改打印机位置和名称。在此选项卡输入的名称会显示在 Printers configuration 的打印机列表中。 • Connection: 查看或选择其他端口。如果在使用中将机器端口从 USB 改为并行或从并行改为 USB，则必须在此选项卡重新配置机器端口。 • Driver: 查看或选择其他机器驱动程序。通过单击 Options，您可以设置默认设备选项。 • Jobs: 显示打印作业列表。单击 Cancel job 取消选定工作，选择 Show completed jobs 复选框在作业列表上查看以往作业。 • Classes: 显示机器所属的类别。单击 Add to Class 将您的机器添加到指定类别中，或单击 Remove from Class 从选定类别中删除机器。 4 单击 OK 应用更改，然后关闭 Printer Properties 窗口。 18 Unix 打印根据机型或选项不同，可能不提供某些功能。它表示不支持这些功能（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。继续打印作业安装打印机后，请选择要打印的任何图像、文本、PS 或 HPGL 文件。 1 执行 “printui ” 命令。例如，如果要打印“document1” printui document1 此操作将打开 UNIX 打印机驱动程序 Print Job Manager，用户可以从中选择各种打印选项。 2 选择已添加的打印机。 3 从窗口中选择打印选项，如 Page Selection。 4 在 Number of Copies 中，选择所需的份数。要利用打印机驱动程序提供的打印机功能，请按 Properties。 5 按 OK 启动打印作业。更改机器设置通过 UNIX 打印机驱动程序 Print Job Manager，用户可以在打印机 Properties 中选择各种打印选项。打印功能 4. 特殊功能 230 也可以使用以下热键：“H” 代表 Help，“O” 代表 OK，“A” 代表 Apply，并且 “C” 代表 Cancel。 General 选项卡 • Paper Size: 根据您的需要将纸张大小设置为 A4、Letter 或其他纸张大小。 • Paper Type: 选择纸张类型。列表框中的可用选项有 Printer Default、 Plain 和 Thick。 • Paper Source: 选择使用哪个纸盘中的纸张。默认情况下为 Auto Selection。 • Orientation: 选择在页面上打印信息的方向。 • Duplex: 进行双面打印可以节省纸张。某些型号可能不提供自动/手动双面打印。您可以使用 lpr 打印系统或其他应用程序进行奇偶页打印。 • Multiple pages: 在纸的一面打印多页。 • Page Border: 选择任何边框样式（如，Single-line hairline，Doubleline hairline） Image 选项卡在此选项卡中，可以更改文档的亮度、分辨率或图像位置。 Text 选项卡设置实际打印输出的字符边距、行距或栏数。 HPGL/2 选项卡 • Use only black pen: 以黑色打印所有图形。 • Fit plot to page: 调整整个图形以适合单页大小。 Margins 选项卡 • Use Margins: 设置文档的边距。默认情况下，不启用边距。用户可以通过在各自的字段中更改值来更改边距设置。默认情况下，根据所选页面大小设置这些值。 • Unit: 将单位改为磅、英寸或厘米。 Printer-Specific Settings 选项卡在 JCL 和 General 框中，选择各种选项来自定义各种设置。这些选项特定于打印机并取决于 PPD 文件。4. 特殊功能 231 扫描功能 • 有关基本扫描功能，请参阅基本指南（请参见第 61 页上的“基本扫描”）。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 可达到的最大分辨率取决于多种因素，包括计算机的运行速度、可用磁盘空间、内存、扫描图像的大小以及位深度设置。因此，根据系统和扫描的对象，可能无法以特定分辨率进行扫描，尤其是在使用增强 dpi 时。 19 基本扫描方法视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。可通过 USB 电缆或网络来使用机器扫描原件。可通过以下方法扫描文档： • 扫描到PC: 从控制面板扫描原件。然后，扫描的数据将存储在已连接的计算机我的文档文件夹中（请参见第 61 页上的“基本扫描”）。 • TWAIN: TWAIN 是一种预设的成像应用程序。图像扫描作业会启动选定的应用程序，从而控制扫描过程。可通过本地连接或网络连接使用该功能（请参见第 235 页上的“从图像编辑程序扫描”）。 • Samsung 扫描助手/SmarThru 4/SmarThru Office: 可使用该程序扫描图像或文档。 - 请参见第 235 页上的“使用 Samsung 扫描助手扫描”。 - 请参见第 236 页上的“使用 SmarThru 4 扫描” - 请参见第 237 页上的“使用 SmarThru Office 扫描” • Windows 图像采集（WIA）: WIA 为 Windows Images Acquisition （Windows 图像采集）的缩写。要使用该功能，计算机必须通过一条 USB 电缆直接与您的机器相连（请参见第 235 页上的“使用 WIA 驱动程序扫描”）。 • USB 内存: 您可以扫描文档，并将扫描的图像保存至 USB 内存设备。 • 电子邮件: 您可以将扫描图像作为电子邮件附件发送（请参见第 233 页上的“扫描至电子邮件”）。 • FTP/SMB: 您可以扫描图像，然后将它上传到 FTP/SMB 服务器（请参见第 234 页上的“扫描至 FTP/SMB 服务器”）。 20 配置计算机中的扫描设置视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 232 1 打开 Samsung Easy Printer Manager（请参阅第 260 页上的“使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager”）。 2 从打印机列表中选择相应的机器。 3 选择扫描至 PC 设置菜单。 4 选择所需选项。 • 扫描启动: 决定是否在设备上启用扫描。 • 基本选项卡: 包含普通扫描的相关设置和设备设置。 • 图像选项卡: 包含图像更改的相关设置。 5 按保存 > 确定。 21 从联网机器扫描机器不支持网络接口，它无法使用此功能（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。务必借助软件光盘将打印机驱动程序安装到您的计算机上，因为打印机驱动程序中包含扫描程序（请参见第 30 页上的“本地安装驱动程序”）。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（扫描）> 扫描到PC > 网路PC。或从触摸屏上选择扫描 > 网络 PC。如果您看到不可用消息，请检查端口连接。 3 选择注册的计算机 ID，必要时输入密码。 • ID 与 Samsung Easy Printer Manager > 切换到高级模式 > 扫描至 PC 设置的注册扫描 ID 相同。 • 密码是 Samsung Easy Printer Manager > 切换到高级模式 > 扫描至 PC 设置的 4 位注册密码。 4 选择所需选项并按OK。 5 扫描即会开始。扫描图像保存在计算机的 C:\用户\users name\我的文档。保存文件夹可能会因您所使用的操作系统或应用程序的不同而有所差异。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 233 22 扫描至电子邮件视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。设置电子邮件帐户 1 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 2 选择设置 > 网络设置和邮件发送服务器(SMTP)。 3 以十进制点符号输入 IP 地址或作为主机名输入。 4 输入服务器端口号（从 1 至 65535）。 5 若需要验证，请勾选SMTP 要求验证框。 6 输入 SMTP 服务器登录名和密码。 7 按应用。 • 如果 SMTP 服务器的验证方法是 POP3 before SMTP，则应选中 SMTP 在进行 SMTP 验证前需要 POP。 • 输入 IP 地址和端口号。扫描和发送电子邮件 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 2 从控制面板中选择（扫描）> 扫描电子邮件。或从触摸屏上选择扫描 > 发送电子邮件。 3 如果已配置 SyncThru™ Web Service，请输入登录名和密码（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 4 输入发件人和收件人的电子邮件地址。通过 SyncThru™ Web Service 的设置 > 扫描 > 扫描到电子邮件激活自动发送给本人选项，可以将电子邮件发送给自己。 5 输入电子邮件主题，然后按OK。 6 选择要扫描的文件格式，然后按OK。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 234 7 输入 SMTP 服务器登录名和密码。 8 机器开始扫描，然后发送电子邮件。 23 扫描至 FTP/SMB 服务器视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。设置 FTP/SMB 服务器 1 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 2 选择地址簿 > 单人 > 添加。 3 选中添加 FTP 或添加 SMB 旁的框。 4 以十进制点符号输入 IP 地址或作为主机名输入。 5 输入服务器端口号（从 1 至 65535）。 6 选中匿名旁的复选框，此时服务器允许未经授权者访问。 7 输入登录名和密码。 8 如果服务器连到特定域，请输入域名，否则只需输入向 SMB 服务器注册的计算机名。 9 输入用于保存扫描图像的路径。 • 用于保存扫描图像的文件夹必须在根中。 • 需要将文件夹属性设置为共享。 • 您的用户名应当可以读写该文件夹。 10 按应用。扫描和发送至 FTP/SMB 服务器 1 确保您的机器已联网。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 从控制面板中选择（扫描）> 扫描到SMB或扫描到FTP。或从触摸屏上选择扫描 > SMB 或 FTP。 4 选择所需的服务器和扫描格式。 5 机器开始扫描，然后将扫描图像发送到指定的服务器。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 235 24 从图像编辑程序扫描您可以在 Adobe Photoshop 等图像编辑软件（如果该软件兼容 TWAIN）中扫描和导入文档。使用与 TWAIN 兼容的软件扫描，请执行下列步骤： 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 打开应用程序（如：Adobe Photoshop）。 4 单击文件 > 导入，然后选择扫描仪设备。 5 设置扫描选项。 6 扫描并保存扫描图像。 25 使用 WIA 驱动程序扫描您的机器支持使用 Windows 图像采集 (WIA) 驱动程序扫描图像。WIA 是 Microsoft Windows 7 提供的一种标准组件，可以与数码相机和扫描仪一起工作。与 TWAIN 驱动程序不同，WIA 驱动程序无需使用其他软件即可扫描和轻松调节图像： WIA 驱动程序只能用于带 USB 端口的 Windows 操作系统（Windows 2000 不支持）。 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 单击开始 > 控制面板 > 硬件与声音 > 设备与打印机。 4 右键单击打印机和传真 > 开始扫描中的设备驱动程序图标。 5 将出现新的扫描应用程序。 6 选择扫描首选项并单击预览查看首选项对图片的作用效果。 7 扫描并保存扫描图像。 26 使用 Samsung 扫描助手扫描 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 可使用 Samsung 扫描助手程序的 OCR（光学字符识别）功能。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 236 1 确保机器与您的计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 单击开始 > 所有程序 > Samsung 打印机，然后启动 Samsung 扫描助手。选择帮助菜单或单击窗口中的按钮，单击要了解的任何选项。 4 设置扫描选项。 5 单击扫描。 27 使用 SmarThru 4 扫描 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 可使用 SmarThru 4 程序的 OCR（光学字符识别）功能。 1 确保机器与您的计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 双击 SmarThru 4图标。 4 将显示 SmarThru。 • 扫描至: 您可以扫描图像并将其保存到应用程序或文件夹、用电子邮件发送或在网站上发布。 • 图像: 您可以编辑图像并将其发送到选定应用程序或文件夹、用电子邮件发送或在网站上发布。 • 打印: 您可以打印已保存的图像。选择帮助菜单或单击窗口中的按钮，单击要了解的任何选项。 5 单击扫描至。 6 从应用程序、电子邮件、文件夹、OCR 或 Web 中选择目标。 7 如果需要，可单击设置自定义设置。 8 单击扫描。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 237 28 使用 SmarThru Office 扫描 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 要使用 SmarThru Office，您必须从提供的 CD 手动安装该程序。选择高级安装 > 自定义安装，然后选择安装 SmarThru Office。 • 可使用 SmarThru Office 程序的 OCR（光学字符识别）功能。 1 确保机器与您的计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 双击 SmarThru Office 图标。 4 将显示 SmarThru Office。单击帮助或窗口中的按钮，单击要了解的任何选项。 5 单击 Windows 任务栏托盘区中的 SmarThru Office 图标 ( ) 以激活 SmarThru Office 启动程序。 6 单击扫描图标 ( ) 以打开扫描窗口。 7 扫描设置窗口会打开。 8 设置扫描设置，然后单击扫描。 29 Macintosh 扫描从通过 USB 连接的机器扫描 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 启动应用程序并单击图像捕捉。如果未连接图像捕捉设备信息出现，请断开 USB 电缆连接，然后重新连接。如果此问题继续出现，请参阅图像捕捉帮助信息。 4 选择所需选项。 5 扫描并保存扫描图像。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 238 如果图像捕捉中无法运行扫描，请将 Mac OS 更新至最新版本。图像捕捉在 Mac OS X 10.4.7 或更高版本中可正常操作。从联网机器扫描仅限网络或无线型号（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 1 确保您的机器已联网。 2 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 3 启动应用程序并单击图像捕捉。 4 根据操作系统，按照以下步骤操作。 • 对于 10.4 - 单击菜单栏中的设备 > 浏览设备。 - 在 Twain 设备选项中选择您的机器。确保选中使用 TWAIN 软件复选框。 - 单击连接。如果出现警告消息，单击更改端口..选择端口，如果显示 TWAIN UI，则单击首选项选项卡中的更改端口.. 并选择一个新端口。 • 对于 10.5 - 单击菜单栏中的设备 > 浏览设备。 - 确保选中 Bonjour 设备中机器旁的已连接复选框。 - 如果要使用 TWAIN 进行扫描，请参考上述 Mac OS X10.4 步骤。 • 对于 10.6 -10.7，在共享下面选择设备。 5 在此程序中设置扫描选项。 6 扫描并保存扫描图像。 • 如果“图像捕捉”中无法运行扫描，请将 Mac OS 更新至最新版本。图像捕捉在 Mac OS X 10.4.7 或更高版本中可正常操作。 • 有关更多信息，请参阅图像捕捉的帮助。 • 还可使用与 TWAIN 兼容的软件（如：Adobe Photoshop）扫描。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 239 30 Linux 扫描扫描 1 确保机器与计算机连接，并打开电源。 2 双击桌面上的 Unified Driver Configurator。 3 单击按钮，切换到 Scanners Configuration。 4 从列表中选择扫描仪。 5 单击 Properties。 6 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 7 从 Scanner Properties 窗口中，单击 Preview。 8 扫描文档，然后在 Preview Pane 中显示图像预览。 9 拖动指针，设置要在 Preview Pane 中扫描的图像区域。 10 选择所需选项。 11 扫描并保存扫描图像。扫描功能 4. 特殊功能 240 为了方便今后使用，可以保存为扫描设置并将它添加到 Job Type 下拉列表中。使用 Image Manager 编辑图像 Image Manager 应用程序提供用于编辑扫描图像的菜单命令和工具。4. 特殊功能 241 传真功能 • 有关基本传真功能，请参阅基本指南（请参见第 62 页上的“基本传真”）。 • SCX-340x/SCX-340xW Series 不支持此功能（请参见第 24 页上的“ 控制面板概览”）。 31 自动重拨如果您所拨打的号码在发送传真时正忙或无响应，机器会自动重拨该号码。重拨时间取决于国家/地区的出厂默认设置。当显示屏显示尝试重拨？时，按（开始）按钮可重拨该号码，并且无需等待。要取消自动重拨，请按（取消或停止/清除）。要更改两次重拨之间的时间间隔和重拨次数。 1 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 发送。 2 选择所需的重拨次数或重拨期限。 3 选择所需选项。 32 重拨传真号码 1 按控制面板上的（重拨/暂停）按钮。 2 选择所需传真号码。将显示最近发送的十个传真号码和十个已接收的呼叫者 ID。 3 当将原件装入进纸器时，机器将自动开始发送。如果将原件放置在扫描仪玻璃板上，请选择是添加另一页。装入另一原件，然后按确定。完成后在出现另一页?时选择否。 33 确认发送成功发送完原件的最后一页之后，机器会发出蜂鸣音，然后返回就绪模式。如果在发送传真的过程中出错，则显示屏上会显示错误消息。如果您收到错误消息，可按（取消或停止/清除）清除该消息，然后再次尝试发送传真。可以将机器设置为在每次完成发送传真时自动打印确认报告。按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 发送 > 发送报告。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 242 34 发送计算机中的传真视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。可以从计算机中发送传真，无需走到传真机旁。若要从计算机发送传真，则必须安装 Samsung Network PC Fax 程序。安装打印机驱动程序后会安装此程序。 1 打开要发送的文档。 2 从打印菜单中选择文件。将显示打印窗口。外观可能会因应用程序的不同而略微有所差异。 3 从打印窗口中选择 Samsung Network PC Fax。 4 单击打印或确定。 5 输入收件人的号码并选择选项选择帮助菜单或单击窗口中的按钮，单击要了解的任何选项。 6 单击发送。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 243 35 延迟传真传送当您不在场时，可以将机器设置为稍后发送传真。不能使用此功能发送彩色传真。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板上的（传真）。 3 调整分辨率和暗度，使之满足您的传真需要。 4 按控制面板中的（菜单）> 传真功能 > 延迟发送。或从触摸屏上选择传真 > 延迟发送 > 收件人。 5 输入接收传真机的号码，然后按OK。 6 显示屏要求输入发送文档的另一个传真号码。 7 要输入更多传真号码，当突出显示是时按确定并重复步骤 5。 • 最多可以输入 10 个目标。 • 输入组拨号码之后，就不能再输入其他组拨号码了。 8 输入作业名称和时间。如果设定的时间早于当前时间，机器会在第二天的该时间发送传真。 9 在发送之前，原件会被扫描到内存中。机器返回就绪模式。显示屏提醒您现在处于就绪模式，以及已设置延迟传真。可以检查已延迟传真作业列表。按控制面板上的（菜单）> 系统设置 > 报告 > 计划作业。在预定传真中添加文档 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板中的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 添加页面。 3 选择传真作业并按OK。完成后在显示另一页？时选择否。机器将原件扫描到内存中。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 244 取消预定传真作业 1 按控制面板中的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 取消作业。 2 选择所需传真作业并按OK。 3 当是突出显示时请按OK。选定的传真已从内存中删除。 4 按（停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 36 发送优先传真当需要在预定操作之前发送高优先级的传真时，使用此功能。在当前操作结束时，原件会扫描到内存中并立即传送。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 优先发送。或从触摸屏上选择传真 > 优先发送 > 收件人。 3 输入目标传真号码并按OK。 4 输入作业名称，然后按OK。 5 如果原件放置在扫描仪玻璃板上，请选择是以添加其他页。装入另一原件，然后按确定。完成后在显示另一页？时选择否。机器将开始扫描并将传真发送到目标。 37 将已发传真转发到另一个目标可以将机器设置为通过传真、电子邮件或服务器将已收或已发传真转发到其他目标。如果不在办公室但必须接收传真，则该功能可能会有用。 • 通过电子邮件转发传真时，首先必须在 SyncThru™ Web Service 中设置邮件服务器和 IP 地址（请参见第 257 页上的“使用 SyncThru™ Web Service”）。 • 虽然已发送或接收彩色传真，但转发的数据为灰度。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 转发 > 传真 > 发送转发 > 打开。或选择触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 传真设置 > 转发 > 传真、电子邮件或服务器 > 发送转发 > 开。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 245 视型号或可选商品，转发选项可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 3 输入目标传真号码、电子邮件或服务器地址，然后按OK。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。随后发送的传真将转发至指定传真机。 38 转发已接收的传真可以将机器设置为通过传真、电子邮件或服务器将已收或已发传真转发到其他目标。如果不在办公室但必须接收传真，则该功能可能会有用。虽然已发送或接收彩色传真，但转发的数据为灰度。 1 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 转发 > 传真、电子邮件或服务器 > 接收转发或接收转发 > 转发。或选择触摸屏上的安装 > 机器设置 > 传真设置 > 转发 > 传真、电子邮件或服务器 > 接收转发或接收转发 > 开。 • 视型号或可选商品，转发选项可能不可用（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 • 要将机器设置为在转发完传真后打印出该传真，请选择转发并打印。 2 输入目标传真号码、电子邮件或服务器地址，然后按OK。 3 输入开始时间和结束时间，然后按OK。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。随后发送的传真将转发至指定传真机。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 246 39 通过纸的两面发送传真 • 仅当您将原稿装入进稿器时可使用此功能。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板上的（传真）> 双面。或从触摸屏上选择传真 > 选择所需菜单 > 从子菜单中选择双面打印。 • 关闭: 以正常模式发送传真。 • 2面: 通过原件的两面发送传真。 • 2->1面旋转2: 通过原件的两面发送传真，并分别在单独的纸张上打印，但打印输出背面的信息旋转 180°。 3 按 OK。 40 接收计算机中的传真 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 要使用此功能，请通过控制面板设置选项：按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 转发 > PC > 打开。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 传真设置 > 转发 > 计算机 > 开。 1 打开 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 2 从打印机列表中选择相应的机器。 3 选择传真至 PC 设置菜单。 4 使用启用从设备接收传真更改传真设置。 • 图像类型: 将接收的传真转换为 PDF 或 TIFF。 • 保存位置: 选择用于保存转换后传真的位置。 • 前缀: 选择前缀。 • 打印已接收传真: 接收传真之后，为已接收的传真设置打印信息。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 247 • 完成时通知我: 设置为通过显示弹出窗口通知传真接收。 • 使用默认应用程序打开: 接收传真后，使用默认应用程序打开它。 • 无: 接收传真后，机器不通知用户或打开应用程序。 5 按保存 > 确定。 41 更改接收模式 1 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单) > 传真设置 > 接收 > 接收模式。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 默认设置 > 传真默认值 > 通用 > 接收模式。 2 选择所需选项。 • 传真: 应答传真来电，并立即进入传真接收模式。 • 电话: 依次按（免提拨号）和（开始）按钮接收传真。 • 应答/传真: 在应答机连接到您的机器时使用。机器将应答来电，呼叫者可以在应答机上留言。如果传真机在线检测到传真音，则机器将自动切换为传真模式以接收传真。要使用应答/传真模式，必须将应答机连接到您的机器背面的 EXT（分机）插槽。 • DRPD: 可以采用“特色振铃模式检测”（DRPD）功能来接收通话。特色振铃是一种电话公司服务，通过该服务用户能够使用一条电话线接听来自于几个不同电话号码的来电。有关详细信息，请参见第 248 页上的“使用 DRPD 模式接收传真”。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。 3 按确定。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 42 在电话模式中手动接收在听到传真音后，您可以按（免提拨号）按钮，然后再按（开始）接收传真呼叫。如果机器有话筒，则可以使用话筒接听通话（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 248 43 以应答机/传真模式接收要使用此模式，必须将应答机连接到本机背面的 EXT（分机）插槽。如果呼叫者留言，则应答机会存储该信息。如果机器在线检测到传真音，则自动开始接收传真。 • 如果已将机器设置为此模式，并且应答机关闭或机器的 EXT（分机）插槽中未连接任何应答机，则机器将在预定响铃次数后自动转入传真模式。 • 如果应答机有一个用户可选响铃计数器，则应将机器设置为响铃 1 次即应答来电。 • 如果机器处于电话模式，请将应答机与传真机断开连接或关闭应答机。否则，应答机的输出信息会干扰电话通话。 44 使用电话分机接收传真使用连接到 EXT 插口的电话分机时，无需转到传真机就可以从分机上通话的一方那里接收传真。在分机上接到呼叫并听到传真音时，请在分机上按 *9* 键。机器即开始接收传真。 *9* 为出厂预设的远程接收代码。第一个星号和最后一个星号是固定的，但您可以任意更改中间的号码。通过连接到 EXT 插口的电话分机通话时，复印和扫描功能不可用。 45 使用 DRPD 模式接收传真该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。特色振铃是一种电话公司服务，通过该服务用户能够使用一条电话线接听来自于几个不同电话号码的来电。此功能通常由提供应答服务的工作人员使用，他们负责接听多个不同客户的电话，并且需要知道呼叫者拨打的号码，以便恰当地接听电话。该设置是否可用取决于您所在的国家/地区。 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 接收 > DRPD模式 > 等待振铃。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 默认设置 > 传真默认值 > 通用 > 接收模式 > DRPD。 2 从另一部电话拨打传真号。 3 当传真机开始响铃时，不要应答呼叫。传真机需要多次响铃才能识别该模式。当机器完成识别过程后，显示屏将显示已完成 DRPD 设置。如果 DRPD 设置失败，将显示错误 DRPD 振铃。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 249 4 出现 DRPD 时，按 OK，然后从步骤 2 开始。 • 如果重新分配传真号码，或者将机器连接到另一条电话线上，则必须重新设置 DRPD。 • DRPD 设置完成后，再次拨打传真号码，以验证机器是否以传真音应答。然后拨打分配到同一条线上的另一号码，确保通话转至电话分机或插入 EXT（分机）插槽内的应答机。 46 以安全接收模式接收视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。可能需要防止未经授权的人员查看接收的传真。打开安全接收模式，接入的所有传真均将存储到内存中。输入密码即可打印接入的传真。要使用安全接收模式，可通过控制面板中的（传真）> （菜单 > 传真功能 > 安全接收激活菜单。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 传真设置 > 安全接收。打印已接收的传真 1 从控制面板中选择（传真）> （菜单）> 传真功能 > 安全接收 > 打印。或从触摸屏上选择安装 > 机器设置 > 下步 > 传真设置 > 安全接收 > 打印。 2 输入四位数的密码，然后按OK。 3 机器打印存储在内存中的所有传真。 47 双面打印传真 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。传真功能 4. 特殊功能 250 1 将单页文档正面朝下放在文档玻璃板上，或者将文档正面朝上装入进稿器中。 2 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单) > 传真设置 > 接收 > 双面打印。 • 关闭: 以正常模式打印。 • 长边: 将页面打印为书本形式。 • 短边: 将页面打印为记事本形式。 3 按 OK。 4 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 48 把传真接收到内存中由于机器是一种多任务设备，因此可以在复印或打印的同时接收传真。如果在复印或打印时接收到传真，则机器会将收到的传真存储在其内存中。然后，在完成复印或打印后，机器会立即自动打印传真。如果接收并打印传真，则无法同时处理其他复印和打印作业。 49 自动打印已发送传真报告可以设置机器，使其打印一份有关前 50 次通信操作的详细报告，其中包括时间和日期。 1 按控制面板上的（传真）> （菜单）> 传真设置 > 自动报告 > 打开。 2 按（取消或停止/清除）返回就绪模式。 2 5 34. 特殊功能 251 使用共享文件夹功能此功能允许您将机器内存用作共享文件夹。它的优势在于，您可以通过计算机窗口便捷地使用共享文件夹。 • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“不同型号的功能”）。 • 配备大容量存储设备的机型上可使用此功能（请参见第 10 页上的“ 多种功能”）。 • 管理员可以通过设置 ID 和密码来限制用户访问，并设置同时使用它的最大用户数。 50 创建共享文件夹 1 从计算机打开 Windows 资源管理器窗口。 2 在地址栏中输入打印机的 \\[IP 地址]（例如：\\169.254.133.42），然后按 Enter 键或单击执行。 3 在 nfsroot 目录下新建一个文件夹。 51 使用共享文件夹您可以像普通计算机上那样使用共享文件夹。像普通 Windows 文件夹那样创建、编辑和删除文件夹或文件。还可以将扫描的数据存储在共享文件夹中。您可以直接打印存储在共享文件夹中的文件。可以打印的文件包括 TIFF、BMP、JPEG 和 PRN。4. 特殊功能 252 使用内存/硬盘驱动器功能配备大容量存储设备 (HDD) 或内存的机型上可使用此功能（请参见第 10 页上的“多种功能”）。 52 设置可选内存从打印机驱动程序安装可选内存后，您可以使用高级打印功能，如检验作业以及在打印窗口中指定打印专用作业。选择属性或首选项，并配置打印模式。使用控制面板如果机器有可选内存或可选硬盘驱动器，可以从（菜单）按钮 > 系统设置 > 作业管理使用这些功能。 • 当前作业: 所有等待打印的打印作业都以您发送的顺序列在“活动的作业队列”中。您可以在打印之前从该队列中删除某项作业，或者将某项作业往前移以便更快打印。 • 文件策略: 在通过可选内存继续进行打印作业之前，您可以选择生成文件名的文件策略。如果在输入新文件名时，可选内存中已存在相同的文件名，则可以重命名或覆盖该文件。 • 已存储的作业: 可打印或删除已存储的作业。 • 根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 • 安装硬盘驱动器后，您还可以从（菜单）按钮 > 系统设置 > 表单菜单打印预定义的文档模板。5. 实用管理工具本章将介绍提供给您的管理工具，可帮助您充分利用机器。 • Easy Capture Manager 254 • Samsung AnyWeb Print 255 • Easy Eco Driver 256 • 使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 257 • 使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 260 • 使用 Samsung 打印机状态 263 • 使用Smart Panel 265 • 使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator 2665. 实用管理工具 254 Easy Capture Manager • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。只需按打印屏幕键即可捕捉屏幕并启动 Easy Capture Manager。此时您可以轻松地按捕捉或编辑状态打印捕捉到的屏幕。5. 实用管理工具 255 Samsung AnyWeb Print • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 和 Macintosh 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。与使用普通程序相比，此工具可帮助您更轻松地捕捉、预览、处理和打印 Windows Internet Explorer 页面。单击开始 > 所有程序 > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version 以链接至可下载该工具的网站。5. 实用管理工具 256 Easy Eco Driver • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。使用 Easy Eco Driver，您可以应用 Eco 功能在打印前节省纸张和墨粉。要使用此应用程序，应选中打印机属性中的在打印作业前启动 Easy Eco Driver 复选框。 Easy Eco Driver 还允许您执行简单编辑，如删除图像和文本、更改字体等。您可以将常用设置保存为预设。使用方法： 1 打开要打印的文档。 2 打印文档。将显示一个预览窗口。 3 选择要应用于文档的选项。您可以看到已应用功能的预览。 4 单击打印。5. 实用管理工具 257 使用 SyncThru™ Web Service • 对于 SyncThru™ Web Service，至少要求 Internet Explorer 6.0 或更高版本。 • 根据机器的选项或型号，本用户指南中的 SyncThru™ Web Service 解释可能与您的机器不同。 • 仅限网络型号（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 1 访问 SyncThru™ Web Service 1 从 Windows 访问 Web 浏览器，如 Internet Explorer。在地址字段中输入打印机的 IP 地址（http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx），然后按 Enter 键或单击执行。 2 机器的内嵌网站将打开。登录 SyncThru™ Web Service。配置 SyncThru™ Web Service 中的选项之前，首先必须以管理员身份登录。在不登录的情况下仍可以使用 SyncThru™ Web Service，但您将无法访问设置选项卡和安全选项卡。 1 单击 SyncThru™ Web Service 网站右上角的登录。 2 键入 ID 和密码，然后单击登录。 • ID: admin • 密码: sec00000 2 SyncThru™ Web Service 概述视打印机型号而定，某些选项卡可能不会出现。信息选项卡此选项卡为您提供有关机器的一般信息。您可以检查诸如墨粉剩余量等信息。此外，您还可打印错误报告等报告。 • 活动警报: 显示机器中已出现的警报及其严重性。 • 耗材: 显示已打印的页数以及墨粉盒中的剩余墨粉量。 • 使用计数器: 按打印类型显示使用次数：单面和双面。 • 当前设置: 显示机器信息和网络信息。使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 5. 实用管理工具 258 • 打印信息: 打印系统相关报告、电子邮件地址和字体报告等报告。设置选项卡此选项卡可用于设置打印机提供的配置和网络。需要作为管理员登录才能查看此选项卡。 • 机器设置选项卡: 设置机器提供的选项。 • 网络设置选项卡: 显示网络环境选项。设置 TCP/IP 和网络协议等选项。安全选项卡此选项卡可用于设置系统和网络安全信息。需要作为管理员登录才能查看此选项卡。 • 系统安全: 设置系统管理员信息，也可以启用或禁用机器功能。 • 网络安全: 设置 HTTPs，IPSec，IPv4/IPv6 过滤，802.1x 和验证服务器的设置。 • 用户访问控制: 根据每个用户的角色，将用户分为几组。每个用户的授权、认证和统计将由相应组的角色定义控制。维护选项卡此选项卡可用于通过升级固件以及设置用来发送电子邮件的联系信息来维护打印机。您还可以通过选择链接菜单来连接到 Samsung 网站或下载驱动程序。 • 固件升级: 升级机器固件。 • 联系信息: 显示联系人信息。 • 链接: 显示可下载或检查信息的实用网站的链接。 3 电子邮件通知设置您可通过设置该选项接收有关机器状态的电子邮件。通过设置包括 IP 地址、主机名称、电子邮件地址与 SMTP 服务器信息等在内的信息，将自动向某人的电子邮箱发送机器状态（墨粉不足或机器故障）。该选项可由机器管理员更加频繁地使用。根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。使用 SyncThru™ Web Service 5. 实用管理工具 259 1 从 Windows 启动 web 浏览器，如 Internet Explorer。在地址字段中输入机器的 IP 地址（http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx），然后按“ 回车”键或单击执行。 2 机器的内嵌网站将打开。 3 在设置选项卡中，依次选择机器设置 > 电子邮件通知。如果您尚未配置发送服务器环境，请进入设置 > 网络设置 > 邮件发送服务器(SMTP)，在设置电子邮件通知之前先配置网络环境。 4 选中启用复选框，以便使用电子邮件通知。 5 单击添加按钮添加电子邮件通知用户。为您希望收到其警告的收件人姓名和电子邮件地址设置通知项。 6 单击应用。如果防火墙已激活，则可能无法成功发送电子邮件。在这种情况下，请联系网络管理员。 4 设置系统管理员信息此设置是使用电子邮件通知选项所必需的。根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。 1 从 Windows 启动 web 浏览器，如 Internet Explorer。在地址字段中输入机器的 IP 地址（http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx），然后按“ 回车”键或单击执行。 2 机器的内嵌网站将打开。 3 在安全选项卡中，依次选择系统安全 > 系统管理员。 4 输入管理员的姓名，电话号码，地点和电子邮件地址。 5 单击应用。5. 实用管理工具 260 使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager • 视型号或可选商品，此功能可能不可用（请参见第 7 页上的“软件 ”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 和 Macintosh 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的 “软件”）。 • 对于 Windows，Samsung Easy Printer Manager 至少需要 Internet Explorer 6.0 或更高版本。 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 是一个将 Samsung 机器设置集中到一个位置的应用程序。Samsung Easy Printer Manager 结合了设备设置以及打印环境、设置/操作和启动。所有这些功能提供了一个轻松使用 Samsung 机器的途径。Samsung Easy Printer Manager 提供两个不同的用户界面供用户选择：基本用户界面和高级用户界面。在两个界面之间切换很简单：单击按钮即可。 5 理解 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 要打开程序：对于 Windows，选择开始 > 程序或所有程序 > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager。对于 Macintosh，打开应用程序文件夹 > Samsung 文件夹 > Samsung Easy Printer Manager。 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 界面包含几个不同的基本部分，如下表所述：屏幕截图可能因操作系统不同而异。 1 打印机列表打印机列表显示计算机上已安装的打印机以及网络发现添加的网络打印机（仅限 Windows）。使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5. 实用管理工具 261 选择帮助菜单或单击窗口中的按钮，单击要了解的任何选项。 6 高级设置用户界面概述高级用户界面适用于负责管理网络和机器的人员。根据选项或型号的不同，某些菜单可能不会显示。这种情况下，此功能不适用于您的机器。设备设置您可以配置各种机器设置，如机器设置、纸张、布局、模拟、网络和打印信息。 2 打印机信息该区域为您提供有关机器的总体信息。您可以检查信息，如机器的机型名称、IP 地址（或端口名称）以及机器状态。您可以查看联机用户指南。故障排除按钮: 当出现错误时，此按钮可用于打开故障排除指南。可以直接打开用户指南中的必要部分。 3 应用程序信息包含用于更改为高级设置、首选项、帮助和关于的链接。按钮可用于将用户界面更改为高级设置用户界面（请参见第 261 页上的“高级设置用户界面概述”）。 4 快速链接显示特定机器功能的快速链接。本部分还包含指向高级设置中的应用程序的链接。如果将机器连接到网络，将启用 SyncThru™ Web Service 图标。 5 内容区域显示选定机器、剩余墨粉量和纸张的相关信息。此信息因选定机器不同而异。一些机器不具备此功能。 6 订购耗材在“订购耗材”窗口中单击订购按钮。您可以在线订购备换墨粉盒。使用 Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5. 实用管理工具 262 扫描至 PC 设置该菜单包含创建或删除扫描至 PC 配置文件的设置。 • 扫描启动: 决定是否在设备上启用扫描。 • 基本选项卡: 包含普通扫描的相关设置和设备设置。 • 图像选项卡: 包含图像更改的相关设置。传真至 PC 设置该菜单包含选定设备的基本传真功能的相关设置。 • 禁用: 如果禁用为开，该设备不会接收进入传真。 • 启用从设备接收传真: 启用设备上的传真，还可以设置更多选项。警报设置（仅限 Windows）此菜单包含错误警报的相关设置。 • 打印机警报: 提供何时收到警报的相关设置。 • 电子邮件提醒: 提供通过电子邮件接收警报的相关选项。 • 警报历史记录: 提供设备历史和墨粉相关警报。作业统计提供指定作业统计用户的配额信息查询。可以使用 SyncThru™ 或 CounThru™ 管理软件等作业统计软件创建这一配额信息并应用到设备。5. 实用管理工具 263 使用 Samsung 打印机状态 Samsung 打印机状态是一个监视和通知机器状态的程序。 • 根据使用的机器或操作系统的不同，本“用户指南”中所示的 Samsung 打印机状态窗口及其内容可能会有所不同。 • 检查操作系统是否和您的机器兼容（请参见第 103 页上的“规格”）。 • 只适用于 Windows 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 7 Samsung 打印机状态概述如果在操作过程中出现错误，可以从 Samsung 打印机状态检查错误。安装机器的软件时将自动安装 Samsung 打印机状态。还可手动启动 Samsung 打印机状态。转至打印首选项，单击基本选项卡 > 打印机状态按钮。这些图标出现在 Windows 任务栏中：图标含义描述正常机器处于就绪模式并且未出现错误或警告。警告机器处于可能会在以后发生错误的状态。例如，设备可能处于墨粉不足的状态，该状态可能会使设备到达墨粉用尽的状态。错误机器至少出现一个错误。 1 碳粉量您可以查看每个墨粉盒中的剩余碳粉量。根据所使用的机器不同，上方窗口中所示的机器和墨粉盒数量可能不同。一些打印机不具有此功能。 2 选项您可以设置打印作业警报的相关设置。 3 订购耗材您可以在线订购备换墨粉盒。使用 Samsung 打印机状态 5. 实用管理工具 264 4 User’s Guide 您可以查看联机用户指南。当出现错误时，此按钮可用于打开 Troubleshooting Guide。可以直接打开“ 用户指南”中的“故障排除”章节。 5 关闭关闭窗口。5. 实用管理工具 265 使用Smart Panel 智能面板是一种监视和通知机器的状态，并且允许您自定义机器设置的程序。您可以从 Samsung 网站下载智能面板（请参见第 132 页上的“安装智能面板”）。 • 根据使用的机器或操作系统的不同，本“用户指南”中所示的Smart Panel窗口及其内容可能有所不同。 • 检查操作系统是否和您的机器兼容（请参见第 103 页上的“规格”）。 • Smart Panel仅适用于 Linux 操作系统用户（请参见第 7 页上的“软件”）。 8 Smart Panel概述如果在操作过程中出现错误，可以从Smart Panel检查错误。还可手动启动 Smart Panel。双击通知区域中的智能面板图标（）。 9 更改Smart Panel的设置右键单击Smart Panel图标，然后选择 Configure smart panel。从 Configure smart panel 窗口选择所需的设置。 1 碳粉量您可以查看每个墨粉盒中的剩余碳粉量。根据所使用的机器不同，上方窗口中所示的机器和墨粉盒数量可能不同。如果您看不到此功能，表明它不适用于您的机器。 2 Buy Now 您可以在线订购备换墨粉盒。 3 User’s Guide 您可以查看联机用户指南。当出现错误时，此按钮可用于打开 Troubleshooting Guide。可以直接打开“用户指南”中的“故障排除”章节。 4 Printer Setting 您可以在打印机设置工具窗口中配置各项机器设置。一些打印机不具有此功能。如果您的机器已联网，则会显示 SyncThru™ Web Service 窗口，而不是打印机设置工具。5. 实用管理工具 266 使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator Unified Driver Configurator 是一种主要用于配置打印机设备的工具。需要安装 Unified Linux Driver 才能使用 Unified Driver Configurator（请参见第 132 页上的“Linux 安装”）。在将驱动程序安装在您的 Linux 系统上之后，将在您的桌面上自动创建 Unified Driver Configurator 图标。 10 打开 Unified Driver Configurator 1 双击桌面上的 Unified Driver Configurator。也可以单击 Startup 菜单图标，然后选择 Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator。 2 单击左侧各个按钮可切换到相应的配置窗口。 1 Printer Configuration 2 Port Configuration使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator 5. 实用管理工具 267 要使用屏幕帮助，请单击窗口中的 Help 或按钮。 3 更改配置之后，单击 Exit 关闭 Unified Driver Configurator。 11 打印机配置 Printers configuration 有两个选项卡：Printers 和 Classes。 Printers 选项卡单击 Unified Driver Configurator 窗口左侧的机器图标按钮，查看当前系统的打印机配置。 1 切换到 Printers configuration。 2 显示已安装的所有机器。 3 显示机器的状态、型号名称和 URI。使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator 5. 实用管理工具 268 打印机控制按钮如下： • Refresh: 更新可用打印机列表。 • Add Printer: 允许您添加新机器。 • Remove Printer: 删除选定机器。 • Set as Default: 将当前的选定机器设置为默认机器。 • Stop/Start: 停止/启动机器。 • Test: 允许您打印测试页，以确保机器工作正常。 • Properties: 允许您查看并更改打印机属性。 Classes 选项卡 Classes 选项卡显示可用机器类别列表。 • Refresh: 更新类别列表。 • Add Class: 允许您添加新的机器类别。 • Remove Class: 删除选定机器类别。 1 显示所有打印机类别。 2 显示类别状态和该类别中的所有打印机数量。使用 Linux Unified Driver Configurator 5. 实用管理工具 269 12 Ports configuration 在此窗口中，您可以查看可用端口的列表、检查每个端口的状态，以及释放在所有者因任何缘由终止作业时释放因繁忙状态而搁置的端口。 • Refresh: 更新可用端口列表。 • Release port: 释放选定端口。 1 切换到 Ports configuration。 2 显示所有的可用端口。 3 显示端口类型，连接到端口的设备和状态。6. 故障排除本章介绍有关如何排除故障的帮助信息。 • 进纸问题 271 • 电源和电缆连接问题 272 • 打印问题 273 • 打印质量问题 276 • 复印问题 283 • 扫描问题 284 • 传真问题 285 • 操作系统问题 2876. 故障排除 271 进纸问题状况建议的解决方法打印过程中出现卡纸清除卡纸。纸张粘连在一起 • 检查纸盘的最大纸张容量。 • 确保使用的纸张类型正确。 • 将纸张从纸盘中取出，然后弯折或呈扇形散开。 • 潮湿的环境会使一些纸张粘连在一起。不得送入多张纸纸盘中可能叠放有不同类型的纸张。请只装入同一类型、大小和重量的纸张。机器不进纸 • 清除机器内的所有阻碍物。 • 未正确装纸。从纸盘中取出纸张，然后按正确方法将其重新装入。 • 纸盘中的纸张过多。从纸盘中取出多余的纸张。 • 纸张过厚。仅使用符合机器规格要求的纸张。不断地卡纸 • 纸盘中的纸张过多。从纸盘中取出多余的纸张。如果在特殊材料上打印，请使用纸盒手动进纸。 • 使用了错误的纸张类型。仅使用符合机器规格要求的纸张。 • 机器内可能有碎屑。打开前盖，清除任何碎屑。信封歪斜或不能正确进纸确保纸张导板紧贴信封两侧。6. 故障排除 272 电源和电缆连接问题状况建议的解决方法机器未通电，或者计算机和机器间的连接线缆未正确连接 • 首先将机器连接到电源。如果机器的控制面板上有（电源）按钮，请按下它。 • 断开机器的电缆连接，然后重新连接。6. 故障排除 273 打印问题状况可能的原因建议的解决方法机器不能打印机器未通电。首先将机器连接到电源。如果机器的控制面板上有（电源）按钮，请按下它。未将机器设为默认机器。在 Windows 中将您的机器选作默认打印机。检查机器是否出现以下情况： • 盖板没有关闭。合上盖板。 • 卡纸。清除卡纸（请参见第 91 页上的“清除卡纸”）。 • 未装纸。装纸（参见第 41 页上的“在纸盘中装纸”）。 • 未安装墨粉盒。安装墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 • 确保拆掉墨粉盒上的保护套（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。如果出现系统故障，请联系服务代表。计算机和机器间的连接线缆未正确连接。断开机器电缆连接，然后重新连接（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。计算机和机器间的连接线缆有问题。如有可能，将线缆连接到另一台正常工作的计算机上，然后进行打印作业。还可尝试使用一根不同的机器线缆。端口设置错误。检查 Windows 打印机设置，确保打印作业发送到正确的端口。如果计算机有多个端口，请确认机器连接到正确的端口。打印问题 6. 故障排除 274 机器不能打印机器可能配置不正确。检查打印首选项确保所有打印设置均正确无误。打印机驱动程序可能安装不正确。卸载然后重新安装机器的驱动程序。机器出现故障。检查控制面板上的显示信息，查看机器是否提示系统故障。请与服务代表联系。文档太大，计算机没有足够的硬盘空间可供访问该打印作业。请留出更多硬盘空间，然后再次打印该文档。出纸盘已满。从出纸盘中取走纸张后，机器将继续打印。机器从错误的纸张来源选择了打印材料在打印首选项中选择的纸张选项可能不正确。对于许多应用程序而言，纸张来源选项位于打印首选项中的纸张选项卡下方（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。选择正确的纸张来源。请参见打印机驱动程序的帮助屏幕（请参见第 54 页上的“使用帮助”）。打印作业极为缓慢作业可能过于复杂。降低页面的复杂程度，或尝试调整打印质量设置。页面的一半为空白页面方向设置可能错误。在应用程序中更改页面方向（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。请参见打印机驱动程序的帮助屏幕（请参见第 54 页上的“使用帮助”）。纸张大小与纸张大小设置不一致。请确保打印机驱动程序设置中的纸张大小与纸盘中的纸张匹配。或者确保打印机驱动程序设置中的纸张大小与您使用的软件应用程序设置中的纸张选择匹配（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。机器可以打印，但出现了文本错误，乱码或不完整情况。机器线缆松动或有故障。断开机器线缆连接，然后重新连接。尝试打印一份曾经成功打印过的作业。如果可以，将线缆与机器连接到另一台运行有效的计算机上，然后尝试打印。最后，尝试更换新的机器线缆。选择的是错误的打印机驱动程序。检查应用程序的打印机选择菜单，确保选择了您的机器。软件应用程序存在故障。尝试从另一个应用程序打印作业。操作系统存在故障。退出 Windows，然后重新启动计算机。关闭机器电源，然后再次重新打开。状况可能的原因建议的解决方法打印问题 6. 故障排除 275 打印页面，但全部为空白墨粉盒有问题或墨粉已用完。如果需要，请重新摇匀墨粉。如果需要，更换墨粉盒。 • 请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”。 • 请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”。文件中可能有空白页。检查文件，确保文件中没有空白页。某些零件（如控制器或控制板）可能存在故障。请与服务代表联系。机器无法正确打印 PDF 文件。遗漏了图片、文字或示意图的某些部分 PDF 文件与 Acrobat 产品不兼容。将 PDF 文件作为图像打印会使文件被打印。启动 Acrobat 打印选项中的打印为图像。将 PDF 文件作为图像打印时将需要较长的时间。照片的打印质量欠佳、图像不清楚照片的分辨率太低。请减小照片尺寸。如果在软件应用程序中增大照片尺寸，分辨率将会降低。打印前机器出纸盘附近会散发出蒸汽使用潮湿的纸张会导致打印时产生蒸汽。这并不是故障。请继续打印。该机器不能打印特殊尺寸的纸张，例如：账单纸纸张大小与纸张大小设置不符。在打印首选项的纸张选项卡的自定义中设置正确的纸张大小（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。账单纸在打印后卷曲。纸张类型设置不符。更改打印机选项，然后再试。转至打印首选项，单击纸张选项卡，然后将类型设置为厚纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。状况可能的原因建议的解决方法6. 故障排除 276 打印质量问题如果机器内部变脏或装纸不当，则可能会降低打印质量。请参见下表解决问题。状况建议的解决方法打印件颜色浅或褪色 • 如果页面上出现白色竖条或褪色区，则表示墨粉量不足。安装新的墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 • 纸张可能不符合规格；例如，纸张过于潮湿或粗糙。 • 如果整个页面的颜色都很浅，则说明打印分辨率的设置过低或启用了“省墨”模式。请调整打印分辨率并关闭“省墨”模式。请参见打印机驱动程序的帮助屏幕。 • 褪色和污迹同时出现说明墨粉盒需要清洁。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 机器内 LSU 零件的表面可能较脏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。如果这些步骤仍不能解决问题，请与服务代表联系。纸张上半部打印颜色与纸张其余部分相比较浅墨粉可能无法有效粘附在这种纸上。 • 更改打印机选项，然后再试。转至打印首选项，单击纸张选项卡，然后将纸张类型设置为再生纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。墨粉斑点 • 纸张可能不符合规格；例如，纸张过于潮湿或粗糙。 • 传墨辊可能较脏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 送纸路径可能需要清洁。请联系服务代表（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c A aB bC c打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 277 褪字如果页面上偶尔出现褪色区（通常为圆形）： • 单张纸可能有问题。请尝试重新打印作业。 • 纸张湿度不均匀或纸的表面有湿斑。请尝试一种不同品牌的纸张。 • 这批纸张有质量问题。造纸工艺会导致某些区域不吸墨。请尝试使用一种不同品牌的纸张。 • 更改打印机选项，然后再试。转至打印首选项，单击纸张选项卡，然后将类型设置为厚纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。如果这些步骤仍不能解决问题，请与服务代表联系。白点如果页面上出现白点： • 纸张过于粗糙且纸张上的大量灰尘落至机器内部组件，因而传墨辊可能较脏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 送纸路径可能需要清洁。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。如果这些步骤仍不能解决问题，请与服务代表联系。竖条如果页面上出现黑色竖条： • 机器内的墨粉盒表面（磁鼓部分）可能刮损。拆下墨粉盒，安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。如果页面上出现白色竖条： • 机器内 LSU 零件的表面可能较脏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。如果这些步骤仍不能解决问题，请与服务代表联系。状况建议的解决方法 A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C A a B b C打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 278 黑色或彩色背景如果背景渲染程度不足： • 更换一种较轻的纸张。 • 检查环境条件：过于干燥或潮湿（相对湿度超过 80%）的条件会增加背景渲染程度。 • 取出旧墨粉盒，然后安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 • 摇匀墨粉（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。墨粉拖尾 • 清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 检查纸张类型和质量。 • 拆下墨粉盒，安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。反复出现垂直瑕疵如果打印面上重复出现间距均匀的印痕： • 墨粉盒可能已损坏。如果相同问题仍然出现，可取下该墨粉盒，然后安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒 ”）。 • 机器零件上可能沾有墨粉。如果缺陷出现在打印页背面，则再打印几张纸后问题可能会自行解决。 • 定影组件可能已损坏。请与服务代表联系。状况建议的解决方法打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 279 背景散射背景散射是因随机分布在打印页上的少量墨粉所产生的。 • 纸张可能过于潮湿。尝试换用另一批纸张进行打印。不需要时请勿打开纸张的包装，以免纸张吸收空气中的湿气。 • 如果在信封上出现背景散射情况，请更改打印布局，以避免打印在背面重叠接缝区域内。在接缝上打印可导致问题出现。或从打印首选项窗口中选择厚纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 • 如果整个打印页都出现了背景墨粉扩散现象，请通过您的软件应用程序或在打印首选项中调整打印分辨率（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。确保选择正确的纸张类型。例如：如果选择特厚纸，而实际使用的是普通纸，可能出现导致复印质量问题的用墨过量情况。 • 如果使用新的墨粉盒，请首先摇匀墨粉（请参见第 71 页上的“摇匀墨粉”）。墨粉颗粒围绕在粗体字符或图片周围。墨粉可能无法有效粘附在这种纸上。 • 更改打印机选项，然后再试。转至打印首选项，单击纸张选项卡，然后将纸张类型设置为再生纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 • 确保选择正确的纸张类型。例如：如果选择特厚纸，而实际使用的是普通纸，可能出现导致复印质量问题的用墨过量情况。字符扭曲 • 如果字符扭曲且出现中空图像，可能是因为纸面过于光滑。试用另一种纸张。状况建议的解决方法 A打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 280 页面歪斜 • 确保正确装入纸张。 • 检查纸张类型和质量。 • 确保导板顶靠纸叠不过紧或过松。卷曲或波纹 • 确保正确装入纸张。 • 检查纸张类型和质量。高温和高湿度都会导致纸张卷曲。 • 将纸盘内的纸摞翻转过来。此外，请尝试将纸张在纸盘中旋转 180°。起皱或折叠 • 确保正确装入纸张。 • 检查纸张类型和质量。 • 将纸盘内的纸摞翻转过来。此外，请尝试将纸张在纸盘中旋转 180°。状况建议的解决方法 A a B b C A a B b C C C c A a B b C c打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 281 打印件背面不干净 • 检查墨粉是否泄漏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。页面全彩色或全黑 • 可能是墨粉盒安装不正确。取出墨盒，然后将其重新插入。 • 墨粉盒可能有问题。拆下墨粉盒，安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。 • 机器可能需要维修。请与服务代表联系。墨粉晕开 • 清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。 • 检查纸张类型和质量。 • 取出旧墨粉盒，然后安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。如果问题仍然存在，则打印机可能需要维修。请与服务代表联系。状况建议的解决方法 A打印质量问题 6. 故障排除 282 字符脱墨字符脱墨是指应该为纯黑的字符部分内出现白色区域： • 可能打印在纸张的非打印面上。请取出纸张，并将其翻转。 • 纸张可能不符合纸张规格。水平条纹如果出现水平排列的黑色条纹或污点： • 墨粉盒安装可能不正确。取出墨盒，然后将其重新插入。 • 墨粉盒可能有问题。拆下墨粉盒，安装一个新墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。如果问题仍然存在，机器可能需要维修。请与服务代表联系。卷曲如果打印出来的纸张卷曲或纸张无法进入机器： • 将纸盘内的纸摞翻转过来。此外，请尝试将纸张在纸盘中旋转 180°。 • 更改打印机的纸张选项，然后重试。转至打印首选项，单击纸张选项卡，然后将类型设置为薄纸（请参见第 53 页上的“打开打印首选项”）。 • 连续在几张纸上反复出现未知图像 • 墨粉晕开 • 打印颜色过浅或污渍现象机器可能在 1,000 米或以上的海拔高度使用。高海拔会影响打印质量，如：墨粉松散或图像色浅。更改机器的海拔设置（请参见第 209 页上的“海拔调整”）。状况建议的解决方法 A6. 故障排除 283 复印问题状况建议的解决方法复印件过亮或过暗。使用复印功能中的黑度使复印件的背景变浅或变深（请参见第 57 页上的“更改每次复印的设置”）。复印件上出现污迹，线条，墨痕或污点。 • 如果是原稿的问题，使用复印功能中的黑度将复印件的背景变浅。 • 如果原件没有问题，请清洁扫描装置（请参见第 81 页上的“清洁扫描装置”）。复印的图像歪斜。 • 确保原件与定位指示对齐。 • 传墨辊可能较脏。清洁机器内部（请参见第 77 页上的“清洁机器”）。打印出空白复印件。确保原件正面朝下放在扫描仪玻璃板上，或者是正面朝上放入进纸器。如果这些步骤仍不能解决问题，请与服务代表联系。复印件上的图像易被擦除。 • 将纸盘中的纸张更换为新包装中的纸。 • 在湿度高的地区，请勿将纸张长时间搁置在机器中。复印时经常出现卡纸。 • 将纸呈扇形散开，翻转后放入纸盘。将纸盘中的纸张更换为新纸。如果需要，请检查/调整纸张导板。 • 确保纸张的类型和重量合适（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。 • 清除卡纸后，请检查机器中是否剩有复印纸。墨粉盒用尽之前，墨粉盒的打印量少于预期值。 • 原件可能包含图片，实线或粗线条。例如，原件可能是表格，新闻稿，书籍或使用较多墨粉的其他文档。 • 复印时，扫描仪盖可能一直开着。 • 关闭机器电源，然后重新打开。6. 故障排除 284 扫描问题状况建议的解决方法扫描仪不工作。 • 确保要扫描的原件正面朝下放在扫描仪玻璃板上，或者是正面朝上放在进纸器中（请参见第 48 页上的“装入原件”）。 • 可能没有足够的可用内存空间来保存要扫描的文档。尝试使用“预扫描”功能，检查其是否正常工作。尝试降低扫描分辨率。 • 检查打印机电缆是否连接正确。 • 确保打印机电缆没有问题。请使用确认完好的打印机电缆。如有必要，更换打印机电缆。 • 检查扫描仪配置是否正确。在 SmarThru Office 或要使用的应用程序中检查扫描设置，以确保扫描仪作业发送至正确的端口（例如：USB001）。装置扫描速度缓慢。 • 检查机器是否在打印接收到的数据。如果是，请打印完接收的数据后再扫描文档。 • 图形的扫描速度要比文本慢得多。 • 使用扫描模式时通信速度会很慢，因为分析并再现扫描的图像时需要大量的内存。通过 BIOS 设置将计算机设置为 ECP 打印机模式。这将有助于提高速度。有关如何设置 BIOS 的详细信息，请参见您计算机的用户指南。计算机屏幕上出现以下信息： • 设备无法设置为您需要的 H/ W 模式。 • 其他程序正在使用该端口。 • 端口已禁用。 • 扫描仪正忙于接收或打印数据。请在当前作业完成后再试。 • 无效句柄 • 扫描失败 • 可能正在复印或打印作业。作业完成时，请尝试重新复印或打印作业。 • 所选端口当前正被占用。重新启动计算机并重试。 • 打印机电缆可能连接不当或电源被关闭。 • 未安装扫描仪驱动程序或工作环境设置不当。 • 确保机器连接正确并通电，然后重新启动计算机。 • USB 线可能连接不当或电源关闭。6. 故障排除 285 传真问题状况建议的解决方法机器不工作，没有任何显示并且按钮不起作用。 • 拔下电源线，然后将其重新插入。 • 确保电源插座通电。 • 确保电源已打开。无拨号音。 • 检查电话线是否正确连接（请参见第 23 页上的“后视图”）。 • 将另一个电话机插入墙上的电话插孔，检查插孔是否正常工作。内存中存储的号码无法正确拨号。确保内存中存储的号码准确无误。要进行检查，请打印一份地址簿列表。原件未能送入机器。 • 确保纸张没有褶皱，且插入方法正确。检查原件的大小是否合适，不要太厚，也不要太薄。 • 确保进纸器牢牢地合上。 • 可能需要更换进纸器橡胶垫。请联系服务代表（请参见第 69 页上的“可用维护零件”）。无法自动接收传真。 • 接收模式应该设为传真（请参见第 247 页上的“更改接收模式”）。 • 确保纸盒中有纸（请参见第 106 页上的“打印介质规格”）。 • 查看显示屏是否显示有任何错误信息。如果有，请解决该问题。机器不发送。 • 确保将原件装入进纸器或者扫描仪玻璃板上。 • 检查目标传真机是否能接收传真。收到的传真中有空白，或者质量欠佳。 • 发送传真的传真机可能有故障。 • 电话线噪音可能导致线路故障。 • 通过复印检查机器。 • 墨粉盒已经达到其预计的墨粉盒寿命。更换墨粉盒（请参见第 73 页上的“更换墨粉盒”）。收到的传真上某些文字变宽。发送传真的传真机可能暂时出现文档卡纸故障。您发送的原件上有线条检查扫描单元上面是否有痕迹，然后进行清洁（请参见第 81 页上的“清洁扫描装置”）。传真问题 6. 故障排除 286 机器拨号，但无法与对方传真机建立连接。对方传真机可能已关闭、缺纸或无法应答来电。与对方机器操作员通话，请求对方解决该问题。传真未存储在内存中。可能内存空间不足，无法存储传真。如果显示内存状态的显示屏出现，请将任何不再需要的传真从内存中删除，然后再次尝试存储该传真。请拨打服务电话。每页底部或其他页上出现空白区，并且顶部出现一小条文字。可能在用户选项设置中选择了错误的纸张设置。检查纸张大小并重新键入。状况建议的解决方法6. 故障排除 287 操作系统问题 1 常见 Windows 问题有关 Windows 错误消息的详细信息，请参阅计算机随附的 Microsoft Windows 用户指南。状况建议的解决方法安装过程中出现“文件正在使用 ”消息。退出所有软件应用程序。从启动组中删除所有软件，然后重新启动 Windows。重新安装打印机驱动程序。出现“一般保护故障”、“异常 OE”、“假脱机 32”或“非法操作 ”等消息。关闭所有其他应用程序，重新启动 Windows，然后重新打印。出现“无法打印”、“发生打印机超时错误”等消息。打印时可能出现这些信息。仅需等待直至机器完成打印。如果在就绪模式下或打印完成后出现此类消息，请检查连接，查看是否发生错误。操作系统问题 6. 故障排除 288 2 常见 Macintosh 问题有关 Macintosh 错误消息的详细信息，请参阅您计算机随附的 Macintosh 用户指南。状况建议的解决方法机器无法正确打印 PDF 文件。遗漏了图片、文字或示意图的某些部分将 PDF 文件作为图像打印会使文件被打印。启动 Acrobat 打印选项中的打印为图像。将 PDF 文件作为图像打印时将需要较长的时间。某些信纸在进行封面打印时无法正确显示。在打印封面时，Mac 操作系统无法创建字体。英文字母和数字在封面上显示正常。当在 Macintosh 中使用 Acrobat Reader 6.0 或更高版本打印文档时，打印颜色不正确。确保机器驱动程序中的分辨率设置与 Acrobat Reader 中的分辨率设置匹配。操作系统问题 6. 故障排除 289 3 常见 Linux 问题状况建议的解决方法机器不能打印 • 检查系统中是否安装了打印机驱动程序。打开 Unified Driver Configurator 并切换至 Printers configuration 窗口中的 Printers 选项卡查看可用打印机列表。确保机器显示在列表中。如果未在列表中，请打开 Add new printer wizard 设置您的设备。 • 检查机器是否已启动。打开 Printers configuration，并从打印机列表中选择您的机器。查看 Selected printer 窗格中的说明。如果状态包含 Stopped，请按 Start 按钮。之后，即可恢复机器的正常操作。当打印过程中出现某些问题时，可激活“stopped”状态。 • 检查应用程序是否有特殊打印选项，例如“-oraw”。如果在命令行参数中指定有 “-oraw”，则需要将其删除方可正常打印。对于 Gimp 前端，选择 “print” -> “Setup printer”，然后在命令项中编辑命令行参数。有些彩色图像打印出来都是黑色的。这是 Ghostscript（直到 GNU Ghostscript 7.05 版）中的已知错误，其原因是文档的基本颜色空间是编有索引的颜色空间，它是通过 CIE 颜色空间转换而来的。由于 Postscript 将 CIE 颜色空间用于颜色匹配系统，因此您应将系统上的 Ghostscript 升级为至少 GNU Ghostscript 7.06 或更高版本。您可以在 www.ghostscript.com 上找到最新的 Ghostscript 版本。有些彩色图像的输出结果严重失真。这是 Ghostscript（GNU Ghostscript 7.xx 版以前的版本）中的已知错误，其中文档的基本颜色空间是编有索引的 RGB 颜色空间，通过 CIE 颜色空间转换。由于 Postscript 将 CIE 颜色空间用于颜色匹配系统，因此您应将系统上的 Ghostscript 升级为 GNU Ghostscript 8.xx 或更高版本。您可以在 www.ghostscript.com 上找到最新的 Ghostscript 版本。机器无法打印整页内容，只能打印半张页面这是在 Ghostscript 8.51 或更早版本以及 64 位 Linux 操作系统上使用彩色打印机时出现的已知问题。此问题已作为在 Ghostscript Bug 688252 报告至 bugs.ghostscript.com。此问题在 AFPL Ghostscript 8.52 或更高版本上得到解决。从 http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ 中下载并安装 AFPL Ghostscript 的最新版本可解决此问题。操作系统问题 6. 故障排除 290 有关 Linux 错误消息的详细信息，请参阅您计算机随附的 Linux 用户指南。无法通过 Gimp Front-end 进行扫描。检查 Gimp 前端的“Acquire”菜单上是否包含“Xsane:Device dialog”。如果没有，应为计算机上的 Gimp 安装 Xsane 插件。可以在 Linux 发行光盘或 Gimp 主页上可以找到用于 Gimp 的 Xsane 插件包。有关详细信息，请参阅 Linux 发行光盘或 Gimp Front-end 应用程序的帮助信息。如果您希望使用其他类型的扫描应用程序，请参阅应用程序帮助信息。打印文档时，出现 “Cannot open port device file” 错误消息。请避免在进行打印作业时更改打印作业参数（如通过 LPR GUI）。只要打印选项发生更改，则已知版本的 CUPS 服务器就会中止打印作业，然后从头重新开始打印作业。由于在打印过程中 Unified Linux Driver 将端口锁定，而驱动程序的突然中止会保持端口处于锁定状态，从而不能用于随后的打印作业。如果出现这种情况，请尝试在 Port configuration 窗口中选择 Release port 释放端口。机器未出现在扫描仪列表中。 • 确保机器通过 USB 端口正确连接至计算机，然后将其打开。 • 确保系统中已安装机器的扫描仪驱动程序。打开 Unified Linux Driver Configurator，切换到扫描仪配置，然后按 “Drivers”。确保名称与机器名称对应的驱动程序在窗口中列出。 • 确保端口未被占用。由于打印机的功能组件（打印机与扫描仪）共用同一 I/O 接口（端口），因此可能会出现不同用户应用程序同时访问同一端口的情况。为避免可能的冲突，每次只允许其中一个对设备进行控制。其他用户会收到 “设备忙”的应答。这种情况通常在开始扫描程序时出现。会出现一个相应的信息窗口。要找出问题源，请打开“Ports configuration”，然后选择向您扫描仪分配的端口，端口符号 /dev/mfp0 与显示在扫描仪选项中的 LP:0 标识对应，/dev/mfp1 与 LP:1 相关，依此类推。USB 端口始于 /dev/mfp4，因此 USB:0 上的扫描仪分别与 /dev/mfp4 相关，依此类推。在“Selected port”窗格中，您可查看该端口是否已被另一个应用程序占用。在这种情况下，应等待当前作业完成，或者按 Release port 按钮（如果能确定当前端口应用程序运行不正常）。机器不能扫描。 • 确保将文档装入机器中，确保机器与计算机连接。 • 如果在扫描过程中出现输入/输出错误。状况建议的解决方法操作系统问题 6. 故障排除 291 4 常见 PostScript 问题下列情况与 PS 语言相关，可能会在使用多种打印机语言时出现。问题可能的原因解决方法无法打印 PostScript 文件 PostScript 驱动程序可能安装不正确。 • 安装 PostScript 驱动程序（请参见第 129 页上的“软件安装”）。 • 打印配置页并验证是否存在用于打印的 PS 版本。 • 如果问题仍然存在，请联系服务代表。打印限制检查错误报告打印作业过于复杂。您可能需要降低页面的复杂性或者安装更多内存。打印一张 PostScript 错误页打印作业可能不属于 PostScript 类型。确保打印作业属于 PostScript 类型。检查软件应用程序是否需要设置将要发送至机器的 PostScript 页眉文件。在驱动程序中没有选择选装纸盘尚未对打印机驱动程序进行配置，使其识别选装纸盘。打开 PostScript 驱动程序属性，选择设备选项选项卡，然后设置纸盘选项。当在 Macintosh 中使用 Acrobat Reader 6.0 或更高版本打印文档时，打印颜色不正确打印机驱动程序中的分辨率设置可能和 Acrobat Reader 中的分辨率设置不匹配。确保您打印机驱动程序中的分辨率设置与 Acrobat Reader 中的分辨率设置匹配。 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 292 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site ALBANIA 42 27 5755 www.samsung.com ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 www.samsung.com AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 www.samsung.com BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/ be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/ be_fr (French) BOLIVIA 800-10-7260 www.samsung.com BOSNIA 05 133 1999 www.samsung.com BRAZIL 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com BULGARIA 07001 33 11 www.samsung.com CAMEROON 7095-0077 www.samsung.com CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ ca www.samsung.com/ ca_fr (French) CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) From mobile 02-482 82 00 www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com COTE D’LVOIRE 8000 0077 www.samsung.com CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) www.samsung.com CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from landline www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o., Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 293 EGYPT 08000-726786 www.samsung.com EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 www.samsung.com GHANA 0800-10077 0302-200077 www.samsung.com GREECE 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line www.samsung.com GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com HONDURAS 800-27919267 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/ hk www.samsung.com/ hk_en/ Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA 1800 1100 11 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com IRAN 021-8255 www.samsung.com ITALY 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799) www.samsung.com KENYA 0800 724 000 www.samsung.com KOSOVO +381 0113216899 www.samsung.com KUWAIT 183-2255 www.samsung.com KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 294 LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com MACEDONIA 023 207 777 www.samsung.com MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com MONGOLIA www.samsung.com MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www.samsung.com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900- 7267864) (€ 0,10/min) www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com OMAN 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com PERU 0-800-777-08 www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726- 7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726- 7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726- 7864) for Globe 02-5805777 www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801-1 SAMSUNG (172-678) +48 22 607-93-33 www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 808 20-SAMSUNG (808 20 7267) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com ROMANIA 08010 SAMSUNG (08010 726 7864) only from landline(+40) 21 206 01 10 from mobile and land line www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.com SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com SENEGAL 800-00-0077 www.samsung.com SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) www.samsung.com SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 295 SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (0800-726- 7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ ch www.samsung.com/ ch_fr(French) TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com TAIWAN 0800-329-999 0266-026-066 www.samsung.com TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com TRINIDAD & TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site UGANDA 0800-300 300 www.samsung.com U.K 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 www.samsung.com/ ua www.samsung.com/ ua_ru UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com Country/Region Customer Care Center Web Site术语表 296 术语表以下术语表介绍了与打印相关的常用术语以及本用户指南中提及的术语，有助于您熟悉本产品。 802.11 802.11 是一套无线局域网 (WLAN) 通信标准，由 IEEE LAN/MAN 标准委员会 (IEEE 802) 制定。 802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n 可共享相同的硬件并使用 2.4 GHz 带宽。802.11b 支持高达 11 Mbps 的带宽，802.11n 支持高达 150 Mbps 的带宽。802.11b/g/n 设备有时候可能会受到微波炉，无绳电话和蓝牙设备的干扰。接入点接入点或无线接入点（AP 或 WAP）是将无线局域网 (WLAN) 中的无线通信设备连接到一起的设备，是 WLAN 无线电信号的中央传送器和接收器。 ADF 自动进纸器 (ADF) 是一种可以自动送入纸张原件的扫描装置，它可使机器一次扫描一定数量的纸张。 AppleTalk AppleTalk 是由 Apple, Inc 开发的专用于计算机网络的一套协议。此协议包含在最早的 Macintosh (1984) 中，现在由 Apple 将其中关于 TCP/IP 网络的部分进行了修改。位深度这是一个计算机图形术语，描述在位图图像中表现单一像素颜色所使用的位数。较高的颜色深度使得颜色的范围较宽。随着位数的增加，彩色图上可能出现的颜色数量会变得很大。1 位颜色通常被称为单色或黑白。 BMP 这是 Microsoft Windows 图形子系统 (GDI) 内部使用的一种位图图形格式，常用作该平台的简易图形文件格式。 BOOTP 引导程序协议。这是网络客户端用来自动获取其 IP 地址的网络协议。通常是在计算机或计算机上运行的操作系统的引导过程中完成的。BOOTP 服务器将地址池中的 IP 地址指定给每个客户端。BOOTP 可使“无盘工作站” 计算机在加载高级操作系统前获取 IP 地址。术语表术语表 297 CCD 电荷耦合器件 (CCD) 是用来启用扫描作业的硬件。CCD 锁定机制还用于固定 CCD 模块，以防在机器移动过程中造成损坏。分页逐份复印是成套打印多拷贝作业的过程。当选择逐份复印时，设备将在打印另一份作业前打印出整套作业。控制面板控制面板是可以显示控制或监控仪器的平面区域（通常为垂直）。它们通常位于机器的前端。覆盖率这是一个用于衡量打印时墨粉使用量的打印术语。例如，5% 的覆盖率表示在 A4 尺寸的纸张上，图像或文字的覆盖率为 5%。因此，如果纸张或者原件上有复杂的图片或很多文字，覆盖率将会更高，这时墨粉使用量将同覆盖率相同。 CSV 逗号分隔值 (CSV)。CSV 是一种文件格式类型，用于交换不同应用程序之间的数据。此文件格式用于 Microsoft Excel，已成为整个行业的事实标准，即使在非 Microsoft 平台中也是如此。 DADF 双面自动进纸器 (DADF) 是一种可自动进纸并将原件翻面的扫描装置，从而使机器可对纸张两面都进行扫描。默认改变打印机状态，重置或初始化时所生效的值或设置。 DHCP 动态主机配置协议 (DHCP) 是客户端与服务器之间的一种网络协议。 DHCP 服务器提供特定于 DHCP 客户端主机请求的配置参数，一般是客户端主机参与某个 IP 网络所需的信息。DHCP 还提供用于将 IP 地址分配给客户端主机的机制。 DIMM 双列直插式内存模块 (DIMM)，一个承载内存的小电路板。DIMM 存储机器上的所有数据，例如打印数据，收到的传真数据。 DLNA 数字生活网络联盟 (DLNA) 是一种用于家庭网络设备通过网络互相共享信息的标准。术语表术语表 298 DNS 域名服务器 (DNS) 是一个存储网络分布式数据库中的域名相关信息的系统，例如 Internet。点阵式打印机点阵式打印机是指一种计算机打印机，其打印头在页面来回运行并通过碰撞，击打用墨浸过的布带而打印，非常像打字机。 DPI 每英寸点数 (DPI) 用于衡量打印和扫描的分辨率。一般而言，如果 DPI 越高，则分辨率就越高，图片就越细腻，文件也就越大。特色振铃模式特色振铃模式检测。“特色振铃”是电话公司的一项服务，通过该服务用户能够使用一条电话线接听几个不同的电话号码。双面这是自动将纸张翻面，使机器可以在纸张的两面进行打印（或扫描）的机制。配有双面打印单元的打印机可以在一个打印周期中在纸张的两面进行打印。工作负载工作负载是在不影响打印机性能的情况下每月的打印页数。一般而言，打印机都存在使用寿命限制，如每年的打印页数。使用寿命就是平均打印能力，通常在保修期内。例如，如果工作负载为每月 48,000 页，假定每月工作 20 天，那么每天的打印机限制为 2,400 页。 ECM 错误修正模式 (ECM) 是建于 1 类传真模式或传真调制解调器中的可选发送模式。可自动检测或修正传真发送过程中的错误，这些错误有时因电话线噪音而导致。模拟仿真是一种获取与其他设备相同结果的技术。仿真就是在一个系统上复制另一个系统的功能，使此系统与另一系统执行相同的操作。仿真重在内部动作的准确复制，而与模拟不同，后者关注的是被模拟的系统中的摘要模型，通常会考虑其内部状态。以太网以太网是适用于局域网 (LAN) 的一种基于帧的计算机网络技术。它定义 OSI 模型物理层的配线与信令，以及介质访问控制 (MAC)/数据链路层的帧格式和协议。以太网通常以 IEEE 802.3 为标准。从二十世纪九十年代投入应用至今，它已成为最常用的 LAN 技术。术语表术语表 299 EtherTalk 这是由 Apple 公司开发的关于计算机网络的一套协议。此协议包含在最早的 Macintosh (1984) 中，现在由 Apple 将其中关于 TCP/IP 网络的部分进行了修改。 FDI 外部设备接口 (FDI) 是安装于机器内部的卡，通过它可以使用第三方设备，如投币启动的设备或读卡器。这些设备可以让您使用机器上的按打印页数付费服务。 FTP 文件传输协议 (FTP) 是通常用于在任一支持 TCP/IP 协议的网络（例如 Internet 或 Intranet）上交换文件的协议。定影器装置激光打印机的一部分，可以将墨粉融入打印介质。由一个热辊和一个压紧辊组成。墨粉传送到纸张之后，定影器装置会进行加热并施加压力，将墨粉永久固定在纸上，这就是从激光打印机出来的纸都很热的原因。网关这是计算机网络之间或计算机网络与电话线之间的连接。网关非常流行，因为它是允许访问另一个计算机或网络的计算机或网络。灰度这是指当彩色图像转换为灰度图像时，用来表示该图像明暗部分的灰阶；而色彩正是由不同的灰阶所表示的。半色调这是一种通过改变点数来模拟灰度的图像类型。深色区域由很多的点组成，而浅色区域则由较少的点组成。大容量存储设备 (HDD) 大容量存储设备 (HDD)，通常又称作硬盘驱动器或硬盘，是在快速旋转母盘的磁性表面上存储数字编码数据的非易失性存储设备。 IEEE 美国电气电子工程师学会 (IEEE) 是一个非营利性的国际专业组织，主要致力于电子电气技术的发展。 IEEE 1284 1284 并行端口标准是由美国电气电子工程师学会 (IEEE) 制定的。“1284- B”是指连接至外围设备的并行电缆末端的特定连接器类型（例如打印机）。术语表术语表 300 Intranet 这是一个专用网络，它使用 Internet 协议，网络连接和可能的公共通信系统确保与公司员工安全共享组织的信息或操作。有时此术语仅指最明显的服务，即内部网站。 IP 地址 Internet 协议 (IP) 地址是指在利用 Internet 协议标准的网络上，供设备识别其他设备并相互通信的唯一数字。 IPM 每分钟图像数 (IPM) 是测量打印速度的一种方式。IPM 速率说明了每分钟打印机可完成的单面打印的纸张数量。 IPP Internet 打印协议 (IPP) 定义了有关打印，管理打印作业，介质大小和分辨率等等的标准协议。IPP 可以本地使用，或者通过 Internet 发送至更多打印机，还支持访问控制，验证和加密，使其打印功能更加实用和安全。 IPX/SPX IPX/SPX 表示 Internet 数据交换/顺序包交换。这是 Novell NetWare 操作系统使用的网络协议。IPX 和 SPX 均提供了类似 TCP/IP 的连接服务，类似 IP 的 IPX 协议和类似 TCP 的 SPX。IPX/SPX 主要为局域网 (LAN) 而设计，是针对此目的非常高效的协议（通常，其性能超过 LAN 上的 TCP/ IP）。 ISO 国际标准化组织 (ISO) 是一个国际标准制定团体，由来自不同国家的标准团体代表组成。它可以制定世界范围内的工商业标准。 ITU-T 国际电信联盟是致力于标准化和管理国际无线电与电信而建立的国际组织。主要使命包括制定标准，分配无线电频谱和组织不同国家/地区之间的互联方案以便接打国际电话。ITU-T 中的 -T 表示电信。 ITU-T 表 1 由 ITU-T 发布用于文档传真发送的标准测试表。术语表术语表 301 JBIG 联合二值图像专家组 (JBIG) 是精度和质量都无损的图像压缩标准，专为二元图像（特别是传真）的压缩而设计，但也可用于其他图像。 JPEG 联合图像专家组 (JPEG) 是最常用的图形图像有损压缩的标准方法。是用于在万维网上存储和传输照片的格式。 LDAP 轻型目录访问协议 (LDAP) 是查询和修改运行于 TCP/IP 上的目录服务的网络协议。 LED 发光二极管 (LED) 是一种可以指示机器状态的半导体设备。 MAC 地址媒体访问控制 (MAC) 地址是唯一与网络适配器相关的标识符。MAC 地址是唯一的 48 位标识符，通常两个一组写作 12 个十六进制字符（例如，00- 00-0c-34-11-4e）。此地址通常由制造商直接写入网卡 (NIC) 中，并作为路由器的辅助程序以尝试查找大型网络中的机器位置。 MFP 多功能外围设备 (MFP) 是在一个物理实体中具有打印机，复印机，传真机和扫描仪的功能的办公设备。 MH 改进的霍夫曼 (MH) 是一种压缩方法，用于减少需要在传真机之间传输的数据量，以传送 ITU-T T.4 推荐的图像。MH 是一种基于密码本的行程编码体系，针对高效地压缩空白区域而优化。由于大多传真都包含较多空白区域，因此这样做可以减少此类传真的时间。 MMR 改进的二维压缩编码 (MMR) 是由 ITU-T T.6 推荐的压缩方法。调制解调器这是调节载波信号以编码数字信息，并解调此类载波信号以解码传送信息的设备。 MR 改进的像素相对地址指定码 (MR) 是由 ITU-T T.4 推荐的压缩方法。MR 使用 MH 对扫描的第一行进行编码。第二行与第一行相比较，所得出的差异结果被编码并发送。术语表术语表 302 NetWare 这是由 Novell, Inc 开发的网络操作系统。最初它用共同多任务处理在 PC 上运行不同的服务，网络协议源于原型的 Xerox XNS 协议栈。目前 NetWare 同时支持 TCP/IP 和 IPX/SPX。 OPC 有机光导体 (OPC) 是一种可生成虚拟图像，并供激光打印机发出的激光束打印的机械装置，通常为绿色或红棕色的柱状体。包含硒鼓的成像装置在打印机中使用的过程中会使硒鼓表面逐渐磨损，由于其与墨粉盒显影刷，清洁装置及纸张相接触，故应适当地进行更换。原件即第一个样本，例如文档，照片或文本等，用于复印或转成其他的样本，但其本身并非从其他样本复制或转变过来。 OSI 开放系统互联 (OSI) 是由国际标准化组织 (ISO) 开发的通信模型。OSI 提供了标准的网络设计模块方法，可以将所需的一套复杂功能分成可管理的独立功能层。这些层从上往下依次是应用层，表示层，会话层，传输层，网络层，数据链路层和物理层。 PABX 专用自动交换分机 (PABX) 是私人企业内部的电话自动切换系统。 PCL 打印机命令语言 (PCL) 是由 HP 开发的作为打印机协议的页面描述语言 (PDL)，已成为业界标准。PCL 最初是为喷墨打印机所开发的，后来又发布了用于热敏打印机，点阵打印机和激光打印机等不同打印机的 PCL。 PDF 便携式文档格式 (PDF) 是一种由 Adobe Systems 开发的专用文档格式，它通过与设备和分辨率无关的格式表示二维文档。 PostScript PostScript (PS) 是一种页面描述语言和编程语言，主要用于电子和桌面排版领域。- 在解码器中运行以生成图像。打印机驱动程序用于从计算机发送命令并传输数据到打印机的程序。术语表术语表 303 打印介质可在打印机，扫描仪，传真机或复印机上使用的纸张，信封，标签以及透明胶片等介质。 PPM 每分钟页数 (PPM) 是衡量打印机打印速度的方法，表示打印机每分钟打印的页数。 PRN 文件设备驱动程序接口，可以通过标准的输入/输出系统请求，使软件与设备驱动程序进行交互，使许多任务得以简化。 Protocol 这是在两个计算端点之间控制或实现连接，通信和数据传输的惯例或标准。 PS 请参见 PostScript。 PSTN 公共交换电话网 (PSTN) 是基于行业前提的全球公共电路交换电话网的网络，常通过配电板进行发送。 RADIUS 远程认证拨号用户服务 (RADIUS) 是用于远程用户认证和记费的协议。 RADIUS 允许对身份验证数据进行集中式管理，如使用 AAA（认证，授权和计费）概念来管理网络访问的用户名和密码。分辨率图片的清晰度，以每英寸点数 (DPI) 计量。dpi 越大，分辨率就越高。 SMB 服务器信息块 (SMB) 是主要应用于网络节点之间的共享文件，打印机，串行端口和混合通信的网络协议。还提供经过验证的相互处理的通信机制。 SMTP 简单邮件传输协议 (SMTP) 是 Internet 上的电子邮件发送标准。SMTP 是一种相对简单的文本协议，它指定了一个或多个信息接收人，然后将此信息文本发送出去。它是一个客户端到服务器的协议，可以将邮件信息从客户端发送至服务器。术语表术语表 304 SSID 服务集标识符 (SSID) 是无线局域网 (WLAN) 的名称。WLAN 中的所有无线设备均使用同一 SSID，以便相互通信。SSID 区分大小写，最大长度为 32 个字符。 Subnet Mask 子网掩码用于网络地址的联合，以决定该地址的哪一部分是网络地址，哪一部分是主机地址。 TCP/IP 传输控制协议 (TCP) 和 Internet 协议 (IP) 是实现运行 Internet 和大多数商业网络的协议堆栈的一组通信协议。 TCR 传送确认报告 (TCR) 提供了每次传送的详细信息，如任务状态，传送结果和发送页数。此报告可以设置为在每次任务后打印或者仅在失败的传送后打印。 TIFF 标签图像文件格式 (TIFF) 是分辨率可变的位图图像格式。TIFF 通常描述来自扫描仪的图像数据。TIFF 图像利用标签，关键字来定义包含在文件中的图像的性质。这种灵活的，不依靠平台的格式可用于由不同的图像处理应用程序制成的图片。墨粉盒它是机器（如打印机）中使用的一种装有墨粉的瓶子或容器。墨粉是激光打印机和复印机中使用的一种粉末，可以在打印纸张上形成文字与图像。墨粉可以在定影器的热量/压力的作用下融化，与纸张纤维紧密融合。 TWAIN 是用于扫描仪及其软件的行业标准。通过使用与 TWAIN 兼容的扫描仪和程序，可以由程序内开始扫描。它是一种适用于 Microsoft Windows 和 Apple Macintosh 操作系统的图像捕捉 API。 UNC 路径统一命名协定 (UNC) 是在 Window NT 和其他 Microsoft 产品中访问网络共享的标准方法。UNC 路径的格式是：\\<服务器名称>\<共享名称>\<其他目录>术语表术语表 305 URL 统一资源定位符 (URL) 是 Internet 上文档与资源的全局地址。地址的首部分指示使用的协议类型，第二部分指定了资源所处的 IP 地址或域名。 USB 通用串行总线 (USB) 是一种由 USB Implementers Forum, Inc. 开发的标准，用于连接计算机与外围设备。与并行端口不同，USB 的设计目的是将一台计算机同时与多台外围设备相连接。水印水印是纸张上可识别的图像和模式，在发送光下观察时颜色较淡。水印于 1282 年在意大利的博洛尼亚首次推出，由造纸者用于标识他们的产品，还可用于邮票，货币和其他政府文档以防伪造。 WEP 有线等效加密 (WEP) 是 IEEE 802.11 中指定的安全协议，以提供与有线 LAN 相同等级的安全。WEP 通过加密无线电数据实现安全性，以使端点间传输的数据受到保护。 WIA Windows 图像结构 (WIA) 最初是附带在 Windows Me 和 Windows XP 中推出的图像结构。可以在这些操作系统中使用与 WIA 兼容的扫描仪进行扫描。 WPA Wi-Fi 保护访问 (WPA) 是保护无线 (Wi-Fi) 计算机网络的一类系统，旨在提高 WEP 的安全特性。 WPA-PSK WPA-PSK（WPA 预共享密钥）是面向小型企业或家庭用户的 WPA 特殊模式。在无线接入点 (WAP) 以及任何无线便携式或台式设备中配置共享密钥或密码。WPA-PSK 为无线客户端与关联的 WAP 之间的每个会话生成唯一密钥，以实现更高级的安全性。 WPS Wi-Fi 保护设置 (WPS) 是一种用于建立无线家庭网络的标准。如果您的无线接入点支持 WPS，您就可以在不使用计算机的情况下轻松配置无线网络连接。术语表术语表 306 XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) 由 Microsoft 公司开发，不仅是一种页面描述语言 (PDL) 规范，同时也是一种新的文档格式，对便携式文档和电子文档大有裨益。XPS 是基于 XML 的规范，基于新的打印路径，同时也是基于向量且与设备无关的文档格式。索引 307 索引 A AnyWeb Print 255 安放机器调整海拔 209 按钮打印屏幕 24 环保 24, 26 扫描至 24 身份证件复印 25, 26 数字键盘 27 wps 24, 26 安全符号 15 信息 15 B 报告机器信息 184, 190, 191, 192, 194, 195, 196, 199 C 菜单概述 33 常见图标 14 存储电子邮件地址 210 错误消息 97 D 打印打印到文件 218 打印文档 Windows 52 更改默认打印设置 217 Linux 227 Macintosh 226 mobileprint 180 设置为默认机器 217 使用直接打印实用程序 225 双面打印 Macintosh 227 特殊打印机功能 219 UNIX 229 一般设置 183 移动操作系统 180 在一张纸上打印多页 Macintosh 226 打印菜单 183 打印功能 217 打印机设置机器状态 184, 189, 190, 193, 199 打印机首选项 Linux 228 打印机状态一般信息 263, 265 打印介质标签纸 45 卡片纸 46 设置纸张大小 46 设置纸张类型 46 输出支架 106 特殊介质 43 信封 44 预印纸 46 打印偏好设置 53 打印文档 Linux 227 Macintosh 226 UNIX 229 地址簿编辑 213 使用 213 一般设置 203 注册 213索引索引 308 组编辑 214 组登记 214 地址簿设置 213 电子邮件一般设置 203 电子邮件地址 210 存放 210 搜索 210 叠加打印创建 223 打印 223 删除 223 多用途纸盘使用特殊介质 43 使用提示 43 F 法规信息 113 分辨率传真 64 复印基本复印 57 缩小或放大复印件 59 一般设置 184 G 功能 5 打印介质功能 106 机器功能 181 管理员设置 206 规格 103 打印介质 106 H 耗材订购 68 更换墨粉盒 73 监控耗材寿命 75 可用耗材 68 预计墨粉盒寿命 70 后视图 23 环保打印 54 J 机器信息 184, 189, 190, 193, 199 K 可选内存设置可选内存 252 控制面板 24 L LCD 显示屏浏览机器状态 184, 189, 190, 193, 199 Linux 常见 Linux 问题 289 打印 227 打印机属性 228 连接 USB 线缆的驱动程序安装 132 连接 USB 线缆的驱动程序重新安装 134 扫描 239 使用 SetIP 139 unifled driver configurator 266 为已连接网络安装驱动程序 144 Linux 扫描 239 了解状态 LED 95 M Macintosh 常见 Macintosh 问题 288 打印 226 连接 USB 线缆的驱动程序安装 130 连接 USB 线缆的驱动程序重新安装 131索引索引 309 扫描 237 使用 SetIP 138 为已连接网络安装驱动程序 143 系统要求 110 Macintosh 扫描 237 墨粉盒处理说明 70 存放 70 非 Samsung 和重新装填的 70 更换墨粉盒 73 摇匀墨粉 71 预计寿命 70 模拟一般设置 203 模拟设置 203 默认设置纸盘设置 46 N N 页缩印打印 Macintosh 226 内存硬盘驱动器功能 251, 252 P postScript 驱动程序故障排除 291 print resolution set Linux 228 Q 卡纸避免卡纸的提示 85 清除原件 86 清除纸张 91 清洁搓纸轮 80 内部 78 扫描装置 81 外部 77 清洁机器 77 驱动程序安装 Unix 145 S Samsung 打印机状态 263 service contact numbers 292 SetIP 程序 137, 173 SmarThru 4 236 SmarThru Office 237 SyncThru Web Service 257 一般信息 257 扫描从联网机器扫描 232 从图像编辑程序扫描 235 基本信息 231 Linux 扫描 239 Macintosh 扫描 237 扫描至 FTPSMB 服务器 234 扫描至电子邮件 233 使用 Samsung 扫描助手扫描 235 使用 SmarThru 4 扫描 236 使用 SmarThru Office 扫描 237 使用 WIA 驱动程序扫描 235 一般设置 193 扫描功能 231 扫描助手 235 身份证件复印 59 使用帮助 54, 227 手动进纸装入 43 授权用户索引索引 310 注册 216 输出支架 48 输入字符 212 水印编辑 222 创建 222 删除 222 T 特殊功能 208 W Windows 常见 Windows 问题 287 连接 USB 线缆的驱动程序安装 30, 31 使用 SetIP 137, 173 为已连接网络安装驱动程序 140 系统要求 109 UNIX 打印 229 为已连接网络安装驱动程序 145 Unix 系统要求 111 usb 202 一般 setupusb 202 USB 线驱动程序安装 30, 31, 130, 132 驱动程序重新安装 131, 134 网络安装环境 112 IPv6 配置 148 驱动程序安装 Linux 144 Macintosh 143 Windows 140 UNIX 145 SetIP 程序 137, 138, 139, 173 网络程序介绍 136 无线网络设置 151 一般设置 204 有线网络设置 137 维护零件 69 文档框 204 一般设置 204 问题操作系统问题 287 打印问题 273 打印质量问题 276 电源问题 272 复印问题 283 进纸问题 271 扫描问题 284 传真问题 285 无线基础结构模式 151 特别模式 151 WPS 断开连接 155 WPS（机器没有显示屏） PBC 156 PIN 156 USB 线 158, 161, 169 无线网络网络电缆 173 Y 一般设置 195 约定 14 Z 正视图 21 直接打印实用程序 225索引索引 311 纸盘调整宽度和长度 40 更改纸盘大小 40 设置纸张大小和类型 46 手动进纸 43 术语表 296 传真调节分辨率 64 调节黑度 65 发送计算机中的传真 242 发送优先传真 244 更改接收模式 247 将收到的传真转发到其他目标 245 将已发传真转发到另一个目标 244 将传真接收到内存中 250 接收计算机中的传真 246 取消预定传真作业 244 使用电话分机接收 248 双面打印传真 249 通过纸的两面发送传真 246 延迟传真传送 243 以 DRPD 模式接收 248 以 Tel（电话）模式接收 247 以安全模式接收 249 一般设置 190 以应答机模式接收 248 在预定传真中添加文档 243 在传真模式下接收 64, 248 重拨最后一个号码 241 准备发送传真 62 自动打印已发送传真报告 250 自动重拨 241 传真发送多路发送 63 传真功能 241 装入特殊介质 43 纸盘 1 中的纸张 41 装入原件 48 状态 25, 27 准备原稿类型 48 自定义设置 207 www.samsung.com You can access the full user manual for more information. To learn to access the user manual, see “Viewing the user manual” in this quick start guide. Quick Start Guide GT-S60102 www.sar-tick.com This product meets applicable national SAR limits of 2.0 W/kg. The specific maximum SAR values can be found in the SAR information section of this guide. When carrying the product or using it while worn on your body, maintain a distance of 1.5 cm from the body to ensure compliance with RF exposure requirements. This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s high standards and technological expertise. • Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices.3 • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause your device or applications to work improperly. Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information4 Copyright Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • The Android logo, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store, and Google Talk™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. • and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HDx technologies are incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.5 • Windows Media Player ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. • Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.6 Getting started Device layout Back button Microphone Speaker/Earpiece Speaker Proximity sensor Menu button Power button Music button Home button Touch screen7 Getting started Headset jack Rear camera GPS antenna Main antenna Multipurpose jack Volume button Back cover Memory card slot Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery.8 Getting started Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes. • Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock mode when the touch screen turns off. Menu • Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen. • Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search. Home • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to open the list of recent applications.9 Getting started Button Function Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Music • Press to pause and resume playback. • Press and hold to view the music player screen. • Press twice to skip to the next song.10 Getting started Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. 1 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover.11 Getting started 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the goldcoloured contacts facing downwards. The SIM card slot of your device is only suited for standard SIM cards. Inserting a microSIM card or a microSIM card with an unauthorised holder may cause damage to the SIM card slot of your device.12 Getting started 3 Insert the battery. 2 1 4 Replace the back cover.13 Getting started Charging the battery Before using the device for the first time or when the battery has been unused for extended periods, you must charge the battery. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large end of the charger into an electric socket. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.14 Getting started After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket while charging. Checking the battery charge status When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charge status: Charging Fully charged15 Getting started Turning the device on and off When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn the device on and off.16 Basics Notifications Notification icons appear on the status bar to report missed calls, new messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Open the notifications panel, and then view your device’s current status and use available options. Drag down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. To close the notifications panel, drag up the bar that is on the bottom of the screen. The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.17 Basics Making or answering a call Use call functions, such as making and answering calls, using options available during a call, or customising and using call-related features. Making a call Enter the number using the keypad, and then tap . Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the circle. Managing contacts Manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and others. You can group contacts to make them easier to search for and send contacts to others or share them.18 Basics Sending messages Send text messages, or multimedia messages by attaching images or videos. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider. Using applications The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications installed. Open the Applications screen and select an application icon to open it. Tap to close applications.19 Basics Connecting to the Internet Connect to the Internet by using the Wi-Fi feature or cellular data network. Open the Internet application and browse webpages. You may incur additional charges for accessing the Internet and downloading media files. For details, contact your service provider. Viewing the user manual The user manual provides complete information about operating your device. You may incur additional charges for accessing the Internet and downloading media files. For details, contact your service provider.20 Basics From your device 1 Open the Internet application. 2 Tap to open the bookmarks list. 3 Select the bookmark for the user manual. To access the user manual more easily, place a shortcut or widget for the user manual on the Home screen. The user manual may not be available depending on the web browser or service provider. From your computer Access www.samsung.com and then search for the user manual by the model name of your device.21 Safety information This safety information contains content for mobile devices. Some content may be not applicable to your device. To prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your device, read the safety information about your device before using the device. Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets Do not touch the power cord with wet hands or disconnect the charger by pulling the cord Do not bend or damage the power cord Do not use your device while it is charging or touch your device with wet hands Do not short-circuit the charger or the device Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the device Do not charge the battery with the charger that is not approved by the manufacturer Do not use your device during a thunderstorm Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased.22 Safety information Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery For safe disposal of your Li-Ion battery, contact your nearest authorised service centre. Handle and dispose of the device and charger with care • Use only Samsung-approved battery and charger specifically designed for your device. Incompatible battery and charger can cause serious injuries or damage to your device. • Never dispose of the battery or device in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used battery or device. • Never place the battery or device on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. The device may explode when overheated. • Never crush or puncture the device. Avoid exposing the device to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal short circuit and overheating. Protect the device, battery and charger from damage • Avoid exposing your device and battery to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Extreme temperatures can damage the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device and battery. • Prevent the battery from coming into contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage. • Never use a damaged charger or battery.23 Safety information Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in restricted areas Do not use your device near other electronic devices Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices. Do not use your device near a pacemaker • Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker, if possible, as your device can interfere with the pacemaker. • To minimise possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device only on the side of your body that is opposite the pacemaker. Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by radio frequency If you use medical equipment, contact the equipment manufacturer before using your device to determine whether or not the equipment will be affected by radio frequencies emitted by the device. If you use a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference The radio frequency emitted by your device may interfere with some hearing aids. Before using your device, contact the manufacturer to determine whether or not your hearing aid will be affected by radio frequencies emitted by the device. Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments • Turn off your device in potentially explosive environments instead of removing the battery.24 Safety information • Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments. • Do not use your device at refuelling points (petrol stations), near fuels or chemicals, or in blasting areas. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. Turn off your device when on an aircraft Your device may interfere with the aircraft’s electronic navigation instruments. Your device may interfere with automotive equipment Electronic devices in your car may malfunction, due to radio interference from your device. Contact the manufacturer for more information. Comply with all safety warnings and regulations regarding mobile device usage while operating a vehicle While driving, safely operating the vehicle is your first responsibility. Never use your mobile device while driving, if it is prohibited by law. For your safety and the safety of others, use your common sense and remember the following tips: • Get to know your device and its convenience features, such as speed dial and redial. These features help you reduce the time needed to place or receive calls on your mobile device. • Position your device within easy reach. Make sure you can access your wireless device without taking your eyes off the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voicemail answer it for you.25 Safety information • Suspend calls in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and heavy traffic can be hazardous. • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility of driving safely. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic. Place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make the person you are talking to aware that you are driving and suspend conversations that could potentially divert your attention from the road. • Use your device to call for help. Dial a local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accidents, or medical emergencies. • Use your device to help others in emergencies. If you see a car accident, a crime in progress, or a serious emergency where lives are in danger, call a local emergency number. • Call roadside assis